HARVARD UNIVERSITY

Library of the

Museum of

Comparative Zoology

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 1.

DESCRIPTIOXS OF BOLCA FISHES.

Bt C. R. Eastman.

With Two Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

June 1904.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 1.

DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES.

Bt C. R. Eastman.

With Two Plate3.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

June, 1904.

No. 1, Descriptions of Bolca Fishes. By C. R. Eastman.

There are two principal sources of information in regard to the
marine fish fauna of tlie Eocene period, leaving out of account the
minor evidence that is jjresented by detached hard parts, such as teeth
and other fragmentary remains. The first of these, which is at the
same time tlie most important and liistorically the most interesting, is
that furnished by the tolerably abundant skeletons occurring in tlie
fissile limestone of Monte Bolca and Monte Postale in northern Italy.
The other is that association of ichthyic remains which is known from,
the nearly equivalent horizon of the Loudon Clay.

These two faunas fortunately supplement each other to a consider-
able extent, one of them making us acquainted with the large variety
of forms which flourished during the later Eocene, and the other sup-
plying us witli important anatomical details. For the conditions of
preservation in clay beds are obviously very different from those which
are peculiar to limestone. Calcareous sediments are more compact;
and where pressure and subsequent hardening occur, bodies which are
not absolutely rigid, like the skeletons of vertebrates, or even the outer
covering of chelonians and crocodilians, are liable to become compressed
and flattened out. Hence, as a general rule, the parts belonging to
eitlier side of the body in fishes become squeezed together and con-
fused when preserved in limestone, and the pliant head-bones become
more or less distorted and displaced. This is almost invariably the case
with the fishes from Monte Bolca, and for a correct understanding of
the cranial osteology we must turn to the uncrushed skulls from
Sheppey and elsewhere.

The London Clay fauna,^ however, is not nearly so rich as the Italian,
either in point of numbers or variety ; and it is accordingly the latter
which provides us with the principal data for comparing the ichthyic
representation of Eocene and modern times. Comparisons of this
nature and of detailed structural modifications are of the very greatest
importance, since by their means we ai'e able to trace the direction and

1 Agassiz, L., Report on the Fossil Fishes of the London Clay (Kept. Brit. Assoc.
Adr. Sci. pp. 279-310, 1815).

VOL. XLVI. — NO. 1 1

2 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPAKATIVE ZOOLOGY.

extent of variation and specialization that has been going on in certain
groups during this interval. But the most striking fact which ari-ests
our attention is not that variation should have advanced at such a slow
rate since Eocene times as it apparently did, but that this process
should have been quickened by such a sudden and enormous accelera-
tion as took place at the dawn of the Tertiary system. Cretaceous
forms pass away, leaving only here and there a few moribund survivors
(e. g. PycnodiLs, PalaeohaUstum, etc.) in the Eocene, their place being
taken by a host of modern types which appear for the most part ab-
solutely unheralded. Not only does the Eocene fish fauna bear an
overwhelmingly modern aspect, but many of its types are as highly
specialized as they are to-day ; and forms which at the present day are
widely aberrant have representatives at least as far back as the Middle
Eocene. It is evi^dent that an " expression point " (to us Cope's apt
term) was reached in the evolution of ichthyic life exactly correspond-
ing to, and contemporaneous with that which is so well recognized in
mammalian life, although the cause of the phenomena is in each case
unknown.

The literature of Bolca fishes is extensive, and material from the
typical locality has become distributed throughout the principal museums
of the world. Nevertheless, the autlientic specimens which have
served either for the establishment of species, or for extending our
knowledge in regard to them, are preserved in comparatively few in-
stitutions. These are the only reliable standards we have to refer
to in cases where the synonymy is confused ; and as such cases are
numerous, it is of importance to systematists to know where these
standards are preserved and may be consulted for study. In the
sequel, therefore, a list is given of all the type and figured specimens
belonging to the largest single collection of Bolca fishes which at present
exists. In the following brief historical summary it is hoped that
some facts have been brought together relating to the study of this
fauna which shall be of service to investigators.

1. Old Collections, and Early Studies of Bolca Fishes.

Although the priority of the Italian school of geology and palaeon-
tology amongst those of other nations is clearly established, the share
contributed by fossil vertebrates towards stimulating inquiry has been
less generally appreciated. For this reason it may be profitable to cast
a retrospective glance over the formative period of these branches of

EASTMAN: DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 3

natural science, a period coeval with the literary reawakening in Italy.
We need not, however, extend our survey so far back as to include the
detached statements or speculations of classic authors, or even post-
Augustan writers, such as Tertullian and Poniponius Mela, for, familiar
as the ancients undoubtedly were with the occurrence of fossils, they do
not appear to have been seriously concerned in attempts to account
for their origin, nor did their views serve to enlighten subsequent
progress. Per contra, the doctrines of Aristotle, followed blindly or
enlarged upon by scholastic ^vriters during the middle ages, acted as a
positive hindrance. Minds which could accept without difficulty Aris-
totle's ideas of spontaneous generation were free to admit that mineral
matter could take on of itself any conceivable shape, even mimicking
animate forms. If living plants and animals could produce themselves,
•why not fossils, as readily 1 Avicenna,^ for instance, most brilliant
luminary of the Arabian circle of sciences in the tenth century, and
whose Canon Medicinae remained the principal medical authority
throughout the middle ages, proposed a vis hqnjidica, and following him
in the thirteenth century Albertus Magnus ^ affirmed his viHus forma-
tica. At a still later period a "World-Spirit," or Archaeus, was pre-
dicated by Bauhiu, and Libavius held that fossils sprang from germs or
seeds, like living beings. Glimmerings of a spirit of experiment and
observation are rarely in evidence before the fourteenth century. Until
about this period nature-study in Europe continued at an extremely low
ebb, Greek and Latin scientific works were unread in the original, and
untranslated into the vulgar tongue, and popular concepts of natural
history were perverted by the bestiaries.

Fourteenth Century. In Cecco d'Ascoli (1257-1327),^ the ill-
fated author of VAcerba, and sometime professor of philosophy in the
University of Bologna, we discover a man of remarkable erudition and

1 Cf. Wiistenfeld, F., Gescliiclite der arabischen Aerzte und Naturforscher, nach
den Quellen bearbeitet. Giittingen, 1840.

^ Sighart, J., Albertus Magnus, sein Leben und seine Wissensehaft, nacli den
Quellen dargestellt. Regensburg, 1857.

3 Popular name for Francesco Stabili of Ascoli, whom Petrarch honored with
a sonnet beginning, —

" Tu se 'I grande Ascolan che il monde allumi."

He has been made the subject within recent years of a thoughtful essay by Wel-
bore St. C. Baddeley, and of a historical romance by Pietro Fanfani {Cecco d'Ascoli,
Racconto storico del secolo XIV. Leipzic, 1871). VAcerba, which was the immedi-
ate cause of the author's death, passed througli a score of editions between 1473,
the date of the earliest, and 1546. The latest bears date of 1820, at Venice.

4 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPAKATIVE ZOOLOGY.

varied abilities, in many respects far ahead of his age. The work by
which lie is best known, an encyclopaedic poem of moderate literary
merit, contains a vast number of observations on all manner of things
natural and supernatural, in which tlie veritable and mythical are
curiously blended. In Book I., Chapter viii. of I'Acerha, which is de-
voted to thunder, lightning, meteorites, earthquakes, and other physical
phenomena, mention is made of the occurrence of fossils, although no
definite explanation of their origin is undertaken, as has been claimed
by Libri and others. Considering the period in which he wrote, we
must admit Cecco to have been a first-rate observer, a good reasoner,
and less credulous in his judgments than many of his predecessors and
contemporaries. Caustic envy of Dante is conspicuous in various parts
of his poem, especially in the concluding passage of Book IV., from
which the following lines are taken : —

" Qui non se canta al modo dele rane,
Qm non se canta al modo del poeta
Che finge imaginando cosse vane ;
Ma qui resplende e luce onne natura,
Che a chi intende fa la niente lieta ;
Qui non se regna per la selva oscura."

Less a stranger to fame than Cecco is Giovanni Boccaccio, " prince of
story-tellers "(1313— 1375), one of whose early amusements consisted in
gathering fossil shells near his home in the Valdelsa, hard by Florence.
Unusually intelligent and well educated himself, he deplored the pre-
vailing ignorance of his age, and aided largely in reviving the study of
classic literature in Italy. Amongst his more serious Latin works is a
Geographical Dictionary,^ a laborious but indiscriminating compilation,

1 De Montibus, Silvis, Fontibus, etc., supposed to have been written about
1373. The passage on Elsa fluvius (q. v.) occurs on p. 456 of the Basle edition,
1589. Cf. also, by the same author, Commenlo a Dante, Lezione LII, in Vol. II.,
pp. 367-369, of the Milan edition, 186.3.

On Boccaccio and the extent of his information, the following may be consulted :
Ilortis, A., Studj sulle opere latine del Boccaccio. Triest, 1879. — Koerting, G.,
Per Umfang des Wissens Boccaccios, in his Geschichte der Litteratur Italicns,
Vol. II. Leipzic, 1880. — Landau, M., Giovanni Boccaccio, sein Leben und seine
Werke. Stuttgart, 1877. — Libri, G., Histoire des sciences mathematiques en
Italic, Vol. III. Paris, 1840. — A list of the older writers consulted by Boccaccio in
the compilation of his De Montibus, etc., is published in Boll. Soc. Adriat. Sci. Nat,
Ann. IIL pp. 62-114.

On Dante as a naturalist, see Ilolbrook, R. T., Dante and the Animal Kingdom,
New York. 1902.

EASTMAN: DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 5

iu whicli he refers to the occurrence of fossils, and agrees with Pom-
ponius Mela (whose Cosmo<jra2)hy he quotes) iu considering them as
having belonged to living bodies. A passage is also said to occur in
Book YIII. of the Filocopo, by the same author, iu which fossils are
mentioned, and the inference is drawn from them that the land had
been submerged beneath the sea ; but Brocchi,^ who is authority for
this statement, appears to have been mistaken in his reference.

Sixteenth Century. Very few Cinquecentisti appear to have in-
quired into the significance of fossils. The first to claim our attention
is Alexander ab Alexandre (1461-1523), a learned Neapolitan juris-
consult, concerning whom little is known save for personal statements
interjected amongst a mass of miscellaneous information in his Dies
Geniales.^ In Book Y., chapter ix., of this peculiar work, which first ap-
peared at Rome in 1522, the author recalls having seen in the moun-
tains of Calabria, at a considerable distance from the sea, divers sorts of
marine shells heaped together and embedded in a variegated hard
marble, so that they formed one mass : " quas quidem ossea et non
lapideas esse, et quales in litoralibus vadis insjneimvs, facile erat cernere,"
as he remarks. He j'efers to the statement of Herodotus ^ concerning
the presence of marine shells in the hills of Egypt and over the Libyan
desert, from which the Greek geographer had inferred that the sea
foi-merly covered that whole region ; and a like explanation is applied
by him to Calabria.

According to Brocchi and LyelJ, both of whom have furnished ex-
cellent accounts of the development of geological science in Italy,
Alessandro anticipated by a long interval the theory advanced by
Burnet and "Whiston in England, which explained the waters formerly
covering the land as having been drawn off in consequence of a change
in the inclination of the earth's axis of rotation. But such a theory
implies an understanding of the Copernican cosmogony, which Ales-
1 sandro certainly did not possess, and as no such suggestion as is attrib-
uted to him can be found iu the Dies Geniahs, the statement is
probably an error. Nevertheless, Alessandro is deserving of credit for

^ Brocchi, G., Discorso sui progressi dello studio della conchiologia fossile in
Italia, prefixed to his Conchiulof/ia Fossile Subappeniiia, Vol. I. p. iv. Milan, 1814.
Other early references to petrifactions are given by G. Lami in his Hodoeporicon
of Chariton and Hippophilus (DeliciaeEruditorum, Vol. X., p. 4S, passim). Florence,
1741.

2 Alexandri ab Alexandre, Genialiuni Dierum, libri sex. There is a Paris
edition of 1589, and a Leyden edition of IGTo, in two volumes.

3 History, Lib. II. cap. xiii.

6 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

having recognized the true nature of fossils, in despite of the popular
notions tliat they were relics of the Scriptural deluge, or sports of na-
ture generated within the solid rock through the operation of some
occult force, or through the fermentation of a materia pinguis.

Throughout the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries the nature and
origin of fossils remained a favorite topic of discussion. In the frequent
and often vexed disputes of this period are to he observed on the one
hand the influence of ecclesiastical prejudice, the Church claiming ability
to explain all things, and possessing means of ])roved efficacy for com-
pelling the acceptance of her views ; and on the other hand the per-
sistency of Aristotelian doctrines mingled with rank superstition. Such
was the infertile soil into which the method of experiment and observa-
tion endeavored to send its roots. A tender plant in the beginning, its
first green leaves withered, and during the long warfare between science
and theology its growth was retarded. Concerning the methods in vogue
during the period we are considering, it has been aptly remarked by
Lyell ^ that " the system of scholastic disputations encouraged in the
Universities of the middle ages had unfortunately trained men to habits
of indefinite argumentation, and they often preferred absurd and ex-
travagant propositions, because greater skill was required to maintain
them ; tlie end and object of these intellectual combats being victory
and not truth. No theory could be so far-fetched or fantastical as not
to attract some followers, provided it fell in with popular notions."

In the midst of such conditions as these it is pleasing to note the
appearance of two men of remai'kable insight, whose vision was in no
wise clouded by the prevailing atmosphere of superstition and dogmatism.
The first whom we have to consider is that versatile and brilliant genius,
Leonardo da Vinci (1452-1519), of whom Humboldt remarked that
" he was the first to start on the road towards the point where all the
impressions of our senses convey the idea of the Unity of Nature." His
clear exposition of the manner in which fossils have become preserved
in the rocks offers a refreshing contrast to the prevailing views of the
age, and although noticed by Humboldt,^ Lyell and others, his remarks

1 Lyell, C, Principles of Geology, I. chap. iii. London, 1834.

2 Humboldt, A. von, Cosmos, IL cliap. viii. Stuttgart, 1845. — Libri, G., Histoire
des sciences niatliematiques en Italic, III. Paris, 1840. — Lyell, C, Principles of
Geology, I. chap. iii. London, 1830. — Raab, F., Leonardo da Vinci als Naturfor-
sclier, in Vircliow and Holtzendorff's Sammlung gemeinverstandl. Vortriige, ser.
15, p. 504. Berlin, 1880. — Ravaison-Mollien, C, Les nianuscrits de Lc'onard de
Vinci. Manuscrits Fet / de la Bibliotlieque de I'lnstitut. Paris, 1880. — Richter,

EASTMAN : DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA TISIIES. 7

have uot attracted the attention amongst geologists and pahieoiitologists
■which they deserve. An idea may be formed of the nature of his ob-
servations from tlie following extracts, translated literally from his
published manuscripts : —

" All marine clays still contain shells, and the shells are petrified together
with the clay. From their firmness and unity some persons will have it that
these animals were carried up to places remote from the sea by the deluge.
Another set of ignorant persons declare that Nature or Heaven created them
in these places by celestial influences, as if in these places we did not also find
the bones of fishes which have taken a long time to grow ; and as if we could
not count, in the shells of cockles and snails, the periods of their growth, as we
do in the horns of bulls and oxen." — Leic. MS. 10 a.

" And if you were to say that these shells were created, and were continually
being created in such places b}^ the nature of the spot, and of the heavens
which might have some influence there, such an opinion cannot exist in a brain
of much reason; because here we find [lines denoting] annual growth num-
bered on their shells, and there are large and small shells to be seen which
could not have grown without food, and could not have fed without motion, —
and here they could not move." — Leic. MS. 9 b.

" As to those who say that shells existed for a long time and were formed
at a distance from the sea from the nature of the place and of the cycles, which
can influence a place to produce such creatures, — to them it must be answered :
such an influence could not place the animals all on one level, except those of
the same sort and age ; and not the old with the young, nor some with an
operculum and others without their operculum, nor some broken and others
whole, nor some filled with sea-sand and large and small fragments of other
shells inside the whole shell, which remained open ; nor the claws of crabs
without the rest of their bodies, nor the shells of other species adhering to
them like animals which have moved about on them, since the impressions
of their tracks still remain on the outside, after the manner of w'orms in the
wood which they ate into. Nor would there be found among them the bones
and teeth of fish which some call arrows and others serpents' tongues, nor
would so many portions of various animals be found all together if they had
not been thrown on the sea-shore." — Leic. MS. 9 a.

J. P., The Literary Works of Leonardo da Vinci, compiled and edited from the
original manuscripts, II. chap. vi. London, 1883. — Uzzielli, G., Leonardo da Vinci
e le Aipi. Turin, 1890. — Venturi, G. B., Essai sur les ouvrages pliysiconiatlu'ma-
tiqiies de Leonard de Vinci. Paris, 1797. — Wliewell, W., History of the Inductive
Sciences, II. London, 1847. —White, A. D., History of the Warfare of Science with
Tiieology, I. New York, 1896. The most sumptuously published of all Leonardo's
writings is tlie Codex Atlanticus of tlie Anihrosian library in IMilan, wliicli has re-
cently been reproduced in facsimile under the auspices of tlie Ilegia Accademia dei
Lincei.

8 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOuLOGY.

"On Shells in the Mountains. — And if yoii were to say that Nature has
formed the shells in the mountains through the agency of the constellations,
how will you explain it that the constellations create shells of divers species
and of different ages in the selfsame spots 1 . . .

" On Leaves. — How will you explain the multitudinous leaves of different
species solidified in the rocks high up in the mountains, and sea-weed com-
mingled with shells and sand ? And likewise you will see all [sorts of] petri-
factions together with fragments of marine crabs, commingled with these
shells." — M,S'. F, folio 80, «, h {circa 1510).

Witl) the exception of the last fragment, which has been inaccurately
paraphrased by Venturi, Lyell, and others, the above passages have not
been noticed in geological literature. How far Leonardo's ideas are
reflected by the commonly current paraphrase referred to may be
seen on comparing it with the original text, a literal transcript of which
follows : —

" Denichi nemonti.

" Essettu vorai dire linichi esserprodutti dalla natura inessi monti mediante
leconstelatione per qual uia mosterai tal constellatione fare li nichi di uarie

grandeze i eddi uerse eta edi uarie spetie nun medismo sito

''Dellefogle.

" Cone [Come] proverrai ilgrandissimo numero di uarie spetie di foglie conge-
lata nellei pietre alti sassi di tal monti ellaligha erba dimare stande a diacere
niista con nichi ecosiuderi onni cosa petrificato insieme congranche marini rotti
inpezi etramezati tu essi nichi."

The second notable sixteenth-century personage whose opinions con-
cern us is Girolamo Fracastoro, or in the more usual scholastic form,
Hieronymus Fracastorius (1483-1553) of Verona, famous as physician,
poet, and astronomer. A statue erected to his memory a few years
after his decease attests the esteem in which he was held by his fellow-
townsmen, and the eulogies pronounced upon him in foreign lands
indicate a widespread recognition of his ability. Through the par-
tiality of an enthusiastic fellow-countryman,^ he has been allotted little
short of an apotheosis, but the most trustworthy judgment is probably
that of Libri, which is as follows : " Un seul nom, celui de Fracastoro,
domine a present les noms de tons ces astronomes italiens. II fut
celehre par la profondeur et la variete de ses connaissances. De Thou,
qui, dans son histoire, en a fait un magnifique eloge, dit que Sannazar
s'avoua vaincu par les vers latins du medecin de Verone. H fut bota-

1 Lioy, P., Linneo, Darwin, Agassiz nella vita intima. Milan, 1904.

EASTMAN: DESCHirTIONS OF ROLCA FISHES. 9

niste, philosophe, et matliematicien, et, cultivant dcs sciences si diverses,
il s'illustra dans toutes." ^

Fracastoro resembled his illustrious contemporary Leonardo in his
ability to deduce sound conclusions from observed facts, and in his
habit of appealing directly to nature rather than to authority for
answer to the problems confronting him. His opinions in regard to
the nature of fossils, a variety of which were brought to his attention
during the reconstruction of a citadel in Verona in 1517, are set forth
very clearly in a description of the Calceolarian Museum,^ a work fre-
quently referred to by the older writers, and also in an historical account
of Verona by Torello Saraina.' Fracastoro ridicules the notion that
fossils are the reliquiae of the Mosaic deluge, or were formed within the
rocks through the agency of a plastic force, and states his reasons for
believing them to be the remains of plants and animals which inhabited
the sea at a period when the continents were submerged. Had these
sensible views been heeded, much useless discussion which continued
throughout the succeeding two centuries would have been avoided.

A brief notice concerning the fossil fishes of Monte Bolca, the earliest
in which they are specifically referred to, was inserted by the celebrated
botanist Mattioli * in his fourth edition of the Materia Medica of
Dioscorides, which he commentated and illustrated in 1552. He also
quotes the statements of Polybius, in Book XXXIV. of his History, re-

1 Op. cit., II. p. 101.

2 Chiocco, A., and Ceruti, B., Musae ra Franc. Calceolari iun. Veronensis.
Verona, 1622. The passage entitled " Magni Fracastorii Sententia de proposita
quaestione," which occurs on p. 407 of tliis work, is quoted in extenso by Vallisneri
in iiis De' corpi man'jii che su' monti si trovano (Venice, 1721), and is referred to by
various other authors prior to Lioy. A figure evidently of Holocentrum macroce-
chalum is given on p. 428 of this work.

3 Saraina, T., De Origine et Amplitudine Civitatis Veronae. Verona, 1530.
See also on Fracastoro the following : Barbarini, E., Girolanio Fracastoro e le

sue opere. Verona, 1894. — Caverni, R., Storia del metodo sperimentale in Italia.
Florence, 1893. — Holden, E. S., The. Precursors of Copernicus (Pop. Sci. Monthly,
LXIV. p. 316), 1904. — bioy, P., Fracastoro e le sue idee divinatrici della Palcon-
tologia (Atti R. Istit. Veneto, ser. 7, IX. p. 1098), 1898. — Meneghini, G., Dei meriti
dei Veniti nelle Gcologia. Pisa, 1866. — Menken, 0., De vita, moribus, scriptis
meritisque H. Fracastori Veronensis. Leipzic, 1731. — Omboni, G., Cenni sulla
storia della Geologia. Padua, 1894. — Stoppani, A., Della preminenza e priorita
degli studj geologici in Italia. Milan, 1868.

* Mattioli, P. A., Commentarii secondo aucti, in libros sex Pedaci Dioscoridis
de Medica Materia, 4th ed., Venice, 1552; 5th, ibid., 1558. Tlie reference occurs
in the Introduction to Book V., and is wanting in earlier editions of this work.

10 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

gardiiig the " subterranean fish " of Narbonne and the views of earlier
writers on the nature of fossils in general.

About this time interest became awakened in the formation of natural
history collections, first in Italy, where zoological gardens had long since
been introduced, and afterwai'ds generally throughout Europe. One of
the earliest and at the same time most extensive, was the museum
founded at Verona in 1572 by Francesco Calceolari, which contained a
number of Bolca fishes, and was the fruitful source of several publica-
tions. Ulisse Aldrovandi (1522-1607), a noted scientist and professor
at the University of Bologna, brought together a large private collection,
out of which grew eventually the Public Museum of Bologna, and de-
scriptions of his minerals and fossils were published some years after his
deatli.-^ In 1574 an elaborate description was prepared by Mercato, but
not published until nearly a century and a half later, of the Vatican
collection of minerals, fossils, and antiquities which had been brought
together under the auspices of Pope Sixtus V. The priestly author,
however, was content to believe tliat not only fossils, but even an-
cient pottery and inscriptions were mineral concretions which had
assumed their shapes through the influence of celestial bodies.^ Agassiz
contemptuously remarks of this work that it is a " compilation sans
valeur et sans goiit." The physician Olivi of Cremona, who described
in 1584 the fossils contained in the Calceolarian Museum,^ vvas likewise
prejudiced in regarding them as lusi naturae. Nevertheless his woi*k
was deemed worthy of being reprinted nine years later, and new illus-
trations of the same museum appeared in 1G22, at the hands of Ceruti
and Chiocco, as already noted. It is in this work that the opinions of
Fracastoro, announced more than a century earlier, are at last accorded
recognition. Among the curiosities of palaeontological literature be-
longing to this period should be mentioned Buonaraici's dissertation on
Gloss02>etrae* published in 1668.

Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries. The important contri-
butions to palaeontology made by Fabius Colonna, Nicolas Steno, and
Augustin Scilla during the seventeenth century are well known, hence we

1 Anibrosini, Musaeum nietallicum. 1648.

2 Mercato, M., Metallotheca [Vaticana], opus posthumum. Rome, 1717.

^ Olivi, G. B., De recondites et praecipius collectaneis a Francesco Calceolario
Veronensis, in Museo adservatis. Verona, 1584; and A^enice, 1593.

■* Biionamici, F., Siille p^lossopetre, gli ocelli di serpe ed altre pietre, etc. (Opusc.
Sicil. Vol. XIL), 1668. References to otiier essays of tins period on the same sub-
ject will be found in Palaeontographica, XLI. pp. 149-153, 1895.

EASTMAN: DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 11

may pass over these authors with the bare mention of their naiiies.^
Throughout tliis period the growth of museums continued apace, and
attempts to describe their fossil contents succeeded better as Fracastoro's
ideas were revived and gradually gained acceptance. Descriptions ap-
peared of the x\.lilrovandi collection in 1648, as has been stated, and in
1656 of Count Moscardo's^ museum in Verona, both of which contained
interesting fish remains. Another museum famous for its fossils was that
of Zannichelli * of Venice, who prepared an elaborate catalogue of its
contents, publislied first in 1720, with additions in 1736. Attention
should also be called to the important essay by Vallisneri * " On Marine
Bodies found in the Mountains," published in 1721, in which reference
is made to the fishes and crustaceans occurring at Monte Bolca. Ap-
pended to the complete works of this author is a letter on Bolca fishes,
with a map of the locality, by Ferdinand Marsili.^

As remarked by Lyell, the writings of Vallisneri are rich in geological
observations. He attempted the first general sketch of the marine
deposits of Italy, their geographical extent and most characteristic
organic remains, and was the principal opponent amongst his country-
men of Woodward's diluvian hypothesis. In 1702 the fossil fishes of
Monte Bolca were made the subject of a communication before the
French Academy by Maraldi,^ an Italian astronomer, aiid the same body
was similarly addressed by J. J. Scheuchzer, whose '^ Pisciuni querelae
et vindiciae " and other writings provoked wide-spread discussion. No-
tices of vertebrate remains appear also in the dissertations of Spada,^

1 On tliese writers one may consult the following : Seguenza, G., Agostino
Scilla. Messina, 18G8. — Marsh, O. C, History and Metliods of Palaeontological
Discovery (Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1879), 1880. — Ward, L. F., Sketeli of
Palaeobotany, Fifth Ann. Kept. U. S. Geol. Surv. (1883-1884), 1885. — Zittel,

/K. A., Geschichte der Geologie und Palaontologie. Munich, 1899.

2 Note overo niemorie del INIuseo di Lodovico Moscardo, dal medesimo de-
scritte. Padua, 1656. Some poor figures of Bolca fishes are given on p. 182.

3 Zannichelli, Apparatus rariorum Musaei Zannicchelli. Venice, 1720. Idem,
Enumeratio rerum naturalium Musaei Zannichelli. Venice, 1736. This catalogue
contains the earliest mention of fossil hippopotami in Ital}'.

* Vallisneri, A., De' corpi marini che su' monti si trovano. Venice, 1721.
5 Vallisneri, A., Opere, II. p. 359.

* Maraldi, J. P., Di verses observations de physique generale, § xi. (Hist. Acad.
Roy. Sci., annee 1703). Paris, 1720. This is the earliest communication on Bolca
fishes published by any learned society. The earliest in Englisli is a paper by G.
Graydon, entitled "On the fish enclosed in stone of Monte Bolca," which appears
in the transactions of the Royal Irish Academy for 1794 (Vol. V., p. 281).

^ Spada, J. J., Dissertazione ove si prova che i corpi marini petrificati non sono

12 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPAEATIVE ZOOLOGY.

a learned priest of Grezzana, who wrote in 1737, and again in 1744, to
prove that the fossils fonnd near Verona were not of diluvian origin
Scipio MafFei ^ was another active collector and writer on Bolca tishes
during the middle of the eighteenth century. But we cannot dwell upon
any of the numerous minor publications of this time, nor even upon the
more important contributions of Moro,^ Generelli,^ and others. With
this brief sketch we must conclude our survey of pre-Linnaean literature,
and pass on to the modern era ; for from the time of the two great
Swedish naturalists onward, Linne and Artedi, the latter of whom is
justly styled the "father of ichthyology," a new order of things existed.
One of the earliest writers of the new era in natural science, and in-
deed the first who attempted a specific determination of the Bolca fishes,
was Cammillo Zampieri d'Imola,* whose Catalogue of the Ginauni
Museum, published in 17G2, is decidedly me)-itorious. His identifica-
tion of species, however, based as it was upon the treatises of Willoughby
and Ray, was altogether f^xulty. The celebrated Fortis also made un-
successful endeavors to identify Bolca fishes with the species described
by Bloch and Broussonet. Fortis had already noted the occurrence of
fossil fishes Mn other parts of the Alpine strata, but on turning his
attention to the Bolca forms, he encountered difficulties.^ He was mis-

diluviani. Verona, 1737. — Wew, Corporum lapidefactorum agri veronensis cata-
logus. Verona, 1744. In Plate ii. of this work is given a tolerable figure of
Semiophorus. See also Cobres's estimate of Spada, in Buchersammlung der Natur-
geseliichte, I. p. 20.

1 Maffei, F. S., Del Monte Bolca, della sua Pesciaia, e degli annessi Monti Caion-
nari, etc., in his Compendio della Verona Illustrata, Vol. I., pp. 217-230, pi. i.-viil.
Verona, 1795.

2 Moro, L., Sui crostaeei ed altri corpi marini che si trovano sui monti. 1740.
The same work was also published in German under the title of " Neue Unter-
suchungen iiber die Abiinderungen der Erde." Leipzic, 1751.

Moro's ideas were appropriated without acknowledgment by Edward King in a
paper read before the Royal Society entitled " An attempt to account for the
Universal Deluge" (Phil. Trans., LVII. pp. 44-57), 1767. For a biographical
sketch of Lazzaro Moro see Giornale di Storia naturale del Griselini, I. p. 79.

3 Generelli, C, Dei crostaeei e di altre produzione del mare. 1749.

« Zampieri, C, Produzione naturali che si ritrovano nel Museo Ginanni in
Ravenna. Lucca, 1702.

* Fortis, A., Viaggi in Dalmazia, IL p. 239. 1774.

6 Fortis, A., Extrait d'une lettre, etc. Journ. de Phys., XXVIIL 1786. In a
later communication to the same journal, Fortis vigorously disclaims authorshii) of
the catalogue of Bolca fishes which is appended to his first article. In this anony-
mous postscript an extravagant valuation (28,000 liv.) is placed upon the Bozza
Collection, which then consisted of about six hundred specimens.

EASTMAN : DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 13

led into supposing certain species to be identical with modern troi)ic;d
forms, and his somewhat fanciful theories to explain their occurrence in
northern Italy plunged him into a spirited controversy with another
prominent naturalist, Domenica Testa. Their letters, written in a style
that is both elegant and incisive, show wide erudition and good argu-
mentative ability on both sides. The correspondence was finally col-
lected and published in book form, with comments of his own, by
Count Giambattista Gazola ^ of Verona, in 1793 and 1794.

By this time a very lively interest had arisen in regard to the fishes
of Monte Bolca, and the Veronese collections became greatly aug-
mented as the result of excavations that had been undertaken on pur-
pose to secure them. The culmination of this activity was marked by
the appearance in 1796 of an elaborate work by G. Serafino Volta,
entitled Ittiolitologia Veronese. In the compilation of this famous
monograph, which was illustrated by nearly fourscore excellent plates,
Volta was aided by several collaborators, chief amongst whom was
Count Gazola himself. Volta had already published in 1789 a list of
tlie fossil fislies occurring at Monte Bolca,^ in Avhich about one hundred
species were enumerated, and of these twenty-five were erroneously
identified with recent forms. The determinations in his final memoir
were scarcely more fortunate, Agassiz having afterwards declared that
there was only one ^ adequately established species in the whole work,
that one being Blochms lomjirodris. The practical value of Volta's
work, ho\vever, was immeasurably increased by the redetermination of
his originals, an authentic list of the figured specimens being published
by Agassiz * in 1833. In tliis list Volta's originals are regarded as
belonging to 90 species and 69 genera, all of the species being marine,
and none of them represented in the existing fauna.

1 Gazola, G., Lettere recentemente pubblicate sui pesci fossili veronesi, con
annotazioiii inediti agli estratti delle inedesime. Milan, 1793, and Verona, 1794.

2 Volta, G. S., Degl' impietrimenti del Territorio Veronese, etc. Lettera al Sig.
Vincenzo Bozza, 1789. Idem, Prospetto del Museo Bellisomi. 1787.

3 This is not strictly true. The names of over a dozen species described by
Volta as new are rejected by Agassiz, and otiiers substituted, for the reason that
the forms were regarded in the first instance as belonging to existing genera. A
list of the species which should properly be credited to Volta is as follows :

Blochius longirostris, Eocnttus vcronensis, Ephippus asper, Ductnr i-cstvnae, Mene
rhoinbeus, Monoptvrus (jifjas, Platax p/ipilio, Pyqaens liolcanus, Pycnodns apodus, Rham-
pliosiis rastrum, Rhinellus lesiniformis, Semiophorus velifer, Vomeropsis triiirns, Xiphtip-
terus fidcntus.

* Ag.nssiz, L., Revue critique des Poissons Fossiles figures dans I'lttiolitologia
Veronese. Neuchatel, IBS.?! Also in German in the Neues Jahrbucli for 1835.

l5~

14 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Volta narrates in considerable detail the history of the principal col-
lections which furnished liim with material. Of these there were ten
belonging to Veronese gentlemen, the most notable one being the prop-
erty of Count Gazola, with which the Bozza and Dionisi collections
became shortly afterwards united. The circumstances which deprived
Count Gazola of most of his specimens in 1797, their removal to "Paris
by order of First Consul Bonaparte, and their presentation by him to
the Museum of Natural History in that city are familiar historical facts.

The second largest suite of fossil fishes was that belonsins; to the
Marchese Ottavio di Canossa, which afterwards became enlarged by the
purchase of Julius Caesar Moreni's collection. Agassiz never had access
to the Canossa Collection, nor in foct to any in Italy, but portions
of it were described by subsequent authors at various times. The collec-
tion remained intact at Verona until 1903, when it passed into the
possession of natural history dealers and museums of several countries.
Heckel's figured specimen of Palaeohalistwa orhiculafum, for instance,
was acquired by the British Museum, Massalongo's types of Archio}>his
were divided between the Harvard and Berlin Museums, and the Car-
negie Museum at Pittsburg also obtained several of Massalongo's figured
specimens.

Count Gazola's first care on suff'ering the loss of his splendid collec-
tion was to undertake the formation of a new one. Excavations at
Bolca were recommenced, and on the death of Count Ronconi a number
of fine specimens which he had bi'ought together passed into Gazola's
hands; the result of all this activity being that, phoenix-like, his museum
became speedily rehabilitated. This second collection of Count Gazola
is preserved in the Museo Civico of Verona, but is not now, and un-
fortunately never has been, fully accessible for study. The scientific
value of this collection was fully appreciated by Jacob Heckel, who first
visited it in 1850. The condition in which he found the museums of
Verona, Padua, Venice, and other cities at that time is set forth by him
in a highly entertaining narrative which he communicated to the Vienna
Academy,^ under whose patronage the journey was undertaken. lu
referring to the Gazola Collection, he laments particularly the fact that
it never came under Agassiz's observation, for this " heerliches Material,"
as he calls it, would have helped him to a much more complete under-
standing of many interesting species, and even genera, and would have
enriched our knowledge of the Bolca fauna with valuable details.

1 Heckel, J., Bericlit iiber eine Reise, etc. (Sitzungsber Akad. Wissenscli.
Wien, VII. p. 318), 1851.

EASTMAN: DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 15

Heckel also remarks that the same collection " ist bci woiteni reicher als
jene des Marchese Cauossa uud liefert eiue beiualio vollstiindige Ueber-
sicht summtlicher oi-ganischer Reste, welche in deu tertiareu Ablage-
ruueren des Monte Bolca enthalten sind."

The only other private collection which we need notice here is that
brought together early in the nineteenth century by Luigi Castellini, of
Castelgomberto, which now forms one of the principal treasures of the
Padua Museum. This comprised in all about five hundred fishes from
Monte Bolca and Monte Postale, some of which were remarkable for their
large size and excellent preservation, as well as for their rarity. "Sie ist
auf drei grossen Doppelpulten aufgestellt," writes Heckel in his naive
narrative of 1850, " und enthalt ausser vielen der seltenen Arten und
manchen Prachtstiicke, sammtliche in Doppelplatten, auch einige bisher
unbeschriebene Species, deren nahere Bekanntschaft mich urn so ange-
nehmer berllhrte, da ich bereits mehrere derselben zu Verona in der
schijnen Sammlung des Herrn Grafen Gazola unter Glas bemerkt hatte."
Some of these new forms were shortly afterwards described by Heckel,
and others have been investigated by more recent writers.

We return now to the first Gazola Collection, which, as we have seen,
was transported to Paris in 1797, and deposited in the Museum of
Natural History. It is well known that Cuvier spent considerable time
in the investigation of this material, with the intention of preparing a
monograph upon it, — a task, liowever, which was ceded finally to Agassiz.
Some use of the collection was made by de Blainville in the preparation
of his article^ on fossil fishes, published in 1818, but it cannot be said
that our knowledge was materially increased by this author. It remained
for the elder Agassiz, in 1831 and 1832, to ascertain the true nature of
the extinct forms of fish life here represented, and by means of this and
other collections which he studied, to give the first accurate and best
general account we possess of the remarkable ichthyic fauna occurring at
Monte Bolca.

Agassiz's own estimate of the value of the Gazola Collection is thus
expressed by him : " Le Museum d'llistoire Naturelle de Paris a cte
pour moi I'une des mines les plus riches que j'aie exploitce. ... La
collection de poissons fossiles la plus importante qui existe maintenant,
et en memo temps qui otfre le plus d'interSt historique, est, sans con-
tredit, celle du comte de Gazola, qui a fourni les originaux pour
VlttioUtologia Veronese. . . . Je I'ai entierement revue et complete-

1 De Blainville, H. D., Sur les Ichthyolites. ou les Poissons Fossiles, in his
Nouveau Dictionnaire d'llistoire Naturelle, Vol. XXVIII. Paris, 1818.

16 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPATIATIVE ZOOLOGY.

nient decrite vers la fin de 1831 et pendant las Imit premiers mois de
I'annee 1832, et j'ai inscrit mes determinations sur le revers de toutes
les plaques." ^

The total number of species recognized by Agassiz as the result of his
investigations of the Gazola Collection and other Bolca material that
came under his observation was 127, and the total number of genera 77.
Many of Volta's types were refigured by him, but in several cases
descriptions were given without fresh illustration, and in others Volta's
figures were merely renamed without further description. Some con-,
fusion in the nomenclature was occasioned by reason of other names
being applied to species which had been duly established both by Volta
and by de Blainville, and in about a dozen instances MS. names were
proposed for certain forms which up to the present time have remained
undescribed. These types inedits, designated as such in Agassiz's hand-
writing, have recentlj'^ been investigated by the present writer, and their
publication undertaken by the French Geological Society. It must not
be supposed, however, that all of Volta's types which originally formed
part of the Gazola Collection are now preserved in the Paris Museum,
nor was it possible even in Agassiz's time to account for the specimens
which were then missing.^ Owing to the historic and scientific interest
attaching to these originals, it is to be hoped that all such as are still in
existence and have escaped notice amongst other collections may again
come to light. Lists are given below of all the types and hypotypes
belonging to the Gazola Collection in Paris.

It will be sufficient to pass over the post-Agassizian literature of
the Bolca fish-fauna very briefly, merely indicating the names of the
principal contributors. These are, in clironological order, Jacob Meckel,
Rudolf Kner, Franz Steindachner, Ratfaele Molin, Abramo Massalongo,
Paolo Lioy, Achille de Zigno, Francesco Bassani, Wladislaw Szajnocha,

1 Agassiz, L., Poissons Fossiles, I. p. 5. Neuchatel, 1833.

2 The Library of tlic Museum of Comparative Zoology possesses the identical
copy of Volta's work employed by Professor Agassiz in his determinations of the
types in the Gazola Collection at Paris. Each figure of the plates is marked with
Agassiz's revised designation, and in cases where the originals were wanting, the
fact is so indicated. Ilis private copy of de Blainville's Poissons Fossiles, in
the same library, likewise contains valuable corrections and annotations. The
Museum has received through Prof. R. T. Jackson, who obtained it from Prof.
J. E. Wolff, a specimen which formerly belonged to the Gazola Collection at Paris,
but wliich disappeared from it probably during some of the early vicissitudes through
wliicli the collection passed. Several interesting notices of the latter are to be found
in the papers of Faujas-St.-Fond, de Jussieu, Cuvier, and others, published in tlie
early volumes of the Annales and of the Me'moires da Museum d'llisioire Naturelle.

EASTMAN : DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 17

Cai-1 Gorganovic-Kramberger, Otto Jaekel, auel A. Smith "Woodward.
Some seventy-five additional species have been described by these
authors in the aggregate, making a total representation of slightly more
than two hundred. A rather considerable number of these, however,
are undoubtedly synonyms, and the status of a score or more of imper-
fectly defined species requires further investigation.

The best general account of the geology of the region in which tliis
fish-fauna occurs is contained in an inaugural dissertation by the late
Munier-Chalmas, entitled '^ IiJfude du Tifhonique, du Creface et du Terti-
aire du Vicenfin" (Paris, 1891), the usefulness of which is increased by
a copious bibliography. Mention should also be made of Enrico Nicolis'
" Catia Geolojica della Provincia di Verona" (Verona, 1882), and of
his " SuijJi aivtici Corsi delV Adige" (Rome, 1898). The invertebrate
fauna of Monte Bolca forms the subject of special memoirs by Cattullo ^
and Oppenheim.^

List of Specimens in the Gazola Collection of the Paris
Museum Figured in Volta's " Ittiolitologia Veronese," Ar-
ranged IN Serial Order.

Refigured by Agassiz

(^Poissons Fossiles).

Carcharias (ScoUodon) cuvieri (Ag.).

Platax pinimtiformis (Blv.). Vol. IV. PL 41.

Axdostoma bolcense (Blv.). Vol. IV. PL 35, Fig. 3.

Fistularia longirostris (Blv.). Vol. IV. PL 35, Fig. 4.

Calamostoma hreviculum (Blv.). Vol. II. PL 74, Fig. 1.

KJmmphosus rostrum (Volta). Vol. IV. PI. 32, Fig. 7.

Semiophorus velifer (Volta). Vol. IV. PL 37 a, Fig. 2.

" " VoL IV. PL 37 a, Fig. 1.

velicans (Blv.). Vol. IV. PL 37.

Pomacanihus suharcimtus (Blv.). VoL IV. PL 19, Fig. 2.
9, Figs. 1, 2. Tnjgon muricatus (Volta).
Ephippus rhombus (Blv.).

Eocottus veronensis (Volta). Vol. IV. PL 34, Fig. 3.

VoL IV. PL 34, Fig. 4.

Blochius longirostris Volta. Vol. II. PL 44, Fig. 3.

^ 1 Cattullo, T. A., Memorie sopra 11 corpi organizzati fossili del Bolca, etc. (Gior-
nale di Pavia), 1818-22.

'■^ Oppenheim, P., Die Eociinfauna des Monte I'ostale bei Bolca in Veronesis-
chen (Palaeontograplika, XLIIL pp. 125-222), 189G.

VOL. XLVI. — NO. 1 2

Volta

(itt. :

Fer.).

'1. 3,

Fig. 1.

4.

5,

" 1.

^5,

" 2.

5,

" 3.

5,

" 4.

7,

" 1.

7,

" 2.

7,

" 3.

8,

" 1.

9,

Figs. 1

10,

Fig. 1.

11,

" 1.

11,

" 2.

12,

" 1.

12.

" 2.

18 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

VOLTA ReFIGURED BY AgASSIZ

(Itt. Ver.). (Foisso7is Fossiles).

PI. 13, Fig. 1. Sparnodus vulgaris (Blv.). Vol. IV. PL 29, Fig. 2.

13, " 2. Sjntiacanthus cuneiformis (Blv.). Vol. V. PI. 39, Fig. 1.

14, " 1. Enoplosus pyciopteriis Ag. Vol. IV. PI. 9, Fig. 1.
17, " 1. Spcmiodus vulgaris (Blv.). Vol. IV. PI. 29, Fig. 2.
17, " 3. Lates gracilis Ag. Vol. IV. PI. 3, Fig. 2.

19. Acanthotiemus subaureus (Blv.). Vol. V. PI. 4.

20, " 1. Ephijjpus asper (Volta).

20, " 2. Pristigenys substriatus (Blv.).

22, " 1. Naseios tiuchalis Ag. Vol. IV. PL 36, Fig. 2.

23, " 1. Ophisurus acuticaudus Ag.

23, " 3. Anguilla leptoptera Ag.

24, " 3. Ehamphognathus sphyraenoides (Ag.). Yo], Y. Fl. 3S, Fig. 2.

25, " 1. Ohanoides macropoma (^Ag.) .

25, " 2. " " " Vol. V. PL 37 b, Fig. 4.

26, " 1. Plataxpapilio (Yo\t&). VoL IV. PL 42.

26, " 2. Zanclus brevirostris Ag. Vol. IV. PI. 38, Figs. 1, 2.

27. Thynnus (?) bolcensis Ag.
29, "1. " lanceolatus (Ag.).

29, " 4. Urosphen dubia (Blv.).

30, Callipteryx recticaudus Ag. Vol. IV. PL 33, Fig. 2.

31, '* 1. Spxirnodus elongatns Ag. VoL IV. PL 28, Fig. 1.

31, " 2. Acantlmrus tenuis Ag. Vol. IV. PI. 36, Fig 1.

32, " 1. Sparnodus elongatus Ag. VoL IV. PL 23 6, w/ra.

32, " 2. Dudorvestenae (YoMa). Vol. V. PL 12.

33. Naseus rectifrons Ag. Vol. IV. PL 36, Fig. 3.
35, " 1. Pycnodus apodus (Y o\tvC) .

35, " 3. Vomeropsis triurus (Volta). Vol. V. PL 5.

35, " 4. Cydopoma (?) micracanthum (Ag.).

37, Labrus valenciennesi Ag. Vol. V. PL 39, Fig. 2.

38, " 1. Paranguilla tigrina (Ag.). Vol. V. PL 49.

39, " 3. Tradiynotus tenuiceps Ag. Vol. V. PL 7, Figs. 1, 2.

39, " 5. Engraulis evolans (Ag.). Vol. V. PL 37 b, Figs. 1, 2.

40. Palaeobalistum orbiculatum (Blv.).

42, " 1. Ostracion dubius (Blv.). Vol. II. PL 74, Figs. 4,5.

42, " 2. "Pcf/rtSMS wZajis" Linn, (indeterminable).

42, " 3. Lophius bradiysomus Ag. Vol. V. PL 40, Figs. 1, 2.

44, " 1. Amphistium paradoxum Ag.

44, " 2. Vomeropsis triurus (Volta). VoL V. PL 6.

45, " 1. Toxotes antiqmis Ag. VoL IV. PL 43.

45, " 2. Dules temnopterus Ag. Vol. IV. PL 21, Figs. 1, 2.

45, " 3. Sparnodus microstomus (Ag.).

47. Monopterus gigas Volta.

48, " 3. Atherina Tuacrocephala Ag.

EASTMAN : DESCEIPTKJNS OF BOLCA FISHES. 19

Refigukki) by Agassiz

{Poissons Fossiles).

IIolocentrummacroceplmlumBlv. Vol. IV. PI. 14.

Acanthonemus sichmireiis (Blv.). Vol. V. PI. 3.

Leptoccphalus medius Ag.

Dentex leptacanthus Ag. Vol. IV. PL 26.

Blochius longirostris Volta. (The head of an anguilliform fish

has been snbstituted for the one properly belonging to this

specimen.)
Orycynus latior Ag. Vol. V. PI. 24.

Apoyon spinosus Ag. Vol. IV. PI. 9, Figs. 2, 3.

Cyclopoma (J) viicracanthum (Ag.).
Xiphopterus falcatus (Volta) .
Fseudosyngnathus opisthopterits (Ag.).
Ductor vestenae (Volta).

Pygams holcanus (Volta). Vol. IV. PI. 20.

Sparnodus vulgaris (Blv.). Vol. IV. PL 28, Fig. 3.

Plafyrhina gigantea (Blv.).
tiphyraena holcense Ag.
Seriola analis Ag.
Blnchius longirostris Volta.
Holocentrum iinacrocep)halum Blv.
Myripristis homopterygius Ag.
SjMirnodus vulgaris (Blv.).
Cyclopoma gigas Ag.
Rhamphosus rastruni (Volta).
Cyclopoma spinosum Ag.

Alphabetical List of the Type and Figured Specimens of Bolca
Fishes Belonging to the Gazola Collection, now preserved
IN the Paris Museum of Natural History.

1. Acanthonemus subaureus (Blv.). Volta, PL 51, Fig. 3; Ag., V. PL 3.

2. " " " Volta, PL 19; Ag.,V. PL 4.

3. Acanthurus tenuis Ag. Volta, PL 31, Fig. 2 ; Ag., IV. PL 36,

Fig. 1.

4. Amphistium paradoxum Ag. Volta, PL 44, Fig. 1.

5. " " Ag., V. PL 13.

6. Anguillabranchiostegalis Ag. (MS.).

7. " brevicula Ag. Ag., V. PL 43, Fig. 1.

8. " U'ptoptera Ag. Volta, PL 23, Fig. 3,

9. Apogon spinosus Ag. Volta, PL 56, Fig. 2; Ag., IV. PL 9,

Figs, 2, 3.
10. Atherina macrocephala Ag. Volta, PL 48, Fig. 3.

Volta

(rtt. \

Fer.).

M. 51,

Fig. 2.

51,

" 3.

53,

" 2.

54.

55,

" 1.

55,

" 2.

56,

" 2.

56,

'• 3.

57.

58,

" 1.

58,

" 2.

59.

60,

" 2.

61.

62.

69,

" 1.

70.

72,

" 1.

72,

" 4.

73.

74.

75

" 1.

76.

20

bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

11.

12.
13.

14.
15.
16.
17.

18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.

25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.

37.

38.

39.

40.
41.
42.

43.

44.
45.
46.

A^^losto7na bolcense (Blv.).

(i a a

Blocliius longirostris Volta.

((

i(

«

u

((

((

a

11

((

Calamostoma breviculum (Blv.).

Volta, PI. 5, Fig. 1 ; Ag., IV. PI. 35,

Fig. 3.
Ag., IV. PI. 35, Fig. 2.
Volta, PI. 12, Fig. 1 ; Ag., II. PI.

44, Fig. 3.
Volta, PI. 12, Fig. 2.
Volta, PI. 55, Fig. 1.
Volta, PI. 70.
Volta, PI. 5, Fig. 3; Ag., II. PI. 74,

Fig. 1.

Volta, PI. 30 ; Ag., IV. PL 33, Fig. 2.
Ag., IV. PI. 33, Fig. 1.
Ag., V. PI. 8.

Callipteryx redicaudus Ag.

" speciosus Ag.
Oarangopsis dorsalis Ag.
Carcharias (Scoliodoii) cuvieri (Ag.). Volta, PI. 3, Fig. 1
Chcmoides leptostea Ag. (MS.).
macropoma ( Ag . ) .

Coelogaster analis Ag. (MS.).
Cybium speciosum Ag.
Cyclopoma gigas Ag.

(J) micracanthihm (Ag.).
spinosum Ag.

Dentex crassispinus Ag.

" leptacanthus Ag.

Ductor vestenae (Volta).

U U ((

Dules temnopterus Ag.
Engraulis' evolans Ag.

Enoplosus pygopterus Ag.

Eomyrus formosissimus (Ag.) (MS.)
" interspinalis " "
" latispinus (Ag.).

Eocottus veronensis (Volta).

Ephippus asper (Volta).

(( (( i(

" rhombus (Blv.).

Volta, PL 25, Fig. 1.
Volta, PL 25, Fig. 2; Ag., V. PL
37 b, Fig. 4.

Ag., V. PL 25.
Ag. , IV. PL 2.
Volta, PI. 74.
Volta, PL 35, Fig. 4.
Volta, PL 76.
Ag., IV. PL 1.

Volta, PL 54 ; Ag., IV. PL 26.
Volta, PL 32, Fig. 2; Ag., V. PL 12.
Volta, PL 58, Fig. 2.
Volta, PL 45, Fig. 2; Ag., IV. PL

21, Figs. 1, 2.
Volta, PL 39, Fig. 5; Ag., V. PL 376,

Figs. 1, 2.
Volta, PI. 14, Fig. 1 ; Ag., IV. PL 9,

Fig. 1.

Ag., V. PL 43, Fig. 4.

Volta, PI. 11, Fig. 1; Ag., IV. PL

34, Fig. 3.
Volta, PL 11, Fig. 2; Ag., IV. PL

34, Fig. 4.
Volta, PL 20, Fig. 1.
Ag., IV. PL 39, Fig. 3.
Volta, PL 10, Fig. 1.

EASTMAN : DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES.

21

47.
48.

49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.

56.
67.
58.

59.

60.
61.
62.
63.

64.
65.
66.
67.
68.

69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.

82.
83.

84.

1
Vol.

Ephippus rhombus (Blv.).
Fistularia longirostris (Blv.).

Holocentrum macrocephalum Blv.

11 a ((

" pygmaeum Ag.

Holosteus eaociniLS Ag.
Labrax schizurus Ag.
Labrus valenciennesi Ag.
Lates gracilis Ag.

Leptoccphulas medius Ag.
Lojjhius brachijsovius Ag.

Mene oblongus (Ag.).
Monopterus gigas Volta.
Myripristis homoptenjgius Ag.
Naseus iiucImUs Ag.

" redifrons Ag.
Odonteus sparoides Ag.
Ophisiirus acuticaudus Ag.
Orycynus latior Ag.
Ostracion dubius (Blv.).

Pagellus microdon Ag.
Palaeobalistum orbiculatum (Blv.).
Paranguilla tigrina (Ag.).^
" Pegasus volans " Linn.
Pelates quitidecimalis Ag.
Plataxpapilio (Volta).

" pinnatiformis (Blv.).

" subvespertilio (Blv.).

ti U ((

Platinx internudius Eastm.
" macropterus (Blv.).
Plafyrhimt, gigantea (Blv.).
Pomacanthus subarcuatus (Blv.).

Pristigenys substriatus (Blv.).
Pristipoma furcatum (Ag.).

Ag., IV. PI. 35,

PI. 14.

Ag., IV. PI. 40.
Volta, PI. 5, Fig. 2

Fig. 4.
Volta, PI. 51, Fig. 2 ; Ag., I\
Volta, PI. 72, Fig. 1.
Ag., IV. PL 15, Fig. 1.
Ag., V. PI. 43, Fig. 5.
Ag., IV. PI. 13, Fig. 3.
Volta, PI. 37; Ag., V. PL 39, Fig. 2.
Volta, PI. 17, Fig. 3; Ag., IV. Pi. 3,

Fig. 2.
Ag., IV. PI. 5.
Volta, PI. 53, Fig. 2.
Volta, PI. 42, Fig. 3; Ag., V. PI. 40,

Figs. 1, 2.
Ag., V. PI. 40, Figs. 3, 4.
Ag., V. PL 1, Figs. 1, 2.
Volta, PL 47.
Volta, PL 72, Fig. 4.
Volta, PL 22, Fig. 1; Ag., IV. PI.

36, Fig. 2.
Volta, PL 33 ; Ag., IV. PI. 36, Fig. 3.
Ag., IV. PL 39, Fig. 2.

Ag., V. PL 23, Fig. 1.

Ag., V. PI. 24.

'•o"'

II. PL

Volta, PL 55, Fig. 2 .
Volta, PL 42, Fig. 1 ; A

74, Figs. 4, 5.
Ag., IV. PI. 27, Fig. 1.
Volta, PL 40.

Volta, PL 38, Fig. 1 ; Ag., V. PL 49.
Volta, PL 42, Fig. 2.
Ag., IV. PL 22.

Volta, PI. 26, Fig. 1 ; Ag., IV. PL 42.
Volta, PL 4 ; Ag., IV. PL 41.
Volta, PL 6.
Ag., IV. PL 41 a.
(In press.)
Ag., V. PL 14.
Volta, PL 61.
Volta, PL 8, Fig. 1; Ag., IV. PL 19,

Fig. 2.
Volta, PL 20, Fig. 2.
Ag., IV. PL 39, Fig. 1.

Pseudosyng7iathusopistJwpterus{A.g.). Volta, PL 58, Fig. 1.

Tlie relations of this type are discussed by Cuvier in Mem. Mus. d'llist. Nat.,
I. (181o),p. 321.

22

BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

85.
86.

87.
88.

89.
90.
91.

92.
93.
94.

95.

96.
97.
98.
99.

100.

101.
102.
103.

104.

105.
106.
107.

108.
109.

110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.

116.
117.

118.
119.

Pter7jyocephalus paradoxus Ag.
Pycnodus apodus (Volta).
Pijijaeas bolcanus (Volta).
Ehamphosus rastrum (Volta).

Bhamphognathus paralepoides Ag.
" sphyraenoides (Ag.)

Scatiphagus frontalis Ag.
Semiophorus velicans (Blv.).
velifer (Volta).

Seriola analis (Ag.).
" prisca (Ag.).
Serranus rugosus Heckel.
Sparnodus elongatus Ag.

microstomus (Ag.).
Sparnodus vulgaris (Blv.).

«

(I

Sphyraena bolcensis Ag.
Spinacanthus cuneiforviis (Blv.).

Thynnus (?) bolcensis Ag.

" lanceolahis (Ag.).

" 0) propter ygius Ag.
Toxotes a7itiquus Ag.
Trachynotus tenuiceps Ag.

Trygon vtiiiricatus (Volta).

Urolophus crassicaudatus (Blv.).
Urosphen dubia (Blv.).

Ag., IV. PI. 32, Figs. 5, 6.
Volta, PI. 35, Fig. 1.
Volta, PI. 59 ; Ag., IV. PI. 20.
Volta, PI. 6, Fig. 4 ; Ag., IV. PI. 32,

Fig- 7.
Volta, PI. 75, Fig. 1.
Ag., V. PI. 38, Fig. 1.
.Volta, PI. 24, Fig. 3 ; Ag., V. PI. 38,

Fig. 2.
Ag., IV. PL 39, Fig. 4.
Volta, PI. 7, Fig. 3; Ag., IV. PL 37.
Volta, PL 7, Fig. 1 ; Ag., IV. PL

37 a, Fig. 2.
Volta, PL 7, Fig. 2 ; Ag., IV. PL

37 a, Fig. 1.
Volta, PL 69, Fig. 1.
Ag., V. PL 11a.
Ag., IV. PL 23 b (supra).
Volta, PL 32, Fig. 1 ; Ag., IV. PL

23 b (infra).
Volta, PL 31, Fig. 1 ; Ag., IV. PL

28, Fig. 1.
Volta, PL 45, Fig. 3.
Ag., IV. PL 23, Figs. 1, 2.
Volta, PL 13, Fig. 1, and PL 17,

Fig. 1 ; Ag., IV. PL 29, Fig. 2.
Volta, PL 60, Fig. 2 ; Ag., IV. PL

28, Fig. 3.
Volta, PL 73.
Ag., IV. PL 29, Fig. 1.
Ag., IV. PL 29, Fig. 3.
Volta, PL 62.
Volta, PL 13, Fig. 2; Ag., V. PL 39,

Fig. 1.
Volta, PL 27.
Volta, PL 29, Fig. 1.
Ag., V. PL 23.
Ag., V. PL 27.

Volta, PL 45, Fig. 1 ; Ag., IV. PL 43.
Volta, PL 39, Fig. 3; Ag., V. PL 7,

Figs. 1, 2.
Volta, PL 9, Fig. 1.
Volta, PL 9, Fig. 2.
Type not figured (de est ?).
Volta, PL 29, Fig. 4.

EASTMAN : DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 23

120. Urosphen dubia (Blv.). Ag., IV. PL 35, Fig. 6.

121. Vomeropsis triurus (Volta). Volta, PI. 44, Fig. 2 ; Ag., V. PI. 6.

122. " " " Volta, PI. 35, Fig. 3 ; Ag., V. PI. 5.

123. Xiphopterus falcatus (Volta). Volta, PI. 57.

124. Zand us brevirostris Ag. Volta, PI. 26, Fig. 2; Ag., IV. Pi.

38, Figs. 1, 2.

II. SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS.
ELASMOBRANCHII.

RAJIDAE.

Platyrhina gigantea (Blv.).

1796. Raja torpedo G. S. Volta, Ittiolit. Veronese, p. 521, Plate LXI.

1818. Narcobatits giganteus H. D. de Blainville, Nouv. Diet. d'Hist. Nat, xxvii.

p. 337.
1835. Torpedo gigantea L. Agassiz, Neues Jahrb., p. 297 (name only).
1843. Torpedo gigantea L. Agassiz, Poiss. Foss., iii. p. 382 ; ** iv. p. 38 (name only).
1860. Narcine gigantea R. Molin, Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xl. p. 585.
1874. Torpedo gigantea A. de Zigno, Catalogo ragionato dei Pesci Fossili, p. 177.
1894. Platyrhina gigantea O. Jaekel, Die eocanen Selachier vom Monte Bolca, p.

108, text-fig. 19.

The holotype of this species is preserved in the Paris Museum of Natural
History, and not, as stated hy Baron de Zigno, in the second Gazola Collec-
tion at Verona. In its present state the disk is remarkable for its great
antero-posterior elongation. De Blainville was of the opinion that this was
not a character properly belonging to the specimen, but one due to deceptive
appearances, a portion of the disk having become folded upon itself. 0. Jaekel,
without having had access to the specimen, imagined that the disk had become
deformed by mechanical agencies subsequent to the death of the creature. An
examination of the original leads the present writer to conclude that there is
no evidence of a folding over of the edges of the disk, nor of distortion due to
pressure or other causes. Although extremely probable that the lateral mar-
gin of the disk escaped fossilization, it nevertheless appears certain that the
form was more elongated longitudinally than in the majority of rays.

TEYGONIDAE.

Trygon muricatus (Volta).

1796. Raja muricata G. S. Volta, Ittiolit. Veronese, p. 37, Plate IX. Figs. 1, 2.
1818. Trygonobatus vulgaris 11. D. de Blainville, Nouv. Diet, d'llist. Nat. xxvii.
p. 336.

24 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

1835. Trygon gazzolae L. Agassiz, Neues Jahrb., p. 297 (name only).

1831). Trygon gazzolae L. Agassiz, Poiss. Foss., iii. p. 382**; vol. iv. p. 38 (name

only).
1851. Trygon gazzolae J. Heckel, Sitzungsber. Akad.^Wiss. Wien, vii. p. 325.
1861. Alexandrinum, sp. K. Molin, Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xlii. p. 579.
1874. Alexandrinum molini A. de Zigno, Mem. 11. Istit. Veneto, xviii. p. 299, PI. XII.
1874. Trygon gazolae A. de Zigno, Catalogo ragionato dei Pesci Fossili, p. 180.
1894. Trygon {Taeniura) muricatus O. Jaekel, Die eocanen Selachier voni Monte

Bolca, p. 142, Plate IV. text-fig. 32.

One can gain some idea of the difficulties attending the identification and
designation of this species from the following statements of Dr. Jaekel :

" Es ist auffallend, dass eine Form, die bereits von Volta vortrefflich beschrieben
und abgebildet war, und welche durch ihren reich gegliederten Skeletbau so leiclit
kenntlich ist, so viele nachtragliche Beneniiungen erfahren hat. Volta kannte und
besclirieb das hier Tafel IV abgebihlete Exemplar der Collection Gazola; aller-
dings rtchnete er zu der gleichen Art, die er als Raja muricata bezeichnete, noch
ein mit einem Stachel besetztes Schwanzfragment (/. c. Taf. ix. Fig. 2), welches
zu Vrolophus crassicauda [.sec] gehort. . . . Zu den spateren Benennungen gab z.
Th. die Auffindung neuer Exemplare und die Niclitberiicksichtigung des vorher
beschriebenen Veranlassung. So enstanden auf Grund eines Exemplares in den
Pariser Sammlung die Namen Trygonobatus vulgaris de Blainville und Trygon Gaz-
zolae Agassiz, von welchen die letztere, obwohl er ohne Beschreibung verdffent-
licht wurde, sich in der Litteratur am meisten einbiirgerte. Dass Molin lediglich
auf Grund der distalen Stellung des Schwanzstachels eine neue Gattung Alex-
andrinum aufstellte, . . . kann nicht gerechtfertigt erscheinen " (p. 142).

The above extract is in complete accord with the views of the present writer,
save in one particular, which concerns the presence in this species of the form
of caudal spine attributed to it by Volta. Heckel, and following him most
writers, have maintained that the original of Volta's PI. IX. Fig. 2 does not be-
long to Trygon muricatus, but to another form of ray altogether, that now
known under the name of Urolophus crassicaudatus (Blv.). It is probable,
however, that the same form of dermal defence is common to both species.
As for the original of Volta's figure, either the identical specimen, or one so
closely resembling it as to be indistinguishable from it, is preserved in the
Paris Museum of Natural History ; and this is seen very clearly to belong
to a complete individual of Trygon muricatus.

Urolophus crassicaudatus (Blv.).

1818. Trygonobatus crassicaudatus H. d. de Blainville, Nouv. Diet. d'Hist. Nat.

xxvii. p. 337.
1835. Trygon oblongus L. Agassiz, Neues Jahrb., p. 297.

Trygon oblongus L. Agassiz, Poiss. Foss., iii. p. 382, **, iv. p. 38.
1851. Trygon brevicauda J. Heckel, Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vii. p. 324.
1853. Urolophus princeps J. Ileckel, Sitzungsber. Akad. Wissen. Wien, xi. p. 122.

EASTMAN: DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 25

1861. Taeniiira kneri K. Molin, Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xlii. p. 581.
1863. L'rolopkus princeps Kiier und SteindachntT, Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

xxi. p. 32, I'late VI. Fig. 2.
1874. Tryjon oblongus A. de Zigno, Catalogo Ragionato dei Pesci Fossili, p. 181.
1874. Taeniura kneri A. de Zigno, ibid., p. 182.
1874. Urolophus princeps A. de Zigno, ibid., p. 183.

1889. Taeniura kneri A. S. Woodward, Cat. Fossil Fishes Brit. Mus., pt. i. p. 153.
1894. Urolophus crassicaitda 0. Jaekel, Die eocanen Selachier vom Monte Bolca,

p. 148, Plate V.

It seems desirable to give the complete synonymy of this species, as there is
no possible reason for doubting that all of the rays described under the various
names cited above belong to a single species. There is no specimen at the
Paris Museum which can be certainly identified as the type either of de Blaiu-
ville's Trygonobatus crassicaudatiij?, or of Agassiz's Tryijon oblongus.

CAECHAEIIDAE.
Carcharias (Scoliodon) cuvieri (Aoassiz).

(Text-figure A.)

1796. Squalus carcharias G. S. Volta, Ittiolit. Veronese, p. 10, Plate III. Fig. 1.
1807. Squalus vidpes Scortegagna, F. 0., Memoria epistolare al Sig. Faujas-St.-

Fond.
1807. Squalus carcharias G. Gazola, Lettera al Sig. Scortegagna, &c.
1818. Squalus innominatus (errore) H. D. de Blainville, Nouv. Diet. d'Hist. Nat.

xxviii. p. 336.
1835. Galcus cuvieri L. Agassiz, Neues Jahrb., p. 291.
1839. Galeits cuvieri L. Agassiz, Poiss. Foss., iv. p. 38.

1860. Protogaleus minor {pars) R. ]Molin, Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xl. p. 583.
1874. Alopiopsis cuvieri (pars) A. de Zigno, Catalogo ragionato dei Pesci Fossili,

p. 174.
1894. Galeus cuvieri O. Jaekel, Die eocanen Selachier vom Monte Bolca, p. 172,

text-fig. 38.

The holotype of this species forms part of the Gazola Col]e<'.tion in Paris,
and another specimen slightly smaller than the type is preserved in the Uni-
versity of Padua Museum. An outline figure of the latter is given by Jaekel,
and likewise the following description : —

" Was nun schliesslich das kleinere, vorstehend abgebildete Exemplar der Padu-
aner Sammlung betrifft, so ist dasselbe fast voUstiindig erhalten, also wesentlich
besser, als das von Volta abgebildete und von Agassiz als Galeus cuvieri bezeich-
nete. . . . Die Brustflossen sind schlank, fast sichelformig riickwarts gekriimnit."

Regarding the type-specimen in the Paris ]\Iusenm the same author re-
marks that the rostral region is incompletely preserved, and " von dun Flossen

26 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

sind nur die beiden Brustflossen deutlicb." A little further on, however, lie
says: "Dieerste Eiickenflosse ist auch bei deiii Pariser Exemplar an dersel-
ben Stelle angedeiiiet, wo sie bei deni bier abgebildeten sitzt, namlich un-
niittelbar liber dem Hinterrand der Brustflossen. Auch die zweite Dorsalis
und die Analis scheiuen bei dem Pariser Sttick an der gleichen Korperstelle,
wie an dem Paduaner, ubereinander zu stehen. . . . Ueber die Form der
Schuppen und sonstigen Einzelheiten konnte ich leider an dem Pariser Stiick
keine zuverlassige Beobachtung anstellen " (p. 174).

The present writer has not been able to verify the above description in all
particulars, but on the other hand has found it possible to observe some details
not jjreviously made known.

The specimen, by the way, is preserved on a single slab, and the catalogue
of the Museum does not show that it ever existed in counterpart, although the
contrary is aflirmed by Jaekel. The anterior third of the trunk lies squarely
on its back in the matrix, the first dorsal fin being thus wholly or for the

^„.

\.

Fig. a. Type-specimen of Carcharias (Scoliodon) cuvieri (Ag.). X x'j. Extremi-
ties of the dorsal and caudal fins hypothetically restored.

most part concealed. The remainder of the trunk is visible from the lateral
aspect, and the fins which it exhibits are the posterior dorsal, anal, and a
portion of the lower lobe of the caudal, as indicated in the accompanying
Figure A. A small triangular mass of scales lying immediately in front of the
posterior dorsal may perhaps be interpreted as a ruptured portion of the
shagreen, or possibly even as the displaced tip of the anterior dorsal.

The shagreen is very excellently preserved over various portions of the body,
the form and structure of the individual scales appearing as distinct as in life.
The shagreen granules agree so perfectly with those of the recent Scoliodon
that no further description is necessary, and the same is true of the dentition.
A number of the teeth are preserved in their natural position in the mouth
region, and all exhibit very clearly the inclined triangular crown with smooth
edges characteristic of Scoliodon. It will be seen that the identification which
is here made of this shark as a species of Scoliodon is in accordance with all
the characters, except that the rostrum appears to have been rather less pro-
longed. In the above text-figure, the posterior dorsal and caudal fins have
been hypothetically restored.

EASTMAN: DESCiarTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 27

Altogether seventeen species of elasmobranchs are known from the Monte
Bolca horizon, a list of which is subjoined :

Speciks of Elasmobranchs from Monte Bolca.

1. Rhinohatis zignii (Heckel). 10. Promyliohatis gazolae (Zigno).

2. " primuevus Zigno. 11. Lamna vincenti Winkler.

3. Platijrhina holcensis (Heckel). 12. Odontaspis hopei Ag.

4. " ecjertoni Zigno. 13. Carcharodon auriculatus (Blv.).

5. " gigantea (Blv.). 14. Pseudogaleus voltai Jaekel.

6. Narcine molini i-Aktk.ii\. 15. Alopiopsis plejodon Lioy.

7. Trygon muricatus (Volta). 16. Carcharias (Scoliodon) cuvieri (Ag.).

8. " zignii (Molin). 17. Mesiteia emiliae Kramb.

9. Urulophus crassicaudatus (Blv.).

TELEOSTOMI.

ACTINOPTERYGH.

ALBULIDAE.
MONOPTERUS Volta.

Trunk elongated oval and laterally compressed. Head relatively short, with
steep frontal profile ; opercular bones well developed. Vertebrae at least 60
in number, half of them being caudal. Length of anterior pectoral fin-ray
exceeding maximum depth of trunk ; pelvic fins minute, situated nearer the
anal than the pectoral pair. Anal placed opposite the dorsal, and rising into
an acuminate lobe in front. Caudal very deeply forked, with a scaly lamella
extending over the middle of the tail at the base. Mouth opening small, a
series of conical teeth present along the margin of the jaws, and a series of
hemispherical crushing teeth placed further back.

Monopterus gigas Volta.

1796. Monopteros gigas G. S. Volta, Ittiolit. Veronese, p. 191, Plate XLVTI.

1818. Monopteros gigas H. D. de Blainville, Nouv. Diet. d'Hist. Nat., xxvii. p. 357.

1835. Platinx gigas L. Agassiz, Neues Jalirb., p. 304.

1838-44. Platinx gigas L. Agassiz, Poiss. Fuss., v. pt. 2, p. 126.

1874. Platinx gigas A. de Zigno, Catalogo ragionato dei Pesci Fossili, p. 151.

The removal of this species from the genus Platinx, and its transfer to the
vicinity of Chanos, amongst the Albulidae, appears warranted by the presence
of numerous hemispherical crushing teeth in the pharyngeal region, and by the

28 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

structure of the caudal and other tins. The dorsal and anal are situated oppo-
site each other, and consist each of 20 rays. The caudal is short and much
expanded, covered with a scaly lamella along the middle at its base, and the
distance between the extremities of its lobes exceeds the maximum depth of
the trunk. All of the tins have the foremost ray covered with a finely rugose
dermal layer, and the anterior pectoral fin-ray is as much enlarged and elon-
gated as in certain Osteoglossidae and Chirocentridae. This species, of which
several examples are known, attains a total length of about 80 cm.

SCOPELIDAE.

Holosteus esocinus Agassiz.

1838-44. Holosteus esocinus L. Agassiz, Poiss. Foss., v. pt. 2, p. 85, Plate XLIII.

Fig. 5.
1856. Holosteus esocinus H. G. Bronn, Lethaea Geognostica, p. 683, Plate XLII.^

Fig. 8.
1874. Holosteus esocinus A. de Zigno, Catalogo ragionato del Pesci Fossili, p. 140.

The holotype and only known example of this species is an imperfectly
preserved fish belonging to the G-azola Collection of the Paris Museum. It
bears on the reverse the following MS. inscription in Agassiz's handwriting ;
" Cette plaque est evidemment composee de pieces incoherentes, surtout de la
partie anterieure de la dorsale, et vers le front de la tete; cependant la colonne
vertebrale indique un poisson d'un genre nouveau voisin de Belone."

An examination of the specimen shows that the vertebral column is intact
from the occiput at least as far as the insertion of the dorsal fin, the latter
being unquestionably preserved in its natural position. It is evident that the
triangular piece intended to represent the interneurals supporting the dorsal
does not belong to this fish, and the same remark applies also to another
fragment introduced in advance of the dorsal, which was properly recognized
by Agassiz as " n'etant q'une fausse dorsale." Although the authenticity of
the anal itself is doubtful, its position is shown by the presence of fin-supports
to be opposite the dorsal. Very little of the portion posterior to the anal fin
can be regarded as other than a factitious mosaic.

CAEANGIDAE.
Caranx primaevus, sp. nov.

(Plate 1, Fig. 4 ; Text-fig. B.)

A small species attaining a total length of about 10 cm. Head with oper-
cular apparatus contained slightly less than 3^ times in the total length to base
of caudal fin. Trunk laterally compressed, elongated, regularly fusiform. An-

EASTMAN: DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA EISIIES.

29

terior dorsal fin with about 8 spines of moderate Itnigth, closely followed by
the low second dorsal with about 20 soft rays. Anal tin opposed to the pos-
terior dorsal, and apparently of equal extent, preceded by two short and sepa-
rate anal spines. Dorsal and anal iinlets not observed. Scales thm and small.
Lateral line with well-developed scutes along its entire length, the line arch-
ing upward and the scutes becoming shorter anteriorly; number of scutes

about 65. . . 1 1 • i.

The unique individual upon which the above description is based exists
in counterpart, and details taken from both halves have been combined in

Fig. B. Caranx primaevus, sp. nov. X {■

the adjoining Figure B. This is the earliest recorded appearance of the
genus in geologicll history, the half-dozen fossil species that are known being
confined to the Oligocene and Miocene. Amongst the latter G. ovalis, which is
imperfectly known, seems to have resembled the present species in general out-
line, and amongst modern forms the species commonly referred to " Tmchurus"
(e.g., Caranx trachurus and C. picturatus) present the same peculiarity of hav-
ing scutes developed along the entire length of the lateral line.

The type-specimen, which is from Monte Bolca, is preserved in the Museum
of Comparative Zoology.

LABEIDAE.
Symphodus szajnochae (Zigno).

(Plate 1, Fig. 5.)
1887. Crenilabrus szajnochae A. de Zigno, Mem. R. Istit. Veneto, xxiii. p. 17, Fig. 3.

Besides the holotype of this species, which is small and imperfectly pre-
served, no other examples have come to light until recently, when one was
acquired for the Museum of Comparative Zoology, and another for the Car-
negie Museum at Pittsburgh. The individual belonging to the Cambridge
coUection is preserved in counterpart, and is interesting for the additional
information which it affords in regard to certain structural details.

This example has a total length of 10 cm. to the base of the caudal fin, and
in this distance the head with opercular apparatus is contained four times.

30 bulletin: museum of compakative zoology.

The preoperculum is strongly serrated, its posterior border being produced
into very prominent spines. Tlie niiirginal teeth are conical and arranged in
single series, no pharyngeal teeth being observed. The vertebrae are about
25 in number, of which 14 are caudal. The dorsal fin is much extended, with
about 26 rays, and of these 11 are spinous. The caudal is composed of 17
principal rays, there being one more in the upper than in the lower lobe, and
these are preceded both above and below by four or five spinelets. The anal
appears to be formed of about eight rays in addition to the spines, but their
number cannot be accurately counted. There are at least eight branchiostegal
rays. Evidence of the former extension of the scales over the opercular bones
and cheeks is not apparent in the present condition of the specimen, nor in fact
is it ordinarily to be expected amongst fossils. The scales are thin, cteuoidal,
and very strongly pectinated.

Crenilabrus was separated by Cuvier from Labrus as a distinct genus on
account of its having a serrated preoperculum, but it has been shown by D. S.
Jordan in his Review of Labroid Fishes ^ that the form is identical with the
earlier described Symphodus of Rafinesque.

CHAETODONTIDAE.
PYGAEUS Agassiz.

To this imperfectly known extinct genus have been referred half a dozen
species from the Bolca Eocene, and two from the Lower Miocene of Chiavon,
Vicentin. The type species is P. bokanus (Volta), renamed P. gigas by Agassiz.
This is a large form, attaining a total length of about 35 cm., the remaining
species being very much smaller, and included by Agassiz only provisionally
in the same genus with the type. It appeared to Agassiz that the smaller
forms constituted a group by themselves, typified by P. coleanus, but passing
over into the group of larger forms through the intermediate P. oblongus. Con-
cerning the advisability of subdividing the genus, Agassiz remarks as follows:
"II faudra done probablement demembrer un jour ces especes et en faire
autant des genres qu'on y reconnaitra de types difFerents, en les ^tudiant d'une
nianifere plus complete; ce qui sera d'autant plus difficile que les Pygees sont
fort rares dans les collections."

There are in addition to the small number of forms known to Agassiz two
other species represented by a solitary individual each, which are evidently
closely akin to Pygaeus bolcanus, although possessing more finely divided
vertical fins. These are the so-called Acaniliurus gazolae Massalongo'^ and
A. gaudryi de Zigno,^ from the Bolca Eocene, whose true position amongst

^ Jordan, D. S., A Review of the Labroid Fishes of America and Europe, Rept.
U. S. Fish Conim. for 1887, pp. 559-699, 1891.

2 Specimen Photowr. Anim. Foss. Agr. Veron., 1859, p. 20.

3 Atti R. Istit. Vcneto, xxiii. 1887, p. 14, Fig. 2.

EASTMAN : DESCKirTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 31

Chaetodonts has already been suspected by Smith Woodward. It is probable
that they represent types of distinct genera, but for the present they may be
most conveniently included within the limits of Pygaeus, as purposely extended
by Agassiz. It is evident that some of these forms are closely related to
modern Acanthuridae, the chief differences consisting in the great development
of the dorsal spines, and the fact that the maxilla and premaxilla are distinct.
The latter condition is alone sufficient to warrant the retention of these larger
species of Pygaeus amongst the Chaetodontidae, rather tlian amongst the Acan-
thuridae, or so-called " Acronuridae " of Giinther, and Teuthidae of Jordan.
On the other hand, the teeth are much stouter than in living Chaetodonts.

We have now to offer the description of a new species of Pygaeus, as con-
strued in its broader sense, no division of this genus being at present attempted.^
The type-specimen formerly belonged to the Marchese di Canossa Collection, a
part of which was purchased some months ago for the Museum of Comparative
Zoology. The choice of a specific title has been determined by the desire to
commemorate the labors of the master in this field, his name not being simi-
larly associated with any other member of the Bolca fauna.

Pygaeus agassizii, sp. nov.

(Plate 2.)

D. 10 + 9; A. 5-1-8 ; V. 5; P. 17 or 18.

A comparatively large species, attaining a total length of about 19 cm.
Maximum depth of trunk contained twice, and length of head with opercular
apparatus three times in the total length to base of caudal fin. Dorsal fin
arising immediately 1)ehind the occiput and extending as far as the caudal
pedicle with ten subequal spines and nine articulated rays, the latter not
longer than the former, and not produced into an acute lobe in front. Anal
spines gradually increasing in length and stoutness from the first onward, the
fifth e(iualling the foremost articulated ray in length, and longitudinally
striated. Articulated portion of the anal corresponding in size and position
to the articulated dorsal. Abdominal vertebrae 10, caudal 13. Large incisi-
form teeth present in front, gradually diminishing in size posteriorly, apjxar-
ently in single series ; maxilla and premaxilla clearly separate. Scales small,
those of the posterior part of the body in the form of shagreen-like calcifications
and tubercles. Neural spines of abdominal region and all of the interspinous
bones much expanded ; pelvic bones strongly developed. No lateral caudal
spines.

1 The writer is indehted to President Jordan, than whom is no Iiigher authority,
for the suggestion that " Pi/qneus, and y)ossil)ly Apoatntiis also, should he taken as
representing a distinct family, which would occupy a more central ])Osition near
the common ancestry of Acanthuridae Chaetodontidae, and Siganus ( Teuthis) " (Ittt.,
May, 1904).

32 bulletin: museum of compaeative zoology.

The general outline of body in this species is more suggestive of Acanthurus
than Pygaeus, but the fin-structure is wholly in accord ■with the latter genus.
The development of the spinous dorsdl is about equal to that of the type
species of Pygaeus, but the articulated dorsal is less strongly developed. This
is a character of specific importance, and its variation amongst different forms
belonging to the same general group is indicated by the following formulae :

Pygaeus holcanus D. 10 or 12 + 20 {Jide Agassiz).

" agassizii D. 10 + 9 ; A. 5 + 8.

" nohilis D. 12+ 12; A. 3 + 12.

" coleanus D. 14 H- 15 ; A. 9 + 11.

Acanthurus gaudryi D. 7 + 28 ; A. 3 + 25.

" tenuis D. 9 + 21 ; A. 3 + 19.

LOPHIIDAE.

Histionotophorus, nomen nov.

[Histiocephaltis A. de Zigno, 1887.]

The name proposed for this genus by Baron de Zigno is not only inap-
propriate but preoccupied, Diesing having applied it to a genus of Vermes
in 1851. The title Histiocephalus may therefore be discarded in favor of
Histionotophorus, which is bestowed in allusion to the sail-like median fin ex-
tending along the back.

Histionotophorus bassani (Zigno).

(Plate 1 , Figs. 1-3 ; Text-fig. C.)

1887. Histiocephalus bassani A. de Zigno, Mem. R. Istit. Veneto, xxiii. p. 31, Fig. 9.
D. I - I - I + 13 ; C. 8 ; A. 9 ; V. 7 ; P. 6.

A comparatively small pediculate species attaining a total length to the
base of the caudal fin of about 6 cm. Mouth oblique, maxillary extending far
downward, dentary thickened, jaws with cardiform teeth, skin naked. An-
terior dorsal of three separated tentacle-like spines on the head, posterior dorsal
high, much extended, with thirteen articulated rays, the fin-membrane stiffened
at the base with small spiniform calcifications. Pectoral members situated
immediately above the origin of the anal fin, their short rays directed vertically,
and supported by extremely long pseudobrachia, which are apparently composed
of two actinosts. Number of vertebrae apparently not more than 18 (according
to de Zigno, however, there are 22 in the type, 10 abdominal and 12 caudal).

Three specimens answering to the above description, two of them in counter-
part, are preserved in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, and their princi-

EASTMAN : DESCKIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES.

33

peal characters are combined in the accompanying text-figure, so far as they are
observable. There is little room for doubt that these interesting and rare
pediculates are identical with the species described by Baron de Zigno under
the name of Histiocephalus bassani, although the type-specimen is so imper-
fectly preserved that his description is at variance in some points with the
one given above, and the affinities of the type have remained more or less
obscure. The latter, indeed, was referred to the Scorpaenidae l;y Dr. A. S.
Woodward in his Catalogue of Fossil Fishes in the British Museum. The
characteristic pectoral members are not shown in de Zigno's illustration of
this form, and the head is much disfigured ; as for a supposed membrane sup-
]i()rted by the cephalic spines (to which the name Histiocephalus alludes), no
indication is afforded by the new material that such a structure existed. An
interesting fact to be noted is the close correspondence existing between the
fin-formulae of the fossil and recent species. In the connnon Angler, Lophius

Fm;. C. Illstloiiutoiihoius hiisMinl ((\e7Ag\w). X J- A composite il rawing based
upon three individuals belonging to tlie Miis. Comp. Zool.

piscatorius, for instance, as well as in the form under discussion, the first and
second dorsal together comprise 13 rays, and the number of rays Ijebjnging to
the caudal, anal, and ventral fins is identical in both species.

It is to be regretted that the cranial osteology is not more clearly displayed,
as it would be interesting to compare the various degrees of modification
exhibited by the Eocene and modern pediculates. The recent genus Corynolo-
phus exhibits a similar thickening of the dentary and other btmes of the lower
jaw, and another resemblance is seen in the construction of the premaxillaries,
which are probably movable, but further than this we cannot go. Attention
should be called, however, to the remarkable fact of a type of fish-life appear-
ing suddenly in the Eocene, already highly modified, without any known
predecessors nor any that can be plausibly conjectured, but which persists after
its first introduction essentially unchanged until modern times.

VOL. XLVI.^ — NO. 1 3

34

BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPAEATIVE ZOOLOGY.

GYMNODONTIDAE.
Diodon erinaceus Agassiz.

(Text-flgur« 2>.)

1844. Diodon erinaceus L. Agassiz, Poiss. Foss., ii. pt. ii. p. 274.

1859. Diodon erinaceus A. B. Mass.aloiigo, Specimen Photogr. Aniiii. Foss. Agr.

Veron., p. 21, Plate XII. Fig. 2.
1874. Diodon erinaceus A. de Zigno, Catalogo ragionato dei Pesci Fossili, p. 163.
1876. Diodon erinaceus F. Bassani, Atti Soc. Veneto-Trent. Sci. Nat., iii. p. 189.
1901. Diodon erinaceus A. S. Woodward, Cat. Foss. Fishes Brit. Mus., pt. iv. p. 572.

Fig. D. Diodon erinacerts Ag. X \-

This species has never been satisfactorily defined, and with the extremely
limited material that has thus far been obtained, a precise definition is not yet

EASTMAN: DESCRIPTIONS OF BOLCA FISHES. 35

possible. Agassiz's sole description consists in the statement that it is " une
espece de trois pouces de long, reniarquablc par sa forme ovale et par ses
piquants courts, robustes et assez clair-semes." Of the type-specimen, now
preserved in the British Museum, Dr. Woodward states that it is exposed
from the ventral aspect, has the dentition much obscured, and " no fins are
seen except part of the caudal. The largest and most slender spines are at the
sides of the middle of the trunk."

The type-specimen has never been figured, and the species is so little known
that it seems desirable to furnish an illustration of a specimen closely resem-
bling the type, which has recently been secured by the Museum of Comparative
Zoology. This is shown from the ventral aspect in the adjoining text-figure 4,
and it will be seen that scarcely any differences are to be noted between it and
the so-called " Enneodon echimis " of Heckel. In the latter, according to this
author, " der Oberkiefer ist niit sieben kleinen Zahnplatten besetzt, die gleich
einer Reihe tiacher Schneidezahne diclit an einander stehen." There are some
obscure indications that separate teeth were also present around the margin of
the upper jaw in Diodon erinaceus, l)ut as this cannot lie absolutely demon-
strated at iiresent, it is not deemed advisable to unite these two species. The
lower dental plate is well shown from the inferior aspect in the Cambridge
specimen, and does not appear to have been divided by a median longitudinal
suture. Pelvic fins are not observable, nor has the writer been able to detect
them in anj"- specimen of D. tenuispmus from Monte Bolca thus far examined
by him. An example of this species so closely resembling the type as to
have been confused with it by some writers is treasured amongst the splendid
collection belonging to the Paris Museum of Natural History. For the excep-
tional favors and facilities enjoyed at the hands of M. Albert Gaudry and
M. Pxiule during his study of this collection the past year, the writer finds it
dillicult to express his deep sense of obIigati(jn and gratitude.

36 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

All figures are of the natural size, and the originals are preserved in the
Museum of Comparative Zoology.

PLATE 1.

Figs. 1-3. Histionotophorus hassani (Zigno). Upper Eocene ; Monte Bolca. Figs. 1

and 1 a are counterparts of tlie same specimen.
Fig. 4. Caranx primaevus, sp. nov. LTpper Eocene; Monte Bolca.
Fig. 5. Si/mphodus ssajriochae {Z\gi\o). Upper Eocene; Monte Bolca.

PLATE 2.
Pygaeus agassizii, sp. nov. Upper Eocene; Monte Bolca [ex Canossa Collection).

Eastman. — Boka Fishes.

Plate I.

?^:'.it

/

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on clie Results of Dredging Ojierations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and iSS<>, in charge ol Ai.kx-
ANDKR Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake-," as follows: —

E. EHLEKS. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HARTl.AUB. The Couiatulse of the " Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUUWIG. Tlie Genus Pentacriims.

A. MILXE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the " Blake."

A. E. VERRILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fifh Comiuis?ion Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jeli'erson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Illustrations of North Ainericau :MARIKE INVERTEBRATES, from Drawings by Buhk-
HAKDT, SosKEL, and A. Agassiz, prepavetl under the direction of h. Agassiz.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. JI.-VRIC. Studies on I.epiilosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. :Mo-M. W001>W0UTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
A. AGASSIZ and A. G. :\IAYER. The Aealephs of the East Coast of the United States.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. I^
ALEx.\^'l)EK Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna.

" The Echini.

" The Pananiic Deep-Sea Fauna.

K. BRANDT. The SagittiB.

" The ThalassicolsB.

O CHUN. The Siphonophores.

" The Eyes of l)eei)-Sea Crustacea.

W. H. DALL. The Mollusks.
H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians.
S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.
G. VON KOCH. The Deep-Sea Corals.
C. A. KOFOID. Solenogaster.

B. VON LENDENFELl). The Phospho-

rescent Organs of Fishes.

1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
Tanker, L'. S. N., Commanding, in charge of

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

J. P. McMURRlCH. The Actinarians.

E. L. MARK. Branchiocerianthus.

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

ropods.
THEO. STUDEK. The Alcyonarians.
M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

DoliolidiB.
H. B. WARD. The Sipuncnlids.
H. V. WILSON. The Sponges.
W. McM. WOOD WORTH. The Nemerteans.
" The Annelids.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have l)een published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLI., and
also Vol. XLI V. ; of the Memoirs, Vols. I. to XXIV., and also
Vols. XXVIIL and XXIX.

Vols. XLIL, XLIII., XLV., XLVL, and XLVIL of the Bulle-
tin, and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., and XXXI. of the
MicMOius, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and IMemoius are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the JMnsenni, of
investigations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upon tlie Museum Collections and P^xplorations.

The following publications are in preparation :^^-

Kejjorts on the KesiiUs of Dredgiiiij Operations froTii 1877 to 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Hhike," Lieut.
Coniniauder C. 1). Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Conniiander J. K. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Couiniaiiding.

Reports on tiie Results of the Expedition of 1801 of the U. S. Fish Coinmission
Sleanier- " Albatross," Lieut. Conniiander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Com-
manding, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific ResuUs of tlie Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish. Commission Steamer
"Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
IVIoser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laborator}', in charge of Professor N. S.
Shaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals ; one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the
Memoirs (4 to) usually appear annually. Each number of the
Bulletin and of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list
of the jiublications of the Museum will be sent on application
to the- Librarian of the IMuseum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.

^.^^'

^

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college

Vol. XLVI. No. 2.

MALDIVE CEPTTALOCHORDATES,
WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES fROM FLORIDA.

By G. H. Parker.

' With Two Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

November, 1904.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college,

Vol. XLVI. No. 2.

MALDIVE CEPHALOCHORDATES,
WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES FROM FLORIDA.

By G. II. Parker.

With Two Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:
PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

"^'^NOVEilBEK, 1904.

Xo. 2. — Maldive Cephalochordates, with the Description of a New
Species from Florida. By G. H. Parker.

Introduction.

Through the kindness of Mr. Alexander Agassiz, to whom my thanks
are due, I have had the privilege of studying the cephalochordates col-
lected by him in his recent expedition to the Maldive Islands. These
consisted of material from three localities. At Timarafuri, Kolumadulu
Atoll, a single specimen of the rare Branchiostoma pelagicum Giiuther was
taken in the net between one liundred and fifty fathoms and the surface ]
at Xalandu, Miladummadulu Atoll, a single specimen of a new species of
Heteropleuron was dredged in twenty-four fatlioms ; and at Hanimadu,
Tiladummati Atoll, the dredge brought np from sixteen fathoms twenty-
one specimens as follows : twelve Heteropleuron maldiveuse Cooper, two
specimens of a new species of Heteropleuron, and seven specimens of
a new species closely related to Asymmetron lucayanum Andrews. The
exact positions of these localities are well shown in the chart accom-
panying Mr. Agassiz's (1903, Plate 1) account of his voyage.

In addition to this material I have also studied that in the collections
of the ^fuseum of Comparative Zoology and of the United States Na-
tional Museum. In the former I found seven specimens of a new
species of Asymmetron ft-om the coast of Florida. A description of this
species is included in the present paper.

I am indebted to the officers of the Xatioual Museum and of the
Museum of Cor parative Zoology, especially to my friend Ur. W. McM.
Woodworth, for the use of the collections under their charge.

Description of Species.

While it is perhaps premature, in view of the rapidly increasing number
of species, to discuss at any length the classification of the cephalo-
chordates, a survey of the recent literature on the subject shows that
the species thus far known fall more or less naturally into three gi'oups,
which have at least the taxonomic value of genera.

The first of these is Costa's original genus Branchiostoma, which, though
somewhat restricted by new definitions, has been retained by Kirkaldy

VOL. XLVI . — NO. 2

40 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

(1895), Cill (1895), Willey (1901), and Tattersall (1903"), and is defined
by all excepting Kirkaldy for the inckision of symmetrical species only.

The second is Andrew's Asymmetron, wliich was accepted in its origi-
nal form by Kii'kaldy (1895) and by Gill (l895), but expanded by
Tattersall (1903") to inchide all unsymmetrical species, whether they
possessed a urostyloid process or not.

The third is Kirkaldy's subgenus Heteropleuron, which was raised by
Willey (1901) to generic value for the reception of all uusymmetrical
species, including those originally put under Asymmetron.

These three genera may be briefly defined as follows :

1. B ranch iosiojna. — Symmetrical cephalochordates in which the right
and left metapleural folds terminate just behind the anus and the gonads
form two lateral series.

2. Heteropleuron. — Unsymmetrical cephalochordates in which the
left metapleural fold terminates just behind the anus, and tlie right one
is continuous with the median ventral fin; the gonads form a single
series on the right side ; and a urostyloid process is not present.

3. Asymmetron. — Unsymmetrical cephalochordates in which the left
metapleural fold terminates just behind the anus and the right one is
continuous with the median ventral fin ; the gonads form a single series
on the right side ; and a well developed urostyloid process is present.

As already indicated, species representing all three genera were found
by Mr. Agassiz in the Maldives, and their descriptions follow.

Branchiostoma pelagicum Gunthee.

Guntlier, 1889, p. 43.

Plate 1, Figs. 1, 3.

A single specimen of this somewhat rare species was taken in the net between
one hundred and fifty fathoms and the surface at Timarafuri, Kolumadulu
Atoll. This species was originally described from a single specimen taken by
tlie "Challenger" a few degrees north of Honolulu in the Pacific. A second
specimen obtained by Mr. J. J. Lister, in the Indian Ocean midway l)etween
Madagascar and Australia, was reported on by Cooper (1903, p. 352) in his
account of the Maldive and Laccadive cephalochordates. Finally six specimens
formed the basis of an account of this species l)y Tattersall (1903'', p. 214) ; all
six were taken l)y tow-net in the Indian Ocean, one about halfway between
Perim and the Maldives, and the other five between the Maldives and the Gulf
of Manaar. Notwithstanding these several catches, all three lots of material
were reported as poorly preserved, and consequently the best description of
this species that could be compiled is still defective in several important
particulars.

PAPwKER: MALDIVE CEPHALOCHORDATES. 41

The specimen obtained by Mr. Agassiz is exceptional! j- well preserved, and
the following notes based upon an examination of it are intended to supple-
ment former descriptions.

The length of the specimen is 9 mm. and its depth 0.8 mm., being .slightly-
smaller than the " Challenger" specimen, though having almost exactly the
same proportions. Cooper's specimen had the considerable length of 21 nnn.,
though, as his figure shows, its depth was proportionally as great as that of the
" Challenger " specimen; Tattersall's largest specimen was 8.5 mm. long and
1 mm. deep, thus agreeing fairly well with the measurements of the small
individuals already given. Tattersall's drawing (1903b, Fig. 16), however,
represents, probably by mistake, a more slender animal. Notwithstanding the
slight differences in the dimensions of the various specimens, they probably all
belong to one species.

The fins in the specimen taken liy 'Mv. Agassiz were in perfect preservation.
The caudal fin (Plate 1, Pig. 2) is oval in outline and almost exactly sym-
metrical dorsoventrally. The chorda extends through its major axi>, and ends
close to its posterior edge. The fin dorsallj^ and ventrally is marked with
numerous delicate radiating striae.

Dorsally the caudal is continuous with a dorsal fin, which can be followed to
the anterior end of the animal. Xear the tail (Fig. 2) it is moderately high,
but it gradually becomes lower and lower, till near the anterior end (Fig. 1)
it is about one-third as high as at its posterior limit. In the posterior region
a row of low fin-ray chambers can be seen (Fig. 2). These increase in height,
and near the middle of the trunk reach the outer edge of the fin. At the
anterior end they rapidly diminish in height, and cease near the eye-spot
(Fig. 1). They contain no fin-rays.

A low ventral fin without fin-ray chambers connects the caudal fin with the
right metapleural fold.

Anteriorly the dorsal fin is continuous with a rostral fin (Fig. 1) which ex-
pands ventrally and po.steriorly to jdin the buccal hood on the left side.

The number of myotomes in the specimen under examination is sixty-
seven, corresponding in this respect exactly with the " Challenger " specimen.
Cooper's specimen contained at least sixty, and Tattersall's sixty-five, though,
as the authors state, neither of these counts can be relied upon as accurate be-
cause of the poor state of the material.

The myotome formula for this species had been provisionally stated by Kir-
kaldy (1895, p. 320) as 36 + ] 6 -|- 15 == 67. This was based upon a tentative
statement by Gunther (1889, p. 43), in whose specimen the atriopore could
not be identified with certainty. In our specimen the atriopore and anus were
distinctly visible, and the myotome formula proved to be 46 -[- 10 -}- 11 =:67.

The notochord, which is well developed, reaches from very near the anterior
edge of the rostral fin almost to the posterior limit of the caudal. At both
ends it projects well beyond the myotomes.

The nerve tube contains in its anterior end a well developed eye-spot and,

42

bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

beginning at the third myotome and extending almost to the posterior end, a
series of smaller spots in groups irregularly twice as numerous as the myotomes.

The gonads form two series, one righfand one left, though, as intimated by
Giinther (1889, p. 44), they are often so closely pressed together near the
median phme that they there seem to form a single median row. The presence
of a double row of gonads places tliis species untpiestionably in the genus
Branchiostoma.

The number of gonads on each side Avas thirty-three, and the series ranged
from the first to about the twenty-ninth myotome instead of the twenty-sixth,
as in the " Challenger" specimen. Our specimen is probably a male, though
the gonads were not sufficiently mature to allow this determination to be made
with certainty.

I can confirm the statement of most previous writers that oral cirri are absent.
I have also been unable to find any evidence of branchial apparatus, and I agree
with Cooper (1903, p. 353) that if this apparatus is present at all, it must be
very limited in extent. Possibly the small size and flattened form of this
species, which must place very near the surface all the living substance in need
of oxygen, may have been acquired in connection with a gradual loss of special-
ized respiratory organs in much the same way that many of our smaller sala-
manders seem to have lost their lungs.

Heteropleuron maldivense Cooper.
Cooper, 1903, p. 349.

Twelve specimens of this recently described species were dredged in sixteen
fathoms of water at Hanimadu, Tiladummati Atoll. They agreed in all par-
ticulars with the very full account of this species given by Cooper. The more
important structural relations as shown in three of the specimens are given in
Table I.

TABLE 1.

Structural Characteristics, etc., of H. maldivense.

PACKER: MALDIVE CErilALOCIIOKDATES. 43

These reconb agree fairly well witli those tabulated for this species by
Piuniftt (1903, p. 363), from whose table the modes and ranges at the base of
Table I. are taken.

Heteropleuron agassizii, sp. nov.

Plate 2, Fig. 5.

One specimen of this species was dredged in twenty-four fathoms of water at
Malandu, Miladummadulu Atoll. It is rather elongated, measuring 27 mm.
in length by 3 mm. in depth. The dorsal fin is of almost uniform heiglit
throughout. From the anal region to a point a little in advance of the anterior
end of the nerve tube, it contains fin-ray chambers to the number (if fonr dr
five to a myotome. In the anterior and posterior regions these fail to reach
the free edge of the fin, but in the trunk region they meet the edge. The most
anterior three chamber^ are without fin-rays, which are present iu all the more
posterior chambers to a point al)out midway between the atriopore and tlie anus.
From this point posteriorly, only faint traces of fin-rays are here and there ob-
servable, and even these disappear as the caudal region is approached. Never
more than one fin-ray is present in a chamber. Often in the anterior region
and sometimes posteriorly the fin-rays may reach to half the height of the fin,
but in most places they are only about one-fourth this height. Anteriorly the
.dorsal fin is continuous with the rostral. Posteriorly it passes into the simjile
inconspicuous caudal fin which in turn is continuous with the ventral. The
ventral fin has much less height than that part of the dorsal fin opposite to it,
and is without fin-rays or fin-ray chambers.

The myotome formula is 45 -j-15 -}- 10 = 70.

The chorda is stout and almost reaches the anterior and posterior limits of
the body, projecting well bej^ond the myotomes in both directions.

The nerve tube has a faint anterior ej'p.-spot followed by a series of smaller
spots reaching from the third to the last myotome, and showing the usual ten-
dency to fall into two groups for each myotome.

The gonads form a single series on the right side, and are twenty-four iu
number. They extend from the seventeenth to the forty-first myotome. Tlie
specimen is a female.

The oral region is so contracted that it is impossible to be certain of the
number of preoral cirri; at least nine to a side are present.

Heteropleuron agassizii is related to H. bassanum, and especially to H. nial-
divense. In length it is between H. bassanum (43 mm.) and H. maldivense
(22 mm.). The ratio of its depth to its length, one to nine, is almost e.\actly
that of H. bassanum, and less than that of H. maldivense, one to six. The
gonads, wliich in H. maldivense begin between the ninth and tiiirteenth
myotomes and extend to a point between the thirty-third and thirty-nintli, iu
H. agassizii extend from the seventeentli to the forty-first. The caudal fin of
H. agassizii, though much like that of H. maldivense, differs strikingly in its

44 bulletin: museum of COMPAKATIVE ZOOLOCxY.

simple outline from the more lancelike form of that of H. bassanum. Perhaps
the best differential character lies in _the ventral fin. In H. bassanum and
H. maldivense the ventral fin has fin-ray chambers and fin-rays ; in H. agassizii
it has no chambers and no fin-rays. A summarized statement of the contrasts
between H. agassizii and other allied species is given in Table 2, page 45.

Heteropleuron parvum, sp. nov.

Plate 3, Fig. 6.

Two specimens of this species were dredged in sixteen fathoms of water at
Hanimadu, Tiladummati Atoll. They measured 11.5 mm. and 12.5 mm. in
length respectively, and their depth is about one-tenth their length.

The dorsal fin is well developed, and is slightly higher posteriorly and espe-
cially anteriorly than in the middle. It has well marked fin-ray chambers ex-
tending from the anterior end of the nerve tube to the tail, and numbering
about four to a myotome. In the middle region the chambers reach the free
edge of the fin. Single fin-rays are present. Anteriorly the dorsal passes into
the rostral fin, posteriorly into the inconspicuous caudal. The caudal fin,
which is in no way marked off from the dorsal, is also continuous with the
ventral, which contains a series of low fin-ray chambers and short single
fin-rays. These are inconspicuous, and have not been shown in the figure
(Plate 2, Fig. 6).

The myotome formula in both specimens is 40 4- 18 -1- 10 = 68.

The chorda is stout and almost reaches the anterior and posterior limits of
the body.

The nerve tube contains a conspicuous anterior eye-spot, and from the third
myotome to the last a series of smaller spots.

The gonads, which were completely present in only one specimen, formed a
single series on the right side, and were sixteen in number. They extended
from the fourteenth to the thirtieth myotome.

The structure of the ventral fin allies this species with the first four men-
tioned in Table 2. It dift'ers from all these in its small size and narrow form,
for it is even longer in proportion to its depth than H. bassanum, the narrowest
of the four. From H. bassanum it differs markedly in its myotome formula,
the small number of its gonads, and the simpler form of its tail.

A comparison of H. parvum and H. agassizii with other allied species is
given in Table 2.

PARKER : MALDIVE CEl'IIALOCHORDATES.

45

K

m

s

H

O

a

<

a"

>

<

OS

m

■<
O

•<

izi
O
C4
P
»

O

Eh

r a

»

>j
aT <

H
oo

»
H

M

-<!
S

o

b

H
O

P4
H
OS

o

O
03

K

o
O

(B

1

OS

68

00

g

c

1

C)3

;3

5C

«

hi

o

«

>

"

^

^

^

^

C

3

w

O

s

.-

t-l

a

09

CO

,a

o

U

(-•

r^

s

z>

O

B

'3

^

pC

5

s

"*

"*

■•

"

£
5

o

o

C

^

o

Tt^

CO

CO

ao

5<l

o

t^

30

t^

o

»

O

t^

a

II

II

II

II

II

II

II

3

'T

■M

c^

»

c

o

o

o

»-H

<— '

^H

1-1

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

a

CO

CI

CO

CO

X

o

o

o

*— •

T— 1

y^

1— t

I-H

T— 1

f-H

o

1"

+

+

+

+

+

4-

+

o

CO

iS

C5

o

-N

o

■*

o

•^

CO

■^

CO

•V

CC

V

1

,—1

o

o

o

o

a

ec

'^Z

C<)

^^^

o

s

O

o
■*-»

^

2

o

s

,— :

S<1

t;

o

o

■^

CO

o

t^

o

(M

«

fM

c^

T— 1

!5

■

o

•w

o5^

1-H

1— H

^_^

_^

^^

^_

I-H

■p - =,

«J|

05

t^

O

00

o

t~

'C5

«*-r

O

a

"^

5 2

CO

rA

«^

t—

!M

O

t^

tc5

■<»l

U3

C^

(N

1—1

CO

C^

o

J

■

•

^

•

•

U

Ut

m

.2

>

CO

(S

J^

C

o

u

o

O

EC
O

1

s

3

c
2

o

■♦-<

s
o

>

'3

CO

C
o

S

>

-4-f

Ph
S

"3

'E

03

i)

c

S-.

eS

5S

0)

^

rt

3

SO

.a

c

'5

C-

O

cS

1— «

•—1

1— H
1— H

P-H

1— (

46

BULLETIN : MUSEUM .OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Asymmetron orientale, sp. nov.

Plate 1, Fig. 4.

Seven specimens of this species were dredged in sixteen fathoms of water at
Hanimadu, Tiladummati Atoll. They varied in length from 18 mm. to 9 mm.,
and their general proportions and structural features suggested at once that
they belonged to the species Asymmetron lucayanum Andrews. Although the
material on which Andrews based his description came from the Bahamas,
Cooper (1903, p. 348) has recently claimed that the same form also occurs in
the Maldives. In discussing this question he states that " the only point in
which the Maldivan and West Indian forms consistently differ from one another
is in their size. The average length of the Maldivan specimens is 23 mm., the
extremes being 18 and 30 mm., thus being nearly double the length of the
Bahama specimens which Andrews found to average 13 mm. In spite of this
difference the average myotome formula for the two forms remains practically
the same, the mode in each case being sixty-six myotomes, i. e. forty-four from
the head to the atriopore, nine from the atriopore to the anus, and thirteen
from the anus to the tail."

Observations on the seven specimens obtained by Mr. Agassiz confirm most
of these statements, as may be seen l)y inspecting Table 3, in which records
from three of the seven individuals are given, and below these for comparison
average records for the eastern form as given by Cooper (1903, p. 348) and by
Punnett (1903, p. 362), and for the western by Andrews (1893, p. 242). It
is obvious, as Cooper states, that in all these characters, except size, the eastern
individuals agree with the western ones.

TABLE 3.
Comparison of Eastern and Western Specimens of Asymmetron.

No. of Specimen.

Length in
mm.

Sex.

Gonads.

Myotome Foi-mula.

1
2
3

17.5

18
9

9

28

shed

26

44 + 10 + 12 = 66
46 + 10 + 13 := 69
43 + 9 + 11 = 63

East formi
West form 2

23
13

29
29

44 + 9 + 13 = 66
44 + 9 + 13 = 66

1 Records for the eastern specimens as given by Cooper (1903, p. 348), and hy
runnett (1903, p. 362).

'^ Records for the western specimens as given by Andrews (1893, p. 242).

PARKER: MALDIVE CEPHALOCHORDATES. 47

The collection from the United States National ]\rnseum, which I had the
privilege of stud\'ing, contained a few specimens of the West Indian Asym-
metron donated by Dr. Andrews, and I thei'efore had tlie opportnnity of mak-
ing a close comparison between this and the eastern form. As a result of this
comparison I found one structural feature in which the two sets of individuals
consistently differed ; this was the form of the caudal hn. In the West Indian
specimens as figured by Andrews (1893, Plate 13, Figs. 1, 2), and as seen in
the material before me (Plate 1, Fig 3), the dorsal and particularly the ventral
portions of the caudal tin in the vicinity of the myotomes were very broad, the
fin becoming narrow and blade-like only on the urostyloid process. In the
Maldivan forms (Plate 1, Fig. 4) collected by Mr. Agassiz, the ventral portion
of the caudal fin next the myotomes was only slightly broader than that under
the urostyloid portion, and the dorsal portion next the myotomes was no broader
than that over the urostyloid process. These features of the caudal fins in the
two forms were so characteristically different in the material at my disposal
that I do not hesitate to say that the seven Maldivan specimens certainly repre-
sent a species different from A. lucayanum, and I have therefore proposed the
name of Asymmetron orientale for them.

While I am confident that the specimens collected by Mr. Agassiz are spe-
cifically distinct from A. lucayanum, I do not wish to be understood to imply
that this species may not occur in the Maldives. Although the seven speci-
mens examined by me have lengths not far from those of Cooper's S2:>ecimens,
they differ from the figure and description of these given by Cooper (1903,
2^. 348, Plate 18, Fig. 1) in the form of their caudal fins. The caudal fin, how-
ever, is an extremely delicate structure, and now that an important differential
character has been found in it, a re-examination of its condition in Maldivan
material heretofore supposed to be A. lucayanum would seem desirable before
declaring this species to be an unquestionable member of the Maldive fauna.

Asymraetron macricaudatum, sp. nov.

Plate 2, Fig. 7.

Seven specimens of this species were in the collection of the Museum of Com-
parative Zoology. They were labelled " Salt Key Anchorage Fla." and were
probably dredged on" the Florida coast by the late Count Pourtalcs. Two of
the specimens were much curled and were of very little service for study ; the
remaining five were straight and in excellent preservation. The following de-
scription is based upon an examination of these.

The specimens varied in length from 14.0 mm. to 10.5 mm. and were over
twelve times as long as they were deep (Plate 2, Fig. 7).

The dorsal fin is low, particularly in its middle and anterior extent. From
the second myotome to a region somewhat posterior to the anus there are low
fin-ray chambers and short fin-rays. The fin-rays are generally block-like in

48

bulletin: museum of compaeative zoology.

outline and occur one for each chamber. There are as a rule four fin-ray
chambers to a myotome.

Anteriorly the dorsal fin passes over into a small rostral fin. Posteriorly it
is continuous with the much reduced caudal fin which invests the long uro-
stvloid process dorsally and ventrally as a very narrow blade. The caudal fin
is continuous with tlie rather broad ventral fin, in which there are neither fin-
ray chambers nor fin-rays.

The myotome formula may be given as 43 -{-b + 14+ = 62+. Between
the anterior end and the atriopore the number of myotomes varies from 42 to 44,
and between the atriopore and the anus it is usually 5. For the region posterior
to the anus an exact number cannot be given, for the reason that the most
posterior myotomes are so small that it is impossible to count them or deter-
mine with certainty where the system terminates. In the enumerations for
this region given in Table 4, only the numliers that could be counted with
certainty are given, though in every case more myotomes were prol)ably present.
This is indicated by suffixing a plus sign to the numbers for this region and to
the totals.

A well marked chorda passes through the animal almost from end to end,
and forms posteriorly a delicate, long, urostyloid process.

The nerve tube has a distinct anterior eye-spot, and a series of numerous
smaller spots extending from the third myotome to about the region of the anus.

The gonads, which vary in number from twenty-three to twenty-eight, form
a single series on the right side. In a specimen with twenty-six gonads they
extended from the eleventh to the thirty-seventh myotome.

A summarized statement of the chief structural features of the five speci-
mens examined is given in Table 4.

TABLE 4.
Structural Characteristics, etc. of A. macricaudatum.

No. of Specimen.

Length in mm.

Sex.

No.
of Gonads.

Myotome Formula.

1

13.5

9

26

44 + 4 + lOJ- = 68+

2

10.5

9

26

42 -f 5 + 17+ = 64+

3

14.0

9

shed

42 + 5 + 19+ = 66+

4

12.5

(?

28

44 + 5 + 1.3+ = 62+

6

11.0

s

2.3

43 + 5 + 11+ = 59+

The presence of gonads only on the right side of the body and the well
developed urostyloid process place this species unquestionably in the genus
Asymmetron. It differs from all known species of this genus in the form of its

PARKER: MALDIVE CEPHALOCHORDATES.

49

caudal fin, which is narrower even than that in A. orientale, and in the small
number of myotomes intervening between the atriopore and the anus. Table 5
gives in a condensed wa}" some of the more obvious differences between this
and the other known species of Asymmetron.

TABLE 5.
Speciks of Asymmetron Contrasted.

Name of Species.

Length in
mm.

No. of
Gonads.

Myotome Formula.

A. lucayanum Andrews . . .

A. orientale, sp. nov

A. caudatum Willey ....
A. maericaudatum, sp. nov.

13

23
20
13

29
29
30
26

44 + 9 + 13 = 66
44 + 9 + 13 = 66
44 + 9 + 11 =r 64

43 + 5 + 14+ = 62+

50 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Agassiz, A.

1903. The Coral Reefs of tlie Maldives. Memoirs of the Museum of Com-
parative Zoology at Harvard College, vol. 29, xxv +168 pp., 82 pis.

Andrews, E. A.

1893. An undescribed Acraiiiatc : Asymmctron lucayanuni. Studies from
the Biological Laboratory, Johns Hopl^ius University, vol. 5, pp. 213-
247, pis. \'6-U.

Cooper, C. F.

1903. Cephalochorda. Systematic and Anatomical Account. The Fauna
and Geography of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, edited by
J. S. Gardiner, vol. 1, pp. 347-360, pi. 18.

Gill, T.

1895. The Genera of Brauchiostomidae. American Naturalist, vol. 29, pp.
457-459.

Giinther, A.

1889. Report on the Pelagic Bishcs collected by H. M. S. "Challenger"
during the years 1873-76. Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyage
of H. M. S. " Cliallenger," 1873-76, Zoology, vol. 31, 47 pp., 6 pis.

Kirkaldy, J. W.

1895. A Revision of the Genera and Species of the Brauchiostomidae.
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, new series, vol. 37, pp.
303-325, pis. 34-35.

Punnett, R. C.

1903. Cephalochorda. Note on Meristic Variation in the Group. The Fauna
and Geograi)hy of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, edited by J. S.
Gardiner, vol. 1, pp. 361-367-

Tattersall, W. M.

1903'. Notes ou the Classification and Geographical Distribution of the
Cephalochorda. Proceedings and Transactions of the Liverpool Biolog-
ical Society, vol. 17, pp. 269-302.

PAKKER : MALDIVE CEPHALOCHORDATES. 51

Tattersall, W. M.

1903 . Report ou tlie Ceplialocliorda collected by Professor Ilerdinan, at
Ceylon, iu 1902. In W. A. Herdman's Report to the Government of
Ceylon on tlie Pearl Oyster Pisheries of the Gulf of Mauaar, Pt. 1, Sup-
plementary Report No. 6, pp. 210-22C, 1 pi.

Willey, A.
1901. Uolichorhynchus iudicus n. g., u. sp. A new Craniate. Quarterly
Journal of Microscopical Science, vol. 44, pp. 2G9-271.

52 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPAKATIVE ZOOLOGY.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

All the figures are camera drawings of specimens preserved and dehydrated in
alcohol and cleared in clove oil.

PLATE 1.

Fig. 1. Eight side of the anterior end of Branchiostoma pelagicum Giinther.

X 30.
Fig. 2. Right side of the posterior end of Branchiostoma pelagicum Giinther. X 30.
Fig. 3. Left side of the posterior end of Asyrametron lucayanum Andrews, from

tlie West Indies. X 40.
Fig. 4. Left side of the posterior end of Asymmetron orientale, sp. nov. X 25.

PLATE 2.

Fig. 5. Ileteropleuron agassizii, sp. nov. ; right side. X 5.

Fig. 6. Hcteropleuron parvum, sp. nov. ; riglit side. X 12.

Fig. 7. Asymmetron macricaudatum, sp. nov. ; right side. X 10.

■^

ri'^.>?*Wria(.-i?r?a-..r,T.,jv.-.-.

[^±*g» J

- • ■ «r> jiTr.

^

CHP del

fiMet!el,lilH tei'jn

R^rker-Cepha.

:%

J'

A^^

^

I y .A t i^

I

\\ :-

^

A

G K ? de:

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports oti the Results of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 188<>, In charge of Alex-
ander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

E. EHLERS. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HARTLAUB. The Comatulae of the " Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUOWIG. The Genus Pentacrinus.

A. MILXE EDWARDS and E. L. BOITVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VERRILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexandkr Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jeftersou F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LO U IS CA BO r. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. :MAltK. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. McM. WOODWOKTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Imports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L Tansek, U. S. N.", Commanding, in charge of
Alexandek Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna. H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

" The Echini. J. P. ^IcMURRICH. The Actinarians.

" The Panamic Deep-Sea Fauna. E.L.MARK. Branchiocerianthus.

K.BRANDT. The Sagittae. JOHN :mURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

The Thalassicolje. P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-
C. CHUN. The Siphonophores.

" Tlie Kyes of DeeivSea Crustacea. ropods.

W. H DALL. The Mollusks. THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarians.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds. M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidse and
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians. Doliolidfe.

S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids. ^ Sipunculids.

C A. KOFOID. Solenogaster. ' ^

R. VON LKN1)KNI>'KLD. ThePhospbo- W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Nemerteans.
rescent Organs of Fishes. ' The Annelids.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Tlioi-e have been piiblislied of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLI., and
also Vol. XLIV^. ; of the Memoirs, Vols. I. to XXIV., and also
Vols. XXVllL and XXIX.

Vols. XLn.,XLlIL,XLV.,XLVL,and XLVIL of the Bulletin,
and Vols. XXV., XXVI. , XXVII. , XXX., XXXL, and XXXII.
of the ]\IicMOiiis, are now in conrse of publication. •

The Bulletin and Micmoiks are devoted to the publication of
original vvoilc by the Professors and Assistants of the JMuseum, of
investigations carried on bv students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work bj' specialists based
upon the Museum Collections and Exploiations.

The following publications are in prei)aration : —

Reports on the IJesiiJts of Dreilgiiigr Operations from 1877 to 1880, in cliarge of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast 8iuvey Steamer " Blake," Lient.
Connnander C. 1). Sigsbee, U. S. N., anil Conunaniler J. 11. Baitlett, U. S. N.,
Coniinaiuling.

Reports o'l the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer " All)atross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Com-
manding, ii\ charge of Ale.xander v^gassiz.

Re{)orts on the Scientific Resnlts of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from Augnst, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions. from the Zoological Laboi'atory, Professor F. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratory, in cliarge of Professor N. S.
Shaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals ; one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the
Memoirs (4to) usually ap|)ear annually. Each number of the
liulletin and of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list
of tlie publications of the IMuseum will be sent on api)licntion
to the Librarian of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.

^^,^^^

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 3.

BATRACHIA AND REPTILIA FROM THE BAHAMAS.

By Thomas Barbour.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

) FOR THE ]

December, 1904.

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

Bulletiu of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 3.

BATRACHIA AND REPTILIA FROM THE BAHAMAS.

Bv Thomas Bakbour.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

December, 1004.

No. 3. — Batrachia and Beptilia from the Bahamas.
By Thomas Barbour.

This paper is the fourth of a series based on collections made by
Dr. G. M. Allen, Mr. Owen Bryant, and the writer during part of the
summer of 1904 (June 28-July 28). We collected on the islands of
New Providence, Great Abaco, Little Abaco, Grand Bahama, as well
as on a number of outlying cays. Some specimens from New Provi-
dence Island, taken by the author in 1901, and a large series collected
by Mr. Bryant at Mangrove Cay, Andros Island, from August 1-7,
1904, are included. All the material mentioned is now in the Museum
of Comparative Zoology, in Cambridge, Mass. A considerable number
of other specimens, also in the collection of the Museum, have been
utilized.

Cope has summed tip the relations which the Bahaman reptilian
fauna bears to the surrounding regions in a paper in the Proceedings
of the United States National Museum, 1887, Vol. 10, pp. 4.36-439.
Since then several peculiar species have been added by Garman, Bul-
letin Essex Institute, 1888, Vol. 20, pp. 101-113.

BATPtACHIA.

Trachycephalus septentrionalis Tsch.

This tree-toad was abundant on New Providence Island, where we obtained
fourteen specimens. Most of these were taken during the daytime, silting
among the leaves of orange and lemon trees, or on sisal plants. When
approached, they made little or no effort to escape. Their noise at night
sounds like that of a rope drawn through an unoiled pulley. The species
was less common at Little Abaco, where only one specimen was obtained,
though several others were heard. There is a specimen in the Museum from
Andros Island, where Mr. Bryant heard several, but failed to obtain one.
Garman has recorded the species from Rum Cay.

M. C. Z. No. 2415.

Distribution. — Bahamas, Cuba, Jamaica, and San Domingo.

56 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Hyla squirella Bosc.

Two specimens of this species Irom the reeds of a brackish water marsh
at Stranger Cay, north of Grand Bahama, are the first recorded from the
Bahamas. Here they were common ; and their chirp, as was pointed out at
the time by Dr. Allen, who found them, was noticeably different from that of
the other indigenous batrachians. As there are signs that this cay, though
now uninhabited, has been cultivated in times past, it is possible that the
species was introduced with imported plants. There were a number of the
latter growing near the site of the single old house.

M. C. Z. No. 2419.

Distribution. — Southeastern North America generally.

Hylodes ricordii Dum. and Bibr.

We collected twenty-nine examples of this species from New Providence
Island, where it was decidedly common under heaps of rubbish of almost any
nature, but particularly decaying palm leaves. A single specimen from Marsh
Harbor, Island of Abaco, differs considerably from the Nassau specimens in
that the tip of the snout is pallid, and there are two distinct parallel white
lines running down the back. This specimen possibly represents a local race,
but additional material is needed to determine this question. A single example
from Mangrove Cay, Andros Island, is very pale, and there is a noticeable in-
terruption medially in the long series of vomerine teeth. I strongly suspect
that another local race inhabits this island.

M. C. Z. No. 2416 ; 2417 ; 2418.

Distribution. — Cuba, Bahamas, and extreme southern Florida.

EEPTILIA.

Sphaerodactylus flavicaudus, sp. nov.

Type series, fourteen specimens (M. C. Z. No. 6953) collected at Mangrove
Cay, Andros Island, by Mr. Owen Bryant, August 1-7, 1904.

Specific characters. — Similar to Sphaerodactylus decoratus Garman in squa-
mation, but differing widely in coloration and in proportions.

The general body color is that of pale cream, with the skin showing darker
between the scales. Thus the entire surfjice appears to be covered with fine
reticulations. On the tail this darker color shows itself in the form of rings.
The tail, moreover, is bright orange-yellow. This species is more slender than
S. decoratus. The head is unusually sharply pointed. In S. decoratus, par-
ticularly in the young, the length of the head and body considerably exceeds
that of the tail. In S. flavicaudus the tail is almost always longer than the

BARBOUR : BATRACIIIA. AND REPTILIA FROM THE BAHAMAS. 57

head and body ; in a few cases, however, these lengths were ven' nearly the
same. The diameter of the tail at the base is less in the latter species than in
the former.

The types were taken in chinks in the wall of the house in which Mr. Bryant
stayed while at Mangrove Cay. He says that the species is very active and
difficult to capture, except in the direct sunlight, when they appear to be some-
what dazed, and may be taken in the hand without difficulty.

Sphaerodactylus notatus Baird.

This lizard is not uncommon about Nassau in some of the limestone caves,
■where several were captured running about on the walls. There are before
me thirteen specimens from New Providence, two from Stranger Cay, and one
from Little Abaco Island.

M. C. Z. No. 6971 ; 6972 ; 6974.

Distribution. — Cuba, Baliamas, and vicinity of Key West, Florida.

Sphaerodactylus decoratus Garman.

In the collections made during the past summer there are thirty-two
examples of this hitherto rare geckoid from Mangrove Cay, Andros Island,
where Mr. Bryant found it very common about the houses, and also a single
specimen from New Pro\ddence Island. These have been critically compared
with the tj-pe, a single specimen from Rum Cay. There is also in the Museum
of Comparative Zoology a single specimen from Andros Island, but the record
Ls unpublished. So far as I can learn, the species has been heretofore unknown
on New Providence.

M. C. Z. No. 6952; 6973.

Distribution. — Bahamas.

Anolis porcatus Gray.

This species was common on New Providence and Andros Islands ; from the
former locality eight specimens, and from the latter thirty-nine specimens were
taken. We did not observe it at Abaco, whence it was recorded by Cope (Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., Vol. 10, p. 437). A careful comparison of these specimens
with others from Cuba shows a slight but apparently constant difference. In
the Cuban specimens the longitudinal rugae of the head are rather more pro-
nounced, and do not appear to involve so many scutes as in the Bahamam speci-
mens. It is possible that this difference may warrant subspecific separation ;
but until a large series is available from various localities in Cuba, as well as
in the Bahama.?, a new name would only complicate this already over-perplex-
ing genus.

M. C. Z. No. 6964 ; 6951.

Distribution. — Cuba, Bahamas, and Florida Keys.

58 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPAEATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Anolis distichus Cope.

Eighteen specimens of this species were taken on New Providence, and
Mr. Owen Bryant ohtained a fine series of fifty-four specimens from Man-
grove Cay, Andros Ishmd. It was very coniraou on the big silk cotton-tree in
Nassau, but is usually not so common as A. sagrae.

M. C. Z. No. 6950 ; 6956.

Distribution. — Bahamas, Haiti, and San Domingo.

Anolis sagrae Ribron.

This is the most widely distributed and abundant lizard in the Bahamas, and
we obtained it at a number of scattered localities : five at Little Abaco, five at
Grand Bahama, three at Moraine Cay, two at Pensacola Cay, five at Elbow
Cay, ten at Stranger Cay, one at Marsh Harbor, Abaco, twenty at New Provi-
dence ; and Mr. Bryant collected ninety-two at Mangrove Cay, Andros Island.

M. C. Z. No. 6959; 6960; 6957; 6963; 6977.

Distribution. — Bahamas, Cuba, Yucatan, Jamaica, east coast of Central
America, and Venezuela.

Cyclura baeolopha Cope.

Mr. Bryant obtained a good series of this species on Andros Island. He
states that the natives hunt them regularly for food, and that he had no ditli-
culty in procuring specimens from them. He saw none himself about the
village.

M. C. Z. No. 6975.

Distributio7i. — Andros Island replaced on Watling's, Turk's, and Cat Islands
by C. rileyi, G. carinata, and C nubila.

Liocephalus carinatus Gray.

We observed this species almost every day ashore during our cruise among
tlie northern cays. Though recorded by Cope, it is unknown on New Provi-
dence Island, but it is said to occur on some of the small cays lying at some
distance toward Eleuthera Island. Mr. Bryant states that it is unknown on
" the mainland " of Andros, although not uncommon on certain of the outer
cays. Specimens were taken at the following localities: Hopetown, Elbow
Cay, three examples; Marsh Harbor, Abaco Island, two examples; Stranger
Cay, one example; and Grand Bahama, one example.

M. C. Z. No. 6966 ; 6967 ; 6968.

Distribution. — Bahamas and Cuba.

BAKBOUli: BATKACHIA AND liEPTILIA FKOM THE BAHAMAS. 59

Ameira thoracica Cope.

"We collected fourteen specimens on New Providence Island and seven on
Aiidros Island. I am unable to verify the occurrence of this species on the
Island of Abaco, whence it was reported by Cope (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
Vol. 10, p. 438). Possibly the specimens were incorrectly labelled, and were
from Andros Island. The species is said by Mr. Bryant to be rather common
there, although I cannot find a previous record.

M. C. Z. No. 6948 ; 6965.

Distribution. — Bahamas.

Typhlops lumbricalis Linne.

A single specimen of this species was taken by the writer about ten miles
northwest of Marsh Harbor, Abaco Island. It was found tightly curled up
under a large rock in a sweet-potato field. When touched, it became very
active, and it was only after considerable manoeuvring that it was caught.

M. C. Z. No. 6970.

Distribution. — West Indies and Guianas.

Bpicrates strigilatus Cope.

A single specimen of this species was seen in the hands of an animal-dealer
in Nassau. It was a rather large specimen, measuring, I should judge, six and
one-half or seven feet. There is a specimen in the Museum from the same
locality. Eecorded also from Andros Island by Garman (Proc. Amer. Philos.
Soc, 1887, p. 279).

M. C. Z. No. 6242.

Distribution. — New Providence and Andros Islands, replaced by E. chryso-
gaster on Turk's Island.

Ungualia pardalis Gondlaoh.

With a considerable series before me from New Providence Island, I disagree
with Professor Cope in considering this species U. maculata. We took six
specimens this summer ; the writer obtained four previously, and there were
two other specimens labelled U. curta by Garman, one from New Providence,
the other from Cuba, in the Museum of Comparative Zoology. In all of these
specimens part of the tail is black ; in the smallest specimen only the extreme
tip, in the largest specimen more than half. In some of these there are very
many fine punctae on the gastrosteges, as well as the charactei'istic alternating
spots. Two distinct color phases are evident ; in three of the specimens tlio
color is slaty-blue gray, the dorsal blotches being very distinct. In the others

60

BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

the color is brownish or buff with the blotches rather inconspicuous. The
squamation of these specimens exhibits a considerable range, and for this reason
a table of the scale-counts is appended.

No. 6114. " U. curta Garman."
25
Sc. 153 + 30

No. 6491. " U. curta Garman."
25

Sc. 159 + 31

No. 6780. U. pardalis Gund.
25
Sc. 154 + 33

No. 6781. U. pardalis Gund.
23

a. Sc. 150 + 31
25

b. Sc. 152 + 32
25

c. Sc. 154 + 34
No. 6969. U. pardalis Gund.

25

a. Sc. 158 + 34
25

b. Sc. 159 + 28
25

c. Sc. 156 + 33
23

d. Sc. 156 + 37
25

e. Sc. 158 + 32
25

f. Sc. 157 + 33
Distribution. — Bahamas and Cuba.

Cuba.

New Providence Island.

New Providence Island.

New Providence Island; three
specimens.

New Providence Island ; six spe-
cimens ; collected in 1904.

Alsophis vudii Cope.

Two specimens of this snake were caught on New Providence Island ; Mr.
Bryant took one on Andros. A comparison of these with Cuban specimens of
Alsophis (== Dromicus) angulifer shows that Dr. Boulenger is mistaken in con-

BAKBOUR: BATRACHIA and REPTILIA from the BAHAMAS. 61

sidering the former synonymous with the latter. As is rather often the case in
the preparation of his otherwise monumental catalogues, he has united in his
synonymy several perfectly valid species, possibly because he personally has
not verified the descriptions from actual specimens. From his list it appears
that there were no specimens of this species from the Bahamas in the British
Museum.

M. C. Z. Xo. 6954 ; 6955.

Distribution. — New Providence and Andros Islands, Bahamas.

The following" Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 188(i, in charge of Alex-
ANDKR AOASSiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

E. EHLKHS. The Annelids of tlie " Blake."

C. HAHTLAUB. The Coiuatulje of the " Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentacrinus.

A. MILNK EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the " Blake."

A. E. VERRILL. The Aleyouaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jeftersou F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. MARK. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. ISIcM. WOOD WORTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with U Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of
"Albatross," Lieutenant Coniuiander Z. L
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna.

" The Pauamic Deep-Sea Fauna.

The Sagittae.
The Thalassicolae.
The Siphonophores.
" The Kyes of Deep-Sea Crustacea.

H. DALL. Tlie Mollusks.
J. HANSEN. Tlie Ciriipeds.
A. HERD:\IAN. The Ascidians.
J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.
A. KOFOID. Solenogaster.
VON LENDENFELD. The Phospho-
rescent Organs of Fishes.

K. BRANDT.

C. CHUN.

W.
H.
W.

S.

c.

R.

1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
Tanner, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinarians.

E. L. MARK. Branchiocerianthus.

JOHN MURRAV. The Bottom Specimens.

P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

ropods.
THEO. STITDER. The Alcyonarians.
M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

Doliolidae.
H. B. WARD. The Sipuiiculids.
W. McM. WOOD WORTH. The Nemerteans.

The Annelids.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLI., and
also Vols. XLIV. and XLV. ; of the INIenioirs, Vols. I. to XXIV.,
and also Vols.XXVIlL, XXIX., and XXXI.

Vols. XLIL, XLIII., XLVI., XLVII., and XLVIII. of tlie
Bulletin, and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVIL, XXX., XXXII.,
and XXXIII. of the Memoius, are now in coarse of publication.

Tlie Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
orioinal work l)v tlie Professors and Assistants of the Museum, of
investioations carried on bv students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural Histoiy, and of work b}' specialists based
upon the Museum Collections and Iilxplorations.

Tiie following publications are in preparation: —

Reports on the Kesiilts of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in cliarge of
Alexander Agassiz, hy tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. 1). Sigshee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer " Alhatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Com-
manding, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Conimander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Confrihutions from the Zoological Lahoratory, Professor E. L. Marie, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratory, in charge of Professor N. S.
Slialer.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals ; one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the
Memoirs (4to) usually appear annually. Each number of tlie
Bulletin and of the Memoirs is sold separateh'. A price list
of the publications of the IMuseum will be sent on application
to the Librarian of the IMuseum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.

"^^Al

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XL VI. No. 4.

THREE LETTERS FROM ALEXANDER AGAStSIZJ |rC>, THE
HON. GEORGE M. BOWERS, UNITED ST/VTES FISH
COMMISSIONER, ON THE CRUISE, IN THE EASTERN
PACIFIC, OF THE U. S. FISH COMMISSION ib^fEAMER
"ALBATROSS," LIEUT.-COMMANDER L. M. GARRETT,
U.S.N., COMMANDING.

[Published by Permissiou of George M. Bo\vf:R8, U. S. Fish Commissiouer.]

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.
* April. 1905.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 4.

THREE LETTERS FROM ALEXANDER AGASSIZ TO THE
HOX. GEORGE M. BOAVERS, UNITED STATES FISH
COMMISSIONER, ON THE CRUISE, IN THE EASTERN
PACIFIC, OF THE U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER
"ALBATROSS," LIEUT.-COMMANDER L. M. GARRETT,
U.S.N., COMMANDING.

[Published by Permission of George M. Bowers, U. S. Fish Commissioner.]

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.
April, 1905.

^0. 4. — Three Letters from Alexander Agassiz to the Hon.
George M. Bowers, United States Fish Commissioner, on the
Cruise, in the Eastern Paeific, of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer "Albatross," Lieut. Commander L. M. Garrett,

U. S. N., Commandinrj.

I.

Lima, Peru, November 28, 1904.

The " Albatros.?," under command of Lieutenant-Commander L. M.
Garrett, left San Francisco on the 6th of October and arrived at Pan-
ama the 22d. On her way along the coast Professor C. A. Kofoid
took advantage of the opportunity for making surface hauls with the
tow nets as well as vertical hauls, generally to a depth of 300 fathoms.
A large amount of pelagic material was thus collected, not at a great
distance from the coast however. Off Mariato Point the "Albatross"
made two hauls in the vicinity of the stations where in 1891 she found
"modern green sand," in about 500 and 700 fathoms. It was interest-
ing to find the green sand again, as the specimens collected in 1891 were
lost in transit to Washington. I am fortunate in having as assistant
for this trip, Professor Kofoid, who has had great experience in studying
the Protozoa both in fresh water and at sea. He has been given charge
of the collection of Eadiolarians and Diatoms and of other minute
pelagic organisms ; and he will prepare a report on the results of that
branch of the work of the expedition.

The "Albatross" arrived at Panama on the 2 2d; she was coaled and
provisioned at once. On my amval at Panama on the 1st of November
I found her ready for sea, and on the 2d we left for Mariato Point to
make a few additional trawl hauls in the region of the green sand. In
both the hauls made off Mariato Point green sand was found, but not
in the quantity obtained in 1891.

From Mariato Point we made a straight line of soundings towards
Chatham Island in the Galapagos, intersecting the ring of soundings
we made northeast of the islands in 1891. The deepest point of the
line (1900 fathoms) was found about 100 miles southwest of Mariato

VOL. XLVI. — NO. 4 6

66 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY,

Point. The bottom continued to show about 1700 fathoms for nearly 200
miles, and then shoaled very gradually to 1418 fathoms about 80 miles
from Chatham Island. The slope became quite steep, the 1000-fathom
line not being more than 60 miles from Cliatham Island. We ran
a short line south of Hood Island, and found a somewhat steeper slope
to that face of the Galapagos, reaching over 1700 fathoms in a distance
of less than 50 miles, when the bottom remained comparatively flat,
attaining a depth of 2000 fathoms about 100 miles farther south. This
depth we carried eastward on a line to Aguja Point, until half-way the
soundings had increased to over 2200 fathoms and remained at about
that depth to within 60 miles of the coast, when the depth rapidly
shoaled. From Aguja Point we ran a line of soundings to the southwest
to a point about 675 miles west of Callao ; on this line the depths
gradually increased from 2200 fathoms, 100 miles off the Point, to
nearly 2500 fathoms. On running east to Callao the depth soon in-
creased to about 2600 fathoms, and at a distance of about 80 miles off
Callao we dropped into the Milne-Edwards Deep and found a depth of
over 3200 fathoms. We spent a couple of days in developing this
deep, making soundings of 1490, 2845, 458, 1949, 2338, and 3120
fathoms ; showing a great irregularity of the bottom within a compara-
tively limited area of less than sixty miles in diameter. Thus far all
our soundings have been made with the Lucas sounding-machine.

In the Panamic basin to the northeast of the Galapagos we only
trawled off Mariato Point, but we occupied ten stations with the tow
nets, hauling both at the surface and at 300 fathoms, and vertically
from that depth ; we also continued this pelagic work at nearly all the
stations (35) from the Galapagos to Callao.

When off Chatham Island we began to trawl and used the tow nets
regularly, occupying twenty stations. The nets were in charge of Mr.
P. M. Chamberlain. The pelagic collections, as a whole, are remarkably
rich. They are especially noteworthy for the great variety and number
of pelagic fishes obtained inside the 300-fathom line at a considerable
distance from shore, — from 300 to 650 miles. Many of these fishes
had been considered as true deep-sea fishes to be obtained only in the
trawl when dredging between 1000 and 1500 fathoms or more. On
one occasion the tow net brought up from 300 fathoms, the depth being
1752 fathoms, no less than 12 species of fishes; of one species of
Myctophum we obtained 18 specimens ; of another, 37 ; of a third, 45 ;
in all, nearly 150 specimens. On other occasions it was not uncommon
to obtain 8 or 10 species, and from 50 to 100 specimens. Among the

AGASSIZ: LETTERS TO THE HON. GEORGE M. BOWERS. 67

most interesting types obtained in the tow net I may mention as coming
from less than 300 fathoms, Stylophthahuus and Dissoma, both of which
Chun considers as deep-sea fishes, found from 600 to 4000 metres ;
also a species of Eurypliai-ynx obtained for the first time in the Pacific.
Stylophthalmus I had also caught in a tow net in 1900, during the
tropical Pacific Expedition of the " Albatross," in depths of less than
300 fathoms. In the lines we ran across the great northerly current
■which sweeps along the coast of Peru and Chili and is deflected west-
ward at the easterly corner of the Galapagos Islands, we obtained with
the tow nets an unusually rich pelagic fauna at depths less than 300
fathoms. We collected a number of Schizopods, among them many
beautifully colored Guathophausiae, pelagic Macrurans ; huge, bril-
liant red Copepods, as well as many other species of blue, gray, mottled,
and banded Copepods. Lucifer and Sergestes were abundant in many
of our hauls. Many species of Araphipods were collected, Hyperids
without number, especially where the surface hauls were made among
masses of Salpae, which, on several occasions, formed a jelly of Tuni-
cates. Several species of Phronimae also occurred constantly in the tow
nets. Sagittae were very numerous, a large orange species being note-
worthy. Several species of Tomopteris, some of large size and bril-
liantly colored, violet or carmine with yellow flappers, and two species
of Pelagonemerteans. Two species of orange-colored Ostracods were
also common, one having a carapace with a long spiny appendage.
We obtained several species of pelagic Cephalopods, Cranchia and
Taonis among them. Two species of Doliolum also occurred, but they
were never as abundant as the Salpae, two species of which often con-
stituted the whole contents of the tow net.

In the surHice and deeper tows we also procured a number of Acalephs ;
we have thus far collected more than 50 species of Medusae and
Siphonophores, many of which have been figured by Mr. Bigelow, dif-
fering from those of the 1891 Expedition. Atollae, and other deep-
sea Medusae, were common witliin the 300-fathom line. The Salpae
guts gave us, in addition to the finer tow nets, immense collections of
Radiolai-ians, Diatoms, Dinoflagellata, many of which have been con-
sidered to live at great depth and upon the bottom. The number of
Diatoms found in this tropical region is most interesting. They have
\isually been considered as characteristic of more temperate and colder
regions. On several occasions the surface waters were greatly discolored
by their presence, and the extent of their influence on the bottom de-
posits is shown by the discovery of a number of localities where the

68 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

bottom samples at depths from 1490 to 2845 fathoms iu the track of
the great Peruvian current formed a true infusorial earth.

The tow nets also contained many species of Hyalea, Cymbulia,
Styliola, Cleodora, Tiedemannia, Clio, and the like. On one occasion
the mass of the pelagic hauls consisted entirely of small brown
Copepods, the contents of the tow nets looking like sago soup. Another
time Sagittae, Salpae, Doliolum and Liriope, all most transparent forms,
formed the bulk of the tow net's catch. Again, Firoloides and
Carinarias constituted the bulk of the haul. These catches, coming
on successive days or interrupted with hauls of more than mediocre
quality, show how hopeless it is at sea to make any quantitative analysis
of the pelagic fauna and flora at any one station within the influence of
such a great oceanic current as the Chilian and Peruvian stream.

Hauls of the trawl made at the western extremity of our lines
brought us within the area of the manganese nodules, with its radiolarian
ooze mud, shark's teeth, Cetacean ear-bones and beaks of Cephalopods ;
nothing could stand the damaging work of these uodules in grinding to
pieces all the animal life the trawl may have obtained. Down to the depth
of 2200 fathoms or so the bottom was covered by Globigerina ooze, its
character being more or less hidden when near tlie coast by the amount
of detrital matter and terrigenous deposits which have drifted out to sea.

North of the Galapagos we found vegetable matter at nearly all the
stations, and between the Galapagos and Callao such material was not
uncommon in the trawl.

Beyond the line of 2200 fathoms dead Eadiolarians became quite
abundant on the bottom, as well as in the mud of the manganese no-
dules, thoujjh among; the nodules it was not uncommon to find an occasional
Biloculina, Many of the dead Radiolarians found on the bottom Professor
Kofoid found in the guts of Salpae swiniming near the surface or witliiu
the 300-fathom line in the tow nets sent to that depth. The same is
the case with many of the Dinoflagellata which had been considered as
deep-sea types. In our tow nets from 300 fathoms we found very com-
monly Tuscarora, Tuscarosa, Aulospira, and others. In depths of 300
fathoms to the surface the tow net was rich in Tintinnidae, either dead
or moribund Planktoniellae, and Dinoflagellata. Among the Dinoflagel-
lata there were 10 species of Ceratium, 9 of Peridinidae, Gonyaulax,
Phalacroma, Pyrocystis, Cyttarocylis, Undella, and Dictiocystus. On tlie
surface Planktoniella sol predominates with Asteromphale, Biddulphia,
and Synidia thalassothrix ; among the Dinoflagellata we obtained 12
species of Cei'atium, 5 of Peridiuium, and 22 species of other Peredinidae.

AGASSIZ: LETTERS TO THE HON. GEORGE M. BOWERS. 69

Among tlio Tintiunidao were a number of Sticholonche ; among the
Acantheriae were specially to be noticed Acanthometra, Acanthostaurus,
Amphilonche, Collozoum, Thalassicola, and a number of Chirospira
murrayana, and a few Challengeridae.

Our trawls brought up from the bottom many interesting fishes, among
which I may mention Bathypterois, Ipnops, a few bat fishes, all species
thus far described by Mr. Garmau from the 1891 Expedition. I may
also mention a Chimaera, different from the Chili species. The fish
have been admirably cared for by Dr. J. C. Thompson, U. S. N.
Among the Crustacea : Lithodes, Munidopsis, and many Macrurans, all
well-known species of the 1891 Expedition. We found a few Mollusks,
and a few interesting genera of tubicolous Annelids. Compared to the
1891 Expedition, few starfishes and brittle stars were obtained, and still
fewer sea urchins, only one species of Aceste and one of Aeropo, a
marked contrast to the numerous Echini collected in the Panamic
basin m 1891. We obtained, however, a magnificent collection of
Holothurians ; nearly every species occurring in the Panamic basin be-
ing found in numbers in our track south of the Galapagos, in the wake
of the great Chilean- Peruvian current and at considerable depths. On
one occasion, at Station 4647, in 2005 fathoms, we obtained no less than
16 species of Holothurians, among them brilliantly colored Benthodytes,
Psychropotes, Scotoplanes, Euphronides, and the like. At Station
4670, in 3209 fathoms, we obtained 6 species of Holothurians. At
Station 4672, in 2845 fathoms we also obtained very many specimens of
three species of Ankyroderma, a large Deima, 2 species of Scotoplanes,
2 of Psychropotes, with a number of young stages of that genus ; re-
peating thus the experience of the "Challenger," which found Holothurians
in abundance at great depth, not only in the number of specimens, but
also of species, though the " Challenger " did not at any locality obtain as
many as we did at Station 4647. Mr. Westergren made a number of
colored sketches of the species which were not obtained in the 1891
Expedition. We also collected in the trawl a number of deep-sea
Actinians, none ditferent, however, from genera found previously in the
Panamic district. We also obtained a few Pennatulids, Gorgonians, and
Antipathes, and a very considerable number of siliceous Sponges, usually
associated with the Holothurians found in deep water in the track of tlie
Peruvian current. In the track of the current at not too great distances
from the coast we invariably brought, even from very considerable
depths, sticks and twigs and fragments of vegetable matter. On two oc-
casions we brought up in the trawl specimens of Octacnemus. The

70 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

trawl had been working at 2235 and at 2222 fathoms. Both Moseley
and Herdman described this interesting Ascidian as attached to the
bottom by a small peduncle. While the presence of the peduncle can-
not be denied, yet its attachment, if attached at all, must be of the
slightest. Its transparent slightly translucent body, with its eight large
lobes, suggesting rather a pelagic type than a sedentary form. This
Ascidian was discovered by the "Challenger" west of Valparaiso.^

Mr. Chamberlain made two daily observations of the density of the
water, and found the same discrepancies between our observations and
those of 1891 with those given by the " Challenger " and in the Deutsche
Seewarte Atlas of the Pacific Ocean. Whenever we took a serial tem-
perature, he also determined the density at 800 fathoms. We occupied six
stations for the serial temperatures, two on the western termini of the lines
normal to the coast across the great Peruvian current, two in the centre
of the current, and two at a moderate distance from the coast. These
sei'ials developed an unusually rapid drop in the temperature between
the surface and 50 fathoms, nearly 12°, at the western extremity of the
northern line, the temperature having dropped from 71.7° at the surface
to 59.2°. At 200 fathoms it was 51°, and at 600 fathoms it had dropped
to 40.7°, the bottom temperature at 2005 fathoms being 36.4°. The
temperature of the station in the central part of the current in 2235
fathoms agreed with the western series. At the eastern part of the line
in 2222 fathoms, with a bottom temperature of 36.4°, the surface being
only 67°, we found again a close agreement at 50 and 100 fathoms, the
lower depths at 400 and 600 fathoms being from one to two degrees
warmer than the outer temperatures. On taking a serial from the sur-
face to 100 fathoms, we found that the greatest drop in temperature took
place between 5 and 30 fathoms.

The temperatures of a line running due west from Callao showed a
very close agreement both at the western end of the line about 780
miles from the coast and in the central part of the line, as well as in the
shore station about 80 miles from the coast in 3209 fathoms. The bot-
tom temperature in nearly all the depths we sounded was 36°, a high
temperature for that depth. I do not make at present any comparison
with the serials taken in the Panaraic district in 1891 until we shall
have completed our lines to the south and to the west.

We leave for Easter Island on the 3d of December, where we shall

1 In the Albatross Tropical Pacific Expedition (1899-1900) Octacnemus was
obtained in the tow net from less than 150 fathoms at Station 15, Lat. 4° 35' N.,
Long. 136° 54' W.

AGASSIZ : LETTERS TO THE HON. GEOKGE M. BOWERS. 71

coal, and go from there to the Galapagos and thence to Manga Reva and
Acapulco, where we ought to arrive in the early days of March.

The changes made in the working apparatus of the " Albatross "
under the superintendence of Lieutenant Franklin Swift, U. S. N.,
have proved most satisfactory. The changes made in the main drum
and the device for preventing the piling of the wire on the surging drum
and the accompanying shock have greatly reduced the risk of breaking
the wire rope when trawling at great depths. The wire rope has proved
an excellent piece of workmanship, and has worked admirably in the
comparatively deep water in which most of our trawling has been done
thus fai'. A new dredging-boom has also heen installed, and everything
relating to the equipment of the "Albatross" has been carefully over-
hauled.

Lieutenant-Commander L. M. Garrett has been indefatigable in his
interests for the expedition, the officers and crew have been devoted to
their work, and the members of the scientific staff have carried out
most faithfully their duties of preparing and preserving the collections
thus far made.

We hoped to he docked at Callao, but owing to the prolonged occupa-
tion of the dock by a disabled steamer, and the uncertainty of its becom-
ing free within reasonable time, we decided to proceed without further
delay to Easter Island and continue the expedition as we are.

II.

Chatham Island, Galapagos, January 6, 1905.

We left Callao for Easter Island Saturday afternoon, December 3 ; as
far as 90° western longitude we remained in the Humboldt current, as
we could readily see from the character of the temperature serials and
from the amount of pelagic life we obtained both from the surface and
the intermediate hauls. This also affected the bottom fauna, which was
fairly rich even as far as 800 miles from the shore as long as we remained
within the limits of the northern current. As soon as we ran outside of
it the character of the surface fauna changed ; it became less and less
abundant as we made our way to Easter Island, the western half of the
line from Callao to Easter Island becoming gradually barren. This also
affected the deep-sea fauna to such an extent that towards Easter Island,
at a distance of 1200 to 1400 miles from the South American continent,
our trawl hauls were absolutely barren ; the bottom for the greater part

72 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

of the line being covered "with manganese nodules on which were found
attached a few insignificant siliceous Sponges, an occasional Ophiuran,
and a few Brachiopods or diminutive worm tubes ; the same bottom con-
tinuing to Sala y Gomez and between it and Easter Island. Sala y
Gomez and Easter Island are connected by a ridge on which we found
1142 fathoms near Sala y Gomez, and 1696 fathoms between it and
Easter Island. The ridge rises rapidly from about 2000 fathoms, the
general oceanic depth within about 100 miles, to over 1100 fathoms
within a comparatively short distance from both Sala y Gomez and
Easter Island.

The southern part of our line from Easter Island to the Galapagos
shows all the characteristic features of the western part of the line
from Callao to Easter Island : like it, as far as the 12th degree of south-
ern latitude, it proved comparatively barren, the bottom consisting of
manganese nodules to within about 250 miles of the Galapagos. The
pelagic and intermediate fauna from Easter Island to 12° south latitude
was very poor, and the serial temperatures show that we were outside
and to the westward of the great Humboldt current. But near the 12th
degree of southern latitude a sudden change took place ; the pelagic
and intermediate fauna became quite abundant again, and soon fully as
rich as at any time in the Humboldt current. There was also a marked
change in the temperature of the water as shown by the serials; show-
ing that from the 12th degree of southern latitude to the Galapagos we
were cutting across the western part of the Humboldt current. The
great changes of tempei'ature which took place in the layers of the water
between 50 and 300 fathoms are most striking, and show Avhat a disturb-
ing element the great mass of cold water flowing north must be in the
equatorial regions of the Panamic district to the south and to the north
of the Galapagos. South of the Galapagos the western flow of the
Humboldt current must be nearly 900 miles wide and of about the same
width when running parallel to the South American coast.

The range of temperatures between 30 and 150 fathoms is at some
points as great as 21°. Such extremes cannot fail to aff'ect the dis-
tribution of the pelagic fauna, and may account for the mass of dead
material often collected in the intermediate tows when hauling at depths
of less than 300 fathoms, when the range becomes as great as 28°. Such
a range of temperature is far greater than that of the isochrymic lines
which separate coast fauual divisions. The bottom fauna, as we en-
tered the Humboldt current going north, gradually became richer in spite
of its being covered with manganese nodules.

AGASSIZ : LETTERS TO THE HON. GEORGE M. BOWERS. 73

The two lines centring at Easter Island developed the "Albatross"
plateau indicated on the " Challenger " bathymetrical charts, ou the
strength of a few soundings reaching from Callao in a northwesterly
direction, and of a couple of soundings on the 20th degree of latitude.
The Albatross plateau is marked as a broad ridge separating the
Buchan Basin from the deep basin to the westward, of which Grey-
Deep and the Moser Basin are the most noted areas.

Our line from Easter Island to the Galapagos showed a wonderfully
level ridge, varying in depth only from 2020 to 2265 fathoms in a dis-
tance of nearly 2000 miles. The soundings we made to the eastward
from the Galapagos to the South American coast, and to the westward
of Callao, as well as on the line from Callao to Easter Island, all indi-
cate a gradual deepening to the eastward to form what the " Chal-
lenger " has called the Buchan Basin with a greatest depth of 2400 to
over 2700 fathoms, and passing at several points near the coast to Milne,
Edwards, Kriimmell, Richards and Haeckel Deeps, some of them with a
depth of over 4000 fathoms. According to the " Challenger " sound-
ings, the Juan Fernandez plateau connects with the Albatross plateau,
and forms the southern limit separating Buchan Basin from the Barker
Basin to the south of the Juan Fernandez plateau.

At Easter Island we found our collier awaiting our arrival. We
moved from Cook Bay to La Perouse Bay to coal, as there was less
swell there than in Cook Bay, where we could scarcely have gone
alongside to take in coal.

Considerable shore collecting was done at Easter Island. We must
have brought together at least 30 species of plants. The flora of Easter
Island is very poor. There are no trees nor native bushes — not even
the bushes which characterize the shore tracts of the most isolated coral
reefs of the Pacific are found there ; and yet some of the equatorial
counter currents must occasionally bring flotsam to its shores. We
collected a number of shore fishes and made a small collection of the
littoral fauna. The fishes have a decided Pacific look, and the few
species of sea urchins we came across are species having a wide distribu-
tion in the Pacific,

While coaling, we spent some time examining the prehistoric monu-
.ments which line the shores of Easter Island. During our stay at La
Perouse Bay we visited the platforms studding the coast of the bay, and
made an excursion to the crater of Rana Roroka, where are situated the
great quarries from which were cut the colossal images now scattered all
over the island, many of which have fallen near the platforms upon which

74 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

they were erected. Near Rana Roroka, at Tongariki, is the largest plat-
form on the island, about 450 feet in length, to the rear of which are
fifteen huge images which have flillen from the pedestals upon which
they once stood. The plain in the rear of the platform is crowded
by stone houses, most of which are in ruins.

On our return to our anchorage at Cook Bay, we examined the plat-
forms within easy reach of the settlement, and also the crater of Rana
Koa, on the north rim of which, at Orongo, are a number of the stone
houses built by the people who quarried the great stone images. At
Orongo are also found sculptured rocks, but neither the sculptures nor
the images show any artistic qualities, though the fitting of some of the
Cyclopean stones used in building the faces of the platforms indicate
excellent and careful workmanship. To Mr. C. Cooper, manager of the
Easter Island Company, we are indebted for assistance while visiting
the points of interest of the island. He was indefatigable in his exer-
tions in our behalf.

We took a number of photographs during our stay, illustrating not
only the prehistoric remains, but giving also an idea of the desolate
aspect of Easter Island during the dry season.

We arrived at Wreck Bay, Chatham Island, Galapagos, on the third of
January, where we found a schooner with a supply of coal. As soon as
the ship has been overhauled and coaled we shall start for Manga Reva,
where we ought to arrive the last days of January. We reached Chat-
ham Island towards the end of the dry season. Everything is dried up,
the vegetation seems dead with the exception of a few small wild cotton
plants, weeds, cactus, and an occasional Mimosa ; and the great barren
slopes present fully as uninviting an aspect as when Darwin described
them. When the "Albatross" visited the Galapagos in March, 1891,
everything was green, presenting a very marked contrast to its present
desolate appeai'auce.

III.

AcAPULco, Mexico, March 26, 1905.

We left the Galapagos (Wreck Bay) for Manga Reva the 10th of
January.

On the northern part of this line we did but little work beyond
sounding, as we were likely to duplicate our former work to the east-
ward. The fourth day out, in latitude 5° S., we began a series of
trawl hauls, surface and towing to 300 fathoms. In the northern part

AGASSIZ : LETTERS TO THE HON. GEORGE M. BOWERS. 75

of the liue to ]\Iunga Reva the hauls were remarkably rich as long as we
remained within the influence of the western extension of the Humboldt
current, and as long as there poured from the surface masses of the
Radiolarians, Diatoms, and Globigerinae living at or near tho surface.
Some of the hauls were remarkable for the number of deep-sea Holo-
thurians and siliceous Sponges. Among the former I may mention a
huge Psychropotes, 55 c. m. long.

, As we passed south and gradually drew out of the influence of the
western current, we entered the same barren region we passed through
to the eastward when going to and from Easter Island. By the time
we reached latitude 15° S., the hauls became quite poor, and this barren
bottom district extended to within a short distance of Manga Reva ;
corresponding to it near the surface we found a most meagre pelagic
fauna, both at the surface and down to 300 fathoms — so poor that
it could aftbrd but little food to the few species, if any, living on the
bottom in that region.

We arrived at Manga Reva on the 27th of January and found our
collier awaiting our arrival.

While at anchor in Port Rikitea, we examined Manga Reva, the prin-
cipal island of the Gambier group, from its central ridge on the pass
leading from Rikitea to Kirimiro on the west side of Manga Reva, as
well as from the pass leading to Taku. On both these passes we ob-
tained excellent views of the "barrier reef" to the west, north, and east
of the Gambier Islands, and we could trace in the panorama before us
the western reef extending in a northeasterly direction parallel to the
general trend of Manga Reva Island for a distance of about 5^ miles.

From the northern horn to nearly opposite Kirimiro Bay the barrier
reef has only three small islets. It is narrow, of uniform w^idth (about
^ of a mile), plainly defined, submerged in places, and passing north
bounds a lai'ge northern bight dotted with numerous interior coral
patches from a quarter of a mile to a mile in diameter or length, with
from 7 to 11 fathoms. The southern part of the western barrier lagoon
ofi' Manga Reva is irregularly dotted with many small patches of reef,
with an occasional deep hole near Manga Reva Island of from 15 to 20
fathoms. From the islet to the west of Kirimiro there are but few
coral patches, indicating a reef which dips gradually in a distance of a
mile to a deeper channel of from 4 to 6 fathoms, which separates the
northern and western reef from the great reef flat lying to the south-
west of Tara Vai. This flat has a Avidth of nearly 2 miles, it is about
4^ miles long, and is marked at its southwest extremity by a series of

76 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

low islets arranged in a somewhat circular line, formed by 3 deep bays
and spurs from the outer line of islets, as so frequently occurs ou wide
reef flats in atolls of the Pacific.

Tliis part of the reef is called Tokorua. This reef flat shelves very
gradually from 3^ to 4 fathoms on the west face to 7, and connects with
the " plateau " upon which stand Tara Yai and Aga-kanitai. From
Tokorua the reef extends in an indefinite narrow ridge 8 miles long, with
from 3 to 8 fathoms, in a southeasterly direction. The western edge is
steep to, and the eastern face passes gradually into the lagoon, which at
that point has a general depth of 8 to 20 fathoms ; the deepest part of
this region being at the foot of Mt. Mokoto between it and Tara Yai,
though Tara Vai is united with Manga Reva Island by a plateau varying
in depth from ^\ to 4^ fathoms.

At the southeastern point of the reef it passes into a wide pla-
teau with from 9 to 10 or 15 fathoms. The plateau is about 9 miles
■wide southwest of Tekava. That part of the atoll has not been well
surveyed, so that the position of the reef flat has not been ascertained
further west on that part of the east face ; but the southeast passage
indicates 5^, 6, and 6^ fathoms where it probably marks the south-
■western extension of the eastern barrier reef, separating the lagoon from
the southern plateau to the south of the encircling reef.

The western faces of Manga Reva and of Tara Vai are indented by
deep bays, formed by spurs running from the central ridge of these
islands, the remnants probably of small craters which flanked the
large crater, of which Manga Reva forms the western rim and Au Kena
is the remnant of the southeastern edge, the former extension of this
rim being indicated by the spits uniting the base of Mt. Duff" with
Au Kena, and by the projection of Au Kena towards the outer barrier
reef, and by the numerous patches of coral reef off the northeast point of
Manga Reva towards the outer line of Motus till thev almost unite with
the barrier reef.

The whole of the western bays of Manga Reva Island are filled by
fringing reefs which leave but here and there a deeper pass to the shore.
The south face at the foot of the blufl" of Mt. Mokoto and Mt. Duff is
edged by a flourishing, fringing reef extending nearly half a mile on the
plateau at their base. The port of Rikitea is a reef harbor formed
within the large fringing reef which occupies the whole of the southern
bay of Manga Reva Island. The east face of Tara Vai and part of the
east and of the west face of Aga-kanitai are also fringed by reefs.

The islets and islands of Aka Maru, Mekiro, and Maka-pu are within

AGASSIZ: LETTERS TO THE HON. GEORGE M. BOWERS, 77

a fringing reef flat which runs around the west foce of Aka Maru; Au
Keua is also edged by an extensive fringing reef which runs out in a
spit of more than half a mile, in a northeasterly direction almost to
the outer line of Motus, which are nearly united with it by irregular
patches. To the west of Au Kena a huge spit of 2 miles in length
extends towards the base of Mt. Duff and almost unites with the fringing
reef off" the Cemetery, leaving a narrow but deep pass for the entrance
of ships into the inner harbor of Rikitea. There is only from 1 to 2|
fathoms of water on these two spits.

The depth of the basin within this area with from 25 to 31 fathoms
would be naturally explained as being part of an ancient crater, as in
Totoya in Fiji ; its northeastern rim is also perhaps further indicated by
the comparatively shallow flat of the lagoon to the west of the barrier
reef, with from 5 to 11 fathoms of water.

The principal islands of the group are in the central part of the lagoon.
The four larger islands are Manga Reva, Tara Vai, Au Kena, and Aka
Maru. Tara Vai is flanked by Aga-kanitai and another islet to the west
called Topunui ; Aka Maru is flanked by Mekiro to the north, and by
Maka-pu to the south. The southeast face of Aka Maru is an extinct
crater, of which Maka-pu forms the south rim. The main ridge of Tara
Vai is the edge of parts of three craters now opening to the west. The
four small volcanic islands in the southern part of the lagoon are isolated
fragments, steep to, greatly weathered, and disintegrated. No sound-
ings exist to show their relation to the other islands of the group.

The soundings thus far made indicate in the southern part of the
lagoon a depth of about 23 fathoms, with an occasional hole of from 38
to 40, and a gradual slope towards the outer sunken reef. To the south
of the old crater of Manga Reva the general depth of the banks varies
from 6 to 1 1 fathoms, with a deeper channel varying from 20 to 40 from
southwest of Au Kena towards Tara Vai. The lagoon seems to form a
western basin where the depth varies from 10 to 20 fathoms. To the
west of Au Kena and Aka Maru, lying between them and the line of
the outer barrier reef islets. A similaf but shallower basin exists, off
the northern end of Manga Reva, between it and the northern horn
of the barrier reef, with from 7 to 1 1 fathoms. Its rim is formed by a
ring of reef patches of very varying size.

On two occasions we visited theouter barrier reef and examined the outer
line of islets of the eastern face of the Gambler Islands. The position of
the islets as marked on the chart is not that of to-day, and the position
of the reef flats is not correct. The position of Tekava and Tauna appears

78 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPAEATIYE ZOOLOGY.

to be correct. Opposite Au Kena and in its extension the cast face of
the barrier reef projects sharply to the east, forming an angular horn,
with one island south of the horn and the other north running at a sharp
angle with it, so as to form a triangle which makes a deep bight open-
ing westward to such an extent that when off the northern side of the
horn we could see Tekava far to the westward of it. The second island
is followed by a third, and then by a long island — Tarauru-roa — nearly
2 miles long ; these are separated by small gaps. Then comes a larger
island — Amou — followed by three small islands separated by deep
gaps.

At Vaiatekeue (not the Vaiatekeua on the chart), the reef flat be-
comes quite narrow, it is hardly more than 100 yards wide, the islets
perhaps 50. The northern islets are small and separated by long
stretches of low shingle, and carry but little vegetation and very few
cocoanut trees. There are but two short sand beaches all the way from
the northeastern to the eastern horn of the eastern face of the encirclins
reef of Manga Eeya. A regular dam of shingle from 10 to 1-4 feet high,
on the top of which the usual coral reef vegetatioti flourishes, extends
along the outer face of the reef flat, which varies from 50 to 150 yards
in width, and is flanked at the base by low buttresses of modern ele-
vated coral reef rock and of breccia in places all more or less weather-
beaten and honeycombed.

The islets, and their formation, and their junction or separation into
larger or smaller islets, and the gaps which separate them, the mode of
formation of the buttresses, of the planed-off, hard, nearly level reef
flat, of the coralline mounds of the outer edge. — all these differ in no
way from what has been described in other barrier reef islands and atolk
of the Pacific.

The beaches of the lagoon are steep, and corals do not seem to thrive
in those parts of the lagoon to which the sea does not have access or at
some distance from shore. This is well shown by the vigorous growth
of corals in the fi*inging reef to the south of Mt. Duff on the outer edges
of the reef patches of Port Eikitea, and on the spits which connect
Au Kena with Manga Reva, contrasted to those along the west face of
the lagoon flats to the west of the eastern barrier ree£

There is a northeast horn of the eastern barrier reef in the extension
of Mansa Reva Island, forming the northern culmination of the central
bight of the eastern face of the barrier reef From that point the reef
flat runs westerly to form the northern horn about 3 miles north of
Manga Reva Island. The position of the outer reef cannot be correct

AGASSIZ: LETTEKS TO THE HON. GEORGE M. BOWEKS. 70

on the chart (H. 0.2024). On leaving Manga Reva, we made three
soundings close otF the reef flat line of breakers, — one off Tekava, at
the most one-third of a mile from the reef, iu 225 fathoms. Our
position plotted by tangents to the volcanic islands or by their summits
indicated in this case, on the chart, a distance of 1^ miles. A second
sounding of 245 fathoms otf the eastern horn at less than one-half mile,
indicated on H.O. chart 2024 a distance of 2 miles from the horn ; and a
sounding of 241 fathoms one-fourth of a mile off the point which we had
visited (Vaiatekeue) indicated a distance of three-fourths of a mile on
the chart.

The slope of the Gambier archipelago to the east is steep. On
coming in sight of Manga Reva we sounded in 2070 fothoms at a
distance of 11 miles from ^It. Duflf, that is, 6 miles from the outer
edge of the reef bearing southwest ; and on coming out we sounded
again half-way to that point at a distance of 3^ miles from the breakers
in 1394 fathoms.

One cannot fail to be struck with the similarity of the Manga Reva
archipelago to the great atoll of Truk. If I remember rightly, Darwiu
also called attention to this from a study of the charts. Yet, owing
to the great size of Truk, no less than 125 miles in circumference, and
the great distance of the barrier i-eef from the encircled volcanic islands,
the effect as one steams into Manga Reva is totally different from that
produced by Truk. In the latter some of the islands, though large, and
of the same height as those of Manga Reva, are much more scattered,
and seem of comparatively small importance in the midst of the huge
lagoon which surrounds them. Tlie barrier reef islets of Truk are
froha 11 to 15 miles distant from the encircled volcanic islands. In
Manga Reva, which is only 45 miles in circumference, after passing the
small islands in the southern and open part of the lagoon when once off
Maka-pu, we can fairly well take in the atoll as a whole. The western
island (Tara Yai) is only 5 miles off; Manga Reva and Au Kena are
about 3, as are also the islets of the east face of the barrier reef. These
distances, as you approach the entrance to Rikitea, are constantly growing
less, so that when in the gap between Manga Reva Island and Au Kena,
at the foot of Mt. Duff, none of the larger islands are more than 3
miles off; and the islets of the eastern face of the barrier reef are seen
to the northeast about 4 miles off. When on the summit of the central
ridge of Manga Reva, one can, in a radius of a little more than 4 miles,
take in the whole panorama of Manga Reva, and get au impression of
the relations of its different parts far better than it can be conveyed by

80 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

the chart, for the whole of the visible part of the archipelago is included
in a line drawn east and west, south of Maka-pu ; south of that line the
position of the southwestern reef can be traced only by the discoloration
of the water.

Manga Reva is an intermediate stage of erosion and denudation between
an arcliipelago lagoon such as Truk and a barrier reef island like Vanikoro,
and other islands in the Society group, as Bora Bora,^ Huaheine, Raiatea,
Eimeo, in which the surrounding platform has comparatively little width
and the barrier reef is close to the principal island and often becomes
a part of its fringing reef. INIanga Reva is open to the south and to
the west, Vanikoro to the east, while the volcanic islands of Truk are
completely surrounded by the outer encircling bai-rier reef, as are the
Society Islands just mentioned, which have several wide passages into
the lagoon through the wide barrier reef

One is tempted to reconstruct the Gambler Archipelago of former times,
and to imagine it with a great central volcano, with a deep crater of
more than 34 fathoms, of which Manga Reva and Au Kena are parts
of the rim which once were connected from the southeast point of
Manga Reva to Au Kena, and thence along the line of the outer islets
to the northeast end of the former island. On the west face it was
flanked by smaller craters extending to the western islets of the barrier
reef of which the bays of Taku, Kirimiro, and Rumaru, and the bays of
the west side of Tara Vai are the eastern ridges. Tliere were probably
also other secondary volcanoes, of which Aka Maru and the islets of the
south part of the lagoon are the remnants, the latter all being situated
on the gentle slope of the southern part of the Manga Reva plateau ;
this may have been the southern slope of the principal volcano of the
group on the face of which have grown up the outer line of the barrier
reef and its islets.

The existence of a central volcano with a deep crater would readily
explain the great depths of the lagoon in its different regions, and
oif the outer face of Manga Reva, depths showing slopes which are no
steeper nor more striking than the heights and slopes of tlie southern
part of Manga Reva, of Tara Vai, of Aka Maru, and of Maka-pu ; sup-
posing them to be extended into the sea.

Mt. Mokoto and Mt. Dutf drop precipitously for more than one-third
their height, and in less than a quarter of a mile fall from over 1300 feet
to the level of the sea. Similar slopes are found along the volcanoes

1 See A. Agassiz. Tlie Coral Reefs of the Tropical Pacific, Plates 210 and
231.

AGASSIZ: LETTERS TO THE HON. GEORGE M. BOWERS. 81

of Easter Island where there are no coral reefs. The edge of tlie crater
of Rana Kao drops perpendicularly a height of nearly 1000 feet in less
than one-eighth of a mile horizontal distance ; and the eastern face of the
crater of Rana Roroka rises vertically about 800 feet above the plain of
Taugariki.

It is interesting to note how poor is the flora of the Manga Reva
archipelago as compared with that of the more western volcanic islands
like the Marquesas and the Society Islands and some of the western
elevated Paumotus. In the Gambier Archipelago the forests are reduced
to a few patches extending along the small valleys of the slopes of the
volcanic spurs. I am informed that even in the thirties of the last cen-
tury, when the missionaries first landed at Manga Reva, the forest trees
wliile more numerous yet never attained the luxuriance of growth that
they attain in the Society and Marquesas Islands. At the present day,
with the exception of the forest patches just mentioned and a few trees
which have been introduced for cultivation, the islands of the group are in
great part thickly covered with a species of cane closely resembling that
of our southern States. It grows to a height of nearly 10 feet. The
fauna of Manga Reva is also extremely poor. There are no mammals,
and, with the exception of a "sandpiper," no indigenous birds. Sea
birds are few in number, and in our trip in the eastern Pacific we rarely
had more than three or four birds accompanying us; often only one, and
frequently none were visible for days. There are a few lizards on the
islands, apparently the same species as those in the Society Islands.

We left Port Rikitea for Acapulco on the 4th of February to anchor
off" Aka Maru ; on the oth we left our anchorage, sounded off the east
face of ]\Ianga Reva, and took photographs.

On our way north from Manga Reva to Acapulco we did not begin to
trawl or tow until warned by the surface nets that the surface was becom-
ing richer in animal and vegetable life, and also by the surface tempera-
tures indicating that we had reached the southern edge of the cold
western equatorial current. A little north of 10'' south latitude we
made our first haul and deep tow, and found a very rich pelagic surface
fauna down to the 300-fathom line ; recalling the pelagic fauna of the
eastern lines and fully as rich. On trawling we found, as we expected,
a very rich bottom fauna.

Among the animals brought up in the trawl were some superb
Hyalonemas, siliceous Sponges, Benthodytes, and other deep-sea Holo-
thurians ; fine specimens of Freyella, and some large Ophiurans. This
haul is interesting as showing that in the tract of a great current, with

VOL. XI-VI. — NO. 4 6

82 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

abundance of food, we may find at a very considerable depth (2422
fathoms) an abundant fauna at very great distances from continental
lands. We were, at this station, about 2140 miles from Acapulco, 1200
miles from Manga Eeva, 1 700 miles from the Galapagos, and about 900
miles from the JSIarquesas.

Another haul made under the equator, near the northern edge of the
cold current, in 2320 fathoms, gave us the same results. Tlie pelagic
life was very abundant, the surface teemed with Radiolarians, Diatoms,
and Globigerinae, and swarmed with invertebrates. The trawl contained
a superb collection of Holothurians, Brisinga, Hyalonema, Neusina, and
on this occasion we brought up the only Stalked Crinoid collected during
this expedition, parts of the stem of two specimens of Ehizocrinus,
of which, unfortunately, the arms were wanting.

Our progress, which had been excellent during the first days of our
journey after leaving Manga Reva, has for the past six days been greatly
impeded by head winds in the region where we ought to have been in
the full swing of the southeasterly trades. This led us with great re-
luctance to abandon all idea of further work in the equatorial belt of
currents, to give up our proposed visit to Clipperton, and on account of
our limited coal supply to make for Acapulco, merely sounding every
morning. This was a great disappointment to me, as we had every rea-
son to expect to be able to spend some time in the belt of the equato-
rial currents, and settle more conclusively than we have been able to do,
the question of their influence upon the richness of the fauna living in
their track far from continental shores or insular areas.

The presence of Diatoms in all parts of the Humboldt current which
we crossed from south of Callao to the equator at the Galapagos, and
west towards Clipperton, shows how far the tract of a great oceanic cur-
rent can be traced, not only by its temperature, but also by the pelagic
life living upon its surface or near it. "When once in the warm westerly
equatorial current, the Diatoms disappear and the bottom samples show
only surface Eadiolarians and Globigerinae.

"We took a number of serial temperatures in the line Galapagos to Manga
Eeva, passing from the colder water of the Humboldt current to the
warmer waters south toward Manga Eeva. The temperatures at 200
fathoms became nearly identical. K^orth the great change in temper-
ature took place between 25 and 200 fathoms, where there was a difference
of 24°. South the warm water extended to 100 fathoms, a great change
occurring between 100 and 200 fathoms, a drop of 16°. The serial
temperatures taken at the southern and northern edges of the cold cur-

AGASSIZ : LETTEKS TO THE HON. GEORGE M. BOWERS. 83

rent on the liue Manga Reva to Acapulco agreed well with those taken in
the same current to the east.

The samples of the bottom obtained by the soundings taken by the
expedition or gathered in the mud-bag and in the trawl indicate that an
immense area of the bottom of the eastern Pacific is covered by man-
ganese nodules, and that they play an important part in the character
of the bottom, not only in the area covered by this expedition, but also
that the area of manganese nodules probably extends to the northwest
of our lines to join the stations where in 1899 manganese nodules were
found by the "Albatross " in the Moser Basin, on the line San Fran-
cisco to Marquesas. This area may also extend south of our line Callao to
Easter Island, and join the line west of Valparaiso where the " Chal-
lenger" obtained manganese nodules at many stations. I do not mean
to imply that the manganese nodules are present to the exclusion of
Radiolarians and of Globigerinae. It is probable that the layer of
nodules is partly covered by them, and by the thick sticky dark choco-
late-colored mud which is found wherever man^^anese nodules occur.

During this expedition we sounded every day while at sea, and de-
veloped very fairly tliat part of the eastern Pacific which lies to the
south and west of the line from Cape San Francisco to tlie Galapagos
and vest of a line Galapagos to Acapulco, limiting an area occupied by
the *' Albatross " in 1891. The area developed by us is included hy a
line 3200 miles in length from Acapulco to Manga Reva, and north of a
line from Manga Reva to Easter Island and from Easter Island to Callao.
We developed on our line Galapagos to Manga Reva the western exten-
sion of the Albatross plateau, and found it of a depth varying from
1900 to somewhat less than 2300 fathoms in a distance of nearly 3000
miles ; but about half-way from the Galapagos to Manga Reva we came
upon a ridge of about 200 miles in length witli a depth of 1700 to 1055
fathom.^, dropping rapidly to the south to over 1900 fathoms. I pro-
pose to call this elevation tlie " Garrett Ridge."

Our line from Manga Reva to Acapulco continued to show the west-
ern extension of the almost level bottom of the eastern Pacific. In a
distance of 3200 miles the depth varied only about 400 fathoms. This
great area of the eastern Pacific was practically a mare incognitum.
Three soundings in latitude 20° S. toward the Pauraotus and five sound-
ings in a northwesterly trend from Callao to Grey's Deep are all the
depths that were previously known in this great expanse of water.^ The

^ These soundings were made (one) by the Italian S. " Vittor Pisani "in 1882;
(three) by the '= Silverton " in \m?, ; (four) by tlie U. S. S. "Alaska," and two east
of the Pauraotus by the H. B. M. S. " Alert."

84 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

existence of the great plateau dividing Barker Basin along the South
American coast from Grej and Moser Basins to the west is most inter-
esting. It recalls the division of the southern Atlantic into an eastern
and western basin by a central connecting ridge (The Challenger Ridge).
The Albatross plateau joins the western extension of the Galapagos
plateau, as developed by the "Albatross" in 1891,

The existence of a sounding of 2554 fathoms near the equator in
longitude 110° W. would seem to indicate a small basin included in this
plateau, disconnected from Grey's Deep and Moser Basin by its extension
to the west. How far west towards these basins that extension reaches,
no soundings indicate as yet. It is interesting to note that along the
Mexican coast there are a number of deep basins lying disconnected close
to the shore, just as there are a number of disconnected deeps close to
the South American coast extending from off Callaoto off Caldera, Chili,
opposite high volcanoes or elevated chains of mountains. These basins
are deeper than the Albatross plateau to the south, and form a deep
channel separating in places the plateau from the steep continental
slope. The steepness of a great part of the Mexican continental shelf
is well seen, especially off Acapulco and Manzanilla. One of the small
basins along the Mexican coast with 2661 fathoms lies off Sebastian
A^iscaino Bay ; another with more than 2900 f^ithoms is to the west of
Manzanilla Bay ; a third to the southeast of Acapulco has about the
same depth,^ and a fourth with 2500 fathoms is off San Jose, Guatemala.
These basins off the west coast, close to the shore and at the foot of a
steep continental slope, are in great contrast to the wide continental
shelves which characterize the east coast of Central America and the
east coast of the United States.

The collections made during the present expedition will give ample
material for extensive monographs on the Holothurians, the siliceous
Sponges, the Cephalopods, the Jelly-tishes, the pelagic Crustacea, Worms
and Fishes of the eastern Pacific, as well as on the bottom deposits and
on the Radiolarians and Dinoflagellates, Diatoms, and other Protozoa
collected by the tow nets. Small collections of plants were made at
Easter Island and Manga Reva which may throw some light on the origin
and distribution of the flora of the eastern Pacific.

1 Tlie last sounding we made off Acapulco in 2474 fathoms 29 miles south of the
Light House showed the western extension of this deep hole. '

The following" Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on tlie Results of Dredging Operations In 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of Alex-
ander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blalce," as follows: —

E. EHLERS. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HARTl.AUB. The Coniatulae of the " Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentacrinus.

A. iMlLNE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the " Blake."

A. E. VERRILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientifio Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexandkr Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding,

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. h. IVlARIv. Studies on hepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILTj. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. MoM. WOODWOHTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L. Tanker, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna. H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes,

The PanamicDeep-Sea Fauna. J. p. McMURRICH. The Actlnarl»n».
K. BRANDT. The Sagittae. E. L. MARK. Branchiocerianthus.

" The Thalassicolas.

C. CHUN. The Siphonophores.

" The Eyes of DeejvSea Crustacea

W. H. DALL. The MoUusks.
H, J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians. M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpld» «nd

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimeni.
P. SCHIEaiENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

ropods.
THEO. STUDER. The AlcyonarlaDt.

Doliolidae.

S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.
.ROLI) HEATH. Solenogaster.
VON LKNDKNFKLD. The PI
rescent Organs of Fishes. it The Annelids.

HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster. H. B. WARD. The Sipnnculids.

R. VON liKNDKNFKLD. The Phospho- W. MoM. WOOD WORTH. The Nemerteaus.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLIL, and
also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVII ; of the Memoirs, Vols. I. to
XXIV, and also Vols. XXVIII., XXIX., and XXXI.

Vols. XLIIL, XLVL, and XLVIIL of the Bulletin, and Vols.
XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., XXXII., and XXXIII. of the
Memoirs, are how in course of publication.

Tlie Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work b}' the Professors and Assistants of the INIusenni, of
investjoations carried on by students and others in the different
Lal)oi'atories of Natural History, and of work b}' specialists based
upon the Museum Collections and P^xplorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on the HesiiUs of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in cliarge of
Alexander Agassiz, by tiie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on tlie Results of the Expedition of 1891 of tlie U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer " Albatross," Lieut. Conmiander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Com-
manding, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of tlie Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from October, 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions froni the Geological Laboratory, in charge of Professor N. S.
Shaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals; one volume of tiie Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the
Memoirs (4to) usually appear annually. Each number of the
Bulletin and of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list
of the publications of the Museum will be sent on application
to the Librarian of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 5.

THE VERTEBRATA OF GORGONA ISLAND, COLOMBIA.

INTRODUCTION. MAMMALIA.
By Outram Bangs.

PHYSICAL ASPECT AND CLIMATE; FAUNA.
By Wilmot W. Brown, Jr.

AVES.
By John E. Thayer and Ootram Banos.

REPTILIA; AMPHIBIA.
By Thomas Barbour.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

June, 1905.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 5.

THE VERTEBRATA OF GORGONA ISLAND, COLOMBIA.

introduction. MAMMALIA.
By OuTRAiM Bangs.

PHYSICAL ASPECT AND CLIMATE; FAUNA.
By Wilmot W. Brown, Jk.

AVES.
By John E. Thayer and Octram Bangs.

REPTILIA; AMPHIBIA.
By Thomas Barboor.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

June, 1905.

No. 5. — The Vertehrata of Gorgona Island^ Colombia}

CONTEXTS.

Page

I. Introduction. By Outram Bangs 87

II. Physical Aspect and Climate , Fauna. By Wilmot W. Brown, Jr. . . 88

III. Mammalia. By Outram Bangs 89

IV. .Aves. By John E. Thayer and Outram Bangs 91

V. Reptilia and Amphibia. By Thomas Barbour 98

I. Introduction. By Outram Bangs.

In February, 1904, John E. Thayer, Esq., equipped and put into the
field the well-known zoological collector, Mr. Wilmot W. Brown, Jr.
Some Uttle-kuown regions in Panama and northern South America were
selected for the season's work.

One of the places visited was Gorgona Island. The biota of this
island is practically unknown ; so far as I can find out the island has
never been visited by a naturalist, though Captain Kellett and Lieutenant
"Wood apparently stopped there many years ago on their way to the
Galapagos. The Catalogue of Birds in the British Museum (Vol. 11,
p. 215) mentions a tanager, Tacliyphonus delattrii Lafr., taken on Gor-
gona by these officers.

From its isolated position and its unlikeness to the adjacent main-
land it was anticipated that Gorgona would prove a most interesting
field. The results, however, are disappointing, for although many of
the reptiles, birds, and mammals are very pecuhar, the conditions that
prevail seem singularly unsuited to support a rich and varied vertebrate
fauna.

Mr. Brown remained upon the island about two weeks, June 19 to
July 2, 1904.

A word as to the disposition of the specimens. The mammals, rep-
tiles, amphibians, and fishes !Mr. Thayer presents to the Museum of
Comparative Zoology. Of the birds Mr: Thayer retains for his museum
at Lancaster, Mass., those that particularly interest him, chiefly North
American migrants; a small series of each species he has kindly given

1 Papers from the John E. Thayer Expedition of 1904, No. 1.

88 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

to me ; and of the remainder — the bulk of the material — a pair or two
of each species has been selected and will be presented to the United
States National Museum; the remainder is given to the Museum of
Comparative Zoology.

An annotated list of the fishes collected by Mr. Brown, and identified
by Mr. Samuel Garman will be given in the paper on the Panamic
vertebrates.

II. Physical Aspect and Climate; Fauna. By Wilmot W.

Brown, Jr.

Gorgona Island was probably discovered and named by Pizarro, as
history tells us that he and his hardy band of followers, after leaving
Gallo Island, retreated to Gorgona Island, where they fortified them-
selves and lived for five months, enduring great hardship. Finally the
ship sent from Panama to their aid reached Gorgona, and Pizarro and
his companions sailed for Tumbez Bay on the coast of Peru.

Gorgona Island, politically a part of the Eepublic of Colombia, is the
private property of Don Pyan Cuevas, of Buenaventura. It is uninhab-
ited ; fishermen occasionally visit it for a few days at a time. It is five
miles long by about half a mile wide, and lies N. N. E. by S. S. W.,
about twenty miles off Punta las Reys, the nearest point on the Colom-
bian coast. The rise and fall of the tide is ten feet, and the current of
the island sets off to the northeast. The water between the island and
the coast of Colombia is said to be deep.

Gorgona, apparently of volcanic formation, consists of three peaks ;
the highest, and central one, is some 800 feet in altitude. The three hills
make the island very conspicuous from the ocean, and form a pleasant
contrast to the low, swampy mainland opposite. In clear Aveather the
high peaks of the distant Andes can be seen. It is completely wooded
with a dense tropical forest without trails or open places, and is well
watered by numerous streams.

Rain falls continuously throughout the year, there being no dry season,
and heavy electric storms are of daily occurrence. The excessive mois-
ture entailed much personal inconvenience and hardship, and the collec-
tions made were preserved by artificial heat and constant vigilance. In
my attempts to preserve botanical specimens I wholly failed.

Collecting was done under great difficulties ; at low tide one could
walk along the beaches, but high Avater reaches to the very forest, and
every step inland had to be cut with machetes through the dense, satu-
rated jungle.

BANGS: VERTEBRATA OF GORGONA ISLAND. 89

The fauna of the island is extremely poor. There are very few birds,
either in nmubers or in species ; in a day's tramp perhaps from six to ten
birds may be seen. Mammals also are scarce, and with the exception of
the spiny rat, no small rodents were found. Laud crabs swarmed and
proved a great annoyance, eating up or injuring most of the spiny rats
caught ; they also carried off the bait about as soon as a trap was set.
Snakes of several species were not uncommon, and two small frogs were
abundant in the woods. The waters around the island swarmed with
fish, and whales wei'e very abundant, the vicinity of the island being a
favorite feeding-ground during the summer months.

At the southwestern extremity of the island there is a peninsula about
a mile long, called Gorgonilla ; at high water Gorgonilla is essentially an
island. Here boobies of two species and man-o'-war birds breed in great
numbers. At the time of my visit they were not nesting, though they
were present in considerable numbers, roosting or resting between the
times they were at sea fishing,

III. Mammalia. By Outram Bangs.

Apart from two bats, Mr. Brown found but three species of mam-
mals, — a monkey, a spiny rat, and an agouti. The first two are peculiar
and new ; the agouti, however, I am not able to distinguish from Da>?ij-
2)roota variegata, though the only specimen taken is too young to bo
identified with absolute certainty.

Mr. Brown feels confident that no small terrestrial mammals occur in
Gorgona, not only because he trapped assiduously without getting any,
but because the rain-soaked condition of the ground and underbrush
throughout the year seems to preclude any chance of their occurrence.

Dr. Glover M. Allen has very kindly helped me identify the hats.

All the measurements are in millimetres, and the colors are according
to Ridgway's nomenclature.

OCTODONTIDAB.

1. Proecliimys gorgonae, sp. nov.

Type. — Mus. Comp. Zocil. No. 10,828, old atl.J*, Gorgona Island, July 2, 1904.

Seven specimens, adults and young, June 25 to July 2, 1904.

Characters. — Apparently nearest P. centralis jmnamensis Thomas, but very
difierent in color, being very dark above and with the under parts not wholly
white. Skull very similar to that of P. centralis panaviensis, from which it can

90 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPAKATIVE ZOOLOGY. .

only be separated by the slightly larger, wider, and longer palatal foramina and
rather heavier molars. The nasals are pointed posteriorly as in that form, by
which character the skull can be distinguished from that of P. ceiitralis chi-
riquinus Thomas or P. biirrus Bangs. The rostrum is rather heavy, less de-
curved, and ratlier straighter than in imnamensis.

Color and Felagc. — Spines confined to anterior two- thirds of back, not very
numerous and rather softer than in allied forms ; colors very dark : upper parts
burnt umber, most of the hairs as well as the spines tipped with black ; head,
top of nose, and cheeks chiefly blackish, slightly varied with Vandyke brown ;
sides a little paler than back and with fewer black tips to the hairs ; under
parts white only along middle of belly, the under surface of legs, arms, neck,
anal region, and sides of belly being dull mars brown or russet ; upper surface
of feet and hands brownish black ; tail black above, dull gray below, well
clothed with short, stiff hairs ; ears black. Young similar to adults, but still
darker, having a pronounced black dorsal band.

Measurements —

No.

Sex. Total

1 length.

Tail vertebrae.

Hind foot.

Ear.

10,828

(J old ad.

427

150

60

23

10,829

^ old ad.

365

901

55

22

10,834

9 adult

405

140

53

23

10,830

^ young ad.

409

123

53

20

10,831

S yo«ng

340

120

50

20

10,832

i young

327

120

52

20

Skull. — Type, old adult ^: Basal length, 59 ; occipito-nasal length, G5 ;
zygomatic width, 30.4 ; mastoid width, 23.8 ; least interorbital v.ddtb, 13 ; length
of nasals, 25; width of nasals, 7-2 ; length of palate to palatal notch, 22.6 ;
length of palatal foramina, 5.8 ; upper tooth row, 10.2 ; length of single half
of mandible, 35.4 ; lower tooth row, 10.2.

Bemarks. — The spiny rat was not uncommon in Gorgona Island, and a much
larger number were trapped than could be preserved, as the crabs ate them up
as soon as caught.

The form is very well marked, so far as color goes, in its blackish ui>per parts
and the small amount of white on the belly, being very different from the other
forms of this group, all of which are reddish brown above and pure white below.
The skull, however, does not appear to differ markedly from that of P. centra-
lis panamensis, which is probably the nearest ally of the present island form.

DASYPROCTIDAE.
2. Dasyprocta variegata Tschcdi.

One young ^. This specimen is unfortunately too young to identify posi-
tively, but it seems to belong to this species.

1 Tip of tail gone.

THAYER AND BANGS: VERTEBRATA OF GORGONA ISLAND. 01

PHYLLOSTOMATIDAE.
3. Micronycteris megalotis Gray.
One adult ^. June 28.

4. Dermanura rava Miller.

One male, July 1st.

CEBIDAE.

5. Cebus curtus, sp. nov.

Type. — Mus. Comp. Zoul., No. 10,824, adult ^, Gorgona Island, July 2, 1904.

Two specimens, ^ ? July 2, 1904.

Characters. — A small, short-tailed island form, related to C. hypoleums
(Humbt.). Similar in color to G. hypokucus, — black all over except head,
under surface and sides of neck and shoulders, which are white in the male and
Isabella color in the female. Differs from C hypoleucus in being smaller; tail
very much shorter; hands, feet, and limbs shorter. Skull smaller and nar-
rower, especially so across the orbits and just behind them.

Measurements —

No. Sex. Total length. Tail vertebrae. Hind foot.

10.824 S ^icl- 753 420 115

10.825 9 young ad. 753 420 112

Skull. — Type, adult ^ : Basal length, 69 ; occipito-nasal length, 80.4 ; zygo-
matic width, 58.4; mastoid width, 48.2: width across orbits, 49.2 ; least width
behind orbits, 38.4 ; length of palate to palatal notch, 33.6 ; palatal notch to
foramen magnum, 28 ; upper tooth row, canine to last molar, 25 ; length of
mandible, 58; lower tooth row, canine to last molar, 28.

EcmarJcs. — The monkey of Gorgona Island is a well-marked species, differing
greatly from Cebus hijpoleucus in its very short tail, and much smaller hands and
feet. The limbs, also, judging from skins made in the same way, appear to be
very short, and the skull shows characters by which it can be separated from
that of C. hypoleucus.

It was not' uncommon in the forest, but was hard to reach owing to the
denseness of the jungle.

IV. AvEs. By Johx E. Thayer and Outram Bangs.

The paucity in the oruis of Gorgona Island is well shown by the fol-
lowing list of sixteen species. Mr. Brown took examples, during his stay
of two weeks, of but fourteen species, and of these several are represented
by only from one to three individuals each. The small amount of prepa-
ration gave Mr. Brown more time for field work, and he tells us he ofteu

92 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

stayed out all day shooting every bird he saw, and even at that never
got more than ten birds in a single day.

Two species only, the yellow honey creeper and the ant shrike, ■were
even fairly common ; all other land birds were in such small numbers
that of several of them he saw but one or two individuals during his
stay on the island.

Owing to the dense jungles that completely cover the island, it was very
hard to get about, and the birds were all in the high trees, so tlmt it is
very possible Mr. Brown did not procure all the species that occur there.

In spite of the late date, June and July, at which the island was
visited, the birds are in excellent plumage, showing no signs of wear or
fading. In a wet, heavily forested island such as Gorgona, the plumage
of the birds appears to keep in fine condition up to the very time they
moult, in marked contrast to what happens in dry, hot, barren regions.

The four species of land birds we describe as new are strongly charac-
tei'ized, and additional material might show that one or two of the others
also represent new island forms. The new booby is quite different from
either Sula leucogadra or Sula brewsteri, though somewhat intermediate
between them. We give it specific rank, because the only alternative
is to consitler S. leucogastra, S. brewsteri, S. nesiotes, and the new form
subspecies of one bird, wliich we are not quite prepared to do.

We are under great obligations to Dr. Robert Ridgway, Avho, though
extremely busy at the time, compared many of the specimens with the
material in the United States National Museum, and also to Mr. E. W.
Iselson for comparing the boobies with typical specimens in the United
States Biological Survey Collection.

All the measurements are in millimetres, and the colors are according to
Ridgway's nomenclature.

SULIDAE.

1. Sula nebouxi Milne Edwards.

One inmiatiire ^, June 26.

Earlier in the season this species breeds abimdantly on Gorgonilla, according
to information given Mr. Brown by the fishermen who visit the island.

2. Sula etesiaca, sp. nov.

Type. -ColL E. A. & 0. Bangs, No. 14,026, adult <?, Gorgona Island, June 29,
1904.

Five specimens, adults ^ 9, June 29 to July 2, 1904.
M. C. Z., No. 40,280, atUilt 9, Gorgona Island, July 1, 1904.
Characters. — Size about as in Sula brewsteri Goss. Intermediate in color
and color-pattern between S. brewsteri and »S'. leucogastra; in the adult ^ of

THAYEK AND BANGS: VERTEBRATA OF GORGONA ISLAND. 93

the new bird the forward part of the head only is gray, shading into the
dark sooty brown of the rest of upper parts at nape, on cheeks and on throat
just below the gular sack (in iS. breicsteri the adult ^ has the head entirely
■whitish and the neck ashy gray shading into color of back at shou'fders). The
female of the new form has the whole head and neck, dark sooty brown con-
color with the back, like Sula leucogastra (the female of <S. hrewsteri has the
head and neck distinctly lighter or grayer than the back). Young as well as
adult examples are darker brown than specimens of »S'. hrev:steri in corre-
sjjonding plumage.

Colors of Naked Parts in Life. — Adult ^ : Bill du.sky, slightly yellowish
toward base; gular region and skin around eye dusky, simietimes tinged with
greenish yellow; tarsus and foot pea-green. Adult 9 ' Bill, gular region, skiu
around eye, tarsus, and foot sulphur yellow.

Measurements —

No.

Sex.

Locality.

Wing.

TaU.

Tarsus.

Culmen.

14,026

^ ad.

Gorgoua Isl.

374

187

47

95

14,251

c? ad.

Saboga Isl.

380

186

45

95

14,252 ■

^ad.

San Miguel Isl.

379

168

45

94

14,027

9 ad.

Gorgona Isl.

398

198

47

97

14,028

9 ad.

do.

405

197

50

100

14,253

9 ad.

Saboga Isl.

400

192

48

100

Geographic Distribution. — Sula etesiaca is not confined to G-orgona Island, but
breeds also in great numbers on Saljoga Island, — the '• bird rock " of the Pearl
Islands in the Bay of Panama, — Mr. Brown securing a large series on the
present trip at the last-named place. Cocos Island, between Panama and the
Galapagos, is another breeding place, Mr. Xelson informing us that specimens
in the National Museum from this island are identical with ours from Gorgona
and the Pearl Islands.

Remarks. — Mr. E. W. Nelson has most kindly compared our Viirds with the
fine series of true S. brewsteri taken by himself and Goldman on the west coast
of Mexico and adjacent islands, and agrees with us that the present form is well
worthy of recognition. Whether it should be treated as a distinct species or
all the forms like Sula leucogastra arranged as subspecies of one bird, is a
matter best to be left for a detailed revision of the group.

Sula etesiaca breeds m large numbers on Gorgonilla ; at the time Mr. Brown
visited the place the breeding season was over, though the birds were still
abundant about the island.

FREGATIDAE.

3. Fregata aquila (Linne).

No specimens were secured. The breeding season was past and the birds
could not be obtained. It nests in numbers on Gorgonilla.

94 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

ARDEIDAE.
4. Butorides striata (Linne).

Three specimens, June 24 to July 2, all in the striped immature plumage.
They agree minutely with a skin from Surinam in corresponding plumage
with which we have compared them.

FALCONIDAE.
5. Urubitinga subtilis, sp. nov.
Type. - Coll. E. A. & O. Bangs, No. 14,001, adult ^, Gorgona Island, July 1, 1904.

Two specimens, adult J', July 1, 1904; juv. J', June 19, 1904.

Characters. — Somewhat similar to U. anthracina (Licht.), but smaller (wing
nearly two inches shorter) ; white central tail band and terminal margin nar-
rower; in color the new form differs from U. anthracina in having the ground
color of the broad mottled band extending across the secondaries, bright cinna-
mon rufous, this band in true U. anthracina having the ground color dull
grayish only tinged with rufous on the inner edges of some of the feathers;
the young skin has the wings much marked and spotted with cinnamon rufous
— much more so than in any of the many specimens of XJ. anthracina we have
examined.

surcmerus -

"—"

No.

Ser.

Wing.

Tail.

Tarsus.

Culmen.

14,001

S ad.

330

187

87.5

38.5

14,002

(? young

324

188

84

38

RALLIDAE.
6. lonornis martinica (LixNfe).

One adult ^, June 23.

This specimen show's no peculiarities. It agrees exactly with skins from
various localities in North and Middle America.

CUCULIDAE.
7. Coccyzus melanocoryphus Vieill.
One adult 9; June 23. This specimen is perfectly typical of the species.

TROCHILIDAE.

8. Amizilis tzaeatl (Llave).

Three specimens, all females, June 24 to July 2. These are not to be dis-
tinguished from continental specimens.

THAYER AND BANGS: VErvTEBRATA OF GOEGONA ISLAND. 95

FORMICARIIDAE.
9. Thamnophilus gorgonae, sp. nov.

Type. — Coll. E. A. & O. Bangs, No. 14,005, adult $, Gorgona Island, July 1,
1904.

Twenty-four specimens, adults ^ 9, June 23 to July 2, 1904.

M. C. Z., Nos. 40,281-40,290, adults ^ 9, June 23 to July 2, 1904.

Oiaraders. — Nearest to 2\ naevitis (Gnil.), but slightly larger, tail longer,
and bill relatively smaller. Adult ^ similar in color to that of T. nuevius, but
paler gray below, and more whitish in middle of belly — intermediate in color
between the males of T. naevius and T. ambiguus Swains. Adult 9 <iuite dif-
ferent in color from females of these two species, though somewhat interme-
diate between them. From the 9 of T. naevius it differs in being much paler
and much more reddish brown ; the general color much as in T. ambiguus, ex-
cept that in that species the pileum and tail are strongly rufescent.

Color. — Adult 9, upper parts reddish raw umber, slightly more rufescent on
crown ; wings blackish, the primaries edged with raw umber, secondaries with
buff and lesser coverts tipped with buff; outer scapulars edged externally with
whitish ; tail raw umber, all the feathers except central pair with a white ter-
minal spot, the central ones with a tiny buff spot in the middle of the tip, the
outer pair with another spot, buffy white, on the outer web midway of feather;
under parts pale raw sienna on throat and middle of belly ami under tail coverts
and shading to tawny-olive on sides ; a large semi-concealed white patch on back.

Measurements —

No.

Sex.

Wing.

Tail.

Tarsus.

Culmeu.

14,003

<? ad.

70.5

57

21.5

19

14,004

^ad.

75

58

22

19

40,281 M. C. Z.

c? ad.

73

57

21

17.5

40,282 M. C. Z.

$ ad.

71.5

54

22

20

C.

<? ad.

71

54

21

19.5

D.

S ad.

70.5

54.5

21

18.5

40,283 M. C. Z.

(? ad.

70.5

54

21.5

18

F.

<? ad.

72

66

21.5

19

G.

^ad.

70

66

22

19.5

40,284 M. C. Z.

^ ad.

72

55

22

20

14,005

9 ad.

72

53.5

22

18.5

14,006

9 ad.

68.5

51.5

22

19

I.

9 ad.

72

55

21.5

18.5

J.

9 ad.

69.5

63

22.5

20

K.

9 ad.

68

55

22

18.5

40,285 M. C. Z.

9 ad.

68

56.5

22

19

40,286 M. C. Z.

9 ad.

68.5

54

22

20

40,287 M. C. Z.

9 ad.

72

56

22

18.5

40,288 M. C.Z.

9 ad.

71

56.5

22.5

18

P.

9 ad.

68.5

56

22

20

96 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

TYRANNIDAE.

10. Tyrannus melancholicus satrapa (Licht.).

One adult $, July 1. Another, a nestling, was shot, but was so mangled
that it could not be saved. The adult agrees in all respects with continen-
tal skins, except that the under tail coverts .are much more clouded with
dusky than usual. In an enormous series of this form from Central and
northern South America, not one has the under tail coverts marked with
dusky to such an extent, though many show traces of such markings.

COEREBIDAE.

11. Cyanerpes gigas, sp. nov.

Type. —Coll. E. A. & 0. Bangs, No. 14,007 juv. $, Gorgona Island, June 26,
1904.

Three specimens, 2 juv. ^, 1 adult 9, June 26-28, 1904.

Characters. — A very distinct species, though nearly related to C. cyaneus
(Linne). Size very large ; tail very long; bill short and .?tout; the purplish
color of rump and outer scapulars in the ^ very much darker — more purple,
less blue — than in C. cyaneus. Female much darker and duller green.

Color. — Male, type (not quite fully adult, the breast and sides still retaining
some of the green feathers of the immature plumage, and the crown mainly
green, the turquoise-colored feathers of the adult plumage appearing irregularly
through it), similar in distribution of colors to the male of C. cyaneus; the
under parts slightly darker — cyanine blue; rump, upper tail coverts, and
outer scapulars much darker than in C. cyaneus and of a different shade, being
about the same shade as under parts, — cyanine blue.i Adult female, upper
parts dark, dull green (nearer to parrot green of Ridgway than any of his
colors, but duller and more dusky) ; under parts decidedly darker and duller
than in C. cyaneus and less tinged with yellowish on throat and middle of
bellv.

Measurements —

No.

Sex.

Wing.

TaU.

Tarsus.

Exposed culmen,

14,007
A.

14,008

9

68.5 2
66 2
67.5

42
43

42

16
16
16.5

16

16.5

16.5

Remarks. — This species is much more distinct from C. cyaneus than the
above description and measurements seem to imply. In general bulk it is a

^ In Birds of North and Middle America, Part II. p. r.86, Ridgway describes the
(J of Ci/anerpes cyaneus as though the rump and the under parts were tlie same
color, — smalt blue. In a very large series examined by us, the rump is invari-
ably paler and brighter blue than the under parts, about French blue.

- In these two skins the wing measurement is much too short, as the longer
primaries having recently moulted are not full grown.

THAYER AND BANGS: YERTEBRATA OF GORGOXA ISLAND. 97

much larger IniJ. Tlie much tlarker and duller Llue of the rump iu the male
is very striking, and the dull, dusky green of the upper jiarts iu the female is
"wholly different from the paler and more olive green of these parts in C.
cyanetcs.

Gyanerpes ajaneus has, according to Ridgway, never been recorded from anv
point in South America west of the Andes, so that the form inhabiting Gor-
gona Island appears to be widely separated geographically from that species.
It must, however, be borne in mind that very little is known about the ornis
of the western coast of Colombia opposite Gorgona Island.

12. Coereba gorgonae, sp. nov.

Type. — Coll. E. A. & U. Bangs, No. 14,009, adult ^, Gorgona Island, June
28, 1904.

Thirty specimens, adult ^9,1 juv. ^, June 23-July 2, 1904.

M. C. Z., Xos. 40,291-40.306, adults ^ 9, Gorgona Island, June 24 to
July 2,-1904.

Characters. — A very distinct species, nearest to C. cerinoclunis Bangs of the
Pearl Islands, Bay of Panama. Differing in the much smaller — reduced to a
mere dot — white wing spot, much deeper black back, darker gray throat,
darker and more greenish yellow belly, and in having a greenish band border-
ing the gray of throat below. Size about the same.

Color. — Adult (J, upper parts deep sooty black, a broad white superciliary
stripe extending from nostril to beyond auricular region; rump patch olive
yellow ; malar region, chin, and throat dark gray (almost slate-gray. No. 5, of
Rilgway), tlie malar region distinctly freckled with dusky; below the gray
of throat, an ill-defined baud of dull oil green, which separates the gray of the
throat from the yellow of the breast; rest of under parts gamboge yellow with
a greenish tinge, passing into yellowish olive on flanks; under tail coverts
buff"y white ; lateral rectrices broadly tipped with white on inner webs, nearly
as broad as in C. luteola ; white wing spot reduced to a mere trace on the three
or four primaries next the outermost. Female similar, perhaps averaging
slightly paler and duller. Young differs from the adult in Laving the throat
yellowish and the back duller and browner.

Measurements —

No, Sex.

14.009 ^ ad.

14.010 J ad.

14.011 ^ ad.

14.012 9 ad.

14.013 9 ad.
A. 9 ad.

Remarks. — This fine island species can be separated at once from all its
allies by the very small white wing spot, the greenish band below the gray
throat, and the dusky freckling of the malar region. In its dark gray throat

VOL. XLVl. — NO. 5 7

'.Ving.

Tail.

Tarsus.

Culmen,

57

3]

17

13

55.5

34

16

13

57.5

32.5

17

13.5

53

30.5

16.5

12.5

52

29

17

12

53

30

16

13

98 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

and jet black upper parts it resembles C. Udeola, but otherwise the likeness is
not very close, and the species is very strongly characterized.

TANAGRIDAE.
13. Calospiza lavinia (Cassin).

Three specimens, two males and a female, June 25-27.

These agree minutely with continental examples, in color and general pro-
portions, except that the bill is shorter and relatively broader. This charac-
ter, though strongly marked in these three specimens, might fail in- a larger
series, and we prefer, for the present at least, to allow the Gorgona bird to stand
as true C. lavmia.

14. Tachyphonus delattrii Lafe.

Not met with by Mr. Brown. The species is recorded from Gorgona Island
by Sclater in Catalogue of Birds in the British Museum, Vol. 11, p. 215, one
adult (J having been procured there by Captain Kellett and Lieutenant Wood.

FRINGILLIDAE.

15. Sporophila gutturalis (Licht.)?

One adult 9 , July 1.

This skin comes nearer to the 9 of S. gutturalis than to_ females of S.
luctuosa andiS. collaris (the females of these three species all look much alike),
but probaljly really represents a distinct form, as it is much smaller — shorter
wing and tail and smaller feet — and slightly darker in color. Without a male,
however, it is impossible to decide just what it really is. Its measurements
are as follows: No. 14,015 9) wing, 50.5 ; tail, 36.55 tarsus, 13.5; culmen, 7.

16. Sporophila telasco (Lessok)?

One young $, Jwly 1-

This specimen seems to be referable to S. telasco of Peru and Ecuador.
At all events, it needs comparison with no other species. We can find no skins
of T. telasco in quite corresponding plumage to compare it with, but on the
other hand can detect in our specimen no marked differences from the fully
adult skins with which it has been compared. Our specimen is immature, the
bright chestnut throat patch of the adult plumage Ijeing indicated by feathers
of this color appearing irregularly over the throat.

V. Eeptilia and Amphibia. By Thomas Barbour.

The Reptiles of Gorgona Island are derived from the adjacent main-
land. Many of the species, however, are very distinct from their nearest
congeners.

bakboue: vektebrata of gorgona island. 99

The two representatives of the Geckonidae are indistinguishahle from
widely spread mainlaud forms. One notes with surprise the fact that no
Sphaerodad ijki^ occurs in the collection. Of the lyuanidae tlie Anolis,
thouoh quite different from, is probably a modification of, A. andianus.
The series of Basiliscus americanus and the single young Ljuana
tuherculata are typical of their respective species. Dr. Stejneger has
very kindly examined the EnyaUoides a,nd the two amphibians. For this
kindness I wish to thank him. He considers E. lieterolepis as the
nearest relative of E. insulae. The specimens of Ameiva show a constant
difference from A. bridgesii, in the weak carination of the dorsal scales.
With only four specimens from Gorgona Island, and these all of the same
age, it hardly seems desirable to name the island specimens.

Of the snakes, the Green Tree Snake {Leptoi^s occidentalis) differs
sufficiently to warrant its being considered a new subspecies. The
Spilotes agrees well with Gunther's figure of S. cm/us in the Biologia
Ceutrali-Americaua. The LejJtodeira belongs to a wide-ranging species
of the Continent.

Owing to the luxuriant vegetation, Mr. Brown used his gun very
freely in collecting reptiles, and there are several specimens so imperfect
that they cannot be identified, but which lead one to believe that there
are other new forms, besides those described.

Reptilia.

GECKONIDAE.
1. Gonatodes fuscus (Hallowell).

Nine typical examples. •

2. Gonatodes caudiscutatus (Gunth.).
Four examples.

IGUANIDAE.

3. Anolis gorgonae, sp. nov.
Types. — Mus. Comp. Zool., No. 6,984, Gorgona Island.

Three specimens nearly related to A. andianus Blgr. From this species it
difftn-s in having five rows of loreal scales, no tricarinate supraoculars, and six
labials to below the centre of the eye. The hind luub is longer than in the
continental species.

Ear opening medium and round. Body hardly compressed. Ventrals small,
but considerably larger than the dorsals and strongly imbricate. The ap-
pressed hind limb reaches a point halfway between the orbit and the tip of

100 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

the snout. Digits considerably dilated, 16 lamellae under phalanges II and
III of the fourth toe. Tail somewhat compressed, covei-ed with rather large,
equal, strongly keeled scales.

Color. — Bright purple above, lower surfaces lighter and buffish. Gular ap-
pendage large, whitish, with lines and dots of lilac at the base. The under
surfaces of the thighs are buff with indistinct wavy bands of pale lilac.

Head 16 mm.

Width of head 9 "

Body 51 "

Fore limb 33 "

Hind limb 60 "

Tibia . 14 "

4. Basiliscus americanus Ladr.

Sixteen examples of this widely spread species, which do not appear to differ
from typical specimens from Panama.

5- Enyalioides insulae, sp. nov.
• Types. — Mus. Comp. Zool., No. 6,983, Gorgona Island.

Two specimens, closely allied to E. heterolepis Bocourt. The ventral scales,
however, are only very slightly keeled. The spinose lateral scales, considerably
enlarged, form three longitudinal series on each side of the back. On the flanks
are only a few scattered enlarged scales ; these do not fall into vertical series, as
is the case with E. heterolepis. The color of this island race is uniform rich
mahogany bi'own above ; ivory or creamy white below. There are forty-one
distinct spiny whorls evident upon the tail, which is brown above and below at
the tip.

Head 2.5 mm.

Width of head 20

Body 73

Fore limb . 47

Hind limb 102

Tibia 35

Tail 165

(C

li
(I
((
1(

6- Iguana tuberculata Laur.

A single young male.

TBIIDAE.

7- Ameiva bridgesii (Cope).

Four specimens agree perfectly with the descriptions of continental speci-
mens, except that in these island examples the keels on the dorsal scales are
obsolescent.

BAEBOUR: VEETEBIiATA OF GOUGONA ISLAND. 101

COLUBRID^.

8. Spilotes guentheri (Blgr.).

5. ar^us Bocourt. Giinth. Biol. C.-Amer. Kept. p. 118; pi. xliv (1894).

A single large specimen, with only a short stump of tail present, and with the
yellow spots on the scales very irregularly arranged.

9. Leptophis occidentalis insularis, subsp. nov.

Type. — Mas. Comp. Zoul., No. 6,985, adult, Gorgona Island, one specimen.

Scales -— ——•

171 + 16o

This island race is different from the continental form in that there are

several dark brown or black spots, or short wavy lines, on each side of the

carina of each scale. This carina is characteristically dark-colored. The scales

on the tail are dark-edged ; and this condition gives a reticulate condition.

10. Leptodeira albofusca (Lacf.p.).

23

A single example of this common species, with scales ^., is the only

one which Mr. Brown captured.

11. Lachesis lanceolatus (Lacep.).

Two young specimens, typically colored, have their scales arranged as fol-

27
lows : the smaller is 312 + 51 mm. in length, scales ; the larger is

ii)o "T bo

Of

369 + 1 mm. long, scales

195 + ?

Amphibia.

RANIDAE.

12. Prostheraspis femoralis, sp. nov.

Types. — Mus. Comp. Zoul., No. 2,422, Gorgona Island. Twenty-two speci-
mens, all apparently adult.

Apparently closely related to P. inguinalis Cope. It differs in coloring and
proportions. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches somewhat beyond the eye.
The color is gray above, sometimes with faint brown marblings. Below paler
gray, frequently with rich markings of deep chocolate brown, these particularly
abundant under the chin.

102 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

ENGYSTOMATIDAE.
13. Atelopus gracilis, sp. nov.

Types. — Mus. Comp. Zool., No. 2,423, Gorgona Island. Fourteen specimens,
adults and juv.

Rather similar to A. flavescens Dum. and Bibr., the dij];ital arrangements are
the same. This island race, however, differs in the following points. First,
the head is contained three tinges in the length of the trunk of an adult female,
and two and one half times in an adult male. Secondly, the tibio-tarsal ar-
ticulation reaches slightly beyond the anterior border of the eye. The color is
very deep brown, with red-brown longitudinal stripes. In many examples
there is a white lateral stripe running from the posterior border of the eye to
the groin.

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Report* on tlie Results of Dre<lging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 188<i, in charge of Alex-
ander Agassiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blalte," as follows: —

E. EHLERS. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HARTLAUB. The CoiuatulsB of the " Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUUWIG. Tlie Genus Peutacrinus.

A. MILXE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the " Blake. "

A. E. VERRILL. Tlie Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefierson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. MARK. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. McM. WOODWOKTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L. Tanker, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna. H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

The Pauamic Deep-Sea Fauna. J. p. McMURRICH. The Actinarians.

K. BRANDT. The Sagittae. E. L. xMARK. Branchiocerianthus.

The Thalassicolae. JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

C.CHUN. 'Hie Siphonophores^ P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-
The Kjes of Deep-Sea Crustacea. ,
T ,.„.- ,,„„..„,' ropods.

W. H DALL. The Mollusks.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds. ^ , „„ „.,.■,

W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians. M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salp.dse a.id

THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarians.

Doliolidae.

S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.

HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster. H. B. WARD. The Sipunculids.

R. VON LENDENFELD. The Phospho- W. McM. WOOD WORTH. The Nemerteans.
rescent Organs of Fishes. » The Annelids.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Tliere have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLII., and
also Vols.XLIV., XLV., and XLVIl ; of the Memoirs, Vols. I. to
XXIV., and also Vols. XXVIIL, XXIX., and XXXI.

Vols. XLIIL, XLVL, and XLVIII. of the Bulletin, and Vols.
XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., XXXII., and XXXIII. of the
Mkmoiks, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and Memoiks are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the INIuseuni, of
investigations carried on bv students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upon tlie Museum Collections and Explorations.

The following puI)lications are in preparation : —

Reports on tlie Kesults of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in cliarge of
Alexander Agassiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. 1). Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. 11. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer " Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Com-
manding, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of tlie Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from October, 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S.,N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratory, in charge of Professor N. S.
Shaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals ; one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the
Memoirs (4to) usually appear annually. Each number of the
Bulletin and of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list
of the publications of the Museum will be sent on application
to the Librarian of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XL VI. No. 6.

RKPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
EASTERN TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER ACJASSIZ.
BY THE U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER "ALBATROSS," FROM
OCTOBER, 1904, TO MARCH, 1905, LIEUT. COMMANDER L. M. GARRETT,
U. S. N., COMMANDING.

II.

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS OF ISOPODS,
TYPICAL OF A PECULIAR FAMILY.

Bt Harriet Richardson.

[Published by PermiBsion of Oboroe M. Bowers, U. S. Fish Commissioner.]

With One Plate.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

July, 1905.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the East-
ern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer " Albatross," from October,
1904, TO March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. M. Garrett,
U. S. N., Commanding, published or in preparation: —

a. agassiz. General Report on the Expedi-
tiuu.

A. agassiz. I.i Tliree Letters to Geo. M.

Bowers, U. S. Fish Com
A AGASSIZ and H. L. CLARK. The Echini.
H B. BIQELOW. The Medusae.
R. P. BIGELOW. The Stomatopods.
S. F. CLARKE. The Hydroids.
W. R. COE. The Nemerteans.
L. J. COLE. Tlie Pycuogonida.
W. H. DALL. The Mollusks.
C. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. The Fishes
W. G. FARLOW. The Algae.

S. GARMAN. The Reptiles.

S. HENSHAW. Tlie Insects.

W. E. HOYLE. The Cephiilopods.

C. A. KOFOID. The Protozoa.

H. LUDWIG. The Holothurians.

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

H. LUDWIG. The Ophiurans.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinaria.

G. W. MULLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

MARY J. RATHBUN. The Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON. IL^ The Isopods.

W. E. RITTER. The Tunicates.

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Bryozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON. The Plants.

G. O. SARS. The Copepods.

F. E. SCHDLZE. The Siliceous Sponges.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-

pods.
TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.
T. W VAUGHAN. The Corals.
W. MoM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

1 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVI., No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVI., No. C, July, 1905, 4 pp., 1 pL

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVl. No. 6.

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
EASTERN TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ,
BY THE U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER "ALBATROSS," FROM
OCTOBER, 1904, TO MARCH, 1905, LIEUT. COMMANDER L. M. GARRETT,
U. S. N., COMMANDING.

II.

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS OF ISOPODS,
TYPICAL OF A PECULIAR FAMILY.

By Harriet Richardson.

[Publiehed by PermiBBion of George M. Bowers, U. S. Fish Comnrissloner.]

With Oxe Plate.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

July, 1905.

No. 6. — Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to
the Eastern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander A<jassiz,
hy the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer " Albatross " from
October, 1004, fo March, 1905, LiEUT. Commandeh L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

II.

Descriptio7i of a new genus of Isopods, typical of a peculiar family.

By Harriet Richardson.

In the recent voyage, 1904-05, of the Steamer ''Albatross" to the
Eastern Pacific a very peculiar Isopod was collected, which does not seem
to belong to any of the known families of the order. Although it was
found free and luiattached, it is ])robably a parasite, owing to the fact
that it presents marked degeneration in having lost all the abdominal
appendages. It is also without eyes and has prehensile legs. I have
made it the type of a new family, Colypuridae.

A few years ago,^ Giard and Bonnier described a peculiar Isopod,
Rhabdorhirus incertus, which also lacks abdominal appendages. The
abdomen, however, is not inserted under and covered by the last thoracic
segment, as is characteristic of the present type. JR.habdocMi-us mcertus
also differs in having all seven segments of the thorax free, Avell devel-
oped antennae, and a differentiation in the thoracic legs, which are not
prehensile, the three anterior pairs and the seventh pair being very much
shorter, about half as long as the fourth, fifth, and sixth pairs. Giard
and Bonnier were unable to place it in any of the known families of the
order. I propose for this form the family Khabdociiiridae.

COLYPURIDAE.

Colypurus, gen. nov.

Head coalesced with the first thoracic segment. The following six
thoracic segments free, the first four free segments increasing gradually
in width backward. Seventh thoracic segment, or sixth free segment,
longer than the others and rounded posteriorly.

1 Bull. Soc. Ent. France, 1898, No. 9, pp. 198-200.

106 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

Abdomen unsegmented, conically tapered, reduced in size, devoid of
appendages, and placed under the last thoracic segment, so that, in a
dorsal view, only the extremity appears below the seventh thoracic
segment.

All seven pairs of legs present, and prehensile in character.

Antennae rudimentary, composed of only a few articles and almost
inconspicuous, being placed on the ventral side of the head and invisible
in a dorsal view.

Colypurus agassizi, sp. nov.

Body gradaally increasing in width backward from the first to the
fourth free thoracic segment. The head is 2mm. wide, the first free
thoracic segment is 3 mm. in width, and the fourth free segment meas-
ures 4 mm. The length of the body is 5 mm.

The head is produced in the middle anteriorly in a rounded lobe.
The sides of the head are also expanded in rounded lobes. P^our knob-
like bodies are situated in a transverse series on the dorsal surface of the
head, the two central ones being largest ; the lateral knobs are placed
one on each lateral lobe. The antennae are rudimentary, inconspicuous,
composed of only a few articles, and not visible in a dorsal view. The
tips of the mandibles project from the apex of the oral cone.

The first segment of the thorax is coalesced with the head and bears
the first pair of legs. The following five segments are more or less sub-
equal in length, but increase gradually in width to the fourth free
segment. The last thoracic segment is longer than any of the preceding
segments and is posteriorly rounded. Each thoracic segment bears a
pair of prehensile legs, there being seven pairs altogether.^

The abdomen is inserted beneath the last thoracic segment, is conically
tapered, unsegmented, and devoid of appendages.

Only one specimen was collected in the Eastern Pacific by the
Steamer "Albatross" in 1904-05 at station 4621. Lat. north 6° 36';
Long, west 81° 44', off Mariato Point.

The type is in the Museum of Comparative Zoology.

1 In the specimen the third leg on the right side is broken off about the middle.

RiCHABDsoN. — Colypurus.

COLYPURUS AGASSIZI.

1. — Dorsal view x 19^.
2. — Ventral view x \9\.

Eastern Pacific Ex. " Albatross."

COLYPURUS AGASSIZI.

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Keports on tlie Itesults of Dredging Operations in 187T, 1878, 1879, and 188(i, in charge of Alkx-
ANDKR Agassiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

E. EHIiEKS. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HAllTLAUB. The Coiuatulae of the " Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUDWIG The Genus Pentacrinus.

A. MILNE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VEKltllJj. The Alcyouaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexandkk Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to ilarch, 1900, Commander Jeft'erson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. MARK. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. McM. WOODWOKTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Comndssion Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L Tanner, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexanuek Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna. H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

The Panamic Deep-Sea Fauna. J. p. McMURRICH. The Actinarians.

K. BRANDT. The Sagittse. g j^ MARK. Branchiocerianthus.

The Thalassicolae. JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Spetimens.

C.CHUN. llieSiphonophores^ P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropo<lB and Hete-
" The Eyes of Deep-Sea Crustacea.

W. H. DALL. The MoUusks.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds. , ,

W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians. M- ^ A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpulse and

ropods.
THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarians.

Doliolidae.

S. .1. HICKSON. The Antipathids.

HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster. H. B. WARD. The SipuncuHds.

R. VON LKNDKNFKLD. ThePhospho- W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Nemerteans.
rescent Organs of Fishes. n The Annelids.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Tliere have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLII., and
also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVll ; of the Memoirs, Vols. I. to
XXIV., and also Vols. XXVIIL, XXIX., and XXXI.

Vols. XLIIL, XLVL, and XLVIII. of the Bulletin, and Vols.
XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., XXXII., and XXXIII. of the
Memoius, are now in course of publication.

The Bui>letin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the Museum, of
investigations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upon tlie Museum Collections and ^Explorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in cliarge of
Alexander Agassiz, hy the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. 1). Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer " All)atross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Com-
manding, in ciiarge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from October, 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from tlie Geological Laboratory, in charge of Professor N. S.
Sbaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals ; one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the
Memoirs (4to) usually appear annually. Each number of the
Bulletin and of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list
of the publications of the Museum will be sent on application
to the Librarian of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 7.

NOTES OX BERMUDIAN FISHEb.

By Thomas Barbour.

With Four Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTFD FOR THE MUSEUM.

September, 1005.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the East-
ern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from October,
1904, TO March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. M. Garrett^
U. S. N., Commanding, published or in preparation:

A. agassiz. Geneical Rlport on the Expedi-
tion.

A. agassiz. I f.1 Tl^reel |t,etters to Geo. M,
Bowers, U. S; Pish Com.

A. agassiz and H. h. CLARK. Th« Echini.
F. K. BEDDARD. The Earthworms.

H. B. BIGELOW. The Medusae.

R. P. BIGELOW. The Stomatopods.

S. F. CLARKE. The Hydroids.

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans.

L. J. COLE. The Pycnogonida.

W. H. BALL. Tlie MolUisks.

C. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. Tlie Fishes.
W. G. FARLOW. The Algae.

S. GARMAN. The Reptiles.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.

H.J. HANSEN. The Schizopods.

S. HENSHAW. The Insects.

W. E. HOYLE. The Cephalopods.

C. A. KOFOID. The Protozoa.

P. KRUMBACH. The Sagittae.

H. LUDWIG. The Holothurians.

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

H. LUDWIG. The Ophiurans.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinaria.

G. W. MULLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

MARY J. RATHBUN. The Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON, n.2 The Isopods.

W. E. RITTER. The Tunicates.

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Bryozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON. The Plants.

G. O. SARS. The Copepods.

F. E. SCHDLZE. The Siliceous Sponges.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-
pods.

TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.

T. W. VAUGHAN. The Corals.

W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

1 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 6, July, 1905, 4 pp., 1 pi.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 7.

NOTES OX BERMUDIAN" FISHES.

By Thomas Barbour.

With Four Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

September, 1905.

No. 7. — Notes on Bermudian FishesA By Thomas Barbour.

The material which forms the basis for this paper belongs to the
Museum of Comparative Zoology and is from several sources : first, a
collection made by my brother, Mr. W. W. Barbour, and myself during
parts of March and April, 1903; secondly, a large and rather complete
cullection made during part of June, July, and part of August, 1903,
while I was attached to the Biological Station at Flatts, Bermuda ;
thirdly, a number of specimens in the collections of the Museum of
Comparative Zoology, and finally, a series obtained by Professor Mark
and collected at the Station during the summer of 1904. I here express
my gratitude to Dr. Mark for his kindness in procuring a number of
most interesting specimens, and thank Messrs. H. B. Bigelow, Owen
Bryant, and J. T. Nichols, for their kind aid in collecting and preserv-
ing the largest collection. Finally, it is a pleasure to thank Mr. Samuel
Carman of the Museum for the assistance he has giving; me in makins:
the identifications.

Before turning to a systematic consideration of the material in hand,
a few words are necessary in explanation of the peculiar faunal conditions
which obtain about the Bermuda Islands. In 1872 Dr. G. Brown Goode
visited the Bermudas for several weeks (February to March), and made
the first collections of any considerable size or value from this localitjf.
lie pointed out in his paper on the fishes (Goode '76") the splendid op-
portunity here presented to the ichthyologist for the study of the effects
which the ocean currents have had in providing Bermuda with a fish
fauna. He called attention to the fact that almost all the more charac-
teristic fishes of the West Indian regions, and also many fishes which
are found in the Azores, Canaries, Madeira, Cape de Verde Islands, and
even on the coasts of Southern Europe and Africa are represented in
Bermudian waters. One of the most interesting examples of distribution
probably due to ocean currents is the occurrence of Syrmhis saurus, a
fish which, on account of its sluggish, bottom-loving disposition, one
would consider unlikely to range far from home. The majority of the

1 Contributions from the Bermuda Biological Station for Research. No. 6.

VOL. XLVI. — 7

110 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology,

species derived from distant regions, are, as Goode has pointed out,
powerful and rapid swimmers. Few of the species which have been
described as peculiar to Bermuda have remained so long. Both Stole-
phorus cfioerostomus and Siphodoma jonesi were once believed to be
peculiar to Bermuda, but only a year or so ago the U. 8. Fish Commis-
sion expedition to Porto Eico found both these species there. The
Bermuda representatives were in all probability derived from the West
Indian region, Ulaema lefroyi also is now known from many of the
West Indies, and the Florida Keys.

The classic on the general Natural History of the Bermudas is Jones,
Wedderburn, and Hurdis ('59) ; while more recently Verrill (: 02) has
published a most valuable and interesting volume dealing with the
history, scenery, etc., of the island and on the faunistic changes due to
man. In (: 01) Verrill also published a paper dealing with the fauna ;
this contains a short article on the fishes. The birds and several
groups of invertebrates have been treated in a volume by Jones and
Goode ('84). An interesting popular account of the fish markets of
Bermuda was published by Goode ('76*') in "Forest and Stream,"
Gllnther ('79) has listed the species of fishes taken by the naturalists
of H. M. S. Challenger near the islands.

In the present paper the notes on distribution are obtained partly from
" The Fishes of North and Middle America," by Jordan and Everman,
which I have found very valuable in this connection, and partly from
specimens in the vast collections of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology.

LEPTOCARDII.

BRANCHIOSTOMATIDAB.
Branchiostoma caribbaeum Sondeval. The West Indian Lancelet.

Verrill, : 01, p. 55.

Goode, '77, p. 293 [B. hihricum).

Distribution, — Atlantic coast of North America to Rio Plata.
Found in all localities where the bottom is suitable. Very common on the
sandy spit in Flatts Inlet, directly opposite the Hotel Fraecati.

Asymmetron lucayanum Andrews. Andrews's Lancelet.

Mark, : 04, p. 179.

Distribution. — Bahamas and Bermudas.

Taken in dredgings at a number of localities in different parts of the
Bermudas.

BARBOUR: NOTES OX BERMUDIAX FISHES. Ill

PLAGIOSTO.Air.

GALEIDAE.

Carcharhinus platyodon (Poet). Puppy Shark.
Verrill, :01, p. 55.
Distribution. — Coasts of Texas and Cuba.

Very common off the Challenger Banks and outside the reefs. Considered
a fine food fish by the colored people. The only specimen preserved was iden-
tified by Mr. Garman as belonging to this species.

TELEOSTEI.

ANGUILLIDAE.

Anguilla chrisypa Haf. Eel.
A. bostoniensis (Le Sueur) Ayres. Goode, '76^, p. 71.

Distribidio7i. — Atlantic coast (ascending rivers); West Indies.

Said to be common in ditches in Devonshire Marshes. The specimens, seven
in number, were all obtained in mud-holes near the mangrove swamp at
Hungry Bay. I found four there in April, 1903, and three in July, 1903.
The largest specimen was about 4 inches in length. The only water connection
of this swamp was directly with the ocean, and as no eels have ever been taken
off the shores of Bermuda, it puzzles me to know how such young eels got
into the mangrove swamp. The Devonshire Marshes, so far as I could learn,
have no connection with the ocean ; the water there is only slightly brackish.

MURAENIDAE.
Lycodontis moringa (Guv.) Spotted Jloray.

Gymnothorax moringa (Guv.) Goode. Goode, 'IS^, p. 72.

Distribution. — West Indies; North coast of South America; St. Helena.

This species with the larger L. funebris (Ranzani) was quite common about
all the reefs, particularly off the south shore, where many are taken by fishing
from the rocks. The specimen before me was taken during the " Challenger
Bank Expedition" — a three-days trip provided by Captain Meyer, of St.
George's, for the members of the Biological Station about the first of August,
1903. The flesh is eaten by the negroes, who say that it is sugary-sweet, and
very tender; I heard nothing of its being considered poisonous.

L. sanctae-helenae (Gujjther).

Distribution. — Tropical Atlantic; St. Helena.

A single example taken in 1904 ; compared with the preceding this species
is rather rare.

112 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

OPHICHTHYIDAE.
Sphagebranchus anguiformis (Peters).

Distribution. — West Indian region.

A single example of this rare species was dredged in shallow water by Professor
Mark on Aug. (1, 1904, at Station No. 468. It is without spots and is 5| inches
long. The head is contained 18 times in the length of the body, A second
specimen of this species, which I may mention in this connection, was dredged
by Messrs. G. M. Allen, Owen Bryant and myself while on our Northern
Bahama Expedition in Julj^, 1904. It is far larger, being of the same propor-
tions and 12^ inches long. It was dredged in 14 fms. in Whale Cay Channel
off the Island of Abaco, Bahamas.

ALBULIDAE.

Albula vulpes (Linne). Bone fish.

Distribution . — Tropical seas, almost universally distributed.
D. 15; A. 8.

The species is rare at Bermuda; I have examined only a single specimen
taken there. (M. C. Z. No. 18,088.)

CLUPEIDAE.
Sardinella anchovia Cuv. & Val. Anchovy.
Goode, '76% p. 69.

Distribution. — West Indies, N. Coast of South America.

D. 16; A. 16.

Large schools of this clupeoid Avere seined regularly in Hamilton Harbor and
riatts Inlet for bait. They appeared to run up into shoal water at about sun-
rise or sundown.

S. macrophthalma (Ranzani). Pilchard.
Harencjula macrophthalma (Ranzani). Goode, '1&^, p. 69.

Distribution. — West Indies, coast of Brazil.

D. 17; A. 18. Sc. 40; 12.

We took only two specimens of this species. Mr. H. B. Bigelow and mj^self
each took one about 11 o'clock one very warm evening in August in Flatts
Inlet on a hook baited with strips of Bathystoma. A dark lantern turned to-
ward the water showed a considerable number of what appeared to be the same
species swimming about ; no Tuore were seen afterward. They are said to be
rather common in winter.

Opisthonema oglinum (Le Sueur). Herring.
0. thrissa (L.) Goode, '76% p. 69.
Distribution, — West Indies, common on coasts of Florida, Georgia, and the
Carolinas, occasionally much farther northward.

BARBOUR: NOTES ON BERMUDIAX FISHES. 113

D. 19 ; A. 24.

I have about 100 specimens of this common tropical herring, varying in size
from one to five inches. They appeared erratically in great schools.

ENGRAULIDAE.

Stolephorus choerostomus (Goode). Hog-mouth Fry.

Engrauliii choerostomus Goode. Goode, '74, p. 380; and '76\ p. 70.
Jordan & Everraann, '96-O0, vol. 1 (1896), p. Ui.

Distribution. — Bermuda and Porto Rico.
D. 13 or 14; A. 23.

This species veas not at all common during July, but in August immense
quantities were seined for bait in Bailey's Bay and Flatts Inlet.

SYNODONTIDAE.
Synodus saurus (Linne). Snake fish.

S. lacerta (Valenciennes) Goode. Goode, '76^, p. 68.
Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 1 (1896), p. 537.

Distribution. — Atlantic coast of Southern Europe ; Bermuda.

D. 12; A. 12.

One of the two specimens taken jumped into a rowboat at Flatts Inlet ; they
frequently rise three feet from the water in the upward dash after their prey.
The second specimen was taken from the fish pot of a Portuguese at Cooper's
Island by Messrs. Nichols and Bryant.

We had many opportunities to watch their habits as they lay on the white
shell and coral sand in the Flatts Inlet. They changed color remarkably and
mimicked their surroundings very closely indeed. They would wait until
their food, usually a small fish, was directly over them, and then rise with
great speed, and seize it from below.

ESOCIDAE.
Tylosurus raphidoma (Ranzaxi).

Distribution. — West Indies; coasts of Florida and Brazil.

D. 2.3; A. 22.

This species has not, I believe, been found at Bermuda before. One small
specimen {A\" Ig.) was taken with a fine seine hi Flatts Inlet. It showed
none of the silvery coloring of the adults, but was covered with stellate
cliromatophores.

T. acus (Lackpede). Hound.

Distribution. — West Indies, occasionally northward and in the Mediterra-
nean Sea.

D. 23; A. 21.

114 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.-

This species was present in great numbers in most of the inlets and bays
about the islands. We obtained a number of specimens on hooks baited -with
Sardinella or Stolephorus. These fishes play havoc with the useful bait fishes,
killing numbers which they do not eat. They all contained parasitic worms
in the trunk musculature.

HEMIRAMPHIDAE.
Hyporhamphus unifasciatus (Ranzani). Needle fish, Gar fish.

Distribution. — Southern Florida, Panama, and Brazil.

D. 12 ; A. 15.

Specimens were taken with seine at low tide in the Flatts Inlet. They were
quite common, but did not appear as regularly or in as large numbers as did
Tylosurus acus.

Hemiramphus brasiliensis (Linne).

H. pleii (Cuv. & Val.) Goode. Goode, '76^ p. 64.

Distribution. — The West Indian region.
D. 14; A. 12.

One badly damaged specimen, apparentlj' of this species, is in the collection
of the M. C. Z. No. 8,774, taken by Captain Hamilton at Bermuda about 1870.

EXOCOETIDAE.

Exonautes esiliens (Muller). Flying fish.
Exocoetus exiliens Gnielin. Goode, '76^, p. 64.

Distribution. — Pelagic.

D. 12-13 ; A. 12 ; P. 18; V. 6; C. 21.

One young specimen of what appears to be this species was taken from Sar-
gassum off the Challenger Banks and thirteen young examples were taken in
the tow net, July 7, at 9 p. m., wind east, in Flatts Inlet. No adult flying-
fishes were seen close to shore at any time, and only very few inside the outer
reefs. Hundreds of flying fishes, however, were seen from the steamer from
forty to sixty miles off shore.

FISTULARIIDAE.

Fistularia tabacaria Linne.

Goode, '76^ p. 27.
Fistularta serrata Goode, '76^ p. 75.

Distribution. — West Indies, straying northward.

D. 14; A. 13.

One specimen of this curious species was taken by Mr. L. Mowbray off
St. George's and was kindly obtained from him by Prof. E. L. Mark for
examination.

BARBOUR: NOTES OX BERMUDIAN FISHES. 115

SYNGNATHIDAB.

Siphostoma jonesi (Gunther).

Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 1 (1896), p. 768.
Si/ngnathus jonesi Gunther, '74, p. 455. Goode, '76», p. 27.

Distribution. — Bermuda and Porto Rico.

Mr. 0. Bryant obtained a single specimen of this species under a rock at
Hungry Bay ; and a second specimen has recently been banded me by Pro-
fessor Mark ; it was taken during July, 1904.

S. pelagicum (Osbeck).

Syngjiathus pelagicus Osbeck. Goode, 76^, p. 27.

Distribution. — Tropical Atlantic and Mediterranean.

About a dozen specimens were obtained in Sargassum and by the dredge in
from 6-12 fm. Several very large specimens were taken during July, 1904.

S- mackayi Swain & Meek.

Distribution. — S. Florida to Yucatan.

One small specimen was taken^from the dredge in Castle Harbor. This is
the first time the species has been reported from Bermuda.

S. dendriticum, sp. nov.

(Plate 1.)

Type, (M. C. Z. No. 29,057) a single specimen dredged in about 7 fms. oflF Ireland
Island, Bermudas, July, 1904.

Rings 14 + 39. Dorsal 16, just over vent on rings 1—4.

Snout about twice in distance to base of pectoral. Tail longer tlian body.
Anal fin vestigial ; composed of two rays on ring 2. Color brown with
irregular blotches and darker marblings. A number of peculiar filamentous
appendages ; many of these have probably been torn off, as this specimen was
taken in the dredge with a considerable mass of broken Oculina, etc. The
largest pair of these appendages is situated just above and behind the orbits.
The next largest pair is on the nape, just anterior to the branchial aperture.
Pairs of filaments are situated irregularly along the dorsal and ventral surfaces.
On the segments of the trunk rings are peculiar radiating striae; and a raised
boss marks the centre of each segment. On the tail rings the bosses are very
conspicuous and the ornamental striae less so.

HIPPOCAMPIDAB.

Hippocampus sp. Sea Horse.

One exceedingly small specimen taken in the tow-net off Flatts Inlet one
night during July. I have been unable to determine the species. Sea-horses
are well known to the natives, and are said to be common at certains seasons.

116 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIYE ZOOLOGY.

ATHERINIDAE.
Menidia notata (Mitchill).

Distribution. — Coast of United States southward to the Carolinas.

D. 6+9 ; A. 1, 23.

There is one specimen of this species in the collection of the M. C. Z.
(No. 18,246) ; so far as I can ascertain no other specimen has ever been
taken.

M. menidia (Linne). Blue Fry.

Distribution. — Atlantic coast of United States, the Carolinas southward.
D. 4+9; A. 1+22.

This species was exceedingly common in Flatts Inlet. Thousands were
seined daily by the natives for bait.

MUGILIDAE.

Mugil brasiliensis Agassiz. Mullet.

M. Uza Cuv. & Val. Goode, '76% p. 63.

Distribution. — West Indies ; Atlantic coast of South America.
D. 5 + 8; A. 3 + 8.

Specimens were frequently taken from the seine in Flatts Inlet; the species
is generally common.

M. curema Cuv. & Val.

Distribution. — Both coa^s of the Americas.

D. 5 + 5; A. 3 + 9.

I obtained a large number of specimens of this species in March and April,
19(»3, at Hungry Bay. During the summer, however, only one specimen was
taken ; this was from Sargassum floating oflf Ireland Island. The species has
not been taken before at Bermuda.

SPHYRAENIDAE.

Sphyraena sphyraena (Lin-ne.)

S. spet (Haiiy) Goode, '76% p. 61.
Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 1 (1896), p. 826.

Distribution. — Southern coast of Europe to Bermuda.

D. 6 + 9 ; A. 1 + 9.

This European species is not uncommon about Bermuda. I have a single
specimen about 10 inches long taken in the seine near Gibbet Island and
another, considerably smaller, taken by the members of the Biological Station
during the summer of 1904.

barbouk: notes on bermudian fishes. 117

HOLOCENTRIDAE.

Holocentrus ascensionis (Osueck). Squirrel.

Holocentrum sogo Bloch. Goode, '76'^, p. 49.

Distribution. — Floridu and Cuba to St. Helena.

D. 11 + 15 ; A. 6 + 10.

This species is very common in sheltered nooks about the rocky shores and
reefs. It is nocturnal and great numbers were sometimes taken in a few hours
at night in the fish pots.

H. puncticulatus, sp. nov.

(Plate 3.)

D. 11 + 13 ; A. 4 + 8 ; 11. 4.5; Itr. 3 + 8.

Near H. siccifer Cope, but differing in the number of rays in the anal fin, in
the shape of the dorsal fins, and in color.

Head with spines 2^, depth 2|. Spinous dorsal rather long and elevated
anteriorly ; soft dorsal not as high as spinous portion. Second anal spine and
first anal soft ray about the same length and almost reaching the base of the
caudal. There is one strong spine on the preopercular bone and one on the
opercular. The posterior and ventral edges of both these bones are strongly
serrate. The interorbital keels are rather weak, and each divides posteriorly
into nine, spreading out in a fan-like manner.

The color in life is bright rosy red with nine lateral series of very fine black
and dark brown dots ; growing fainter and fewer ventrally. A large black
spot appears on the membrane of the first three dorsal spines, and also on the
spines themselves. The rest of the fins are rosy white, except for a few
extremely faint dusky patches on the posterior part of the first dorsal.

This species is represented by the single type specimen (M. C. Z. No.
29,054), Flatts Inlet, Bermuda Is. Taken in a fish trap in about 10 ft. of water.
The species is rather common, and other specimens were seen.

MULLIDAB.
Upeneus maculatus (Bloch). Goat fish.
Hypeneus maculatus (Bloch) Cuv. GooJe, '76a, p. 49.

Distribution, — West Indian region.

D. 8 + 8 ; A. 2 + 6.

Probably common in rather deep water outside the reef. One specimen was
taken in a fish pot off' Hungry Bay by a fisherman, who said that the species
was not uncommon, and another from the stomach of a large grouper {Ejd-
nephelus striaius).

118 BULLfJTIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

CARANGIDAE.

Decapterus punctatus (Agassiz). Robin.
Goode, '76 , p. 46.

Distribution. — Mass. to Brazil.

D. 3 + 30 (31) ; D. 3 + 25. Sc. 40 about.

I have four specimens, two taken by Dr. A. S. Bickmore (M. C. Z. No.
17,054), and two taken in Harrington Sound in July, 1903. This species is
common at times, but it is at other times quite impossible to find a single
specimen. They take bait best at night in moderately deep water.

Seriola zonata (Mitchill). Crevalle.

Goode, '76% p. 75.

Distribution. — Massachusetts to the Carolinas.
D. 8 + 38; A. 3 + 21.

One specimen taken on the Challenger Banks. T saw quite a number of
these brought in by the Hamilton fishermen. They were usually taken far off

shore.

Trachurops crumenophthalmus (Bloch). Goggle-eye.

Goode, '76' p. 47.

Distribution. — Coast of Atlantic Ocean (except Europe). Pacific off Central
America and Mexico.

D. 8 + 26; A. 3 + 22. Sc. 36.

One specimen about two inches long was taken from Sargassum off the
Challenger Banks and turned over to me by Professor Mark. The species was
very rare at Bermuda all summer. A slightly smaller specimen was taken
during Julj% 1904.

Caranx ruber (Bloch).

Distribution. — West Indies.

D. 8 + 27 ; A. 2 + 23. Sc. 30.

One specimen taken in the tide rush at mouth of Harrington Sound on hook
baited with Stolephorus. A second specimen (M. C. Z. 17,360) was taken at
Bermuda in 1864 by Capt. Hamilton. This specimen has 31 scutes on the
caudal pedicel.

C hippos (Linne).

Distribution. — Tropical seas.

D. 8 + 21; A. 2+ 17. Sc. .30.

One specimen taken on hook and line in Flatts Inlet in about four feet of
water and two specimens from Hamilton (M. C. Z. No. 28,989) are the only
representatives of this widely distributed species which I have had an oppor-
tunity to examine from Bermuda.

BARBOUR: NOTES ON BERMUDIAN FISHES, 119

C- crysos (Mitchill). Jack.

Goode, 76', p. 75.
Paratractus pisquetus (C. & V.) Gill. Goode, 76^, p. 47.

Distribution. — Massachusetts to Brazil.

D. 8 + 25; A. 2 + 21. Sc. 45.

I have examined four specimens of this species from Bermuda; three were
taken in the summer of 1903 at Fkitts Inlet, the other at Hamilton about 1870
(M. C. Z. No. 1733S). A number of these fishes were almost always to be
found lying in wait for fry carried out of Harrington Sound by the tide. They
took bait voraciously and afforded considerable sport for their size. We took
none over 9 inches in length. The name Jack is applied to several species.

NOMEIDAB.

Nomeus gronovii (Gmelin).

Jordan & Evermann, "96-00, vol. 1 (1896), p. 949.

Distribution. — Tropical Atlantic.

D. 11 + 26; A. 3 + 26.

This species appears to be rather common in Castle Harbor, where the only
specimens seen were taken. They usually swim about among the tentacles
of the Portuguese-man-o-war, but the only specimen I caught was swimming
lazily along near the surface of the water ; there were, however, plenty of
Phijsaliae near by.

CORYPHAENIDAE.
Coryphaena equisetis (Linne). Dolphin.

Distribution. — Open Atlantic, most common in the tropics.
D. 52 ; A. 25.

A single specimen taken off Bermuda during the summer of 1904. It was
said to be very common at all times at some distance off shore.

CHEILODIPTERIDAE.
Apogon binotata (PoEy).

Distribution. — Florida, West Indies, and Brazil.

D. 7 + 8; A. 2 + 8.

A single specimen of this species was taken in Castle Harbor, it appears to
be rare. Several natives to whom I showed the specimen declared that thej had
never seen it before. I compared it with Poey's type from Cuba (M. C Z.
No. 8,750) and could find no difference between them.

A. maculata (Poet).
Distribution. — Cuba.
D. 4+ 10; A. 2 + 7; 11. 27, Itr. 2 + 10.

120 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

I have five specimens of this handsome species. Three of these were taken
in Flatts Inlet ; I took one in July, 1903, and Mr. Nichols two in August. The
remaining two came from some floating Sargassum ; one on the Challenger
Banks, the other near the main island; both specimens are very small. I was
told that the species became very common in Flatts Inlet about the latter half
of August.

SERRANIDAE.

Bodianus fulvus (Linxe). Nigger fish. .

Jordan & Evermann, "96-00, vol. 1 (1896), p. 1144.

Distribution. — AVest Indies.

This species appears to be very generally distributed over the reefs, and
moderately common everywhere.

Epinephelus striatus (Bloch). Grouper, Hamlet.

Goode, '76^ p. 57.

Distribution. — West Indies to Brazil.
D. 9+17; A. 3 + 8.

The most important food fish taken near Bermuda. My specimens are small
ones taken in fish pots near Flatts Inlet. It attains a weight of 40 pounds.

B. maculosus (Cuv. & Val.). Hind.

Jctrdan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 1 (1896), p. 1158.
E. gutattus (Gmelin) Goode. Goode, '76^ p. 58.

Distribution. — The West Indies generally.

D. 9+16; A. 3 + 8.

This species was very common everywhere about the reefs. We took speci-
mens by the hook up to 15 or 16 inches in length near Xorth Rock, where they
were especially common. Their power of changing color is highly developed ;
for they change from almost uniform ruddy to flaming red spotted regularly
with deep brown or black.

E. morio (Crv. & Val.). Red Hamlet.

Distribution. — Southern Atlantic coast of North America southward to
Brazil.

D. 9+lG; A. 3 + 9.

This species was generally taken with E. striatus, but was far more rare than
that species. It is said to be growing more common year by year.

Mycteroperca venenosa apua (Bloch). Rock-fish.
Trisotropis undulosus (Cuv.) Gill. Goode, '76=*, p. 55.

Distribution. — West Indies, Florida Keys to Bi\azil.

Grows to a great size and is one of the most important of the common food
fishes.

BARBOUR: KOTES ON BERMUDIAN FISHES. 121

Hypoplectrus puella Cuv. & Val. Mutton Hamlet.
Goode, '76^ p. 60.

Distribution. — West Indies.

D. 10+14; A. 3+7.

Not uncommon about rocky shores with very steep banks; but locally dis-
tributed. Six specimens were taken in fish pots in Harrington Sound near the
bridge and off the dock of the Hotel Frascati.

Paranthias ftircifer (Cuv. & Val.). Barber.

Distribution. — Both coasts of Tropical America.

D. 9+18; A. 3 + 9.

This species has not been previously recorded from Bermuda. Mr. J. T.
Nichols took three specimens, each about 1 foot long, off the south shore near
Hungry Bay with hook and line. Two were also among the collection made
in July, 1904. The color of all was a dull uniform rose pink.

LUTIANIDAE.

Neomaenis griseus (Linne). Gray snapper.
Lutjanus caxis (Schn.) Poet. Goode, '76*, p. 54.

Distribution. — West Indies, South Atlantic coast of United States to Brazil.

D. 10 + 14; A. 3 + 8; 11. 51; Itr. 7 + 13.

One of the most common Bermudian fishes; large schools could be seen
swimming about in Harrington Sound or Flatts Inlet at any time. About 50
of them spent most of their time under our boat at her moorings, never seemed
to be more than a few yards from this location. They are shy and extremely
difficult to take. The specimens before me are from Harrington Sound. They
appear less shy in Hamilton Harbor, where many are taken on hooks and in
fish pots for bait.

N. apodus (Walbaum). Schoolmaster.

Distribution. — West Indies ; Florida to Brazil.

D. 10 + 14; A. 3 + 8.

Several specimens taken from both Hungry Bay and Harrington Sound.
The young were common in many small coves along this shorej and large speci-
mens are often taken about the outer reefs.

N. vivanus (Cuv. & Val.). Silk snapper.

Distribution. — West Indies.

D. 10+14; A. 3 + 8.

A very common species in the deeper water about the outer reefs and in the
middle of Harrington Sound. I have several specimens taken with a fish pot
in the steamboat channel about opposite Bailey's Bay. This species takes bait
well, especially at night, and affords fair .sport.

122 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

N. hastingsi Bean. Spot snapper.
Bean, '98, p. 45.

Distribution. — The Bermudas.

D. 10+14; A. 3 + 8.

One specimen of this species was turned over to me by Prof. E. L. Mark ;
it was taken on the Challenger Banks. Dr. Bean states that this is the " silk
snapper " of the native fishermen ; but so far as I could ascertain from numerous
inquiries, that name is only used for N. vivanus (C. & V.).

Ocyurus chrysurus (Bloch). Yellow tail.
Goode, '76^ p. 55.

Distributio7i. — West Indies to Brazil.

D. 10 + 13; A. 3 + 9; 11. 66; Itr. 7 + 16.

This species was very common in Harrington Sound, where large numbers
were sometimes taken using " scuttle " {Octopus rugosus) for bait. My speci-
mens are from fish pots in Flatts Inlet and Harrington Sound. The species
attains a weight of 5 lbs.

'O'

HABMULIDAE.
Haemulon macrostomuni Gunther. Sow grunt. -

Distribution. — West Indies generally.

D. 12 + 16; S. 3 + 8.

This species was frequently brought into Hamilton by the fishermen, who
took it in rather deep water near the outer reefs, usually in company with
Haemulon album.

H. carbonarium Poet. Bull grunt.
Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 2 (1898), p. 1300.

Distribution. — West Indies.

D. 12 + 16; A. 3 + 8.

This fish was not at all uncommon off the South shore; it was rarely taken
anywhere else. We have several specimens from about one mile south of the
mouth of Hungry Bay.

H. SCiurus (Shaw). Striped grunt.

Distribution. — West Indies generally.

This fish was taken occasionally in fish pots off the South shore and in
Hamilton Harbor. It did not appear to be nearly as common as H. flavolinea-
tum. There are two specimens (M. C. Z. No. 10,555) which were taken in
1862 by Dr. Bickmore.

BARBOUR: NOTES ON BERMUDIAN FISHES. 123

H. flavolineatum (Desmaeest). Yellow grunt.
Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 2 (1898), p. 1306.

Distribution. — West Indies.

This species is very common everywhere about Bermuda. There are thirty-
four specimens in the Museum which were taken by Dr. A. S. Bickmore in
September, 1862 (M. C. Z. Nos. 10,526, 10,541). It does not usually j^row to a
size suitable for food. A large number were taken during August, 1903, in
Hariiu^ton Sound.

o"

Orthopristis chrysopterus (Linne). Sailor's choice.

Distribution. — Atlantic and Gulf coasts of the United States.
D. 13 + 16; A. 3 + 12.

This species was quite common in Hamilton Harbor, though I never saw a
single example elsewhere in the Bermudas.

Bathystoma striatura (Linne).
Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 2 (1898), p. 1310.

Distribution. — Bermudas to South America.

D. 13 + 13 ; A. + 37.

Common, particularly in Flatts Inlet, where it may be taken any day usually
associated with very large numbers of B. rimator. There are twenty specimens
(M. C. Z. No. 10,602) which were taken by Dr. Bickmore in 1862.

B. rimator (Jordan & Swain). White grunt.

Distribution. — East coast of United States and West Indies.

D. 13+ 15; A. 3 + 8.

An excessively common species in Flatts Inlet, less so elsewhere. I have
specimens taken in a fish trap in Harrington Sound and Flatts Inlet ; any
number could have been collected.

SPARIDAE.

Calamus calamus (Cuv. & Val.). Porgy.

C. megacephalus (Swainson) Poey. Goode, '76^, p. 51.
C. orbitarius Poey. Goode, 76', p. 51.

Distribution. — West Indies and Florida.

D. 12 + 12 ; A. 3 + 10.

The fishermen recognize two " Porgies " : the " Goat head," and the " Sheep
head." I think, however, that both species are referable to C. calamus, for they
did not seem to be very certain as to just what constituted a " Goat head " or
" Sheep head " porgy.

124 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

I

Diplodus sargUS (Linne). Bream.

Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 2 (1898), 1363.
Sargus variegatus (Lacepede), Goode. Goode, '76^, p. 52.

Distribution. — Coast of Southern Europe, westward to Bermuda.
D. 12 + 13 (14); A. 3 + 13 (14).

One of the commonest shoal water species. It was strangely confused with
Kyphosus sectatrix by Goode.

GERRIDAE.

Eucinostomus gula (Cuv. & Val.). Shad.

Goode, '76\ p. 39.

Distribution. — New York (rarely) to Brazil.
D. 9 + 10 ; A. 3 + 8.

Common, generally associated in small schools with the young of Neomaenis
griseus and Mugil brasiliensis.

KYPHOSIDAE.

Kyphosus sectatrix (Linne). Chub.

Pimelepterus boscii (Lacepede). Goode, '76 , p. 52.

Distribution. — Pelagic in North Atlantic ; West Indies.
D. 11 + 12; A. 3 + 11.

This species may be called an irregular, though usually very common, visitor
at Bermuda.

POMACENTRIDAE.

Abudefduf saxatilis (Linne). Cow pilot. Sergeant major.
Glyphidodon saxatilis (Linne) Cuvier. Goode, '76=*, p. 38.

Distribution. — Both coasts of Tropical America.

D. 8 + 13 ; A. 2 + 12 ; 11. 28; Itr. 11 + 5.

I have about twenty specimens of this species varying in length from a half
inch to four inches, the latter being a large one for the shores of Bermuda.
I saw a very large specimen in a rock pool at North Rock. Native fishermen
state that the species attains a weight of one and one half pounds in the deep
water off the Rock. It is very common everywhere.

Furcaria cyanea Poet.

Distribution. — Cuba.

D. 12 + 12; S. 2 + 12.

A single specimen from Bermuda taken in 1864 by Captain Hamilton
(M. C. Z. No. 14,801). I can find no other record for the occurrence of this
species except off Cuba.

BARBOUR: NOTES ON BERMUDIAN FISHES. 125

Microspathodon chrysurus (Cuv. & Val.).

Distribution. — West Indies.

Two very small specimens from Sargassum off Ireland Island. The speci-es
does not appear in previous lists, so far as I am aware.

Eupomacentrus leucostictus (Muller & Troschel). Cock-eye pilot.

Distribution. — West Indies ; Florida.

D. 12 -f 15 ; A. 2 + 13.

Although witli considerable hesitation, I refer to this species a number of
Pomacentroids which were taken in various localities, about the Islands. The
genus is in a very confused condition, and I have no desire to describe these
specimens as new until a more extensive examination of existing material can
be made.

E. fuscus (Cuv. & Val.). Brown cock-eye pilot.
Verrill, :01, p. 56.

Distribution. — Florida to Brazil ; West Indies.

Specimens whicb may be this species are very common in many localities
especially at the head of Hungry Bay, both among the loose rocks of the Spit
and among the roots of the mangroves.

LABRIDAE.

Lachnolaimus maximus (Walbaum). Hog fish.

Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 2 (1898), p. 1579.
L.falatus (L.). Goode, '76^ p. 36.

Distribution. — West Indies.
D. 14-f 11; A. 3 + 10.

An important and common food fish, growing to the size of about twenty
pounds.

Iridic radiatus (Linne). Lady fish. Blue fish.

Jordan & Evermann, '96-00, vol. 2 (1898), p. 1590.
Choerojulis radiatus (L.) Goode. Goode, '76', p. 35.

Distribution. — West Indies ; Florida to Brazil ; St. Paul's rocks.
Not uncommon a short distance off the South shore.

I. cyanocephalus (Block). Blue head.

Distribution. — West Indies to Brazil.

Rather rare; the few which we have were taken on the reef off the south
shore. This is the most northerly record for the species.

VOL. XLVI. — NO. 7 2

126 bulletin: museum of compaeative zoology.

I. garnoti (Crv. & Val.)-

Distribution. — West Indies.

One small specimen obtained in Castle Harbor. The species has not been
recorded from Bermuda before.

I. bivittatus (BLOcn). Slippery Dick.
Platyglossus bivittatus Bloch. Goode, "76^, p. 75. Garraan, :00, p. 510.

Distribution. — West Indies ; Carolinas to Brazil.
D. 9 + 11; A. 3 + 12.
A^ery common everywhere.

Chlorichthys nitidissimus (Goode). Slippery Dick.
Jordan & Everraann, '96-00, vol. 2 (1898), p. 1608.

Distribution. — The Bermudas.
Rather common about the outer reefs.

SCARIDAE.

Sparisoma abildgaardi (Bloch).

Distribution. — West Indies to Brazil.

D. 9 + 10; A. 2 + 9. -

This and the three following species are all called Parrot fishes. I have a
single specimen of this species taken in a fish pot ofi' the south shore. It does
not appear to have been recorded from so far north before.

S- viride (Bonnaterre).

Distribution. — West Indies.
D. 9 + 10; A. 2 + 9.

A single specimen, which was taken with the preceding species, is the only
one we obtained. The natives consider it very rare.

Scarus croicensis (Bloch).
Pseudoscarus sanctae-crucis Giinther. Goode, '76^, p. 75.

Distribution. — West Indies generally.

D. 9+10; A. 2 + 9.

Not uncommon in Castle Harbor and occasional in Flatts Inlet. There are
several specimens taken from both localities in the collection made in the
summer of 1903.

S. caeruleus (Bloch).

Pseudoscarus caeruleus (Bloch) Giinther. Goode, '76=', p. 33.
P. psittacus Goode, '76, p. 75.

Distribution. — West Indies, on our coast, rare.
D. 9+10; A. 2 + 9.
Not uncommon.

BAEBOUK: NOTES OX BKRMUDIAX FISHES. 127

CHAETODONTIDAE.

Chaetodon ocellatus (Bloch). Butterfly fish.

Distribution. — Cuba ; Gulf Stream northward.

Kather rare about the outer reefs; but said by the fishermen to be increasing
rapidly in numbers.

C. capistratus (Linne). Four eyes.

Goode, '76% p. 75.
Sarothrodus bimaculatus (Bloch) Poey. Goode, '76% p. 43.

Distribution. — West Indies.
D. 12 + 19; A. 3 + 17.

Common in many localities about Hamilton Harbor, Harrington Sound, and
Castle Harbor.

Angelichthys ciliaris (Linxe). Angel fish.
Eolacanthus ciliaris (Linne) Lacepede. Goode, '76% p. 43.

Distribution. — West Indies and Florida.

D. 14 + 21; A. 3 + 21.

An important food fish, very common about the reefs and steep shores. For
some reason the specimens taken off the north shore are considered much more
palatable than those taken off the south shore.

TEUTHIDIDAE.

Teuthis hepatus (Lixxe). Blue tang.

Acanthurus chirurgus (Bloch.) Schn. Goode, 76% p. 42.

Distribution. — The West Indian region.
D. 9 + 24; A. 3 + 22.

A few specimens were obtained, but the species did not appear to be as com-
mon as the following, with which it was almost always associated.

T- bahianus (Castelxau). Doctor fish.

Distribution. — West Indies; both coasts of Tropical America.
D. 9 + 25; A. 3 + 23.

Decidedly abundant about the reefs and steep shores. Though the adults
did not run up into Flatts Inlet, the young were frequently seen there.

T. helioides, sp. nov. Yellow doctor.
(Plate 3.)
D. 9 + 26; A. 3+26.

Most nearly related to T. chrysosoma (Bleeker) from the Sea of Kajeli.
Form ovate ; height of body rather more than one half of total length (caudal
fin included). The profile of the snout is slightly concave. There are five

128 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

incisors on each side of the upper jaw. The ixpper lobe of the caudal fin is
slightly longer than the lower. The scales of the body are very minute.
In life the color was brillant yellow, which has changed in spirits to a dull
lustreless yellow. The dorsal, anal, and ventral fins are edged with dusky
brown, almost black in some places. There is a diffuse patch of light brown
on the operculum.

Type (M. C. Z. No. 29,053) a single specimen five inches long taken near
Cooper's Island, in Castle Sound, Bermudas, by Messrs. O. Bryant and J. T.
Nichols.

BALISTIDAE.

Balistes carolinensis Gmelin. Turbot.
B. capriscus Gmelin. Goode, '76\ p. 25.

Distribution. — Tropical Atlantic, Mediterranean Sea.

D. 3 + 27 ; A. 25.

We took several specimens in fish pots in about five fathoms off Flatts
Inlet, and I have also one very small one from Sargassum of the Challenger
Banks given me by Mr. J. T. Nichols. The species grows to considerable size
and is frequently eaten, although the flesh is dry and tasteless.

B. vetula Linne. Queen turbot.
Goode, '76\ p. 26.

Distribution. — West Indian region generally.

D. 3 + 29 ; A. 27.

Not taken by Goode, but nevertheless rather common. A regular visitant
at Bermuda, as several are taken every year. The specimen before me was
brought into the Biological Station during the summer of 1904.

MONACANTHIDAE.

Alutera scripta (Osbeck).
Goode, '76% p. 26.

Distribution. — Tropical seas of both hemispheres.
D. 1 + 47; A. 51.

A single specimen of this species was speared at Bermuda during the summer
of 1904 and obtained by Professor Mark.

TETRAODONTIDAE.
Spheroides spengleri (Block). Puffer.

Chilichthys spengleri (Bloch).
Goode, '76% p. 22.

Distribution. — Eastern Atlantic.
D. 7; A. 6.

BARBOUK: NOTES ON BERMUDIAN FISHES. 129

One specimen from Hungry Bay, two inclies long, taken by Mr. Nichols and
one specimen from the dredge, one inch long, among the reefs off Ireland Island
in 8-10 fms. This species did not appear to be sit all common and no adults
were seen. While collecting invertebrates Mr. Bigelow and I both saw
several large "puffers" which appeared to be S. testudineus, and I have no
doubt that this species will occur in future collections.

SCORPAENIDAE.

Scorpaena agassizii Goode & Bean.

Goode & Bean, '96, p. 247.

Distribution. — West Indian region.

One specimen dredged on the Challenger Bank, by the members of the
Biological Station, in forty fathoms.

CEPHALACANTHIDAE.
Cephalacanthus volitans (Linne).

Distribution. — Tropical Atlantic, widely distributed.

D. 2 + 4 + 8; A. 6.

One specimen was taken on the beach at Gibbet Island on June 19, 1903.
The species is very rare at Bermuda, and was not known to any of the fisher-
men that saw the specimen. I learned, however, from Mr. F. Goodwin Gos-
ling, Secy, of the Bermuda Natural History Society, that one specimen bad
been taken during the spring in Hamilton Harbor.

CALLIONYMIDAB.
Callionynius bermudarum, sp. nov.

D. 3 + 7 ; A. 4.

Most nearly related to C. jJauciradiatus Gill ; but differing in the number of
rays in the second dorsal and in the preopercular spine. Besides giving the
radial formula for his specimen (D. 3, 6; A. 3), Gill ('65, p. 144) says : —

"The preopercular spine is armed with three teeth above and terminates
behind in an acute point."

A description of the three specimens from Bermuda follows : —

Head (to tip of opercular spine) 3^ times in total length ; depth 8 times.
Ventral surface of body flat ; -without a bordering fold of skin ; a single lateral
line ; diameter of eye a little less than length of snout. The maxillary reaches
about ^ the distance to the eye. The preopercular spine is armed with two
barbs directed forward and situated dorsally ; there is also a sharp termination
to the spine itself, which is directed straight backward. The gill opening is a
very minute slit, also directed backward. In one specimen the first dorsal ray
reaches the base of the caudal ; each of the other two being successively a little

130 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPAEATIVE ZOOLOGY,

shorter. In the other two specimens the length of the dorsal is about equal to
the distance from the posterior border of the eye to the tip of the snout. The
pectoral fins are about as long as the head ; the ventrals slightly shorter. The
color of these specimens is a milky white, irregularly banded and blotched with
light brown. In the largest one (with the filamentous dorsal) the anal fin
is rather dark bi'own and there is a dark spot on the ventral fin and on the
middle of the throat, nearly covering it.

Type series, three spfecimens (M. C. Z. No. 29,055) 1|", 1", |", Ig. from
Bermuda.. Taken by the dredge in from 6-8 fins.; Aug. 1903, the largest off
Castle Island, the others off Ireland Island.

GOBIIDAE.
Gobius stigmaturus Goode & Bean.
Garman, :00, p. 510.
Distribution. — Bermuda.
D. 4+ 12 ; A. 12.

One specimen from Hungry Bay was taken from under a stone at low tide in
about four inches of water by my brother, Mr. W. W. Barbour, April, 1903 ;
a diligent search in the same and similar localities failed to yield a second
specimen.

G. SOporator Cuv. & Val. Molly miller.
Goode, '76% p. 75.

Distrihxdion. — The West Indian region and Northern South America.

D. 6+ 10; A. 1 + 7.

The forty-eight specimens before me show a decided differentiation into two
distinct color phases. One lot, consisting of twenty-six specimens, was taken
1)V me, with the aid of Messrs. Bigelow and Cole, in the rock pools of the
south shore near Hungry Bay. All these specimens, except two, which are
quite black, are very dark brown. The rest, some twenty or more, were taken
by dredging in Castle Harbor and Mangrove Bay, in localities where the
bottom was white sand composed of coral, shell, and Foraminifera. All these
specimens are light gray, almost white, with a row of dark lateral puncticula-
tions, just visible.

This species is very active and juinps about on the bare rocks washed by the
waves and even moves from one tide pool to another over dry land.

BLENNIIDAB.
Labrisomus nuchipinnis (Quoy & Gaim.). Molly miller.
Lahrosorims nuchipinnis (Quoy & Gaim.) Poey. Goode, '76'^, p. 28.

Distribution. — West Indies and coast of Southern States.
D. 18 + 12; A. 2-f 17.

I collected four specimens of this species in March, 1903, all of a, character-
istic mottled brown color. In July, 1903, I took eight more, four of which

BAKBOUK: NOTES ON BEKMUDIAN FISHES. 131

showed the same color as those taken iu the early spring. The others were
gorgeously bright with yellow, red, and orange about the foreparts of their
bodies. These were all males, the darker ones being females with eggs almost
ready to hatch.

I had an opportunity to watch a pair of these fishes getting ready to lay.
The female would move swiftly about in the sand under a protecting rock,
thus scooping out a hollow place in which she probably deposited her eggs.
In a few days the female, looking thinner, lay quite still near the hollow in
the sand, where I presume the eggs had been laid; the male was swimming
nervously about as if to drive away intruders. Up to the time I left, more
than a month after the probable laying of the eggs, the male, with the same
gaudy color, was still swimming about; the female was gone, and I presume the
young had been hatched and had long since departed.

Salariichthys textilis (Quoy & Gaim.)- Molly miller.
Salarias textilis, Quoy & Gaim. Goode, '76% p. 29.

Distribution. — Bermudas to Northern South America.

Very common iu tide pools about the shores and at North Rock.

BROTULIDAE.
Brosmophysis verrillii Gaeman.
Garman, :00, p. 511.
Distribution. — Bermuda.
D. 71; A. 52; 11. 98; Itr. 25.

Several specimens of this little known Brotuloid were taken by ^Ir. H. B.
Bigelow and myself from the rock pools near Flatts Inlet anel Gibbet Island.
A diligent search at Bailey's Bay, the type locality, and in many other likely
places failed to reveal a single specimen.

PLEURONECTIDAE.
Platophrys lunatus (Linne). Plate fish.

Distribution. — West Indies generally.

Apparently the only fiat fish which is common about Bermuda. Several
were taken during my stay in the summer. The onh- specimen which I had
an opportunity to observe carefully was one loaned to Professor Mark by 'Six.
L. Mowbray of St. George's.

ANTENNARIIDAE.

Pterophryne gibba (Mitchill). Mouse fish.

Distribution. — West Indies generally.
D. 3 + 12; 4.. 7.

Very common in the Sargassum. I have about sixty specimens, a few of
which were taken from the dredge off Ireland Idand.

132 bulletin: museum of COMrARAXIVE ZOOLOGY.

p. ranina Tiles.

Distribution. — Fields of sea weed in the Tropical Atlantic, Richardson.

A single large pediculate was obtained from a colored fisherman and handed
to me by Professor Mark. It is evidently Cuvier's Chironectis laevigatus and
also agrees remarkably well with Richardson's ('44-48, p. 15, pi. 9, Fig. 354),
Chironectis pictus \ ax. vittatus.

Antennarius stellifer, sp. nov.

(Plate 4.)

D. 3 + 12; A. 7; V. 5 ; P. 10; C. 9.

Closely related to A . nuttingii Garman ; but differing conspicuously in color-
ation, size, and form of bait.

In form this species is short and extremely bulky anteriorly. The caudal
peduncle is short and compressed. The head is as wide as high ; with a rather
deep, scaleless concavity behind the second dorsal ray. The mouth is very
wide, almost vertical, and the eye is small. The first dorsal ray is extremely
long and slender, a little more than 2^ times the length of the second dorsal ray.
On the posterior surface of the second dorsal ray there is a peculiar fringe of
elongate scales, a tuft of similar scales being situated on each side of the naked
occipital depression. The base of the first dorsal ray is a prominent movable
pedicel. The second dorsal ray is quite free, while the third is connected with
the dorsum by the skin. The soft dorsal is composed of two regions ; the
anterior five rays are of equal size and their tips do not extend beyond the
connecting membrane. The condition in the posterior part of the fin is very
diff"erent; the rays do project beyond the membrane, and from the sixth to eighth
ray the height of the fin increases regularly, while from the ninth to twelfth
the decrease is as regular, so that the posterior portion is more or less fan-
shaped. The bait on the tip of the first dorsal ray is a tiny sphere, from which
spring numerous delicate filaments.

The color of this species, described from the alcoholic specimen, is as fol-
lows:— The entire body is very dark brown, almost black with areas of deep
velvety black, which are sometimes surrounded in a zone of lighter brown.
The bait, posterior surface of second dorsal ray and under surface of the pec-
toral and ventral fins is dirty white. There is on each side of the body an
irregularly stellate figure of white composed of a central patch and radiating
spots. A white saddle is situated on the caudal peduncle.

Only one specimen known, the type (M. C. Z., No. 29,056), obtained in
Castle Harbor by Mr. L. Mowbray of St. George's, and procured from him
by Professor Mark.

A. scaber (Cuv.)

Distrihution. — West Indian waters.

A single specimen from Bermuda was obtained in exchange from the Boston
Society of Natural History. It had been in the collection for some time.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Bean, T. H.

'98. Notes upon Fislies received at the New York Aquarium, with Descrip-
tion of a new Species of Snapper from Bermuda. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat.
Hist., vol. 10, pp. 45-51.

Garman, S.

:00. Additions to the Ichthyological Fauna of the Bermudas, from the col-
lectious of the Yale Expedition of 1898. Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci., vol. 10,
pp. 510-512.

Gill, T.

'65. On a new Family Type of Fishes related to the Blennioids. Ann.
Lye. Nat. Hist. N. Y., vol. 8, pp. 141-144.

Goode, G. B.

'74. Descriptions of two new Species of Fishes from the Bermuda Islands.
Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. 14, pp. 379-381.

Goode, G. B.

'76*. Catalogue of the Fishes of the Bermudas. Based chiefly upon the
Collections of the United States National Museum. Bull. U. S. Nat.
Mus., no. 5, 2 4- 82 pp.

Goode, G. B.

"76''. Bermuda and its Fish Markets. Forest and Stream, vol. 6, pp. 83-84.

Goode, G. B.

'77. A Preliminary Catalogue of the Reptiles, Fishes, and Leptocardians
of the Bermudas, with Descriptions of four Species of Fishes believed to
be new. Amer. Jonru. Sci. and Arts, ser. 3, vol. 14, pp. 289-298.

Goode, G. B., and Bean, T. H.

"96. Oceanic Ichthyology. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., at Harvard College,
vol. 22. Text and Plates. Also Special Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., 2 vols.,
35 -1- 554 pp., 123 pis.

Gunther, A.

'74. Descriptions of new Species of Fishes in the British Museum. Ann.
and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. 14, pp. 453-455.

Gunther, A.

'79. Report of the Shore Fishes procured during the Voyage of H. M. S.
Challenger in the years 1873-1876. The Voyage of the Challenger.
Zoology, vol. 1, pt. 6, 82 pp., 32 pis.

134 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Jones, J. M., and Goode, G. B.

'84. Cuutributions to tbe Natural History of the Bermudas. Vol. 1. Bull.
U. S. Xat. Mus., no. 25, 23 + 353 pp.'

Jones, J. M., Wedderburn, J. W., and Hurdis, J. L.

"59. The Naturalist iu Bermuda; a Sketch of the Geology, Zoology, aud
Botany of that remarkable Group of Islands ; together with Meteorological
Observations. Loudon. Reeves & Turner. S°. 12 + 200 pp.

Jordan, D. S., and Evermann, B. W.

'96-00. rishcs of Nortli and Middle America. Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
no. 47, 4 vols., 60 + 3136 pp., 392 pis.

Mark, E. L.

:04. The Bahama Lancelet at Bermuda. Science, n. s., vol. 20, p. 179.

Richardson, J.

"44-48. The Fishes. Voyage of the Erebus and Terror. 139 pp., 60 pis.

Verrill, A. E.

:01. Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas from the Yale Expedition of
1901, -with Notes on other Species. Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci., vol. 11,
pp. 15-62, pis. 1-9, 6 test figs.

Verrill, A. E.

:02. The Bermuda Islands. An Account of their Scenery, Climate, Produc-
tions, Physiology, Natural History and Geology, with Sketches of their
Discovery and early History, and the Changes in their Flora aud Fauna
due to Man. [Reprinted from the Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci., vol. 11, with
some changes]. New Haven, Conn. 10 + 5i8 pp., 38 pis., and over 250
text figures.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

PLATE 1.

Siphostoma dendriticum, sp. nov. (p. 115).
Four (4) times natural size

PLATE 2.

Holocentrus puncticulatus, sp. nov. (p. 117),
Twice natural size.

PLATE 3.

Teuthis lielioides, sp. nov. (p. 127).
Natural size.

PLATE 4.

Antennarius stellifer, sp. nov. (p. 132).
Very slightly enlarged.

<

a.

-^-Arj^J

W^

'fcl\

^.'. "^ €■

Ki

en
en

C3

>i/ ;^

PQ

O

CO

<

PQ

Jk-.-;-

^ <' ^

CM

<

w
PQ

I
cd

O
PQ

<:

3Q

CO

<

s
s

X

CO

M
PQ

O

PQ

CO

■s

The following' Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of Alkx-
ANDKB Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

E. EHLERS. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HAKTLAUB. The Couiatulae of the " Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentacrinus.

A. MILNE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VEKKILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT, Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. MARK. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. McM. WOODWORTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L. Tannek, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna. S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.

The Pauaniic Deep-Sea Fauna. J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinarians.

H. B BIGELOW. The Siphonophores. E. L. MARK. Branchiocerlanthus.

K.BRANDT. The Sagittae. , JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

" The Thalassicolae. P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans. ropods.

W. H. DALL. Tlie Mollusks. THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarlans.

REINHARD DOHM. The Eyes of Deep-Sea M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

Crustacea. Doliolidae.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds. H. B. WARD. The Sipunculids.

HAROLD HEATH. Soleiiogaster. W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidiana.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLII., and
also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVII. ; of the Memoirs, Vols. I. to
XXIV, and also Vols. XXVIIL, XXIX., XXXI., and XXXIL

Vols. XLIII., XLVL, XLVIII., and XLIX., of the Bulletin,
and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., and XXXIII. of the
MicMOiiis, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and "Memoiks are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the JMuseum, of
investigations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History', and of work by specialists based
upon tlie Museum Collections and Explorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on tlie HesuUs of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in charge of

Alexander Agassiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.

Commander C. D. Slgsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. 11. Bartlett, U. S. N.,

Commanding.
Reports on the Results of tlie Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission

Steamer "Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Taimer, U. S. N., Com-

maiiding, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.
Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in

charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer

" Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson E.

Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.
Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in

charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer

" Albatross," from October, 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. iM.

Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.
ContributiDiis from tlie Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.
Contributions from the Geological Laboratory, in charge of Profiessor N. S.

Shaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals; one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and lialf a volume of tlie
Memoirs (4 to) usually appear annually. Each number of the
Bulletin and of the Memoirs is sold sepai-ately. A price list
of the publications of the Museum will be sent on application
to the Librarian of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge^ Mass.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVL No. 8.

THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS OF THE PEARL ISLANDS

BAY OF PANAMA.

By John E. Thayer and Outram Bangs.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

September, 1905.

Reports ox thk Sciextific Results of the Expedition to the East-
ern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer " Albatross," from October,
1904, TO March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. M. Garrett,
U. S. N., Commanding, published or in preparation: —

A. agassiz. General Report on the Expedi-
tion.

A. agassiz. I.i Three Letters to Geo. M.
Bowers, U. S. Fish Com.

A. agassiz and H. L. CLARK. The Echini.
P. E. BEDDARD. The Earthworms.

a B. BIGELOW. The Medusae.

R. P. BIGELOW. The Stomatopods.

S. P. CLARKE. The Hydroids.

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans.

L. J. COLE. The Pycnogonida.

W. H. DALL. The Molhisks.

0. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. The Fishes.
W. G. FARLOW. The Algae.

S. GARMAN. The Reptiles.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.

H. J. HANSEN. The Schizopods.

S. HENSHAW.- The Insects.

W. E. HOYLE. The Cephalopods.

C. A. KOFOID. III.3 The Protozoa.

P. KI^UMBACH. The Sagittae.

H. LUDWIG. The Holothurians.

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

H. LUDWIG. The Ophiurans.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinaria.

G. W. MULLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

MARY J. RATHBUN. The Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON. 11.= The Isopods.

W. E. RITTER. The Tunicates.

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Bryozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON. The Plants.

G. O. SARS. The Copepods.

F. E. SCHULZE. The Siliceous Sponges.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-

pods.
TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.
T. W. VAUGHAN. The Corals.
W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

1 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. C, July, 1905, 4 pp., 1 pi.

3 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 9, September, 1905, 5 pp., 1 pi.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 8.

THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS OF THE PEARL ISLANDS,

BAY OF PANAMA.

Bv John E. Thayer and Outram Bangs.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

Septesiber, 1905.

No. 8. — The Mainmah and Birds of the Pearl Islands,

Bay of Panama}

By John E. Thayer and Outram Bangs,
contents.

Page

I. Introduction. By Outram Bangs 137

II. Literature. By Outram Bangs 139

III. List of the Mammalia. By Outram Bangs 139

IV. Aves. By John E. Thayer and Outram Bangs 140

I. Introduction. By Outram Bangs.

Daring the Jolui E. Thayer E-^pedition of 1904 Mr. W. W. Brown, Jr.,
made a second visit (his first expedition to the islands having been made
in the spring of 1900) to the Archipelago de hxs Perlas in the Bay of
Panama. Here he remained, collecting assiduously, for two months,
— from the latter part of February to the latter part of April,
1904.

On his first trip, in 1900, Mr. Brown devoted much time to collecting
mammals, and took specimens of probably every species that occurs
in the islands, with the possible exception of some bats. He felt, how-
ever, that there were many birds in the islands of which he failed to
secure representatives. The birds taken on the first expedition were
also, many of them, in poor plumage, — some so worn and faded as to
be misleading. On the first trip, also, Mr. Brown collected only in San
Miguel Island, and took no reptiles or amphibians. It therefore seemed
desirable that a second visit should be made.

On the present trip Mr. Brown collected on San Miguel, Saboga, and
Pacheca Islands. The biota of all three is similar, and no species taken
has differentiated on the several islands, owing to their closeness. San
Miguel, being the largest island of the group, has the richest fauna, and
many species occu^ there that are not found in the other islands.
Saboga is the "biid rock" of the group, and here cormorants, boobies,
man-o'-war birds, and terns breed in great numbers.

1 Papers from the John E. Thayer Expedition of 1904, No. 2.

138 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Pedro Gonzales and San Jose Islands were not visited ; lying a little
apart from the other islands, these two might pi'ove to be interesting,
but time did not permit of their being explored.

The vertebrates of the Pearl Islands are derived for the most part
from the adjacent mainland, being eitlier the same as, or slightly
differentiated, island races of widely distributed Panamic forms. There
are, however, some striking exceptions to this rule. Among the mam-
mals, for instance, the nearest ally of the island vesper rat — Zyijodon-
tomys seorsus — seems to be Z. hrevicauda of Trinidad ; and a species
of Loncheres allied to the Colombian L. canice2)s occurs in the Pearl
Islands, though the genus is as yet unknown from anywhere else north
of South America proper.

Among the birds the more peculiar cases of distribution are the yellow
honey-creeper, which is not nearly related to Goereba mexicana of the
adjacent mainland, but finds its closest ally in G. luteola of the Carib-
bean coasts of Colombia and Venezuela ; the Phaetliornis of the islands,
•which is related to P. anthopkUus of central and eastern Colombia and
Venezuela ; and the ant wren, which, though very distinct, is a repre-
sentative of Formicivora intermedia of Venezuela and Colombia.

Geologists appear to know very little about the Pearl Islands, and I
can find nothing in print. Mr. Brown collected specimens of rock, and
these, according to Professor Crosby, are of volcanic origin. Prom what
little I can gather, I infer that the Archipelago de las Perlas has never
been connected with the mainland since the elevation of the isthmus
and the separation of the waters of the Bay of Panama from the
Caribbean Sea.

The islands lie in the middle of the Bay of Panama, distant about
twenty miles from the nearest point on the mainland. The larger ones
are hilly and covered with a dense, luxuriant tropical forest, with the
shores in many places fringed by mangroves. The waters of the Bay of
Panama all about the islands are very deep.

The collections of reptiles, amphibians, and fishes will be reported
upon in the third paper of this series.

Mr. Brown also made a small collection of trees and woody shrubs.
These an-ived in splendid condition and have been presented by Mr.
Thayer to Prof. C. S. Sargent.

THAYER AND BANGS: PEAKL ISLANDS MAMMALS. 139

II. Literature. By Outram Bangs.

As the papers on Mr. Brown's first trip to the Pearl Islands Avere.
scattered, it is well to give a list of them here. They are as follows :

Bangs, Outram. Birds of San Miguel Islurul, Panama. Auk, vol. 18, pp.
24-32, January, 1901.

Bangs, Outram. A New Honey Creeper from San Miguel Island, Panama.
Proc. New Eng. Zool. Club, vol. 2, pp. 51-52, Feb. 8, 1901.

Bangs, Outram. A New Ortalis from the Archipelago de las Perlas, Bay of
Panama. Proc. New Eng. Zool. Club, vol. 2, pp. 61-62, July 31, 1901.

Bangs, Outram. The Mammals Collected in San Miguel Island, Panama, by
W. W. Brown, Jr. Amer. Nat., vol. 35, pp. 631-644, August, 1901. (Actual
date of distribution, Aug. 22, 1901.)

Bangs, Outram. Two New Birds from San Miguel Island, Bay of Panama.
Proc. New Eng. Zool. Club, vol. 3, pp. 71-73, March 31, 1902.

Bangs, Outram. A New Wren from San Miguel Island, Bay of Panama.
Proc. New Eng. Zool. Club, vol. 4, pp. 3-4, March 16, 1903.

Besides these papers very little has been published, except a descrip-
tion of a supposed new dove, Zenaida hypoleuca G. R. Gray MS. ^lus.
Brit. 1854 ; Bp. Consp. Av. II. p. 83, 1854. The specimen was collected
by Captain Kellett and Lieutenant Wood, and was said to have come,
from the Pearl Islands (see under Aves of the present paper, species ISTo.
31). One or two other birds are listed in the Catalogues of Birds in
the British Museum from the same source.

Mention of birds and mammals described from the islands is of course
made in lists and reviews since published, such as, —

Systematic Results of the Study of North American Land Mammals during
the years 1901 and 1902, Miller and Rehn ; Land and Sea Mammals of Middle
America, Elliot ; Hand-List of Birds, Sharpe ; Birds of North and Middle
America, Ridgway.

III. List of the Mammalia. Br Outram Bangs.

The present trip added but little to our knowledge of the mammalian
life of the Pearl Islands. No species was taken that Mr. Brown had
not collected on his first visit to the islands in 1900. Mr. Brown, how-
ever, secured an additional example of the rabbit of the islands — Lepus
ineitatus — which was previously known by the type alone. Tliis speci-
men, an adult female, taken in San Miguel Island^ Feb. 29, 1904, is in

140 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY,

every way similar to the type, with the same peculiar skull with its
broad, heavy rostrum.

I give a nominal list of the species of the islands here in order to
make tlie paper complete as to the mammals. The species peculiar to
the Pearl Islands are marked with an asterisk.

1. * Marmosa fulviventer Bangs.

2. Didelphis marsupialis etensis Allen.^

3. * Lepus ineiiaius Bangs.

4. * Basyprocta callida Bangs.

5. * Loncheres labllis Baug?,.

6. * Proechimi/s burrus Bangs.

7. * Zyffodontomi/s seorsus Bangs.

8. Mus musculus Linne.

9. Mus rattus rattus Linne.

10. Mus rattus ale.vandrinus (Geoff.).

11. Fampi/rops helleri Peters.

12. Hemiderma hreicaudum (Wied.).

IV. AvES. By John E. Thayer axd Outram Bangs.

On his first trip to the Pearl Islands Mr. Brown secured examples
of forty-two species of birds, only two of which were North American
migrants. On the present expedition he took representatives of ninety-
two species. One species taken in 1900 — Agamia agami — was not
obtained, and a dove — Zenaida aurirulata — recorded from the Pearl
Islands on the strength of a skin supposed to have been taken there by
Captain Kellett and Lieutenant Wood, was not met with by Mr. Brown.

Thus the number of species of birds so far taken in the Pearl Islands
is ninety-four, of which thirty-three are North American migrants, and
sixty-one resident breeding birds of the islands.

It is rather strange that this considerable increase in the numbers
of resident birds added but one new species, — the Booby, already de-
scribed (Bull. M. C. Z., vol. 46, p. 92, June, 1905). All the others,
with the possible exception of the rail, which we refer hesitatingly to
Aramides cajanea chiricote, prove the same as mainland species.

The large series collected on the present trip shows one species,

1 Allen, Bull. Amer. Mus. of Nat. Hist., vol. 16, Aug. 18, 1902, p. 2G2. I fail to
see how this form from the continent and the Pearl Islands differs from D. marsu-
pialis battyi Thomas, described from Coiba Island (Novit. Zool., vol. 9, p. 137,
April, 1902). Dr. Allen, however, keeps them distinct in his review.

THAYER AND BANGS: PEARL ISLANDS BIRDS. 141

Ortalis struthopus, described by Bangs as peculiar to the islands, to be
the mainland form, Ortalis cinereiceps.

Two new subspecies are described in the following list, — one a tyrant,
of which Mr. Brown had previously taken but one example, and another,
the blue tanager of the islands, which ditiers sufficiently from the main-
land form to be considered a subspecies.

Unfortunatel}' very little can be noted as to the habits of the birds.
Mr. Brown states that in the islands, heavily forested right to high-
water mark, the smaller birds all live in much the same manner, except
that some keep to the underbrush and others to the trees, and that fre-
quently one does not know what bird one has shot until it is secured.

In the following list North American migrants are marked with an
asterisk, measurements are in millimetres, and the colors are according
to Ridgway's nomenclature.

PHALACROCORACIDAE.

1. Phalacrocorax vigua vigua (Vieill.).

Sixteen specimens, adults and youiig, San Miguel and Saboga Islands,
March and April. A nest placed in a tree containing six incubated eggs was
taken, April 14, in Saboga Island.

SULIDAE.

2. Sula etesiaca Thayer and Bangs.

Seventeen specimens, adults of both sexes and young, San Miguel and
Saboga Islands, March and April. No nests were found, the breeding season
being apparently over.

FREGATIDAE.

3. Pregata aquila (Linne).

Three adults, ^ ^ and 9 , Sun Miguel and Saboga. A number of eggs were
also taken.

ARDEIDAE
4. Nyctanassa violacea (Linne).

Twelve specimens, adults and young, San Miguel and Saboga, March and
April. A nest containing two fresh eggs was taken from a tree in San Miguel,
March 14.

142 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

5- Agamia agami (Gmel.).

This bird was not observed on the present trip. One adult 9 was taken in
San Miguel, May 8, 1900, on Mr. Brown's former excursion to the islands.

6. Butorides virescens maculata (Bodd).

Twenty-one specimens, adults and young, San Miguel Island, February and
March. A nest containing one fresh egg was found March 15.

At first we thought this series represented a well-marked new form of the
Little Green Heron, but on close comparison with considerable material from
the West Indies we are unable to find a single character by which the Pearl
Islands birds can be distinguished from B. virescens maadata. The skins
agree in measurements with West Indian examples, as can be seen from the
following tables. In color the Pearl Islands series presents the most astound-
ing amount of individual variation. Some specimens have entirely lost all
markings on the neck, this being dark maroon chestnut with a purplish bloom.
Others have the neck normally striped and marked, agreeing exactly with birds
from Cuba and the Lesser Antilles. Some have the throat white, others
rufous, and others again have it either white or rufous heavily striped with
black. The color of the belly varies from olive gray in some individuals to
brownish slate color in others. The edgings to the wing coverts vary indi-
vidually from whitish to rusty, and in some fully adult birds these edgings are
broad and conspicuous, while in others they are very narrow, — almost wanting
in one skin. In fact, among the adult birds it is hard to find two alike. The birds
that have the neck uniform maroon-chestnut, or nearly so, have blacker bills
than the others, with less yellow on the mandible. These skins represent a phase
of plumage much like, if not the same as, the so-called Butorides brunnescens of
Cuba, which most certainly is nothing but a phase of plumage of the ordinary
species with which it occurs in Cul)a. We have, as it happens, however, never
seen intermediate examples from Cuba, all Ijirds examined from that island
being either in the brunnescens or the m/tenlala phase. In the Pearl Islands
series there is every stage of intermediate coloring.

This series, proving, as it does, that the Green Heron of the Panama region is
the same as the West Indian, leads us to suppose that the range of this form
includes the whole of southern Central and northern South America, where
Butorides virescens meets and overlaps the range of B. striata.

Measurements of a series of Butorides virescens maculata.^ —

No. Locality. Sex. Wing. Tail. Tarsus. Culmen.

14.891 Cuba, Halquin $ ad. 164.5 59.5 45 61

14.892 do. 9 ad. 166 59 47 . 59.5
13,486 Isle of Pines, Santa Fe $ ad. 170 60 51 63

1 Collection of E. A. and 0. Baugs.

THAYER AND BANGS : PEARL ISLANDS BIRDS.

143

No.

Locality.

Sex

Wing.

Tail.

Tarsu8.

Culmen.

13,4S7

Isle of Pines, Eibeybagua

$ ad.

154

51

43

57.5

13,517

Dominica

9 yg. ad.

164

59

47

56

13,578

do.

9 yg. ad.

171

60

47

59

12,897

Boi|uiu, Spring Est.

(Oad.

171

60

49

61.5

12,896

do.

(? ad.

171

63

49

63

12,626

Barbados

9 ad.

168

59

49

60

12,629

do.

$ ad.

165

58

43

57

12,627

do.

9 ad.

163

46

58

13,212

Grenada, St. George

S a<l.

168

60.5

49

57

8,902

Panama, Sona.

S ad.

175

61

48

61

14,260

Pearl Islands, San Miguel

S ad.

167.5

58.5

48.5

61

14,261

do.

$ ad.

170

61

47

58

14,262

do.

S a.l.

169

59

47

59.5

14,263

do.

S ad.

165

60

47.5

60

14,264

do.

$ ad.

166

58

47

58

14,265

do.

<? ad.

175

63

48

58.5

4,831

do.

S ad.

162.5

57

46

14,266

du.

9 ad.

163

58

45

57.5

14,267

do.

9 ad.

163

59

43

57

14,268

do.

9 ad.

164

57.5

45

61

] 0,538

Honduras, Ceiba

$ ad.

174

62

50

60.5

3,423

Bahamas, Nassau

i ad.

167

59

44.5

58

14,994

Bahamas, Andros

c?ad.

157

55.5

43

56

From these measurements it can be seen at a glance that the Pearl Islands
Green Heron does not differ in size or proportions from birds from the West
Indies and continental tropical America. There is a considerable individual
variation in size in the Green Heron everywhere, but averages show that
B. virexcens maculata is easily separable from B. virescens virescens of eastern
North America on account of its smaller size.

After examining a very large amount of material in this connection, we
are forced to place very little reliance on color as a character by which to dis-
tinguish the various races of this species. Seasonal difference in this respect is
very great, individual variation is also great, and in arid regions the bird
bleaches out very fast. Mr. J. H. Riley in a recent publication ^ has stated :
" Green herons from the West Indies, except the Bahamas, are smaller, have
the crest more plumbeous, and the white edgings to the wing coverts are less
pronounced and not so tawny in color when compared w-ilh Florida specimens."
We cannot find a single one of these color characters stable, and furthermore
are unable to separate Bahaman birds from those from other West Indian
Islands killed at corresponding dates. Bahaman birds appear to bleach out
and become very pale in summer, but so do birds in Barbados and Bequia, and

1 Catalogue of a Collection of Birds from Barbuda and Antigua, B. W. I.,
Smith. Misc. Collections, vol. 47.

144 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

probably other more barren islands. The subspecies maculata also has a
rufous phase — the so-called B. brunnescens — which thus far has been re-
corded from Cuba and the Pearl Islands only. That this is merely a phase of
plumage is abundantly shown by the Pearl Islands series.

B. virescens anthonyi Mearns is certainly larger than B. virescens virescefis,
but how much its alleged paler color is due to season and to bleaching in its
arid habitat remains to be proved. Young individuals, however, seem to have
more white in the wing feathers. The two specimens upon which Butorides
virescens frazari (Brewster) was based were killed in February, and appear to
be in full winter plumage, and we cannot help predicting that a careful study
of specimens killed at all seasons of the year will show that this is the name
of the western bird, and that anthonyi is a synonym of it.

IBIDIDAE.

7. Eudocimus albus (Linne).

Four adults, both sexes, San Miguel and Pacheca Islands, March and April.
An egg ready to be laid was taken from the oviduct of a bird killed April 14
in Pacheca Island.

CATHARTIDAE.

8. Catharistes urubu (Vieill.).
One female, Saboga Island, April 12.

FALCONIDAE.

9. Polyborus cheriway (Jacq.).
Two specimens, ^ and 9) Pacheca Island, April 14.

10. Milvago chimachima (Vieill.).

Fourteen specimens, young and adults of both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga
Islands, April and March.

11. Buteo abbreviatus Cab.
Two specimens, ^ and 9> San Miguel Island, March 6 and 11.

12. Rupornis ruficauda (Scl. and Salt.).
Four specimens, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March.

13. Urubitinga anthracina (Licnx.).

Two males, one adult, one young, San Miguel Island, March. These do not
differ from mainland specimens.

THAYER AND BANGS : I'EAKL ISLANDS BIKDS. 145

14. Regerinus uncinatus (Temm.).

One (J, beginning to attain to blue back of the adult plumage, Saboga
Island, April 3. The naked parts are noted by Mr. Brown as " tarsus leniou
yellow; skin of loral region flax flower blue, with a yellow spot in front of
eye ; iris dirty white."

15- Ictinea plumbea (Gmel.).

One adult, $, San Miguel Island, March 13.

TINAMIDAE.
16. Crypturus soui modestus (Cab.).

Six adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March. It is rather
strange that the Tinamou of the Pearl Islands should be identical with that
of the mainland, but such seems to be the case. We can detect no differ-
ences either in color or measurements.

CHACIDAE.
17- Ortalis cinereiceps (Gray).

Ortalis struthopus Bangs, Proc. New Eng. Zoijl. Club, vol. 2, pp. 61-62, July 31,
1901.

Seven adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March. This series
shows that the supposed race from the Pearl Islands is not in any way different
from the bird of the mainland. The present specimens are identical in color
as well as in measurements with examples from Panama and Chiriqui. The
type of 0. struthopus marked " ^ " is probably a female, wrongly sexed.
The other original skin. No. 4882, adult 9 , from Pedro Gonzales Island, is
the smallest in the whole series, and has the smallest and shortest foot and
tarsus ; it is probably a dwarf. Apart from this specimen, measurements of
the island birds agree exactly with those of a series from the mainland, the
males in all cases being much larger than the females.

RALLIDAE.
18. Aramides cajanea chiricote (Vieill.).

Four adults, both sexes, San Miguel, February and March.

These rails, when compared with a series from Panama and Chiriqui, are
paler below and average smaller ; there is such an amount of individual varia-
tion in size in both series, however, that this apparent difference might not
hold good if still more material was measured. The paler color of the under

VOL. XLVI. — NO. 8 10

9 ad.

163

67.5

52

9 ad.

170

66

52

^ad.

165

67

52

^ad.

169

67

53

^ad.

173

69

55

i ad.

185

71

56.5

9 ad.

177

72

53.5

146 BULLETIN:. MUSEUM OF COMPAKATIVE ZOOLOGY.

parts of the island birds also may not be a real difference, but is perhaps

seasonal. Specimens measure as follows :

No. Locality. Sex. Wing. Tarsus. Culmen.

14.297 San Miguel Island

14.298 do.

14.299 do.
40,343 M.C.Z. do.

7,060 Panama, Loma del Leon ^ ad.

7.649 Chiriqui, Divala

7.650 do.

CHARADRIIDAE.

19. Haematopus palliatus Temm.

One adult, 9? San Miguel Island, Marcli 12. Tliis example is rather small,
but E. W. Nelson, who examined it during a study of the American Oyster
catchers, considers its small dimensions as only the extreme of individual
variation.

*20- Arenaria interpres (Linne).
Three specimens, ^ ^ and 9 > San Miguel Island, February 27.

*21. Squatarola squatarola (Linne).
One 9, San Miguel Island, March 11.

* 22- Ochthodromus wilsoni (Ord.).
Three females, San Miguel Island, February 29 and March 11.

* 23. Aegialens semipalmatus (Bp.).
Three specimens, (J 9 9? San Miguel Island, March 4,9, and 17.

*24. Numenius hudsonicus Lath.

Three specimens, two females and a male, San Miguel Island and Saboga
Island, February 24 and April 5.

*25. Catoptrophorus semipalmata (Gmel.).
Two females, San Miguel Island, February 20 and March 2.

THAYEH AND BANGS: PEARL ISLANDS BIRDS. 147

* 26. Actitis macularia (Linne).

Five specimens, both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands, March 1, 2, 10,
and 17 and April 12. Two of these are spotted below, and three are in the
white-bellied plumage.

* 27. Ereunetes occidentalis Lawr#
One 9 , San Miguel Island, March 8.

*28. Limonites minutilla (Vieill.).
Three specimens, two males and a female, San Miguel Island, March 10.

LARIDAE.
29. Sterna maxima Bodd.

Two females, San Miguel Island, j\Iaich 15.

COLUMBIDAE.

30. Columba rufina Temm. and Knip.

Ten adults of both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March.

PERISTERIDAE.

31. Zenaida auriculata (Des Murs).

Though the Pearl Islands were so thoroughly collected by Mr. Brown, he
never saw this dove, and the one specimen — the type of Z. hypoleuca Gray —
obtained by Captain Kellett and Lieutenant Wood, if it really came from the
islands, was probably a stray. It must be borne in mind that this is the only
record for the species from north of Ecuador.

Unfortunately many of the birds collected by Kellett and Wood got mixed
up, and any unusual record is hardly to be relied upon. While Gerrit S.
Miller, Jr., was in the British Museum last winter, we asked him to examine
the type of Z. hypoleuca, and also to look at other skins obtained on the same
trip by Kellett and Wood. This Mr. Miller very kindly did in company with
Dr. Sharjie. He informed us that the type of this dove had been injured by a
taxidermist in making over, and so little of it remains that it is now impossible
to state if it differed in any way from Z. auriculata. He also states that the
Kellett and Wood skins were put in open tubes of paper and the data written
on the tubes, that many got interchanged, and that no reliance can now
be placed on the labels. As these officers collected down the west coast of

148 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

South America, it is very likely the dove in question never came from the
Pearl Inlands, or, as we have said above, if it did, its occurrence there must be
looked upon as purely accidental.

32. Columbigallina rufipennis rufipennis (Bp.)

Twelve specimens, adults of both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands,
February, March, and April.

It might be expected that a bird of such feeble flight as the ground dove
would become modified in some way upon these islands where so many other
birds are different from their mainland representatives, but we are unable to
find the slightest difference between the Rufous-winged Ground Doves of the
Pearl Islands and the continent.

33. Leptotila verreauxi Bp.

Eleven specimens, adults of both sexes and young, San Miguel and Saboga
Islands, February, March, and April.

If it should be found necessary to recognize the Central American form as
Lejjtotila verreauxi riottei Lawr. (type from Navarro, Costa Rica) ^ on account
of its slightly darker brown, back, wings, and upper surface of tail, the Pearl
Islands bird will be included with true L. verreauxi of South America.

CUCULIDAE.

34. Crotohaga ani Linne.

Nine specimens, adults of both sexes and one young (March 28), San Miguel
and Saboga Islands, February, March, and April.

PSITTACIDAE.

35. Amazona salvini Salvadori.

Seven adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, March. We can find no con-
stant differences between these and specimens from Panama and Chiriqui.

ALCEDINIDAB.
36. Ceryle torquata (Linne).
Five adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, March.

^ The range of tliis form extends from Costa Rica to Panama, while the paler
true L. verreauxi occupies the whole of northern South America and the Pearl
Islands.

THAYER AND BANGS : PEARL ISLANDS BIRDS. 149

37. Ceryle inda (Linne).
Five adults, both sexes, Sau Miguel Island, February and March.

BUBONIDAE.

38. Otus choliba (Vieill.).i

Six adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March.
In all probability the screech owl of the islands is not true 0. choliba, but
lack of material prevents us from forming any definite opinion.

CAPRIMULGIDAE.
39. Nyctidromus albicollis (Gmel.).

Five adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March.

The Parauque of the Pearl Islands does not differ from that of the mainland
opposite, but to just what form the Panama bird should be referred is at
present uncertain. As a rule specimens from Panama and Chiriqui are larger
and darker than those from Guiana and Venezuela, but we have before us one
skin from Divala, Chiriqui, of the same small rufous type that is the prevailing
bird in Guiana and Venezuela. It is a ^, and its wing and tail are half an
inch shorter than in any other specimen from the same region, and its general
coloration much more rufous. Can it be possible that these small rufous
examples in reality belong to a species distinct from the larger darker bird ?
It is difficult to see how any other explanation can accoimt for their presence
in the same region with the other kind, and for their being so much alike,
■whether they come from Guiana or Chiriqui.

TROCHILIDAE.

40 Phaethornis hyalinus Bangs.

Phaethornis hyalinus Bangs, Auk, vol. 18, pp. 27-28, January, 1901.

Five adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March.
These specimens, exactly like the original three, confirm the characters of
this well-marked island species.

41. Saucerottea edwardi (Delattre awd Boure).
Eight adults, both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands, March and April.

^ One hardly recognizes " Megascops brasiliana (Gmel.) " under this name, but
according to Von Berlepsch the bird must be known by this specific title, while
Stone has shown that Otus must replace Megascops.

150 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

42. Chlorostilbon assimilis Lawr.

Nine adults, both sexes, Sau Miguel and Saboga Islands, February, March,
and April.

PICIDAB.

43. Melanerpes seductus Bangs.
MelanerjKS seductus Bangs, Auk, vol. 18, pp. 26-27, January, 1901.

Nine specimens, adults of both sexes, and one full-gro^vTi young male (March
11), San Miguel Island, February and March.

The woodpecker of the Pearl Islands is a well-marked island form of M.
u-agleri, but whether its differences are better expressed by a binomial or a
trinomial is a question for some reviewer of the group to decide.

FORMICARIIDAE.
44. Thamnophilus nigricristatus Lawk.
Eight adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March.

45 Formicivora alticincta Bangs.

Formicivora alticincta Bangs, Proc. New Eng. Zool. Club, vol. 3, p. 71, March 31,
1902.

Thirteen specimens, adults of both sexes, and one young male, changing
from a dress similar to that of the female to that of the adult male.

The adult males are similar to the two original specimens upon which this
very di.stinct island species was founded. The female was previously un-
known ; it differs from the female of F. intermedia Cab. in being darker, riclier
brown above, and much more extensively ochraceous below. In one specimen
the whole under parts, except throat and flanks, are of this color. It also
wholly lacks the black subapical spots on the feathers of the chest, which in
the female of F. intermedia form a sort of collar of semi-concealed spots.

46. Cercomacra nigricans Scl.

Cercomacra maculicaudis (Scl.) Bangs, Auk, vol. 18, p. .30, January, 1901.

Eleven specimens, adults of both sexes, and one young male in transition
plumage, between that of the adult male and that similar to the female, San
Miguel Island, February and March.

THAYER AND BANGS: PEARL ISLANDS BIRDS. 151

TYRANNIDAB.
47. Mionectes oleaginus oleaginus (Licht).

Two specimens, male and female adult, San Miguel Island, February 24 and
March 7. Like the first pair from the Pearl Islands, these two skins agree
very well with South American examples, and are slightly larger and a little
paler in color than M- oleaginus parcus Bangs of Panama.

48- Myiopagis placens accola Bangs.

Fifteen adults of both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islamls, February,
March, and April. These skins agree with specimens from Panama, but are
slightly paler in color than the typical series from Chiri(|ui. The back is paler
and grayer green, and the throat and breast slightly yellower, less grayish. In
these points of difference from accola the islaml bird approaches M. placens
pallens Bangs of northern South America (described from Santa Marta). On
the whole, however, though somewhat intermediate, Panama and the Pearl
Islands specimens should perhaps be referred to accola.

49. Ornithion pusillum (Cab. and Heine).

Eighteen specimens, adults of both sexes, and one young ^ in nestling
plumage (March 18), San Miguel, Saboga, and Pacheca Islands, March and
April.

This fine series shows that the bird of the Pearl Islands does not differ from
that of Panama. At the present time, however, we are not prepared to say
that the Panama form is true 0. pimllum which was described from Cartagena.
The rather scanty and poor material examined from Colombia points to the
two being subspecifically distinct, in which case the Panama race should bear
the name, Ornithion pusillMm flaviventre (Scl. and Salv.). The one nestling
differs from the adults in having the cap less sharply defined and more nearly
concolorous with the back, all the colors more blended, and the wing bars
rufous instead of whitish or yellowish.

50. Elainea pagana subpagana (Scl. and vSalv.).

Twenty-three adults, both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands, February,
March, and April.

There appear to be no constant differences between the island skins and
those from the mainland of Panama and Chiriqui. The olive green of the back
varies much in this series, and some specimens are very pale ; others in which
the plumage has become faded are very brown. In measurements the series
varies a good deal, but this is also true of mainland specimens.

152 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

51. Elainea albivertex sordidata (Bangs).
Elainea sordidata Bangs, Auk, vol. 18, pp. 28-30, January, 1901.

Fourteen adults, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March.

It is claimed by Von Berlepsch and Hellmayr (Journ. f. Ornith. Januar-Heft,
1905, p. 2) that Elainea sororia Bangs from the Sierra Nevada de Santa Marta
is identical with E. albivertex Pelz. of Brazil. The bird of the Pearl Islands
seems a subspecies of this species, differing only in average characters. The
present series bears out the slight differences noticed in the original description
of E. sordidata— s\\^i\j shorter wing, tail, and tarsus, and longer and rather
broader bill; slightly duller and grayer upper parts, smaller white crown patch
and narrower wing bars. All these differences are, however, average char-
acters only, and the subspecies is not a very satisfactorily marked one.
Specimens from Panama City are troublesome; they are about the size of the
island examples, and differ from them only in having slightly smaller bills. It
is possible that sordidata is too slightly differentiated to stand even as a
subi^pecies.

52. Sublegatus arenarum (Salv.).

Nineteen adults, both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands, February,
March, and April.

53. Myiodynastes audax nobilis (Scl.).

Four adults, both sexes, San Miguel, Saboga, and Pacheca Islands, March
and April.

54. Myiobius naevius furfurosus, sub. sp. nov.
Myiobius naevius Bangs, Auk, vol. 18, p. 30, January, 1901 (nee. Bodd.).

Three specimens, two adult females, one adult ^, Saboga Island, April.

Tj/pe. — Coll. E. A. and O. Bangs, No. 14,397, adult 9 , Saboga Island, Bay
of Panama, April 9, 1904.

Characters. — Similar to true 3f. naevius (Bodd.) of South America (type
from Guiana), but differing in being much more strongly buffy below, buff on
throat and breast and buff yellow on belly and under tail coverts; the breast
very much less distinctly striped with brownish ; upper parts rather paler —
about russet.

From 3L crypterythrus Scl. of West Ecuador and 31. cryptoxajithus Scl. of
East Ecuador, the new form differs in its much paler brown back, though
agreeing with the former in having the breast indistinctly flammulated.

THAYER AND BANGS : PEARL ISLANDS BIRDS. 153

Measurements. —

No. ,

Locality.

Sex.

Wing.

Tail.

Tarsus.

Culmea.

14,397

Saboga Isl.

9 ad.

54

49

15.5

11

14,398

do.

<?ad.

55.5

47.5

15.5

11

A.

do.

9 ad.

54

48

15

10

4,876

Sail Miguel Lsl.

(J ad.

55.5

51

15.5

11.5

Remarks. — The three 9pecimen.s contained in the present collection agree
with one that Mr. Brown took in San Miguel Island on his first trip in 1900,
and difl'er, as pointed out above, from all examples of true M- naeinus we have
examined. The bird is rare in the islands, and though specially on the look-
out for it, Mr. Brown was unable to get a large series.

* 55. Empidonax traillii traillii (Aud.).
One adult male, Saboga Island, April 13.

*56. Empidonax traillii alnorum Brewst.

Five adults, both sexes, Saboga Island, April 11 to 13. These have been
kintUy identifled for us by Brewster, who pronounces five out of the six Empi-
donax taken by Mr. Brown alnorum and one true traillii.

*57. Horizopus virens (Linnk).
Four adults, both sexes, Saboga and Pacheca Islands, April 6 to 14.

58. Myiarchus ferox panamensis (Lawr.).

Twenty-four specimens, both sexes, Sau Miguel, Saboga, and Pacheca Islands,
February, March, and April.

*59. Myiarchus crinitus crinitus (Linne).

Two adult males, Saboga Island, April 9 and 13.

By a mistake Nelson recorded Myiarchus nigriceps Scl. from the Pearl Islands
in his Revision of the North American Mainland Species of Myiarchus,
Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, vol. 17, pp. 49-50, March 10, 1904. The
specimens collected by Mr. Brown loaned at the time were from San Miguel
in the Sierra Nevada de Santa Marta, which Nelson mistook for San Miguel
Island. The species has never been taken in the Pearl Islands.

* 60- Tyrannus tyrannus tyrannus (Linne).

Seven specimens, both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands, March 18 to
April 8.

154 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

61. Tyrannus melancholicus satrapa (Light.).

Thirty-four adults, both sexes, Sail Miguel, Saboga, and Pacheca Islands,
February, March, and April.

TURDIDAE.
*62. Hylocichla swainsoni (Cab).
Two adults, ^ and 9 i ^Jiboga Island, April 8 and 11.

TROGLODYTIDAE.

63. Troglodytes musculus inquietus (IUird).

One adult male, San Miguel Island, March 18. This skin agrees in all
respects with specimens from Panama. As it was tlie only house wren Mr.
Brown saw in the islands on either trip, it may have come there by some
accident.

64- Thryophilus galbraithii conditus Bangs.

Thrtjophibis rjalbniithii conditus Bangs, Proc. New Eng. Zotil. Club, vol. 4, pp. 3-4,
March' 16, 1903.

Ten specimens, adults of both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and
March. These, like the original specimens, are deeper in color and slightly
larger than mainland examples of true T. galbraithii.

VIREONIDAE.

66. Vireosylva insulanus (Bangs).

Vireo insulanus Bangs, Proc. New Eng. Zoul. Club, vol. 3, p. 73, March 31, 1902.

Twenty specimens, adults of Ijoth sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands,
February, March, and April. The present series shows the same characters to
distinguish the island bird from true F. flavoviridis Cassin as did the original
four skins on which the form was based, — smaller size, duller color of back,
and more pronounced lateral line of pileum and pale superciliary stripe. Still
all these characters are average ones, and had not Ridgway in Birds of North
and Middle America treated the Inrd as a distinct species, we should feel in-
clined to reduce it to a subspecies of V. flavoviridis.

*66 Vireosylva olivacea (LiNNE).
Five adults, both sexes, Saboga Island, April 7 to 12.

THAYER AND BANGS : PEAKL ISLANDS BIRDS. 155

HIRUNDINIDAE.
67- Progne chalybea chalybea (Gmel.).

Five adults, both sexes, S;iii Miguel Island, March. One colony of this dull-
colored martin was nesting in the church at San Miguel; it was not seen else-
where in the islands.

MNIOTILTIDAB.
*68 Protonotaria citrea (BoDD.).
Three females, San Miguel Island, Februar\- 24, March 2 and 13.

*69. Vermivora peregrina (Wils.).!

Three males, San Miguel Island, February 26 and March 1, Saboga Island,
April 1. The specimen killed February 26 is moulting, as is also the one March
1, the olive green feathers of the cap being replaced by gray ones, and new
feathers coming in on the throat and breast. The example taken April 1,
however, is wholly in the plumage of the young in first autumn and shows
no signs of approaching moult.

* 70. Chrysocantor aestiva aestiva (Gmel.).

Twenty-five specimens, both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands, February
21 to April 13. Many of these are in the moult ; others, especially females, are
in much abraded plumage.

71- Chrysocantor erithachorides (Baird).

Seventy-three specimens, San Miguel and Saboga Islands, February, March,
and April.

These skins do not differ from examples from Panama. The series shows a
considerable amount of individual variation, apart from that due to age. Sev-
eral adult males are intensely colored, with the under parts much suffused with
cadmium orange, the smaller wing coverts and yellow })ortion of the tail mostly
of this color, and with the colors of the head very intense ; others, apparentlv
quite as old, are much duller. The extent of the rufous chestnut of the head
varies from, in some skins, where it covers most of the chest to others where it
ends at the throat. The rufous chestnut streaks on breast and sides vary much,
in amount, in intensity of color, and in width. Some .specimens have the back
streaked with rufous chestnut, while usually it is plain yellowish olive green.
In fact, it is difficult to pick out two skins quite alike.

1 Cf. Oberliolser, Smith. Mis. Collections, vol. 48, pp. 66-67, May 13, 1905, for
change of generic name Iltlininthopfiilu to Venmuora.

156 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

The females vary as much as the males. The fully adult female usually has
some rufous chestnut in the crown, but the amount of this color is very vari-
able, and a few, apparently fully adult, have none of it. The shade of yellow
of the under parts and the amount of streaking below vary as in the males.

In the immature plumage, in both sexes, the belly and sides are dull whitish,
the throat and chest yellowish, and the back and head much mixed with gray.
No specimens were taken in nestling plumage, nor probably wholly in the sec-
ond stage, in which the back and head would undoul)ted]y be wholly gray.

The species was common in mangrove swamps bordering the islands, much
more so than in the mangroves near the city of Panama.

*72. Dendroica coronata (Linne).
One female, San Miguel Island, February 23.

* 73- Dendroica rara (Wilson).
One female, San Miguel Island, March 15.

*74. Dendroica blackburniae (Gmel.).
Two males, Saboga Island, April 4 and 11.

*75. Dendroica castanea (Wilson).

Two males, San Miguel Island, March 6, and Saboga Island, April 3.

The specimen taken March 6 is in the midst of the spring moult, changing
everywhere from autumn to spring plumage ; the one taken April 3 has nearly,
if not quite, completed the moult to its summer dress.

*76. Seiurus motacilla (Vieill.).

One female, San Miguel Island, March 18.

*77. Seiurus noveboracensis noveboracensis (Gmel.).

Three specimens, one male, two females, San Miguel Island, February 24 and
March 8, and Saboga Island, April 9.

*78. Wilsonia canadensis (Linne).
One (female ?) specimen, Saboga Island, April 4.

*79. Setophaga ruticilla (Linni?).
One female, San Miguel Island, March 2.

THAYER AND BANGS: PEARL ISLANDS BIRDS. 157

COEREBIDAE.

80. Cyanerpes cyaneus (Linnk).

Thirty-eight specimens, both sexes, San Miguel Island, February and March.
There seem to be no ditferences between specimens from the islands antl the
coast of Panama opposite.

81. Coereba cerinoclunis Bangs.

Coereba cerinoclunis Bangs, Proc. New Eng. Zoul. Club, voL 2, pp. 51-52,
Feb. 8, 1901.

Twenty-nine specimens, adults of both sexes and young in nestling plumage,
the latter taken February 28 to March 16, San Miguel and Saboga Islands,
February, March, and April. Many of the specimens taken in February and
March are moulting, while those killed in April have, as a rule, completed the
spring moult and are in fine plumage.

This is a strongly characterized island species.

ICTERIDAE.
82. Megaquiscalus major macrourus (Swainson).

Eighteen specimens, adults of both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands,
February, March, and April.

This series Nelson kindly compared with typical Mexican specimens, and
found no differences whatever between the island birds and those from eastern
Mexico and Central America generally.

*83. Icterus spurius (Linne).
One adult male, Saboga Island, April 13.

*84. Icterus galbula (Linne).
One male, San Miguel Island, March 2.

TANAGRIDAE.
85. Tanagra cana dilucida, sub. sp. nov.

Type. — Coll. E. A. and 0. Bangs, No. 14,482, adult ,f, San Miguel Island, Bay
of Panama, Feb. 25, 1904.

Thirty-one specimens, adults of both sexes and two young — male and
female, March 3 and April 1, Sun Miguel and Saboga Islands, February,
March, and April.

158 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

Characters. — Similar to T. cana cana Swainsoii, but larger with a larger bill;
brighter blue, less greenish, on margins of wing and tail feathers ; lesser and
middle wing coverts darker and brighter blue — smalt blue ; the contrast be-
tween colors of smaller wing coverts and bastard wing and edging of larger
wing feathers not marked, as is the case in T. cana cana ; rump and upper tail
coverts, usually, decidedly bluer, less greenish.

Measureme.)its. —

No.

Sex.

Lotality.

Wing.

Tail.

Tarsus.

Exposed
Culmen.

14,482

$ ad.

San Miguel Isl.

92.5

66.5

19.6

15

A.

<?ad.

do.

91

66

20

14.2

B.

$ ad.

do.

93

66

20

14

C.

c?ad.

do.

91

65

20

14.2

D.

S ad.

do.

93

67

19.8

14.4

40,5.56 M.

C.

z.

c? ad.

do.

92

62

20.2

14

40,557 M.

C.

z.

$ ad.

do.

92

63

19

14

40,558 M.

C.

z.

i ad.

do.

91.5

64

20

14

40,559 M.

C.

z.

S ad.

do.

91.5

64.5

20

14.2

4,984

(J ad.

do.

92

64.5

19.2

14.2

4,986

c?ad.

do.

92

64

20

14.8

14,485

S ad.

Saboga Isl.

92

64

19.4

14

14,487

$ ad.

do.

93.5

67

20.4

14.8

I.

^ad.

do.

90

64

20

14

J.

^ad.

do.

92.5

64

20.4

14.2

K.

$ ad.

do.

94

67.5

20.6

14

40,560 M.

C.

z.

^ad.

do.

91

65

20

13.8

40,.561 M.

c.

z.

S aA.

do.

92

67

19.6

14.2

14,483

9 ad.

San Miguel Isl.

88.5

62

20

14

N.

9 ad.

do.

86.5

61

19.8

14

40,562 M.

c.

z.

9 ad.

do.

85.5

61

19.6

13.4

40,563 M.

c.

z.

9 ad.

do.

86.5

61

20

14

14,489

9 ad.

Saboga Isl.

87

62

20

13.4

14,491

9 ad.

do.

87

60.5

19.2

13.2

Remarks. — The combination of several slight differences distinguishes the
blue tanager of the Pearl Islands from that of the mainland. Of these its
larger bill is its best character. Its wings and tail average much brighter and
darker blue, and the form averages a little larger. It is, however, a clo.sely
related subspecies, and some single individuals might prove troublesome, but
in series the differences stand out fairly well.

*86. Piranga rubra rubra (Linne).

Three specimens, one male and two females, Saboga Island, April 5, 10,
and 12.

THAYER AND BANGS: TEARL ISLANDS BIRDS. 159

*87- Piranga erythromelas (Vieill.).

Two males, Saboga Island, April 9. Both these are in the scarlet plumage
with l)liuk wings; one specimen has a wholly yellow bill.

88. Raniphocelus dimidiatus limatus (Bangs).
Bhamphocdus limatus Bangs, Auk, vol. 18, pp. 31, 32, January, 1901.

Fort3^-five adult-s of lioth sexes, San Miguel, Saboga, and Pacheca Islands,
February, March, and April.

In Birds of North and Middle America, Ridgway treats this strongly
marked island race as a subspecies. Perhaps this is the better course, but it is
nevertheless a very distinct form.

PRINGILLIDAE.

89. Volatinia jacarini splendens (Vieill.).
Thirty specimens, adults of both sexes, and young males, San Miguel Island,
February and ]\Iarch. Some examples, like the first two recnrded from the
islands, have larger bills than any in a considerable series of mainland speci-
mens, but as a rule the bill is not larger than in the continental form.

'o^

90- Sporophila gutturalis (Light.).
Two adult males, Saboga Island, April.

*91. Cyanospiza cyanea (Linne).
One female, Saboga Island, April 6.

92. Oryzoborus funereus Sclater.
Ten adults, Itotli sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Lslands, March and April.

*93. Zamelodia ludoviciana (Linne).
One female, San Miguel l.slaud, February 28.

94- Saltator albicollis isthmicus (Scl).

Thirty-six adults, both sexes, San Miguel and Saboga Islands, February,
March, and April.

In Birds of North and Middle America Ridgway comments on the rather
grayer colors of the original series from San Miguel Island taken in April
ami May. The jiiv.sent .series include.^ many specimens in perfectly fresh
unworn plumage. These are hardly distinguishable from mainland examples,

160 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPAllATIVE ZOOLOGY.

and we have found it impossible to pick out single skins. Still, as a whole, the
bird of the Pearl Islands is a trifle darker and grayer olive green on crown and
sides of head, and some examples are much more so than any from the main-
land. It is possible that in time a recognizable form will be developed in the
islands, but at present the slight differences are too inconstant to warrant giving
the bird a name. Some examples have the end of the bill yellow (so marked
on the labels by Mr. Brown), but usually it is dark-colored throughout.

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, In charge of Alex-
AXDiiR Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

E. EHLEKS. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HARTLAUB. The Comatulae of the "Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUUWlti. The Genus Peutacrinus.

A. MILXE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VERRILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexaxdkr Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jett'ersou F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. h. ilARlv. Studies on I.epidosteus, continued.

•' On Araclinactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. McM. WOOD WORTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITIMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of tlie Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Coninilssion Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Conmiander Z. L. TA^r^"ER, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: — "

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna.

" The Panamic Deep-Sea Fauna.

H. B. BIGELOW. The Siphonopbores.
K. BRA>;DT. The Sagittae.

" The Thalassicolae.

W. R. COE. The Annelids.
W. H. DALL. The Mollusks.
REINHARD DOHRX. The Eyes of Deejv

Sea Crustacea.
H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.
HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster.
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidiaus.

S. J. HICKSON. The Antipatbids.
J. P. 3IC5IURRICH. The Actinarians.
E. L. MARK. Branchiocerlanthus.
JOHN ^lURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.
P. SCHIEJIEXZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

ropods.
THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarians.
M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

Doliolidae.
H. B. WARD. Tlie Sipunculids.
W. McM. WOOD WORTH. The Nemerteans,

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLII., and
also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVII. ; of the Memoirs, Vols. I. to
XXIV, and also Vols. XXVIII., XXIX., XXXI., and XXXII.

Vols. XLIII., XLVL, XLVIII., and XLIX., of the Bulletin,
and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., and XXXIII. of the
Memoirs, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the Museum, of
investigations carried on b^' students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural Histoiy, and of work by specialists based
upon the Museum Collections and Explorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. I). Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on tlie Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Comniission
Steamer " Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Com-
manding, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from October, 1904, to April, 1906, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratory, in charge of Professor N. S.
Shaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals ; one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the
Memoirs (4to) usually appear annually. Each number of the
Bulletin and of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list
of the publications of the Museum will be sent on application
to the Librarian of the Museum of Comparative Zoolog}', Cam-
bridge, Mass.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 9.

REPORTS ON THE SCIEXTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITIOX TO THE
EASTERN TROPICAL PACIFIC, IX CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ,
BY THE U S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER "ALBATROSS," FROM
OCTOBER. 1904, TO MARCH, 1905, LIEUT. COMMANDER L. M. GARRETT,
U. S. N., COMMANDING.

III.

CPvASPEDOTELLA, A NEW GENUS OF THE
CYSTOFLAGELLATA, AN EXAMPLE OF
CONVERGENGE.

Br OllAKLES AxwrKDD KOFOID.

[Published by Permission of George M. Bowers, U. S. Fish Commissioner.]

With One Plate.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

Septemijkr, 1905.

Reports on thk Scientific Results of the Expedition to the East-
ern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer " Albatross," from October,
1904, to March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. INI. Garrett,
U. S. N., Commanding, published or in preparation: —

a. agassiz. General Report on the Expedi-
tion.

A. agassiz. 1.1 Three Letters to Geo. M.
Bowers, U. S. Fish Com.

A. AGASSIZ and H. L. CLARK. The Echini.
F. E. BEDDARD. The Earthworms.

H. B. BIGELOW. The Medusae.

R. P. BIGELOW. The Stomatopods.

S. P. CLARKE. The Hydroids.

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans.

L. J. COLE. Tlie Pycnogonida.

W. H. DALL. The Mollusks.

C. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. The Fishes.
W. G. PARIOW. The Algae.

S. GARMAN. The Reptiles.

H. J. IIANSEN, The Cirripeds.

H. J. HANSEN. The Schizopods.

S. HENSHAW. The Insects.

W. E. HOYLE. The Cephalopods. '

C. A. KOFOID. III.3 The Protozoa.

P. KRiJMBACH. The Sagittae.

H. LUDWIG. The Holothurians.

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

H. LUDWIG. The Ophiurans.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinaria.

G. W. MULLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

MARY J. RATHBUN. The Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON. 11.2 xhe Isopoda.

W. E. RITTER. The Tunicates. t

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Bryozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON. The Plants.

G. O. SARS. The Copepods.

F. E. SCHULZE. The Siliceous Sponges.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-
pods.

TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.

T. W. VAUGHAN. The Corals.

W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

1 BulL M. C. Z., Vol. XLVI., No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 6, July, 1905, 4 pp., 1 pi.

3 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 9, September, 1905, 5 pp., 1 pL

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 9.

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
EASTERN TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ,
BY THE U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER "ALBATROSS," FROM
OCTOBER, 1904, TO MARCH, 1905, LIEUT. COMMANDER L. M. GARRETT,
U. S. N., COMMANDING.

in.

CRASPEDOTELLA, A NEW GENUS OF THE
CYSTOFLAGELLATA, AN EXAMPLE OF
CONVERGENGE.

By Charles At\vooi> Kofoid.

[Published by Permieslon of Geokoe M. Bowers, U. S. Fish Cominisaioner.]

With One Plate.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

September, 1905.

No. 9. — Reports on the Scientific Remits of the Expedition to
the Eastern Tropical Pacific^ in charge of Alexander Agassiz,
hy the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer ^^ Albatross '^ from
October, 1904, io March, 1905, LiEUT. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

III.

Craspedotella, a new genus of the Cystoflagellata, an
example of convergence. By Charles Atwood Kopoid.

In the plankton obtained by the Eastern Pacific Expedition of the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross" in 1904-5 there occurred
a Cystoflagellate belonging to the Leptodiscidab which is of unusual
interest not only because of its relationships, but especially on account
of its striking resemblance in form to a craspedote medusa. The same
organism subsequently appeared in the plankton collected in June at
the San Diego Marine Biological Station of the University of Califor-
nia. It was first taken in the mid-Pacific at Albatross Sta. 4730, about
15° 7' S., 117° 1'.2 W., midway between the Galapagos Islands and
Manga Reva. This fact, together with its occurrence off the coast of
Southern California, is indicative of a wide distribution in warm-
temperate and tropical seas.

This organism is minute in comparison with Leptodisrus medusoides
R. Hertwig (0.6-1.5 mm.) or Nodiluca miliaris Suriray (0.3-1.25 mm.),
being only 0.15-0.18 mm. in diameter. Its form is campanulate, with
a very well-defined horizontal velum. A large plasma mass is sym-
metrically pendent from the centre of the bell, whose cavity forms about
two thirds of the volume of the organism. In polar view its outline is
circular, and the orifice bounded by the velum is also of the same form.
It is thus distinctly similar to a craspedote medusa in its form, resem-
bling somewhat Laodicea cellularia A. Agassiz. The resemblance is
further enhanced by the circlets of refractive granules found in the
salient margins of the oblique band, while radial plasma strands in this
band and in the velum suggest a muscular activity of the bell and
resultins: locomotion similar to that of a medusa. Its resemblance to

VOL. XLVI. — NO. 9

164 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

a medusa is thus even more striking than that of Leptodiscus medusoides
described by R. Hertwig,^ which is disk-shaped and lacks the velum.
It seems probable that the ring of granules found in Leptodiscus may be
the homologue of one of the two circlets found on either side of the
oblique band in the organism here described.

In structural details it has much in common with Leptodiscus, but the
presence of the velum justifies its generic distinction in the family
Leptodiscidae.

Craspedotella, gen. nov.

Medusiform, with a velum at the margin of the bell-cavity which has
contractile walls.

Craspedotella pileolus, sp. nov.

Form low campanulate or cap-shaped, with a broad oblique band
{ohl. hd.) at the base, bordered above and below by salient ridges and
continued toward the axis in a wide horizontal velum (^vel.) with circu-
lar opening and entire margin. Its greatest diameter is located at the
ridge above the oblique band and is 1.5 to 3 times its height. The
bell opening is about 0.6 of the greatest diameter. A mass of richly
vacuolated granular plasma fills the apex and spreads laterally nearly to
the upper margin of the oblique band. Outside of this region the wall
of the bell is thin, hyaline, and somewhat rigid, and its plasma resembles
that of Lepjtodiscus, but has well-marked radial strands in the oblique
band and in the velum. Within tlie central mass are found a large
fluid-filled vacuole (vac), a number of scattered food vacuoles (f'd. vac),
and the small ellipsoidal nucleus (nuc). On the side of the bell, about
midway between the apex and the oblique band, appears the minute
pore of the flagellar sheath {flay, sh.) which extends about one half the
distance to the apex as a straight tube just beneath the surface. Near
the apex of the bell is the small cytopyge (cyf'p'ij.), from which passes
a sinuous canal soon lost in the plasma. Foecal accumulations similar
to the scattered food particles were found in this canal. The food
appears to consist principally of minute Algae, or their spores. On the
under side of this bell at one side of the pendent mass of plasma is a
lar-ge vestibulum (rst.) bounded laterally by a strand of plasma from the
central mass. From its deeper end a tapering cytopharynx (ryf'ph.)
sinks into the plasma and disappears near the apex of the bell in a

^ Ucber Leptodiscus medusoides eine neiie den Noctiliiccn verwandte Flagellate.
Jena. Zeitsch. Bd. XI, pp. 307-323, Taf. XVII-XVIII, 1877.

KOFOID: CRASPEDOTELLA. 165

somewhat denser mass of plasma not far from tlie nucleus. Its walls
are coarsely striate, with a few prominent longitudinal ridges. Its
opening is unquestionably icithin the bell and most careful scrutiny
reveals no orifice on the outer surface.

In Leptodisctcs Hertwig describes the cytopharynx (Cytostom) as
opening upon the upper (outer) surface of the curved disk on the same
face as the flagellar sheath. In Craspedotella it unquestionably opens
within the bell on the opposite face from the flagellar sheath. This
seems to afford an additional ground for the generic distinctness of
these two forms. The two organisms also diverge in other details
of structure. In Leptodiscus the granular plasma is of small extent and
very slightly protuberant, the pharyngeal striae are fine and close set,
the cytopyge does not appear, the vacuole is small, and the peripheral
plasma has less of a radial arrangement.

Adaptation to a pelagic life in the oceanic environment has resulted
in the case of Leptodiscus, and still more in Craspedotella, in the devel-
opment of a bodily form which beai's a uiost striking resemblance to
that attained by another and much higher gi'oup of organisms living
under the same conditions. In Craspedotella there is differentiated
even a superficial organ, the velum, with the accompanying bell-cavity,
with form, relations, and possibly a function, similar to those of the
corresponding organ in the medusa. The necessities of flotation and
locomotion have brought about independently in the medusa and the
cystoflagellate an external similarity in form, though the inner struc-
tural elements are exceedingly diverse in the two, and the one is a
unicellular and the other multicellular organism, — an instance of
convergence of the most striking character.

KopoiD. — Craspedotella pileolus.

CRASPEDOTELLA PILEOLUS

Fig. 1. Apical view. Mag. 300: 1.

Fig. 2. Lateral view. Cyt'ph., cytopharynx. vel., velum, ohl. I'd., oblique
band, vac, vacuole, f'd. vac, food vacuole, nuc, nucleus, fag. sh.,
flagellar sheath. Cyt'p'g., cytopyge. vst., vestibulum.

Eastern Pacific Ex. "" Albatross.'

■--rryrxz^rrri

vac. a^- -

M:^obibd.

cyt'ph.

cyrpg._.,
flag, sh

fd-vac^z.".

_ _ vst.

obl.bd.

^ \ i^el.

CRASPEDOTELLA PILEOLUS.

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of Alex-
ANDKR Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blalce," as follows: —

E. EHLEKS. Tlie Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HARTLAUB. The Couiatulae of the "Blake,'' with 15 Plates.

II. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentacrinus.

A. MILNE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VERRILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

KiCports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. IMARIC. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Araclmactis.

R.T.HILL. On the Geology of the "Windward Islands.
W. McM. W00I>W0RTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHIT.MAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of. tlie U. S. Fish Comnnssiou Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauiia.

" ■ The Paiiamic Deep-Sea Fauna.

H. B BIGELOW. The Siphouophores.
K. BRANDT. Tlie Sagittae.

" The Thalassicolae.

W. R. COE. The Annelids.
W. H. DALL. Tlie Mollusks.
REINHARD DOHRN. The Eyes of Deep-

Sea Crustacea.
H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.
HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster.
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians.

S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.
J. P. McMUKRICH. The Actiiiftriaiis.
E. L. MARK. Branchiocerianthus.
JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.
P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hefe-

ropods.
THEO. STUDER. Tlie Alcyonarians.
M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

Doliolidae.
H. B. WARD. The Sipunculids.
W. McM. WOOD WORTH. The Nemerteans.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLII., and
also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVII. ; of the Memoiks, Vols. I. to
XXIV., and also Vols. XXVII L, XXIX., XXXI., and XXXII.

Vols. XLIIL, XLVI., XL VIII., and XLIX., of the Bulletin,
and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII. , XXX., and XXXIII. of the
Memoius, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the Museum, of
investioations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upon the Museum Collections and Explorations.

Tlie following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on the Uesults of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Bhike," Lieut.
Commander C. 1). Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. 11. Bartlett, U. S.N.,
Commanding.

Reports on the Results of tlie Expedition of 1891 of tlie U. S. Yish Commission
Steamer "Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Com-
manding, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
*' Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
cliarge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from October, 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the ZoJWogical Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratory, in cliarge of Professor N. S.
Shaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular inter-
vals ; one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the
Memoirs (4to) usually appear annually. Each number of the
Bulletin and of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list
of the publications of the Museum will be sent on application
to the Librarian of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass. '

'^.^^

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARI> COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 10.

REPORTS ON THE RESULTS OF DREDGING, UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF
ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, IN THE GULF OF MEXICO AND THE CARIB-
BEAN SEA, AND ON THE EAST COAST OF THE UNITED STATES,
1877 TO 1880, BY THE U. S. COAST SURVEY STEAMER "BLAKE,"
LIKUT. COMMANDER C. D. SIGSBEE, U.S.N., AND COMMANDER J. R.
BARTLETT, U. S. N., COMMANDING.

XLL

ZUR ANATOMIE

VON

PENTACRINUS DECORUS WY. TH.

Von August Reichensperger.

[Published by permission of Carlile P. Patterson and Otto H. Tittmann, Superintendents
of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.]

MiT Drei Tafeln.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

December, 1905.

Reports on thk Scientific Results of the Expedition to the East-
ern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from October,
1904, TO March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. M. Garrett,
U. S. N., Commanding, published or in preparation: —

A. agassiz. General Report on the Expedi-
tion.

A. AGASSIZ. I.i Three Letters to Geo. M.
Bowers, U. S. Fi.sh Com.

A. AGASSIZ and H. L. CLARK. The Echini.
F. K. BP:DDAKD. The Earthworms.

H. B. BIGELOW. The Medusae.

R. P. BIGELOW. The Stomatopoda.

S. F. CLARKE. The Hydroids.

W. R. COE. Tlie Nemprteans.

L. J. COLE. The Pycnogonida.

W. H. DALL. The MoUusks.

C. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. The Fishes.
W. G. FARLOW. The Algae.

S. GARMAN. The Kept lies.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.

H. J. HANSEN. The Scluzoyods.

S. HEN3HAW. The Insects.

W. E. HOYLE. The Cephalopoda.

C. A. KOFOID. III.3 The Protozoa.

P. KRUMBACH. The Sagittae.

R. VON LENDENFELD. The Sponges.

H. LUDWIG. The Holothurians.

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

H. LUDWIG. The Opliiurans.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinaria.

G. W. MULLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. Tlie Bottom Specimens.

MARY J. RATHBUN. The Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON. II.2 The Isopods.

W. E. RITTER. The Tuuicates.

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Bryozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON. The Plants.

G. O. SARS. The Copepods.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-
pods.

TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.

T. W. VAUGHAN. Tlie Cor.als.

R. WOLTERECK. The Amphipods.

W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

1 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 6, July, 1905, 4 pp., 1 pi.

3 Bull. M. C. Z., VoL XLVL, No. 9, September, 1905, 5 pp., 1 pi.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 10.

REPORTS ON THE RESULTS OF DREDGING, UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF
ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, IN THE GULF OF MEXICO AND THE CARIB-
BEAN SEA, AND ON THE EAST COAST OF THE UNITED STATES,
1877 TO 1880, BY THE U, S. COAST SURVEY STEAMER "BLAKE,"
LIEUT. COMMANDER C. D. SIGSBEE, U. S. N., AND COMMANDER J. R.
BARTLETT, U.S.N., COMMANDING.

XLL

ZUR AXATOMIE

VON

PENTACRINUS DECORUS WY. TH.

Von August Reichensperger.

[Published by permission of Carlile P. Patterson and Otto H. Tittmann, Superintendents
of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.]

MiT Drei Tafeln.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

December, 1905.

No. 10. — Reports on the Results of Dredging, under the Super-
vision of Alexander Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico and the
Caribbean Sea, and on the East Coast of the United States,
1877 to 1880, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake,"
Lieut. Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander
J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N., Commanding.

[Published by permission of Carlile P. Patterson and Otto H. Tittmann, Superin-
tendents of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.]

XLI.

Zur Anatomie von Pentacrinus decorus Wt. Th. Yon August

Reichensperger.^

Das von niir benutzte Material stammt von der nnter Leitung von
Alexander Agassiz 1878-1879 zur Erforschung des Karibischen Meeres
unternommenen Expedition des "Blake." Es bestand aus 25 zum Teil
ganz unverletzten, gestielten Crinoiden, die ich nach P. H. Carpenter (5)
samtlich als " Pentacrinus decorus " Wy. Th. bestimmte.

Das Material erwies sich als gut konserviert. Die einzelnen Teile
wurden in Schnittserien nach den verschiedensten Richtungen zerlegt.
Zur Entkalkung bediente ich mich eiues tropfenweisen Zusatzes von
konzeutrierter Salpetersaure zu relativ grossen oft erneuerten Mengen
70 %igen Alkohols. Mit besserera Erfolg wandte ich sehr scliwache
Chromsaurelosungen an. Zu 1000 ccm 1 %iger Chromsiiure setzte ich
50 Tropfen Salzsaure oder bis 30 Tropfen Salpetersaure zu. Diese
Mischung wurde in der ersten Zeit unter taglichem AVechsel auf ein
Viertel mit destilliertem Wasser verdiinnt, spater langsam fortschreitend
bis auf hochstens }4 gesteigert. Die durch blosse Anwendung von

1 This paper has also been published in Vol. LXXX, Part 1, of the Zeitschrift
fiir wissenscliaftliche Zoologie. Specimens of Pentacrinus decorus were dredged
by the "Blake" — ofT Havana, 175 and 177 fathoms ; off Montserrat, 88 fathoms ;
and off St. Vincent, 124 fathoms.

170 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Chromsaure leicht hervorgerufene Brlichigkeit der Gewebe war bei Ge-
branch jener Mischung nicht zu bemerken. Zum Einbetten wurde aus-
schliesslich Paraffin genommen.

Als Farbemittel kamen vor allem Boraxkarmin, neutrales Karmin
nach Hamann, sowie Hamalaun in Stlickfarbung zur Anwendung. Stel-
lenweise erwies sich Hamatoxylin in Verbindung mit Eosin als glinstig,
Sehr gut eignete sich fur alle Gewebe, auch flir die Kalkgrundsubstanz
eine konzentrierte oder verdtlnnte w^ssrige Thioninlosung, ebenfalls unter
allenfiillsiger Nacbiarbung rait Eosin. Thionin gab stets nooh brauchbare
Resultate, wenn viele andre Farbemittel der vorausgegangenen Entkal-
kung wegen versagten.

Es ist mir eine angenebtne Pflicbt, Herrn Geheimrat Professor Dr.
Hubert Ludwig hier meinen besten Dank auszusprechen flir die tjber-
lassung des seltenen Materials und fur seine liebenswlirdige Bereitwil-
ligkeit, mich jederzeit mit Rat und Tat zu untersttltzen.

Einleitung.

P. H. Carpenter macbte zuerst eingehendere Untersuchungen an
Pentaa-inus decorus, deren Ergebuisse in Bd. XI des Challengerwerkes
niedergelegt sind. Er fuhrt jedoch selbst verschiedentlich an, zur Er-
kenntnis des feineren Baues und Verlaufes mancher Organe sei das Ma-
terial nicht in hinreichend gutem Znstande geweseu.

Zur allgemeinen Orientierung mochte ich zun^chst auf die etwas
umgeanderte Verkleinerung seiner Taf. LXII verweisen, Taf. Ill, Fig. 1.

"Was die Benennung der Skelettteile des Kelches und der Arme anbe-
trifft, so verwende ich die von P. H. Carpenter in einer spatercn Ab-
handlung (7) vorgeschlagenen Namen. In dem Challengerwerk (5)
lasst er auf die den Boden des Kelches bildenden Basalia die Radialia I,
II und III folgen. Von letzteren geht die erste dichotomische Teilung
aus, die bei vielen Crinoiden die einzige bleibt. In dem 1890 ersrhien-
enen Aufsatz (7) belegt Carpenter die ehemala Radialia II und III ge-
nannten Kalkstticke mit dem Namen Costalia I und II. Verzweigen
sich die Arme nun weiter, so heissen ihre Glieder bis zur folgenden Tei-
lungsstelle, das sich teilende Glied eingeschlossen, Distichalia. Bei Pen-
tacrinus decorus ist in der Regel noch eine dritte Spaltung vorhanden.
Von der zweiten Teilung bis zu dieser letzten werden die Glieder als
Palmaria bezeichnet. Weiterhin findet keine Verzweigung mehr statt,
und dio folgenden Glieder des Armes bis zur Spitze heissen Brachial ia.
Glieder, von denen eine dichotomische Teilung ihren Ausgang nimrat,
werden axillare Glieder genannt.

EEICHENSPERGEK : ANATOMIE VON PENTACRINUS DECORUS. 171

Der Stiel zerfallt in Nodi, welche meist je fllnf Cirren tragen, und in
Internodia ohne solche.

Die Leibeshohle des Kelches bildet bei Pentacrinus decorus ein znsam-
menhangendes Ganze, in welchem die Organe von bald stftrkeren bald
schwacheren Bindegewebsstrangen gehalten und umsponnen werden.
In diesen Bindegewebsstrangen sind Kalkgebilde der verschiedensten
Art enthalten, ahnlich, wie solche Ludwig (18) Taf. XVI. Fig. 39, wie-
dergegeben hat.

Annahernd in der Mittellinie dnrchzieht das " drilsige Organ," Car-
penters " plexiform gland ", den Kelch von oben nach unten, urn sich in
den Stiel fortzusetzen. Diese Fortsetznng des drileigen Organs be-
zeichne ich als Achsenstrang ; Ludwig gab diesen Namen bei Antedon
der dorsalen Verlangerung des driisigen Organs. Der Ansdruck P. H.
Carpenters " central vascular axis of stem " birgt dagegen einen weiteren
Begriff, da derselbe nicht nur die eigentliche Fortsetzung des driisigen
Organs, soudern auch die Auslaufer des gekammerten Organs darin
zusammenfasste (5), S. 107.

Im Bereiche der Basalia ist dem driisigen Organ das in filnf Telle zer-
fallende gekaiumerte Organ rings angelagert, welches sich ebenfalls roh-
renforniior in den Stiel verlangert. Endlich treffen wir in den Basalia
noch das Zentralorgan, den Knotenpunkt des umfangreichen antiambu-
lacralen oder dorsalen Nervensystems, von welchem starke Strange
ausgehen, die dorsal durch die Kalkteile des Kelches und der Arme
verlaufen.

In der Mitte der Kelchdecke liegt die Mundoffnung, in der sich die
Ambulacralfurchen der Arme vereingen. Der Schlund geht fast senk-
recht nach unten und macht mit seiner Fortsetzung, dem Darm, eine
Drehung von links nach rechts. Nachdem der Darin in horizontaler
Richtung den Kelch ringformig durchlaufen hat, steigt er weider nach
oben, urn im interradial liegenden After zu enden.

Unter dem Epithel der Mundoffnung bemerken wir die oralen Teile
des Wassergefass- und Blutgefasssj'stems und das ambulacrale Nerven-
system. Ein weiteres, von Jickeli (15) vom ambulacralen Nervensystem
bei Antedon rosaceus unterschiedenes, ventrales oder orales Nerven-
system, welches Hamann (13) S. 72 spater eingehender schilderte, habe
ich bisher bei Pentacrinus nicht wahrgenommen.

Das ftir Promachocrinus und Antedon von P. H. Carpenter (4 nnd 5)
beschriebene *' schwammige Organ", welches er als besondern leicht
durch dichtere Struktur kenntlichen Teil des labialen Blutgefessgeflechts
abtrennt, stellt er selbst bereits ftir Pentacrinus decorus in Abrede (5) S.

172 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

100, und auch ich habe vergebens nach ihm gesucht. Dagegen fand ich
eiiieu umfangreichen Komplex von Zellen, welcher dem obereu Teil des
" drtisigen Organs " angelagert ist. Dieses Komplexes finde ich an keiner
Stelle Erwahuung getan, jedoch glaube ich, dass er in einer Zeichnung
P. H. Cari^enters (5) PI. LVII, Fig. 3, angedeutet sein soil.

Gilt entwickelt ist das " labial plexus " genannte labiale Blutgefassge-
;flecht, das rait dem oralen Blutgefasssystem in Verbindung stelit und zu
iden intervisceralen Teilen der Leibeshohle Auslaufer sendet. Ich halte
»dasselbe mit Ludwig (18) S. 47 nur fiir einen modifizierten Teil des
oralen Blutgefassringes.

Den Bail der Arme fand ich, abgesehen von einer spater zu bertih-
renden Ausnahme, in der allgemeinen inneren Organisation im wesent-
lichen so, wie P. H. Carpenter (5) S. 88 ff., ihn schildert. Ich mochte
daher auf das dort Gesagte verweisen.

1. Antiambulacrales Nervensystem.
1. Verlauf in Kelch und Armen.

Betrachten wir zunachst vom Zentralorgan ausgehend das antiambula-
crale Nervensystem. Ludwig gab zuerst (18), Taf. XV, Fig. 38, ein
Diagramm dieses Systems bei Antedon rosaceus ; Hamann konstruierte
(13) S. 65, ein ahuliches fiir die Gattungen Antedon und Actinometra.

Pentacrinus ■decorus weist manche Verschiedenheiten von den tre-
nannten auf, wie ein Vergleich jener Diagramme mit dem von mir gege-
benen dartut. Vgl. nebenstehenden Holzschnitt.

Das Zentralorgan selbst ruht knopfformig in dem von den Basalia
gebildeten Ring. In der Hauptmasse verlaufen seine Fasern von unten
nach oben. In der Mitte wird es vom gekammerten Organ durcli-
brochen, das sich in den Stiel hinunterzielit.

Vom Zentralorgan gehen nun seitlich schrag nach oben bin zehn
Aste aus, die, ein vj^eniges divergierend, paarweise durch die Kalkgrund-
substanz der fliiif Basalia verlaufen. Ehe sie diese verlassen, werden
die beiden Strange je eines Paares unter sich durch ein Connectiv ver-
bunden, das nur etwa ein Drittel vom Durchniesser der Hauptaste
besitzt. Letztere gehen zu je zweien parallel weiter durch die ersten
Eadialia, um sich an derea distalem Ende zu vereinigen. Die fiinf
Vereinigungspunkte werden durch einen sehr starken, horizontal ver-
laufenden Faserring miteinander verbunden. In den ersten Costalia
finden wir nur einen Strang, der auf der Ober- und Unterseite meist
eiue mehr oder weniger flache Laugsfurche aufweist, so dass ein Quer-
schnitt durch denselben etwa Biskuitform hat.

EEICHENSPERGEIl : ANATOMIE YON PENTACRINUS DECOUUS. 173

In dem axillaren Costale II endlich trefFen wir auf das Chiasma

nevvoruiu brucl>ialiuui, dessen Eau bei Antedon Ludwig, Hamann und
Furrier sehr eingehend geschildert liaben.

Zuuachst kauu ich mit Gewissheit feststellen, dass eiu erstes, bisher

von andern iiiclit bestatigtes Transversal-Connectiv, welches Perrier bei
Antedon fand (21), T. IX, PL XVIII, Fig. 147 en 1, bei Pentacrinus
iiiclit vorhauden ist. Ferner vollzieht sicli die Kreuzung der beiden
eigentlichen Cliiasmabiindel erst sehr spat und in einem eher spitzeu
wie rechten AVinkel. Hierdurch fiillt sie erst in das Gebiet des breiten

174 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

transversalen Nervenzugs, walirend sie sich bei Antedon vorher vollzieht.
Die beiden sich kreuzeuden Strange siiid allgemein sehr viel starker
entwickelt wie bei Antedon. Man kami deutlicli wahrnehmen, dass eia
gegenseitiger Faseraustausch in ihneii auch bei Pentacrinus nicht statt-
findet, vielmelir ein Strang quer iiber den andern weglauft.

Bi- und multipolare Ganglienzellen fiudeu sich in den Hauptiisten
nicht selten, im Chiasma selbst sind sie sehr vereinzelt, aber dann vou
bedeutender Grosse, 0,012 bis 0,009 mm, und mit starken Fortsatzen
versehen.

Ausser den filnf in den axillaren Costalia II befindlichen Chiasmata
finde ich keine weiteren erwahnt. Bei zehnarmigen Crinoiden sind sie
natnrgemiiss die einzigen, welche vorhauden sein konnen. Die Zahl
der Arme schwankt bei Pentacrinus von 10 bis 25 ; durchschnittlich
teilen dieselben sich zwei- bia dreimal. Wie verhalt sich bei dieseu
"weiteren Teilungen der Nervenstrang 1

Auf tangentialen Langsschnitten findet man in jedem axillaren Dis-
tichale und Palmare ebenfalls ein gut ausgebildetes Chiasma, dessen
Dimensionen nattlrlich mit der Entfernung vom Kelch abnehraen. Die
sich kreuzenden Strange sind aber nicht, wie man erwarten soUte, um
die Hjilfte, sondern nur um etwa ein Drittel dtinner, wie die des vor-
ausgegangenen Chiasma. Nach Messungen an zwei Exemplaren betrug
ihr Durchmesser durchschnittlich im :

Chiasma costale 0,118 mm

Chiasma distichale 0,076 mm
Chiasma palmare 0,049 mm

Auf Taf. XXIV des Challenger- Werkes (5) gibt Carpenter verschie-
dene Qnerschnitte durch die Basis eines Kelches von Pentacrinus
wyville-tJiomsoni wieder, welchera Pentacrinus decorus sehr nahe steht.
Er zeichnet dort Fig. 9 den horizontal durch die Radialia verlaufenden
Faserring, aber keine Connective in den Basalia.

Vergleicht man das von mir gegebene Diagramm von Pentacrinus
decorus mit den von P. H. Carpenter (5) konstruierten des Rhizocrinus
Jofotensis S. 253, des Bathycrinus aldrichianus S. 229, und mit dem von
Hamann (13) S. 65 fiir die Gattungen Aiitedon und Actinometra fest-
gestellten, so sieht man, dass das antiambulacrale Nervensystem der
beiden ersten Arten ungleich einfacher gebaut ist, wie das von Penta-
crinus. Bei beiden Arten geht in jedem Basale vom Zentralorgan nur
ein Strang aus, der sich bei Rhizocrinus unmittelbar vor dem Verlasseu
der Basalia, bei Bathycrinus erst in den Radialia in zwei Aste spaltet.

EEICIIENSPEUGER : ANATOMIK VON PENTACRINUS DECOllUS. 175

Da^eo^en teilt sicli bei Antedon und Pentacrinus ieder Basalstrano;
sogleich nach dem Austritt aus dem Zeiitralorgan iu zwei Strange.
Wahrend diese aber bei Pentacrinus zu je zweien diirch eiii Connectiv
verbmiden sind luid im iibrigcn paarweise parallel durch die Radialia
verlaufen, fehlt bei Anfedon das Connectiv in den Rasalia, und die zwei
Strange vereinigen sich beim Ubergang in das Radiale, urn als eia
solider Strang weiter za ziehen.

Allen genannten Familien koninit ein stark entwickelter Faserring
in den Radialia zu. Bei Rhizocrinus liegt er zum kleineren Teile in dea
Basalia, wodurch seine Sternform ziistande komnit ; bei den andern liegt
er stets ganz innerhalb der Radialia und bat die Fdrm eines mehr oder
minder abgerundeten Pentagons.

Einen Vergleich zwischen dem Verlauf der Faserstriinge von Ajitedon
und Eiicrinm, fur welch letztere, anf dicyklischer Basis beruhende
Gattung, Beyrich ein Diagraram konstruierte, zieht Ludwig (18), S. 66,
und schliesst von anatomiscli-vergleichendem Standpunkt wichtige Be-
merknngen an. P> komnit zn dem Schluss, dass der aussere Kreis der
eigentlichen Basalia von Encrinus den Basalia von Antedon entspricht.

Was den Zweck der Connective nnd sonstigen Verbindnngen der
Nervenstiange anbetrifFt, so scheint niir derselbe an erster Stelle in der
Schnelligkeit von Reiztibertragungen zu liegen. Ein auf einen Arm
ausgellbter Reiz kann unmittelbar auf den benachbarten iibertragen
werden, ohne zuerst den Weg zum Zentralorgan und von dort zuriick
machen zu mlissen.

Hinsichtlicli des feineren histologisclien Banes muss ich mich voll-
stiindig Perrier (21) und Hamann (13) anscbliessen. Der letztere be-
schreibt (13) S. 87, auch speziell den Bau der Armnerven von Penta-
crinus decorus; ganze Tiere standen anscheinend nicht zu seiner
Verfiigung. Ich sehe hier von einer Schilderung des dorsalen Nerven-
stranges in den Armgliedern ab, da ich den Auseinandersetzungen
Ilamanns wesentliches nicht hinzuzutugen habe, um mich dera Faser-
verlauf im Stiele zuzuwenden.

2. Verlauf des Nervensystems im Stiel.

In Fig. 1 und 7 b sehen wir, wie das Zentralorgan des antiam-
bulacralen Nervensystems in seiner ]\Iitte von sechs Rohren durch-
brochen Avird. In der mittleren Karamer verlaaft der Achsenstrang ;
die ansseren fiinf sind Fortsetzungen des gekamnierten Organs.

Das ganze Biindel von Rjhren wird im Stiel seiner Lange nach
von einer ziemlich dicken Schicht raeist senkrecht von oben nach

17G BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

ainteii verziehender Nervenfasern unihullt. Grosse Gaiiglienzellen trifft
man in dieser Suliicht wahrend des Verlaufs durch Internodieu verhalt-
jiisiiiassig selten an ; vereinzelte liegen am Aussenraiule. Ein Eelag
.stark farbbarer kleiner Kerne trennt in den Internodien fast liberall die
Faserschicht von der benaclibarten Kalk«>rundsabstanz der Stieliilieder.

In den Nodien, oberlialb und unterhalb der Abiianusstelle der
Cirrengefasse, gehen die periplierischen Fasern der Nervenschicht
seitlicli auseinander, ziehen in der Richtung auf die Gefasse bin nnd
bilden anf diese Weise einen horizontalen Ring, wie Fig. 3 darstellt.
In der Substanz dieses bald scbwacher, bald starker ausgebildeten
peripberiscben Riuges finden wir zahlreicbe grosse bi- und multipolare
Canglienzellen. Einraal liegen sie in der Mitte zwiscben je zwei
Cirreugefassen, dann aber vornebmlich auch unmittelbar neben der
Ursprungsstelle der letzteren aus den Kamniern. Im weiteren Verlauf
bleiben die Cirrengefasse zunachst allseitig ganz gleicliniassig vf)n der
dein Ringe entstaramenden Nervenscbicbt umhiillt (Fig. 4). Verlassen
sie aber das Nodium, urn in das erste, eigentlicbe Cirriisglied iiber-
zugeben, so riickt die Fasermasse mebr und mehr auf die Seiten, und
oben und unten bloibt nur ein diinner Belag, wie das Fig. 5 zeigt.
Derselbe verdickt sich wieder ein weiiig an der Stelle, wo in jedem
CiiTusgliede, von den vier Ecken der das Gefass umbullenden Scliicbt
ausgehend, Nervenztlge zur Innerviernng der Haut und der Gelenk-
verbindungen abgegcben werden.

3. FUNKTION DES ANTIAMBULACrvALEN NeRVENSYSTEMS.

Die Funktion des Zenti-alortrans und der von iliui auswiienden dor-
salen Strange ist sebr verschieden beurteilt worden. \V. R. Carpenter
■war der erste, der dem gesamten Komplex nervose Natnr beilegte und
seine Meinung auch anf eine Reilie von interessanten Experimenten
an lebenden Tieren der Gattung Antedon zn stiitzen sucbte. Lndwig
(18) S. 80 fasste dagegen das dorsale Nervensystem als nnverkalkt
gebliebenen Teil des skelettbildenden Gewebes mit Nahrfunktion anf.
Inzwisclien wies P. H. Carpenter in den Strangen grosse Ganglienzelleu
nacli und W. B. Carpenter trat nochnials in einer ansfulirlicben Abband-
lung (9) flir seine Ansiclit ein. Jickeli (15) S. 367, Peirier (21) und
Hainann (13) gaben nabere Eiiizelbeiten liber den Baa und die Verteil-
ung der bi- und multipolaren Ganglienzelleu an, und letzterer bescbreibt
aucb S. 66, 67 die Struktur der feinen Fasern, urn zu dem Schluss zu
kommen, dass es ecbte Nervenfasern seien.

A. M. Marshall wiederbolte (20) die Experiraente, welche W. B.

KinCIIENSPEKGER: ANATOMIE VOX PENTACUIXUS DECORL'S. 177

Carpenter an lebenden Tieren angestellt hatte nnd fiigte eine bedeu-
teude Anzahl neuer hinzu. Er ktnumt zu der Ausicht, dass das Zen-
tralorgan und seine Verlaugerungeu das Hanptuervensj'stem bildeten.
Das subepitbeliale, anibulacrale Nervensystem scbeint ibni nur sebr
uutergeordnete JJedeutung zu baben (op. cit. S. 35).

DeiLigemass wird nuumebr der ganze Kotnplex fast allgemein als
ausscbliessbcb iiervoser Natur augeseben. Allerdiugs sind in den
Strangen keinerlei bindegewebige Elements anzutreffen, aber dennocb
kann icli obue eine Eiuschrankung der eben genannten Anflfassung uicbt
beii>tlicbten.

P. H. Carpenter sagt selbst (5) S. 116 : "I bave no doubt whatever,
tbat tbe axial cords are permeated by a nutritive fluid, wbich finds its
■way into tbe substance ot the organic basis of tbe skeleton ; " und
ferner berichtet er vou Zweigen, welche ihm tiberzugelien scbeinen :
" into tbe plexus of tissue forming tbe organic basis of the skeleton."
Das niclit seltene Yorkommen solcber Zweige kann icb nur bestatigen.
— Mitunter geben vornebmlich vom dorsaleu iVrrastrang rascb sicb
verjiinuende Auslaufer aus, deren feinste Enden fern von Muskeln oder
abnlich gebauten Fasern im Kalkgrundgewebe verlaufen. Sie besitzen
stellenweise eine dilnne Decke von kleinen Kernen, dagegen luangeln
ibnen grosse Ganglienzellen ganzlich. Fig. 6 gibt dies Verbalten
wieder. Vergebeus versucbte icb diese Auslaufer bis an die Haut oder
wenigstens bis in deren Nahe zu verfolgen.

Haufiger noch und besser sind derartige Abzweigungen in den oberen
Teilen des Stieles wabrzunehmen, in welcben die Neubildung weiterer
Kalkglieder vor sich gebt, wo also die Frage der Ernabrung eine bedeu-
tende Rolle spielt. Sie geben innerbalb des Stieles von dem Nerven-
strang aus, der die Cirrengefasse lunblillt, nnd zwar meist unter einem
recbten Winkel nach oben oder unten. Diese Auslaufer verjtlngen sich
kaum wahrnebmbar und durchziebeu Aveitbin die Grundsubstauz fast
stets obne sich zu verzweigen. Sie sind von zablreichen Kernen
begleitet und stellenweise mit winzigen stark tingierbaren Kornchen
tlbersat, deren Natur mir einstweilen zweifelhaft erscbeint, die icb aber
jedenfalls fiir ein Coagulum balten mocbte. Aucb P. H. Carpenter fand
solcbes baufig in den Nervenstraugen (5) S. 116. Die Fasermasse der
Auslaufer ist gering entwickelt, aber unverkennbar vorbanden. Ganglien-
zellen babe ich an oder in diesen Zligen niemalszu Gesicbt bekonimen.

Da mir in den genannten Fallen eine Innervierung sensitiven oder
motorischen Charakters ausgescblossen scbeint, balte ich eine tro})bische
Nebenfunktion der Strange fiir sebr wabrscheinlich.

VOL. XLVI. — NO. 10 12

178 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

Hamann wies bereits aufs bestimiuteste (13) S. 68 die Behauptung
von Vogt and Yung zuilick, es stellten die Nervenstrange bei Antedon
rosaceus mit geronnener Fliissigkeit erfiilite Roiiren von weitem Lumen
dar (25) S. 5G0, Fig. 277. Ftir Pentacrinus kann icli nur iioclnuals
mit P. H. Carpenter (5) S. 113 tf. feststellen, dass es sich lediglich um
solide Faserstrange haudelt, die weder Hohlraunae noch Scheidewaude
aufweisen.

II. Das " gekaramerte Organ" und die Cirrengefasse.

Eine Zusamuienfassuui'' der Ausiuliten der verschiedenen Forscher
tiber das gekamraerte Organ von Antedon gibt Hamann (13) S. 101.
Bei Pentacrinus decorus besteht es aus ftinf Kammern oder richtiger
Eohren, welche sich nach unten verengen und in den Stiel fortsetzen,
nach oben bin den Achsenstrang nnd weiterhin das "drusijie Organ"
(Dorsalorgan) umfassen, um bald blind zu endigen.

Verfolgen wir Gestaltung und Verlauf an der Hand der Abbildungen.
Fig. 7 a zeigt einen Querschnitt ini Stiel. Fiinf Eohren liegen mit
ihrer Aussenwandung im Kreise seitlich aneinander nnd bilden in der
Mitte eine sechste Kararaer, in welcher der Achsenstrang verlauft.
Figur h und c zeigen, wie weiter oberiialb, bei Ubergang in den Kelch,
die Kamrncrn an Grosse zngenommen haben luid bereits von der Faser-
masse des eigentlichen Zentralorgans nmlmllt sind. Die folgende Zeich-
nnng d gibt einon Querschnitt in Hohe des in den Basalia befindlicheu
Nervenconnectivs wieder. Der Kelch hat sich bier erweitert und seine
Hohlung ist von kalkflihrendem Bindegewebe nach alien Richtungeu
durclizogen, welches an die Ausseuwande der ftinf Kammern herantritt.
Letztere haben sich voneinander getrennt und vom Achsenstrang etwas
entfernt. Spater tiiihern sie sich der Mitte wieder, jede Kannner ver-
jtingt sicli rasch, und ihre Wandung geht in das Colomepithel fiber,
welches das driisige Organ umhiillt. Ihr Holilraum dagegen findefc
keinerlei Fortsetzung, weder ini drlisigen Organ, noch in der Leibes-
hohle, wird vielmehr durch feines Bindegewebe nach oben abgeschlosseu

(Fig. 7 g).

Bei A^dedon fand W. B. Carpenter (8) S. 219, ventralwarts eine
Offmmg in jeder Kammer nnd brachte letztere daher mit der Leibes-
hohle in Verbindung. Ludwig beobachtete Kanale, welche sich den
ventralen OfFnungen W. B. Carpenters anschlossen, um zum Achsen-
strang, bzw. drlisigen Organ hinzuziehen (18) S. 63 nnd Fig. 21.
Ebenso halt P. H. Carpenter (5) S. 104 das gekammerte Organ ftir
ftinf Radiargefasse, welche sich verbreitern und mit dem drlisigen Organ

EEICHENSPEKGER: ANATOMIE VON PENTACRINUS DECOKUS. 179

iu enger Beziehung stehen. Perrier (21) S. 24 fif. verfulgte die ull-
maliliclie Entwicklung des gekaminerteu Organs bei Antedon ramceus
und koiinnt zu dein Schlusse, dasselbe bilde eiueu geschlossenen Rauin,
der sich uicht in das diiisige Organ fortsetze. Iu gleiclieni Sinne
spricht sich Hamanu (13) S. 103 aus : " Es gehen von dem eigentliclien
gekammerten Organ fliuf blindgeschlosseue rohrenformige Hohlraume ab,
welche iieben dem axialen Strang verlaiifeii, um bald blind zu endigeu,
wie icli mit grosster Sicherheit aussprecheu kann (Taf. Yll, Fig. 1)."

Bei Pentacrinus decorus habe ich in den Wamlungen des gekam-
merten Organs keiuerlei Offnungen gefundeu, auch felilen die bei
Ajitedon iiach oben hiu sich erstreckendeu rohrenforniigeu Verliinger-
ungen oder Kanale ; vielraehr endet das Organ fast unmittelbar nach-
deiu es seine grosste Breite erlangt hat. Dieser Unterschied von
Antedon ist offenbar nur quantitativer Art, indem eine Verkiirzung der
Rohren oder Kanale bei dieser Art zu der Form des Organs luliren
Aviirde, wie wir sie bei Pentacrinus angetroffen haben. Wahrscbeinlich
wird bei letzterem eine solcbe Verlangerung nach oben unterdrlickt
durch das die ganze Kelcbhohle erfuUende Bindegewe])e, welches bei
Pentacrinus ungleich starker wie bei Antedon entwickelt ist.

Im obersten Telle der Kammern bemerkt man im Innern vou Wand
zu Wand ziehend unverkalktes, feinfaseriges Biiidegewebe. Ausserdem
fiudet man iiberall im Innern zerstreut zahlreiche, grosse, tiefdunkle
Korner von amorpher Gestalt. Dieselben bilden ein nicht zu verken-
nendes Merkmal ftir alle zum gekammerten Organ gehorigen Telle.
Nirgends sonst sind derartige Gebilde auzutreffen, weder in benach-
barten Teilen des drtlsigen Organs, noch im umgebenden Bindegew(;be
der Leibesholde. Dies scheint mir ein Beweis mehr dafiir zu sein, dass
die Kammern ein in sich gesclili)S.senes Ganze bilden. Auch Perrier
(21) S. 24 ff. stellte ahidiche Korner bei Antedon rosaceus fest, und
sagt, er habe sie ausschliesslich auf das gekammerte Organ beschrankt
gefunden, was demnach vollstiindig mit meinen Beobachtungen in Ein-
klang steht.

In den Xodien des Stiels geht von jed»?r Kammer des Organs, bzw.
seiner Verlangerung, ein Geiass in die Cirren ab. Einen Teil eines
horizontal durch ein Nodium gefiihrten Schnittes gibt Fig. 8 wieder,
einen Teil eines Vertikalschnittes Fig. 9. Die Fortsetziingen der
Kammern nehmen in den Nodien etwas an Umfang zu. Ihre distale
Wandung biegt nach aussen hin aus und zeigt eine langlich ovale
Offnung, den Beginn der Cirrengefasso. Das E[)ithel der Kammern
setzt sich in letztern rin'j;sum fort und kleidet ihre Innenwand aus.

180 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

Jedes Gefass wird von eiiiem horizontal durch die Mitte laufenden
Septum in eine obere uud eine untere Halite geteilt. Das Septum
bildet sich von der proximaleu Kammerwand her uud durchquert die
Kammer. Es besteht aus eiuer selir feineu Bindegewebslage, die beider-
seits mit einem epithelartigen Belag vou Zelleu versehen ist. Seine
Dicke schwankt zwischen 0,0048 uud 0,00G7 mm. Muskelfasern habe
icli niclit in ihm gefundeu. — Zu Anfang zeigen die Cirrengefasse im
Querschnitt eine langlich ovale, von oben nach uiiten gestreckte Form,
rundeu sich aber bald ab. Mit dem Achsenstrang stehen sie bei Penia-
crinus decorus in keinerlei Beziehung.

Unter den mir vorliegenden Exeniplaren befand sich eines mit stark
verkummerter fiiufter Kammer. Denigemass batten sich an jedeui
podium nur vier Cirren entwickelt. Selbst die Gelenkgrube zur Aut-
nahme des ersten Cirrusgliedes, die bei Pentacrinus im allgemeinen
stark ausgebildet ist, war an der ftinfteu Seite kuum wahrzunehmen.

Ftir Erkenutnis der noch immer I'niglichen Fuuktion des gekammer-
ten Organs, das Hamann mit Bury seiner Entstehung nach als Entero-
colraum ansprechen mochte (13) S. 107, ware es von Bedeutuug, zu
Avissen, wie es sich im letzten Stielgliede verbjilt. Da bei alien mir zur
Yerftigung stehenden Tieren der Stiel weiter obevhalb abgebroclien war,
konnte ich nicht feststellen, ob die Kammern an ihrem unteren Ende
gleichfalls geschlossen sind, oder ob sie mit der Umgebung in freier
Kommunikation stehen. Letzteres scheint mir weniger walirscheinlich,
da audi bei Antedon und Adinometra das gekainmerte Organ, abge-
sehen von den Ausgangen der in die Cinen fiilirenden Geiasse, nach
unten hin geschlossen ist, wie Hamann (13) S. 104 mitteilt.

Cuenot (10), Bosshardt (3) S. 105 und andre berichten, dass die
Bewegungen der Cirren von Antedon sehr zogernd und langsara erfulgen
und dieselben sich in dieser Beziehung in weitgehender Weise von den-
jenigen der Arme unterscheiden. Im volleu Gegeusatz hierzu erwahnt
A. Agassiz von einer Anzahl Pentacrinus, die er wahrend einiger Stunden
lebend hielt : " They use the cirri more rapidly, then the arms, and use
them as hooks, to catch hold of neighbouring objects. . . ." — Weitere
Angaben iiber die Bewegungen der Cirren bei den gestieltcn Crinoiden
liegen meines ^Ykssens nicht vor.

III. Das "driisige Organ" (Dorsalorgan).
1. Der Achsenstrang.
In der Bohre, welche in der Mitte des kalkigen Stieles liegt, und die
von dun fiinf Kammern des gekamnierten Organs gebildet wird, befindet

REICIIENSPERGER : ANATOMIE VON PENTACRINUS DECOUUS. 181

sich ein langcr diinner Strang, P. H. Carpenters axis of stem im engeren
Sinn, den ich nach Lndwig als Achsenstrang bezeiehne. Seine Furt-
setzung ini Kelch bildet das diiisige Organ. Genauere Einzelheiten finde
ich bei I'. H. Carpenter liber den Ban dieses Stranges nicht angcgeben.
Er rechnet ihn anscheinend zum gekammerten Organ nnd sagt nur
(5) S. 107, derselbe bilde in den Stielteilen "a singnlar vessel (5) PI.
XXIV, fig. 2—5 r.

Bei den mir voiliegenden Exemplaren von Pentncrinus betr^gt der
Dnrchmesser des Achsenstrangs etwa 0,009-0,0105 mm, und zwar
verjiingt er sich niclit nach unten hin, sondern bat, soweit ich ilni durcli
den Stiel verfolgen konnte, liberall annilhernd gleichen Unifang. Er
setzt sich aus urspriinglich kugeligen Zellen zusaminen, die sich seitlich
gegeneinander abplatten. Fig. 11 bringt eineu Quer-, Fig. 10 einen
Langsscliuitt. Man bemerkt auf ersterem eiiie einreihige, rijigformige
Zellschicht, velclie in der ]\litte ein unregelmassig gestaltetes, stets
sehr kleines Lnmen i'reilasst. Die Zellgrenzen sind nur iindeutlich zu
erkennen. Der Zelliniuilt ist fein granuliert, wie auch der Inhalt der
Kerne. In letzteren befiiiden sich meist noch grossere Kornchen, deren
Zahl schwankend ist. Die Gestalt deiKerneist langhcli oval. Sie
lagern sicli im allgemeinen gegen das innere Lnmen liin. Iln-e Grosse
bewegt sich zwischen 0,0011 • 0,0031 nnd 0,002 • 0,0043 mm.

Der Achsenstrang hangt seiner ganzen Lange nacli frei in dcm von
den Fortsetznngen des gekammerten Organs gebildeten Ranme ; es ist
mir wenigstens nicht gehmgen, Fasern oder bindegewebige Strange zu
fiiiden, die an ihn seitlich von den Kammervvanden her herantreten.
Ebensowcnig fand ich in diesem Raume die oben erwalmten fiir das
gekammerte Organ bezeichnenden dunkeln Korner ; es scheint demnach
auch im Stiel keine Kommunikation zwischen den Foitsetzungen des
gekammerten Organs und der Pohre des Achsenstrangs zu bestehen.

2. DxiS EIGENTLICHE " DRllsiGE OrGAN."

Schon ehe der Achsenstrang in den Kelch libergeht, hat sich sein
Umfancr etwas ver^rossert. An Stelle der einfachen Zellreihe treten
mehrere Schichten. In diesen bilden sich Falttuigen, so dass das innere
Lumen halbmondformig wird (Fig. 7 d). Weitcr nach oben hin kann
man zwei, vier nnd niehr Lumina erkennen. Es kommt sehr bald zur
Bildung einer grosseren Zahl von Schlauclieii, die sich im weiteren Verlauf
verzweigen und in Hirer Gesamtheit kleine Kriinnunngen machen. In
Hohe der Darmwindung finden sirh dann haufig S- "'"^ U-'oi'^io*^
seitliche Ausbiegungeu einzelner SchUtuche, die sich regellus durchein-

182 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

ander schlingen. Sie bedingen den verwickelten Aufbau des drlisigen
Organs, desseii Zusainmensetzung bei Antedon uach Perrier (21) PI. XX,
Fig. 162, einfacher zu sein scheint. Die allgemeine Richtung der
Schlauche ist audi bei Petitacj'inus von unten noch oben, doch gehen
iiicht selten in horizontaler Ricbtnng klirzere Auslaufer ab, welche bald
blind endigen. Ob alle Schlauche niiteinander komiuunizieren, ist mir
zweifelhaft geblieben ; flir eine bescln-ankte Anzahl kanu man aui;
glinstigen Langssclmitten einen Zusammenhang nachweisen.

Solange die Scblaucbe im Boden des Kelches nicht sebr zablreich
sind, treten sie zu einer bald kreisformigen, bald mebr eckigen Eobre
zusammen, deren zienilich "woites Lumen von einem Netzwerk von
zartem Bindegevvebe durchquert wird (Fig. 7 g und h). Die zunebmende
Zahl der Schlauche lasst das Lumen bald enger werden ; das Biudegewebe
verschwindet. An seiner umfangreichsten Stelle, die bei Pentacrinus
zwiscben der Darmwindung liegt, setzt sicli das driisige Organ folgen-
derniassen zusammen : Aussen gegen die Leibeshohle bin tieffen wir
zunachst das umliUllende Culomepithel ; nacb innen zu folgt die Masse
der teils quer-, teils langsgetroffenen Schlauche. Ungefahr in der Mitte
dieser ziemlich kompakten Masse findet sich ein freies Lumen, von Vogt
und Yung (25) S. 562 "leere Achse" genannt. Gegen diese ist die
Gesamtheit der Schlauche wiederum durch ein mit dem Colomepithel
tibereinstimmendes Epithel begrenzt. Ich mochte nach allem die " leere
Achse " als einen abgekapselten Teil der Leibeshohle betrachten, eine
Ansicbt, die allerdings nur durcli entwicklungsgeschichtliche Arbeit rait
voller Sicherheit bewiesen werden kann. Bindegewebe ist sehr snarlich
zwiscben den einzelnen Schlauchen vorhanden, vor allem im untersten
Teil des drlisigen Organs. An keiner Stelle fand ich die Schlauche ganz
von dichtem Bindegewebe nnihullt, wie das Hamann (13) S. 114,
und Taf. IX, Fig. 4, 5, 12 und 13 von Antedon darstellt; nur eine fein-
faserige bindegewebige Membran mit sparlichen Kernen unizielit bei
Pentacrinus jeden Schlauch nach aussen bin, wie das durch meine
Fig. 13 veranschaulicbt ist.

Ziemlich weit^ehende Ubereinstimmung herrscht bei beiden Gattunoen
im Ban der Schlauche selbst. Die zylindrischen Zellen, aus welchen die
Wand der letzteren gebildet wird, erscheinen, abgeselien von ilirer viel
bedeutenderen Grosse, den Zellen des Achsenstranges ahnlich. Sie
werden bis 0,042 mm hoch, bei einer durchschnittlichen Bn^ite von
0,016 mm. Die Kerne liegen im allgemeinen mebr der Aussenseite des
Schlauches zu. Die Substanz der Zellen zeigt eine feinere, die der
Kerne eine grobere Kornelung. In den oberen Teilen des driisigen

REICHENSPERGER : ANATOMIE VON PENTACCINUS DECORUS. 183

Organs triflft man ira Innern der Schlaiiche mitunter feines Gerinnsel
an, was niir auf eiuen Zusammenhang mit dem Blutgefasssysteni
Innzudeuten scheint.

3. Der dem drusigen Organ axgelagerte Zellkomplex.

Yerfolffen wir das drlisige Organ von seiner breitesten Stelle an weitei'
nach oben bin, so trefl'en wir sehr bald auf einen merkwiirdigen Komplex
von Zellen, den ich nirgendwo erwahnt order beschriebeu finde. Der
Unifang desselben schwankt bei den einzehien Tieren ziemlich bedeu-
tend ; seine Form bleibt im allgemeinen aiinahernd die gleiche. Eine
Andeutung dieses Komplexes glaube ich nnr bei P. H. Carpenter
(5) PL LVII, Fig. 3 zu finden. Er rechnet ihn offeubar zu seiuem
"labial plexus" und lasst das mit gv bezeichnete Geuitalgefass aus ihm
entspringen.

Die erwahnte Zellmasse bildet eine mehr o;ler weniger nmfangreiche,
ovale, stark ausgebuchtete Scheibe von verschiedener Dicke, die sich mit
ibreni unteren Eande und den Seitenraudern meist vertikal an das
drlisige Organ anlegt. Yentralwarts, in der Xahe der ]\Iundoffnung
jedoch, hangt sie mit den Endausliiufern des drusigen Organs nicht
zusaramen. Letzteres bildet also mit dem Zellkomplex einen oben offcn-
stehenden Sack. Im Inuern desselben treffen wir vereinzelte, schwach
entwickelte, unverkalkte Bindegewebsstraiige und eine grosse Anzahl
feinerer Eiutgefasse an. Die "Wiodergabe eines Langs- und eines
Querschuittes, Fig. 15 und Fig. 14, verdeutlicht das Yerbalten der
einzelnen Teile.

P. H. Carpenter schildert (5) S. 100 das labiale Blutgefassgeflecht,
labial plexus, welches mit dem oralen Blutriug in Yerbindung steht
und sich aus eiuer Menge feiner und feinster Eohren zusammensetzt.
Yon einera Teile desselben treten Gefasse von oben her in den Sack ein
und wenden sich nach alien Seiteu zu den Innenwanden ; einerseits
miinden sie an Stellen des drusigen Organs, anderseits in den erwiihnten
Zellkomplex. Stellenweise sind sie in solcher Anzahl vorhanden, dass
fast der ganze Innenraum des Sackes ausgefiillt ist. Ob diese Blutgefjisse
mit den Schlauchen des drusigen Organs in direkter Yerbindung stehen,
konnte ich nicht mit Gewissheit feststellen, halte es aber flir sehr
wahrscheinlich ; dass sie aber in das sparlich vorhandene umgebende
Bindegewebe eindringen und sich dort verzweigen, habe ich mit Sicher-
heit wahrgenommen. Dagegen bestreitet Hamann (13) S. 114, cnt-
schieden ein Eintreten der Blutflussigkeit in die Lumina der Schlauche
bei Antedon, um dann fortzufahren : "sie kaun liochstens in der Binde-

184 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

substaiiz des Organs ihren Verlauf nehmen, doch habe ich sie aiich hier
nicht beobachten koinien."

Mit Gewisslieit "elaii'j; es mir ferner, mich davon zu uberzeTi2;en, dass
die zu dem fraglichen Zellkouiplex gehenden zahh-eichen Blutgefasse in
diesen eintreten. Betracbten wir den Bau desselbeu etvvas genauer. Sein
Aussenepitliel setzt das des driisigen Organs unmittelbar fort nnd zeigt
die gleichen Zelleleniente ; sie sind bald mehr kubiscli, bald etwas
abgeflacbt und besitzon deutliche Kerne. Unter dem Epitbel verlaufen
stellenweise in verschiedenen Richtungen bindegewebige Gefiisse. Weiter
nach innen f(jlgt ein solides Polster von zieiulich grossen, dicht zusani-
menschliessenden Zellen, wie Fig. 16 zeigt. Dieselben sind rnndlich
bis polj'gonal gegeneinander abgegrenzt. In der Mitte der Scheibe
befinden sich grossere, rings nach dem Rande zu kleinere Zellen. Sie
farben sich etwas vveniger intensiv, wie die Elemente des driisigen Organs.
Ihre Kerne sind von verhiiltnisma-jsig bedeutender Grosse.

Die Grosse des gesamteu Zellkomplexes, der auf etwas dickeren
Schnitten schon rait blossem Ange leicht kenntlich ist, schvvankt sehr
erheblich ; im allgemeinen findet man ihn boi weiblichen Tieren ein
weuig starker ansgebildet wie bei mannlichen. Der am kiaftigsten
entwickelte hatte nach meinen Messungen eine durchschnittliche Dicke
von 0,077 mm ; seine Breite betrng 1,058, seine grosste Lange 2,414 mm.
Einer der kleineren Koinplexe hatte dagegen nur 0,048 mm Dicke,
0,73 ram Breite nnd etwa 1,54 mm Lange. Ehenso verschieden der
Grosse nach verhielten sich die Elemente, welcho das aus 8-14
Zellreihen bestehende Polster bildeten, Bei einem sehr gut konser-
vierten weiblichen Exemplar liess eine Eisenhamatoxylinfiirl)ung genane
Messungen zu. Demnach bestimmte ich die Grosse einzelner Zellen
und ihrer Kerne auf:

Zelle Kern

0,0076 mm 0,0037 mm

0,0078 " 0,0035 "

0,0095 " 0,005 "

0,0103 '< 0,0062 "

0,0109 '« 0,0068 "

0,0112 " 0,0068 "

0,0132 « 0,007 "

0,0184 « 0,0088 "

0,0187 " 0,0091 "

Aus der Mitte der Anssenfladie der Scheibe geht ein Gefass von
betrachtlichem Durchmesser hervor. Es verlauft in Richtung auf die

EEICHENSPERGER : ANATOMIE VON PENTACEINUS DECORUS. 185

Kelchdecke bin unJ halt sich meist ziinaclist in der Nalie des Sclilundes,
um sich spator rait GenitalgefJissen in Verbindiing zu setzen. Dasselbe
ist aus eiiier ziemlich starken Ijindegewebsschicht gebildet und zeigt ein
deutbches Aussenepithel. Auch im inneren Lumen findon sich nutunter
sehr feiue JJindegewebsstiange ; ob diese bereits hier eine besondere
luneurohre bilden, wie das in den Cenitalstrangen der Fall ist, odcr iiur
von Wand zu Wand ziehen, ist niir sehr zweifelhaft geblieben. Helleres
und duukleres Gerinnsel trifft man in deni Gcfass sehr haufig an.

Der Zellkomplex setzt sich nach oben bin bis unterhulb des Integu-
ments der Kelchdecke fort. Seine Dicke nimmt langsani ab. Neben
der Mundoftnung aiigelanirt macbt er eine fast recht\vinkli"e Bietruno:
und steht als sehr feiner Strang anscheinend niit dem zwischen dem
ambulacralen Nervensystem luid dem Wassergefasssystem verlaufendea
oralen Blutgefassring in engerer Verbindung.

Diesen bei Pentacriuus decorus dem driisioen Orsfan an2:elaa:erten
Zellkomplex halte ich nun flir den Bildungsherd der Urkeimzellen, eine
Meinung, die ich in den folgenden Abschnitten ausfilhrlicher zu begrtin-
den hofte. Zugleich mochte ich zeigen, dass Blutgefasssystem \ind
Genitalgefasssystem in engem Zusammenhang miteinander stehen. Ich
wende raich zu diesem Zweck an erster Stelle der Anordnung und dem
Ban der Gonerationsorgane iu den Armeu zu, da derselbe dort am deut-
lichsten erkeunbar ist.

IV. Die Generationsorgane.

1. BaU UXD YeRLAUF der (iEXlTALSTRANGE IN DEN ArMEN UND

PlNNULAE.

B'ji P. H. Carpenter (5) S. 110 finde ich folgende Bemerkung: ", . .
The ovaries of the Pentacrinidae are likewise long and fusiform, some of
them appearing to present somewhat anomalous characters. For in some
sections^ which were made for Sir Wyv. Thomson by Dr. Stirling, the
ovary appears in the arm, occupying tlie usual position between the
subtentacular and the coeliac canals, where the sterile genital cord is
normally found. This is also the case in the lower parts of the arms of
Holopus rangiy PI. V, c, fig. 2, but I have not yet succeeded in discover-
ing which species of Pentacrinus or Metacrinus is distingtiished by this
peculiarity ; for the sections above mentioned were not labelled with any
name or reference number. I have cut sections of the arms of all the
more common Pentacrinus, but in none of them have I found any .such
departure from the type of the ordinary Antedon as is presented by the
ovaries of this unknown species."

186 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

Lang, (1G) S. 1090, nimmt wohl auf diesen Piissus bezug, wenn er
einei- ausuahmsweiseu Reifung vou Gonaden iiu Anue einer unbekanuteu
Art Ei-\vahnung tut.

Pentacrinus decorus ist iiach alien von mir untersuchten Exemplaren
getrenntgeschlechtlich und zwar bargen die Anne in ihreui ganzen Ver-
lauf naliezu reife mannliche oder weibliche Geschlechtsprodukte, ja
bereits in den meisten Kelchscheiben waren solche vorhanden. Icli kann
daher eine Anormalitiit nicht annehnien, halte vielmehr den Zeitpunkt
des Fanges der mir vorliegenden Tiere ftir besonders giinstig gelegen.
Gehen wir im folgenden naher auf die Einzelheiten ein.

In dem zwischen Dorsal- und Ventralkaiial befindliclien Genitalkanal
— ich wahle die Bezeichnungen, die Ludwig (18) einftihrte — verlauft
ein diinnwandiger Schlauch, der ein weites Lumen besitzt. Derselbe
wird durch bald starkere bald schwachere Bindegewebsstrange in der
Mitte des Genitalkanals aufgehangen. In diesem Schlauch befindet sich
ein engerer rnit sehr feiner Wanduug. In dem Stadium der Geschlechts-
reife, in welchem die vou mir untersuchten Tiere sich befanden, erfliUte
der innere Schlauch fast das gauze Lumen des ausseren. Die Aussen-
wand des inneren Schlauches liegt dann zum weitaus grossten Telle der
Innenwand des ausseren Schlauches an, so dass sie oft sehr schwer er-
kenubar ist. Nur nach oben zum Ventralkanal bin bleibt ein freier
Raum zwischen den Wandungen, dessen Durchmesser bei vorgeschrittener
Entwicklung der Keimzellen etwa ein Viertel des Ganzen betragt. Die
Fig. 17, 18 und 19 geben hiervon ein Bild.

Bereits Ludwig, dem wir die ersten genauen Beobachtnngen liber den
Bau der Generationsorgane von Antedoii verdanken, hielt den ausseren
Schlauch, welcher die eigentliche Genitalrohre umschliesst, fiir zum
Blutgefasssystem gehorig und bezeichnete ihn als Genitalgefiiss oder
Genitalschlauch, (18) S. 30 ff. Andrer Ansicht ist Hamann, (13) S. 117
und 118, der ein Vorhandensein von Blutflilssigkeit im Genitalschlauch
der Crinoiden in Abrede stellt und keinen Zusammenhang mit den Blut-
lakunen der Scheibe auffand. Ich muss entschieden Ludwig beipflichten.
Fast regelmassig fand ich bei Pentacrinus feine Kornchen, Gerinnsel,
Eeste von Blutserum in den Genitalgefiissen, wie das aus den Figuren
ersichtlich ist. Ferner ist der Bau derselben dem der echten Blutgefasse
gleich. Die diinne, aus bindegewebigen Langsfasern gebildete Wand ist
von einem feinen Aussenepithel tlberzogen, dessen Kerne ziendich dicht
aneinanderlagern und scharf hervortreten. Endlich stehen die Genital-
gefasse des Kelches in euger Beziehung zu dem labialeu Blutgefassgo-
fiecht, wie wir welter unten sehen werden.

EEICHENSPERGER : ANATOMIE VON PENTAUKINUS DECORUS. 187

Ringmuskelu, wie sie Ludwig bei Antedon (18) S. 31 erwahnt, habe
ich in der Wauduiig der Gefasse nicht gefunden. Audi ist bei Penta-
crinus decorus die Geuitalrohre nicht itn Geuitalgefass durcli feine,
spindelformige Faseru aufgohangen, wie Ludwig (18) Taf. XIII, Fig. l-i
von Antedon darstellt, soudern sie liegt, wie oben gesagt, zum grossteu
Teil der lunenwand des Gefasses au.

Die Genitalrohre besteht ans einer sehr schwacben rait kleineu zer-
streuten Kernen verseheneu einfachen Biudegewebslamelle. In ihrem
luneru befindeu sich Saiuen- oder Eizellen, nnd zwar trifft man in einem
Arme im allgemeineu zwei sehr verschiedene Stadien der Eizellen an,
umfangreiche Zellen von etwa 0,135 mm und gering entwickelte von
ruud 0,028 mm Durchmesser. Es ware denkbar, dass letztere zu Xah-
ningszwecken resorbiert werdeu, jedoch konnten diese kleineren Keim-
zellen auch eine spater folgende Generation bilden, da ich direkte
Verfallstadien an ibnen nicht konstatieren konnte. In weiter distal
liegeuden Teilen der Arme und in den Pinnulae fiuden sich meist nur
Eier einer Grosse vor. Weder in den Pinnulae, noch in Armen oder
Kelch findet sich eine Follikelbildung, wie Perrier fiir Antedon rosaceus
(21) PI. 19, Fig. 156 und 157 angibt.

VoUkommeu reife Eier, d. h. solche, deren Keimblaschen verschwunden
war, und die bereits Richtungskorperchen ausgestossen batten, wie
Hamann (13) S. 121 und Taf. XII, Fig. 4 a von Ardedon eschrichti
beschreibt uud zeichnet, waren bei raeinen Exemplaren noch nicht vor-
banden. Die weiter unten folgende Tabelle lasst aber erkenneu, wie das
Keimblasclien im Verhaltnis zu der ganzen Eizelle in den Brachialia
hoherer Oidnung an Grosse abnimmt. Die in der Entwicklung vorge-
schrittenen Eier zeigen fast stets im Keimfleck zwei bis flinfzehn stark
lichtbrecheude Korncheu, wie das Ludwig bereits von Antedon erwahnt,
(18) S. 35.

In den Pinnulae erleidet der Genitalstrang bei alien von mir zerlegten
Tieren keine Veranderung ; bochstens wird das Lumen des Genitalge-
fasses noch mehr reduziert, da die Genitalrohre zuweilen etwas an Uni-
fang zunimmt. Eine Ausbauchung oder Anschwellung der Pinnulae
bestand weder iunerlich noch ausserlich. Leider ist es mir auch bisher
trotz zaldreicher, in jeder Richtung geftihrter Schnitte nicht gelungen,
praforraierte Offnungen oder Anlagen zu solchen fiir den Austritt von
Geschlechtsprodukten zu finden. So blieb mir die Art und Weise der
Eiablawe von Pentacrinus fraglich. In den Pinnulae durchzieht der
Genitalstrang in der Regel nur die ersten zwei oder drei, selteuer vier
proximalen Glieder, und zwar besitzt er im ersten und zweiten Gliede im

188 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

allgemeinen den grossteu Diirchmesser. Dann verjungt er sich stet>
und lauft bei niaunlicheu Tiereii in eine Spitze aus, die durch Bindege-
webe von den Wanden des Genitalkanals her gehalten wird. Bei weib-
lichen Exemplaren ist das Ende des Stranges mehr abgerundet imd
gleichfalls von Bindegewebe gehalten.

In den Armen scheint der Genitalstrang meist nur bis zuin aclit- oder
zvvolftletzten Brachiale zu reichen. Genaues hieruber ist scliwer festzu-
stellen, da die letzten Brachialia meist abgebrochen sind ; der Strang
findet seinen Abschluss wie in den Pinnulae.

Unterziehen wir nunmelir die Generationsorgane der mannlichen
Tiere einer nalieren Betrachtung und werfen wir iiochmals einen BHck
auf die Fig. 18 und 19, vvelche einen Langs- und einen Querechnitt durch
einen Teil eines Amies zeigen, der mannhche Keimzellen enthalt. Auch
liier wird das Lumen des die Genitalrohre uniliuUenden Genitalgefasses
nur ventrahvarts freigelassen ; fast drei Viertel des letzteren werden
durch die Genitalrohre ausgefullt. Der Durchmesser derselben schwankt
in den Armen zwischen 0,065 und 0,112 mm. Die Grosse der mann-
lichen Keimzellen betragt 0,002 bis 0,004 mm. Sie zeigen in jiingeren
Stadien in der Mitte einen ziemlich grosse.n Kern, der sich bedeutend
dunkler farbt, wie das ihn umgebende Plasma. Die bereits weiter ent-
wickelten Spermatozoen waren nur als runde dunkle Korner sichtbar, an
denen ich fadenformige Fortsatze nicht bemerken konnte.

Leistenformige Vorsprlinge der inneren Flaclie der mannlichen Geni-
talrohre, die bei Pentacrinus decorus gleich der weiblichen nur von einer
diinnen Bindegewebslamelle ohne Innenepithel gebildet wird, sind nicht
vorhanden. Ludwig (18) S. 36 schildert diese Vorspriinge in den Testi-
keln der Pinnulae von Antedon eschricJdi und illustriert die Beschreibung
durch die Fig. 48 und 49 auf Taf. XVI I.

Wenig abweichend hiervon beschreibt Ed. Perrier (21) den Ban der
mannlichen Genitalrohren in den Pinnulae von Antedon rosaceus .•"...
Le testicule lui meme est forme d'un grand nombre de coloniios de
cellules, colonnes cylindriques, on legerement renflees en massue, et doiit
la base est presque exactement circulaire. Ces colonnes resultent d'une
invagination en doigt de gant de repithclium testiculaire. . . ."

Bei Pentacrinus ist, wie gesagt, der Ban der mannlichen Generations-
organe sowohl in den Armen wie in den Pinnulae dem der weiblichen
gleich. Die mannlichen Keimzellen liegen dichtgedrangt regellos rings
neben der einfach gebauten Wandung und lasson nur zuweilen in der
Mitte der Genitalrohre ein kleineres oder grosseres Lumen frei, wie aua
Fig. 19 ersichtlich ist.

IlEICIIENSPERGER: ANATO.MIE VON TENTACRINUS DECOKUS. 189

2. Der Gexitalstrang ceim 0bergaxg der Arme IX DEx Kelch.

Gehen wir mm zu deii Teileii des Armes liber, welclie proximal, d. h.
nalier am Kelcli gelegen sin>l, wie die eben geschilderteii Partien, also
etwa zu deu ersteu Brachialia. Im allgeineiueu trill't man hier in der
Genitalrohre kleine Streckeu ohne Keimzellen an ; die beiden Schlauche
habeu sicli etwas verengt. Eiu Ei in der Grosse von rund 0,09 mm
fiillt fast das gesarate Lutuen aus. Je nielir wir uns weiterhin der
Scheibe zu bewegen, um so grosser werden die Strecken, auf denen keine
Keimzellen vorhanden sind ; kommen solche vor, so besitzen sie immer-
hin noch eine Grosse von 0,045 bis 0,055 mm und mehr. Die innere
Weite des Genitalgefasses betragt hier durchschnittlich 0,00G mm.

Bcim Ubergang in die Kelchsclieibe verengt sicli wie bei Antedon der
ganze Genitalkanal erheblich. Der in ihm befindliche Doppelschlauch
kanii sich seitlich our wenig ausdehnen. Gczwungenerraassen nehmen
die Genitalzellen eine lauglich gestreckte Form an : 0,04 • 0,0495 mm,
0,036 • 0,048 mm, KeimLlaschen 0,021 bzw. 0,02 mm. Seltsamerweise
fiand ich in den axillaren Gliedern fast nie Geschlechtsprodukte, vielmehr
nur die leeren sich gabehiden Strange. Dagegen waren kurz vor und
nach der Teilungsstelle haufig dichtgedrangt Keimzellen vorhanden.

Der besseren Ubersicht wegen moge hier eine Tabelle folgen. Die
Messungen sind an Teilen eines weiblichen Tiei'es angestellt und lassen
sich verhaltnismassig auf die Mehrzalil der von mir untersuchten Tiere
tibertrageu.

o

3. Verlauf uxd Bau der Gexitalstrangb im Kelch.

Zur Orientierung ver«-eise ich auf die Wiedergabe eines gvinstig
gelegenen Horizontalschnittes durch den Kelch, Fig. 22. Er zeigt den
Verlauf der Generationsorgane in der oberen Kelchhalfte, zwischen dem
Darm und dem ventralen Integument. Im Ubergang zu einem Arme
ist der Genitalstrang st;liief getroffen ; seine Fortsetzung findet er im
Kelcli in einem weitverzweigten System gleichgebauter Rohren. Wah-
rend bei Antedon die Genitalstrauge nach der Beschreibung Hamanns,
(13) S. 119 eiu unregelmassiges Pentagon bilden, das im Kelch in einiger
Entfernung das drilsige Organ umlagert, Perrier (21) S. 24 flf. und Fig.
162 dieselben aber als einzelne Strange unmittelbar aus dem driisigen
Organ berleitet und zu den Armeu ziehen la-;st, fand Russo (24) im
oberen Telle der Scheibe ein formliches Netzwerk von Genitalstrangen,
wie er Fig. 39, Taf. II, von einem erwachsenen Antedon darstellt. Mit
letzterem iibereinstimraend, ftmd ich bei Pentacrinus ebenfalls ein sehr

100

BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

S

s

m

C

trj

&
'3

Durchmesser bis 0.06 wo
Keimzellen vorh. ; 0,024
wo keine vorhanden.

Kaum kenntlich ; bildet
rings einen Kanal von
0,003 Weite.

Freier Teil ventralwarts ge-
legen ; sein Durclimesser
bis 0,035.

CO

o
o"

hi

III

CO

en

01

a
1

3
0

2

.a

1

"3
»

s

4)

'S

CO

<

be t^

Kleine Strecken ohne
Eier ; ein Ei fiillt das
Lumen

u
0)

5

£ s

CO

N

Zwei bis drei grosse Eier
init einigen sehr klei-
nen das Lumen fiiilend

Zwischendnrch einzelne
seiir kleine Keimzellen
vorhanden

a
t4

Til

O

o

0)

1— CO t^ XI

o oo o
o o o o

o-o'o'o"

CO

(M Oi rfi
CO o: 00 »

ooo O
c o_o O

o'o o'o"

CO
O C^l "^ CO

GO Ci Gi Oi ^ O

o o o o o o
O O O' o _ o

o'o'o'ooo"

CO -l* t^ r^

I-- O C5 CI CO 00 o

OOOOOOOO

o' o' o* o' o' o' o' o*

d

o
en

a

CO o t^

r-t lO C^J TO -^
(M ^) — ^ •-<

oo oo o
o'o'o'o'o"

•^ CO eo

ut> 00 l~ — '

CO Ol ^1 -M

o^o c o
o'o' o' o"

C: '- ■<*i -^

CO "^ CD CO

o o oo
o^o-o-o"

o ^ n CD

(M -^ OT » 0-1 —1

CO CO CO CO "-f -t«

o ooooo
o' o'o'o'o'o'

rH CD rH CD O ■<t<

t31 -!t< 00 'tl -M 1 ^ CO

oi CO ■^J "N CO ri -? -o

OOOOOOOO

o' o' o' o o' o' o' o'

d

Ci »ti o

^ uo :r. ^ 00

-P -r -M CO Tl

O. =: O O O

o'oo'c'o"

00 CO -^

^ -r vo lO

CO t-^ O 35

o o o o
o'o'o'o"

OOiO CO
O M ■* 1^

cr: O O J3

O — — o

o-o'o'o"

00 OtH

i-o 05 01 eo cr. i^

GiO O —' O O
O O — _— ' — '-'^

o'o' o'o' o'o

-tl 00

00 lO 00 00 r^ cc- -f to
f— (M — o r CO oi —

o' o" o' o c o' o' o'

a

<

V

1

jj
"3
W

ci
a>

.S

bo

a

OS
£?

>— 1

l-H

C
3
1— 1

.2
£

l-H

;>

CO

l-H

.2

IH

u
rt
1..

.22

hH
l-H
HH

.5

60

c

' 3
S

o

V

To

.3
[3

P3

REICiiEXSPERGER : ANATOMIE VON PENTAfRINLS DECORUS. 191

Stark verzweigtes Netzwerk, welches weite Mascheu besass. Dasselbe
durchzieht Biiulegewebsluckeu, welche die Fortsetzung dec Genitalkanals
im Kelchezu bildeu scheiueu, und wild stelleiiweise eug vou Bindegewebe
umsponnen uud begleitet.

Die Strange des Netzwerks setzen sich ebeufalls aus zwei ineiiiander
geschobeneii Rohreu zusaiumeu. Die Wauduug der aussereu liohre,
d. h. des Genitalgefasses, ist uiit eiueiu gleicheu Epithel verseheii, wie
ill den Armen. Uuter diesem Epithel befiudet sich wiederam eine Biu-
de<rewebslao;e von wechselnder Feinheit, in der man aiif vereiuzelte Kerue
trifft, Ein eigentliches Endothel ist nicht vorhanden. Die Wandung
der Genitalrohre selbst ist nur an sehr gunstigen Stellen wahrzunehmen;
sie besteht aus einer diinnen bindegewebigen Lamella mit spiirlichen
Kernen. Perrier (21) stellt einen Querschnitt durch die Genitalrohre
im Kelch von Antedon in seiner Fig. 144, PI. XVII, dar. Die dort mit
a bezeichnete Membrau ist auch bei Pentacrinus vorhanden ; es fehlt aber
hier ein Inneuepithel, welchem Perrier den Namen " epithelium genital "
beilegt, uud aus dem er die Keimzellen hervorgehen lasst.

Der Durchmesser der das Netzwerk bildeuden Doppelrohren schwankt
erheblich ; dieselben sind teils nur schwach, teils sehr stark entwickelt.
Uuter audern fand ich als Durchmesser ftir :

Genitalgefiss
0,0571 UlUl

0,0738 "

0,025 «

0,0416 «

0,0176 «

0,0981 "

0,101 "

0,127 "

]\Ian ersieht daraus, dass die Genitalstrar ge nach dem tTbergang in
die Kelchscheibe wieder im allgemeinen ganz bedeutend an Stiiike zu-
iielimen. Von Antedon hingegen berichtet Hamann (13) S. 119, dass
der Genitalschlauch im Kelch einen bedeutend geringeren Durchmesser
als in den Armen besitze ; er bestimmt die Dicke desselben auf 0,02 mm,
die der eigeutlichen Genitalrohre auf 0,01 mm.

Als luhalt des Genitalgefasses fand ich helles, ausserst feines Gerinn-
sel, das zuweileu eine schwache Farbung annahm, sowie gelbliche, meist
grobkornige Massen, an denen eine zellige Struktur nicht erkennbar war.
Mitnnter fanden sich wohlerhaltene Lymphkorperchen, auf dio ich gleich
zuriickkommen werde. Die gelbeu Elemente trifft man auch in deu

Genitalrijhre

0,042

mm

0,0573

u

?

u

0,023

((

?

u

?

«

0,096

((

0,0983

((

192 bulletin: museum of comparative ZOuLOGY.

intervisceralen Blatgefassen an. Cuenot (10) S. 425 halt sie : "pour
des amibocytes migrants, . . . charges d'apfjorter des produits de re-
serve dans les divers organs." Audi ich roochte die gelben Massen als
Reservestoffe ansprechen, kann aber uicht wohl eigeutliche Wanderzellen
in ihnen erkennen.

Eei Cuenot, Etudes sur le sang et les glandes lymphatiques (11)
werden die Lymphkorperchen der Echinodermen eiuer eingelienden Be-
trachtung unterzogen, S. 613-6-il. Von Crinoiden hat Cuenot an-
scheinend nur Antedon untersucht und berichtet hieriiber : " Les plus
uombreux (pi. XVIII, fig. 19) sont des amibocytes assez petits, 11 //,
. . . emettant de courts pseudopodes ; lis sont done assez differents
de ceux des Oursins et des Asteries si bien caracterises par le developpe-
ment de leurs pseudopodes." Bei Pentacrinus senden die 0,022-0,03
mm grossen Lymphkorperchen dagegen iiu allgemeinen sehr lange Pseu-
dopodien aus, wie Fig. 21 zeigt. Die Korper selbst enthalten eiue
kleinere oder grossere Anzahl unregelmassiger Kornchen und ein bla-
siges Gebilde. Mit den eben erwahnten gelben Elementen haben sie
keine Ahnlichkeit. In der Lange der Pseudopodien finde ich zwischen
Pentaa-inus einerseits und den Ecliinoidea und Asteroidea auderseits
nicht den geringsten Unterschied. Bei Pentacrinus scheinen sich die
Pseudopodien stetig zu verjiingen und laufen in eine Spitze aus, wahrend
sie bei den eben erwahnten Klassen ihre Breite beibehalten, eine Ditfe-
renz, die aber audi durch die Konservation hervorgerufen sein kann, da
mir nur in Alkohol konserviertes Material zur Verfligung stand. Ver-
bindungsbriicken zwischen zwei oder drei benachbarten Pseudopodien
fand ich bei Pentao'inus nicht vor, wahrend solche nach Cuenot, PI.
XVIII, Fig. 7 und 8, bei Ecliinoidea und Asteroidea haufig sind.

Die eigentliche Geuitalrohre endlich birgt auch im Kelch Genital-
zellen der verschiedensten Grosse. Fig. 20 gibt das Bild eines sehr
stark vergrosserten Langsschnittes durch einen Teil eines weiblichen
Genitalstranges. In Fig. 22 erkennt man der geringen Vegrosserung
wegen nur die bereits weiter vorgeschrittenen Ureier als dunkle Korper,
niit deutlich sich abhebendem hellerem Keimblaschen.

Auffallend sind die betrachtlichen Grossenunterschiede der im Kelch
befindlichen Eizelleu. Oft fiudet sich nahe beieinander jedes Wachs-
tumstadium vertreten. Neben kleinen Zellen von 0,015 bis 0,017 mm
Durchmesser, welche in Form und Aussehen genau mit den von Hamann
(13) Taf. XII, Fig. 15 wiedergegebenen Plasmawanderzellen von An-
tedon escliriditi iibereinstimmen, trifft man Eizellen, welche sich bereits
sehrweit entwickelt haben und deren Durchmesser bis 0,11 mm betragt.

KEICHENSPERGER : ANATOMIE VON PENTACEINUS DECORUS. 193

Eine solche Zelle fiillt in der Breite ein Gefass fast bis zum Platzen aus.
In engeu Gefassen nehmen demgeniass die grosseren Eizelleu eine sehr
langgestreckte Gestalt an. Folgende Messungreihe moge die Verhiilt-
iiisse genauer illustrieren :

Qriisse der :

Keimzellen

Keimblischen

0,016

0,009

0,024

0,01

0,0216

0,098

0,0283

0,0113

0,0641

0,0246

0,1018

0,0283

0,102

0,031

0,113

0,0462

0,098 . 0,0284

0,027

0,0475 . 0,19

0,045 . 0,019

0,04 .0,11

0,031

Keimflecke

I

mm

?

i<

?

«

0,001

u

0,0062

i(

0,0108

«

0,0109

(C

0,0098

<(

0,0079

11

0,00953

it

0,00824

(I

Verfolgen wir die Ziige des Netzwerks der Genitalstrange zentralwarts,
so gelangen wir schliesslich in die !Xahe der Mundoffnung. Dort setzeu
sicli die Genitalgefosse mit dem Geflecht der labialeii Blutgefasse in Ver-
bindung. Einzelne Auslaufer des letzteren treten an die Genitalgefasse
heran und anastomosieren mit denselben, wis ich mit grosser Sicherheit
aussprechen kann. "Weiterhin umziehen die Genitalgefosse den Scblnnd
ill unniittelbarer Xahe nnd treffen dort mit Teilen des bindeg^ewebiaen
Gefasses zusammen, welches, wie oben S. 19 erwahnt, aus der Mitte des
dem driisigen Organ angelagerteu Zellkomplexes in der Richtung auf
den Schlund hinfilhrt. Gleich neben dem labialen Bliitijefasstreflecht
finden sich in der Genitalrohre mitiinter sclion weit entwickelte P^izellen
von 0,043 bis 0,062 mm Grosse, an denen Keimblasclien und Keimfleck
leicht kenntlich sind. Der giinstige Umstand, dass die Genitalfiisse
ziemlich umfangreich sind und bereits grosse Eizellen enthalten, erleich-
tert die Feststellung ihres Verlaufs bei Pentacrinus bedeutend.

Nach dem Gesagten mochte ich nun wiederliolen, dass ich die Zellen
des fraglichen Komplexes fiir Plasmawanderzellen halte, welche sich
loslosen, dnrch das urn den Schlund ziehende Rohr zum labialen Bhitge-
fassgeflecht hinwandern, um sich endlich in den Strangen der Scheibe
und der Arme und Pinnulae zu heranwachsenden Ei- bzw, Samenzellen
zu entwickeln. "Weiterhin scheint mir fin- diese Ansicht voi'nehmlich
folgendes zu spi-echen.

In den Genitalrohren von Antedon fand Ludwig (18) S. 31 und Taf.
XV, Fig. 15, in den Armen einen inneren Wandbelag von nur 0,0075-

VOL. XLVI. — No. 10 13

194 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

0.0085 mm grossen Zellen, aus denen sich erst spiiter in den Pinnulae
die Eier entwickelten. Ausfiihrlicher, aber iiu wesentliclien mit Ludwig
ubereinstimmend, beschrieb Hamann (13) S. 118, die in den Genital-
rohren von Antedon vorgefundenen Zellen. A. Lang (IG) S. 1089 und
1090, Fig. 776, spi-icht von einer Wandverdickung, einer Leiste, von
der aus sich stets neue Keimzellen bilden. Perrier (21) S. 51 endlich
nennt den Innenbelag der Genitalrohren : repithelium producteur des
oeufs, bzw. I'epithelium testiculaire.

Dagegen liabeu wir bei der Besprechung der Genitalrohren von Pen-
tacrinus decorus gesehcn, dass dort weder ein innerer Zellbelag, ein
Epithel, noch eine Leiste vorhanden ist, aus welchen sich Keimzellen
bilden konnten. Vielraehr fanden wir die aus einer dtinnen Lamelle
gebildete Genitalrohre des Armes von weit entwickelten Ei- oder Samen-
zellen erfiillt.

Haraann sprach (14) S. 83 znerst aus : Er betrachte die Zellen in der
Genitalrohre nicht als festsitzende Epithelzellen, sondern als Wander-
zellen, welch in die Pinnulae einwandern, um dort zu reifen. "VVeiterhin
sagt er: " Die Geschlechtsprodiikte entstehen an besonderen Stellen der
Genitalrohren aus Urkeimzelleu", ohne aber solche Stellen des Naheren
zu bezeichnen. — Dass die Keimzellen in der Tat Wanderzellen sind,
dafur scheint mir Pentacrinus decorus ein gutes Beispiel zu liefern.
Schon aus der veranderlichen Form der jtingeren Keimzellen kaun man
auf eine amoboide Fortbewegung schliessen ; bereits ziemlich weit in der
Entwicklung vorgeschrittene Keimzellen zeigen in hohem Grade die
Fahigkeit, sich sehr engen Rohren anzupassen, wie wir weiter oben gose-
hen haben.

Da wir nun bereits im Kelch von Penfacrinus eine grosse Anzalil weit
entwickelter Eizellen fanden, und eine Epithel, aus deui sich Keimzellen
bilden und loslosen konnten, nicht vorhanden ist, haben wir meiner
Meinung nach die Ursprungsstelle der Urkeimzellen ira Kelch zu suchen
und kommen naturgemass auf den dem driisigen Organ angelagerten
Koraplex zurtlck, dessen Zellen die grosste Ahnlichkeit mit Plasmawan-
derzellen, bzw. L^rkeimzellen besitzen (vgl. Fig. 16 u. 20).

Es eriibrigt noch der Versuch, Klarheit iiber das Verhaltnis zwischen
dem driisigen Organ und dem ihm angelagerten Zellkomplex zu erhalten.
Friiher sprach man das driisige Organ allgemein als Mitteli)unkt des
Gefasssystems an (Ludwig, Greef u. a. m.), neuerdiugs wird es als Geni-
talstolo bezeichnet (Perrier, Hamann).

Haraann (13) S. 119 verfolgte beim erwachsenen Antedon die Geni-
talstrange von den Armen her in die Scheibe bis zur unmittelbaren Kahe

REICHENSPEIIGER : ANATOMIE VON PENTACRINUS DECORUS. 195

des driisigen Organs, ohne aber eincn Zusammenhang rnit diesem finden
zu konnen.

Perrier (21) kani auf Grund entwicklungsgeschichtlichcr Forschuugen
zuerst zu der Aiisicht, das driisige Organ selbst sei der einzige Aus-
gangspunkt der Generationsorgane. Von ihm ans lasst er die Genital-
strange ihren Ursprung nehmen und zu den Armen liinzielien. Er legt
ilnn daher deu Karaen "stolon genital" bei und erklart es als homolog
der "glande ovoide " der Asteriden und Echiniden (S. 211).

Zu einem hiervon abweiclieuden Ergebnis kommt A. Russo, der sehr
genaue, ebenfalls der Hauptsaclie nach cntwicklungsgeschicbtliche Stu-
dien an Antedon gemacht bat. Er beobaclitete das Auftreten von
Genitalzellen an verschicdenen Korperteilen der jungen Larve, und be-
richtet darllber (24) S. 11 fF. : " Sul principio alcune cellule celomicbe,
che foriuano una delle due pareti del mesentei'e, . . . s'ingrandiscono
molto, aunientanJo anche di numero come si vede in g delle fig. 15, 23,
36, 42. In tal modo si forma un curaulo di cellule caratteristiche per
le diraensioni molto grandi, e per il loro nucleo grosso e rotondo, che
formano il primo accenno della gonade." Dieser von Russo Gonade
genannte Komplex liegt nach seiner Schilderung in der l\^ahe des
Oesophagus, etwa in der Mitte des Interradius CD.

Fast gleichzeitig mit dieser Bildung sah Russo in der Xahe des
gekammerten Organs den oben genannten ahnliche Zellelemente ent-
stehen, welche sich lebbaft vermehren und spiiter das driisige Organ,
" I'organo assile," bilden.

Schliesslieh fahrt er dann weiter unten fort : " In corrispondcnza
deir esofago, ben presto nella larva alquanto avanzato nello sviluppo,
dopo che I'organo assile si e constituito, si differenzia dalle cellule peri-
toneali un nuovo gruppo di elementi sessuali. II processo, con cui
questi si formano e chiaramente visibile nella fig. 25, dove alcune cellule
celomicbe sono molto ingrossate e sporgenti nella cavita generale, in
modo da formare una gemma. Esse, pi'oliferando si mettono in rap-
porto con I'organo assile mentre in seguito formano attorno I'esofago
una serie di cordoni genitali cavi, aventi diverse dimension!. . . . Dai
cordoni periesofagei emanano per6 molti cordoni cellulari pieni, i quali
si anastomizzano fra di loro formando un intreccio, come si vede nella
fig. 40, ricavata da una sezione orizzontale di grosso Anfedon."

Die von Russo zuerst erwahnte Zellgruppe im Interradius CD re-
duzierte sich spater und verschwand. Die zuletzt genannte Gruppe
dagegen blieb bestehen und trat an das driisige Organ heran. Aus ihr
wird der eigeiitliche Bilduugsherd der Urkeimzellen.

196 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Meine an Pentacrinus gemachten Beobachtungen stehen mit deuen
Russos in vollem Einklang. Es ist unschwer zu erkennen, class der
Komplex der Urkeimzellen nicht aus dem drtisigen Organ hei'vorge-
gangen ist ; es gelang mir nicht einmal mit Gewisslieit nachzuweisen,
dass die Schlauche des letzteren sich z\\ dem Komplex liin offnen,
obwohl icli dies fiir wahrscheiulich halte ; aus meinen Sciinitteu liess
sich bisher nur eine Randaulagerung mid Verbindung unter einem
Epithel erkennen. Die Zellelemente beider Organe sind sehr vcineiu-
ander verschieden und deutlich gegeneinander abgegrenzt.

Denkt man sich den von mir bei Pentacrinus gefundenen Zellkomples
sehr verkleinert, so wurde er eine Gemme bilden, wie Russo sie von der
juugen Ant&lon-\j2iVvQ beschreibt und in seiner Fig. 25 darstellt. Auch
die bei meinen erwachsenen Tieren noch vorhandene Verbindung mit
dem Colomepithel des Schlundes stimmt mit den von Russo gemachten
Beobachtungen ilberein.

Zuerst mochte es scheinen, dass die Form der Komplexe einen Unter-
schied bedinge, indem bei Antedon ein dicker Strang voi'handen ist,
Avelcher sich dem drtisigen Organ eng anschmiegt, wahrend es bei Pen-
tacrinus zur Ausbildung einer Scheibe kommt. Bei naherer Unter-
suchung jedoch ergibt sich aus dem Yerhalten der Komplexe der
Urkeimzellen bei Pentacrinits decorus, bei dem pentacrinoideu Larveu-
stadium von Antedon und bei dem erwachsenen A)itedon eine interes-
sante, phylogenetische Beziehung. Pentacrinus behalt zeitlebens die
Gemmenform des Komplexes bei, welche bei Antedon nur im penta-
crinoideu Stadium vorllbergehend vorhanden ist, wahrend der erwach-
sene Antedon bereits eine hohere Moditikation dieser Form aufweist,
einen weiteren Fortschritt phylogenetischer Entwicklung darstellt.

Die Homologie der "glande ovoide" mit dem drtisigen Organ allein
halte ich nicht fur vollstandig; vielmehr komrat erst durch die Verei-
nigung des drtisigen Organs mit dem eigentlichen Bildungslierd der
Urkeimzellen ein Komplex zustande, dor mir in seiner Gesamtheit der
" glande ovoide " der Asteriden und Echiniden gleichwertig schcint.

Zusammenfassung.

1. Antiambulacrales Nervenststem.

Ausser dem bereits friiher bekannten Ring in den Radialia, fanden
•wir schon in den Basalia Connective, welche die vom Zentralorgan aus-
gehenden Strange paarweise verbanden. Die Paare verlaufen bis zu
dem in den Radialia befindlichen Ring getrennt parallel und vereinigen

REICIIENSPERGER : ANATOMIE VON PENTACRINUS DECORUS. 197

sich erst dort -wioder. Das Cliiasma ist einfacher wie bei Antedon
gebaut. In jedeni axillaren Gliede ist oiii Chiasma vorhaiiden.

2. Gekammertes Organ.

Das gekammerte Organ hat keine Fortsetzungen nach oben ; seine
fiiuf Kammern enden blind geschlossen. Nach unten sendet es Aus-
hiufer in den Stiel, von denen in den Nodien die Cirrengefasse aus-
gehen. Gebildet wird es von einer diinnen Bindegewebshige, die mit
einem deutlichen Endothel versehen ist, Seine silmtlichen Teile ent-
halten als charakteristiches Merkmal dunkle Korner, deren Natur uns
zweilelhaft blieb. Ini oberen Toil des gekannnerten Organs verlaufen im
Innern von Wand zu Wand ziehend schwache bindegewebige Strange,
die frei von Kalkbilduugen sind.

3. Drusiges Organ.

Vom drusigen Organ aus geht in den Stiel der Achsenstrang, dor aus
einer einfachen Edhre mit sehr engem Lumen besteht. Die ihn bilden-
den Zellen besitzen Ahnlichkeit mit denen des drusigen Organs.

Im Kelch wird das driisige Organ von einer sehr grossen Anzahl von
Schlauchen gebildet, zwisciien denen schwache Bindegewebsfasern vor-
kommen. Ob alle Schlauche untereinander in Verbindung stehen, liess
sich nicht feststellen. Die Gesamtheit der Schlauche lasst annilhernd
in ihrer Mitte ein kleines Lumen frei, gegen das sie durch Colomepithel
abgegrenzt ist. Im unteren Teil des drusigen Organs wird das Lumen
von einzelnen Bindegewebsstrjingen durchzogen. Ich spreche es als
abgekapselten Teil der Leibeshohle an. Dem oberen Teil des drusigen
Organs ist ein umfangreiches Zellpolster angelagert. Dasselbe bildet
mit dem drusigen Organ einen oben offenen Sack. In diesen treten
vom labialen Blutgefassgeflecht her zahlreiche Gefasse ein.

Ein direkter Zusammenhang der Schlauche des driisigen Organs mit
Blutgefassen war nicht nachweisbar, wohl aber das Eintreten der letz-
teren unter das Epithel, welches das driisige Organ umhiillt.

4. Die Geschlechtsorgane.

Den Ausgangspunkt der Urkeimzellen bildet der dem drusigen Organ
angelagerte Komplex. Von diesem aus geht ein Strang, welcher den
Schlund in unmittelbarer Nahe umzieht, zuni labialen Gefassgeflecht hin.
Durch Verzweigung kommt unterhalb des Integuments der Kelchdecke
ein umfangreiches Netzwerk von Genitalstrangen zustande. Von dem
Netzwerk aus ziehen Auslaufer durch die Arme zu den Finnulae. Die

198 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Strange uiid Auslaufer bilden Doppeh-ohren. Die aussere Robre, da?
Genitalgefiiss, ist ein Blutgefass ; die innere Rohre bestelit nur aus
eiuer feinen bindegevvebigen Lamelle und eiithalt Geschlechtsprodukte.
Die Genitalrohre hat kein Iniienepithel.

Das Zellpolster, voii welchem die Plasmawauderzellon ausgehen, uiu
sich bald zu Ei- oder Saraenzellen zu entwickeln, wird vou Blutgefassen
iimzogen vmd durchlaufen. Es ist meiner Meiiiung nach nicht wohl
moglich, Blutgefiisssystem und Generationsorgane scharf zu sondern.
Beide sind aufs engste miteinander verbiinden. Ob sich vielleicht die
Generationsorgane iibei'haupt als Blutgefasse betrachten lassen, worauf
Ludwig (18) S. 89 hinweist, daviiber konnte ich mir kein voiles Urteil
bilden, da mir nur ausgewachsene Tiere zur Verfiigung standeu.

Bonn, im Dezember 1904.

IlEICHENSPERGEU : ANATOMIE VOX rENTACKINUS DECOKUS. 199

L I T E R A T U R.

1. Alexander Agassiz, Calamocrinus Diomedae. Mem. Mus. of Comp. Zool.

Harvard College, Cambridge, U. S. A. Vol. XXVII. n. 2. 1892.

2. F. A. Batuer, The Ecliiuoderma. Aus: A Treatise ou Zoology; ed. Ray

Laxkester. Loudon 1900.

3. H. BossHARDT, Zur Keuutnis der Verbiudungsweise der Skelettstiicke der

Arme uud Ranken vou Antedon ros. Jenaisclie Zeitsclir. f. Naturw. 1900.

4. p. H. Carpenter, Reports ou the results of dredgiug uuder the supervision

of Al. Agassiz, etc. XIII. The stalked Criuoids of the Caribbean Sea.
Bull. Mus. of Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll. 18S2.

5. Report on the results of the exploring voj'age of H. M. S. Challenger.

Vol. XI. The stalked Crinoids. 1SS4.

3. Ibid. Vol. XXVI. The Comatulae. 1888.

7. On certain points in the anatomical nomenclature of Echiuoderms.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Vol. VI. 1890.

8. W. B. Carpexter, Ou the structure, physiology and development of Ante-

don rosaceus. Proc. Roy. Soc. London. No. 166. 1876.

9. Ou the nervous system of Crinoids. Proc. Roy. Soc. London.

Vol. XXXVIL 1884.

10. L. CuEXOT, Etudes morphologiques sur les Echinodermes. Arch. Zool.

experim. 1891.

11. Etudes sur le sang et les glaudes lympliatiques. Ibid. T. IX. 1891.

12. R. Greeef, tJber das Herz der Crinoideu. Marburger Sitz.-B(M-. 3.,4. und

5. Mitt. 1876.

13. O. Hamanx, Beitrageziir Histologie der Echinodermen. Heft 4. Ophiuren

u. Crinoideu. Jena 1889.

14. O. Hamaxx, Die wandernden Urkeimzelleu. Zeitsclir. f. wiss. Zoologie.

Bd. XLVI. 1888.
13. C. JicKELi, Vorlaufige Mitteilung iiber den Bau der Echinodermen. Zool.
Anz. VII. 1884.

16. Arnold Laxg, Lehrburch der vergleichendeu Anatomic. 1894.

17. Leunis-Ludwig, Synopsis der Tierkunde. 3. Aufl. Bd. II. 1886.

18. Hubert Ludavig, Beitrage zur Anatomie der Crinoideu. Zeitschr. f. -wiss.

Zool. Bd. XXVIII. 1877.

19. Chr. LtJTKEN, Om Vestindiens Pentacriner. Nat. Eoreu. Videusk. Med-

delelser 1864.

200 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

20. A. M. Marshall, On the nervous system of Antedon ro.«aceus. Quart.

Journ. of niicr. Sc. 1884.

21. E. 1'errier, Memoire sur i'organisation et le developpeinent de la Coma-

tule de la Mediterranee. Nouv. Arch. d. Mus. 1886-1890. 1., 2. und
3. Abteilung.

22. AcHiLLK Russo, Sulla omologia dell' organo assile del Crinoidi etc. Zool.

Anz. 1899.

23. Suir agruppamento dei primi element! sessuali nelle Larve di Ante-
don. Rendiconti della R. Ac. d. L. Rom 1900.

24. Studii su gli Ecliinodermi. Catania 1902.

25. VoGT u. Yung, Lehrbucli der vcrgleichenden Anatomie. 1. Bd. Braun-

schweig 1888.

ERKLARUNG DER ABBILDUNGEN.

Die folgenden Buchstaben gelten fur alle Figuren :

a, Achenstrang ; G, Bildungsstatte der Urkeimzellen ;

bg, Bindegewebe ; go, gekammertes Organ ;

cep, Colomepithel; gs, Ganglienzelle ;

CO, Centralorgan ; kgr, Kalkgrundsubstanz;

d, Darm ; mo, Mundoffnung ;

dep, Darmepithel ; nr, Nervenring in den Radialia;

dn, dorsaler Nervenstrang ; oe, Oesophagus ;

do, driisiges Organ ; sy, Syzgie.

Reichenspebobr. — Anatomie von Pentacrinus decorus.

TAFEL I.

Fig. 1. Langsschnitt durch den Kelcli von Pentacrinus decorus. Kopie nach

P. H. Carpenter (5) PI. LXII, 1/2 mal verkleinert und etwas uni-

geaiidert.
Erkliirung der Farben : Nervensysteme gelb ; Blutgefasse roth ; Wassergef ass-
system griin ; driisiges Organ schwarz ; Generationsorgane grauschwarz. B,
Basale ; R, Radiate; Cj, Costale; D^, Distichale /; ap, ambulacrale Flatten;
kp, Kelcliporen ; sap, subambulacrale Flatten ; abc, ambulacrales Nervensystem ;
St, Steinkanal; Ibg, labiales Blutgefassgeflecht ; ib, interviscerales BlutgefiLss ; wg,
Wassergefass ; r, Rectum ; gs, Genitalstrang.
Fig. 2. Tangentialer Langsschnitt durch die untersten Armglieder, um die

Chiasniata, ch I, II und /// zur Anschauung zu bringen. R, Radiale ;

C, Costale ; D, Distichale ; P, Palmare ; B, Brachiale ; dst, Dorsal-

strang.
Fig. 3. Querschnitt durch ein Nodium des Stieles, so dass die von den Fortset-

zungen des gekammerten Organs fg ausgehenden Cirrengefasse eg ge-

troffen sind. ep, Epithel des gekammerten Organs ; n, Nervenschicht ;

ni, deren peripherische zu den Cirrengefassen hinziehende Fasern ; k,

dunkle Korner. Zeiss, Obj. E, Oc. 2.
Fig. 4. Querschnitt durch ein Cirrengefass mit der umgebenden Nervenschicht

n im Stiel. eg, Lumen des Gef asses ; sc, Septum. Zeiss, Obj. C, Oc. 2.
Fig. 5. Querschnitt durch ein Cirrengefass, nachdem dasselbe in den Cirrus

eintrat. Die Nervenschicht n hat sich auf die beiden Seiten gezogen.

Zeiss, Obj. C, Oc.2.
Fig. 6. Zwei Auslaufer, aus, des dorsalen Armnervenstranges dn, deren feinste

Enden, en, in der Kalkgrundsubstanz verlaufeu. k, begleitende Kerne.

Zeiss, Obj. C, Oc. 2.
Fig. 8. Teil eines Querschnittes durch ein Nodium des Stieles in Hohe der in

die Cirrengefasse ziehenden Septen sc. n, Nervenschiclit und deren

peripherische Fasern; ep, Epithel des Cirrengefiisses. Zeiss, Obj. C,

Oc.2.
Fig. 9. Teil eines Langsschnittes durch ein Nodium. sp. Septum ; eg. Beginn

eines Cirrengefiisses ; n, Nervenfaserschicht ; go, Fortsetzung des

gekammerten Organs. Zeiss, Obj. C, Oc. 3.
Fig. lOu. IL Langs- und Querschnitt durch den Achsenstrang. r, Zelle ; ^f, Kern.

Fig. 10: Zeiss, homog. Immers. 1/18. Fig. 11 : Zeiss, Obj. F, Oc. 4.

;: .*• ('

.s: S .Ithike:

PI. I.

Mgt.

Figs. ^^

: * '^:-s4,* ';^ "''1

.#'^'

M

%-W*v

F^5. V-r-.p?*,-^* 0'^ 0

'^^ Hi

■y

-%••«-

J^^iv.

*«"■

f^

-i»^./^.

«^.//.

.*«

..•'.I

•frf

>,;

^(P-^

IP

^^.

c/t2Z?

~-,.;uL;'' . >--

■■■y ReicIienspergergK.

Pcnifirrili iis decants.

iuh -Aitst. Julius ffliii]shdidl,Leipug.

Reichenspeboeb. — Anatomie von Fentacrinus decorus.

TAFEL 11.

Fig. 7 a-h. Querschnitte zur Erlauterung des Verhaltnisses des gekammerten
Organs zum driisigen Organ, bzw. Aclisenstrang. Zeiss, Obj. C, Oc. 1.

Fig. 7 a: Querschnitt im Stiel. n, Nervenfaserscliiclit. Fig. 7 6 u. c : In Hohe
des Zentralorgans co. k, dunkie Korner. Fig. 7 c? : In HiJhe der Con-
nective cb in den Basalia. bg, Bindegewebe der Leibeshohle. Fig.
7 e u. /": In Holie der Radialia. ubg, unverkalktes Bindegewebe ;
k, dunkie Korner. Fig. 7 g : Oberster Teil des gekammerten Organs ,:
ble, blindes Ende einer Kammer. Fig. 7 /( : Veranschaulichte Lage
und Gestalt des driisigen Organs do kurz nach dem Endigen des
gekammerten Organs.

Fig. 12 a u. b. Wandung des gekammerten Organs. Fig. 12 ci von der Seite,
Fig. 12 b von der Flache aus gesehen. epz, Endothelzelle ; bg, Binde-
gewebslamelie. Zeiss, Obj. E, Oc. 2.

Fig. 13. Stiick eines Querschnittes durch die breiteste Stelle des driisigen Organs.
gei; Gerinnsel ; schl, Schlauch ; bg, Bindegewebsfasern ; L, inneres
Lumen ; ep, dessen Epithel, welches dem Colomepithel cep gleich ist.
Zeiss, Obj. D, Oc. 2.

Fig. 14. Querschnitt durch den von driisigem Organ und Bildungsherd der
Urkeimzellen gebildeten Sack. /?, zum Sclilund liinfiihrende Rohre ;
bl, Blutgefasse ; ep, beide Orgaue unter sich vereinigendes Colomepi-
thel. Zeiss, Obj. C, Oc. 1.

Fig. 15. Langsschnitt durch den Sack, wg, Wassergefass : st, Steinkanal; T.
Tentakel; sonst wie in Fig. 14. Zeiss, Obj. B, Oc. 2.

Fig. 18. Langsschnitt durch den Genitalkanal gc eines mannlichen Tieres. Die
Genitalrohre gi- ist mit Samenzellen erfiilit. bgl, Wand der Genital-
rohre ; ep, Epithel des Genitalgefasses g/"; gei-, Gerinnsel. Zeiss, Obj.
C, Oc. 4.

,f C. S. S.BIakf'

I'l IL

Fig.Tb^

Fig 7h-.

Piy.m.

Bioienspei'gerger.

Pentacriiius decorus.

lithsAnst. Julius Khiiki'.sirat^cjiiiui^,

PiacHENSPKRGER. — Aiiatomie von Pentacrinus decorus.

TAFEL III.

Fig. 16. Teil des dem driisigen Organ angelagerten Komplexes. bl, Blutgefasse;

plw, Plasmawanderzellen ; cep, Colomepithel ; 1, Innenrauni des Sackes ;

A, Leibeshohle. Zeiss, Obj. F, Oc. 2.
Fig. 17. Teil eines Laiigsschnittes durch den Arm eines erwachsenen weiblichen

Tieres. gc, Genitalkanal ; ger, Gerinnsel ; ep, Epitliel des Genital-

gefcisses ; ez, Eizelle ; k-b, Keimblaschen ; kf, Keimfleck. Zeiss, Obj.

AA, Oc. 2.
Fig. 19. Teil eines Querschnittes durch den Arm eines inannlichen Tieres. gc,

Genitalkanal ; ger, Gerinnsel ; sz, Sanienzelle ; dc, Dorsalkanal ; gef,

Genitalgefass. Zeiss, Obj. F. Oc. 1.
Fig. 20. Genitalgefass gf im Kelcli langs durchschnitten. gr, Genitalrohre ; ep,

Epitliel des Genitalgefasses ; ger, Gerinnsel ; knn, gelbe kornige

Massen ; plw, Plasmawanderzellen ; ez, bereits weit entwickelte Eizelle.

Zeiss, liomog. Immersion 1/18.
Fig. 21 a. Lymphkorper L in einem Blutgefass bl. ger, Gerinnsel. Zeiss, Obj.

D, Oc. 1.
Fig. 21 ?>. Lymphkorper, starker vergrossert. %, blasiges Gebilde; />*, Pseudo-

podien. Zeiss, Obj. F, Oc. 1.
Fig. 22. Teil des Netzwerkes der Genitalstrange im Kelch. Horizontalschnitt,

zwischen Darm und Integument der Kelchdecke gelegen. A, Arm ;

gk, Genitalkanal ; gs, Genitalstrang im Ubergang zum Arme ; Ez, weit

entwickelte Eizellen ; gf, Genitalstrange im Kelch ; kp, Kelcliporen.

Zeiss, Obj C. Oc. 1.

r.S. r. .V. .S.BIiike.'

j'im.

Fig. 2S.

. h

A.

^9

Fig.W.

kp

^^-i,

d^

f^..

Mg.2lb.

3''

Ex

; 5=

tS «„6

)sf

^er

' ''>•!•,

J/
cep

iiui.

9 5«i&.

■nwperg^rget.

I't'iiliirriiius dcrnriin.

- lith ArjM,Juliil3j\linh.'i.iiil.U'li>.^iJ-

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on tlie Results of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of Alex-
ander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

H. AUGEXER. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HARTLAUB. The Coiuatulae of the "Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentacrinus.

A. MILXE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. K VERRILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to :March, 1900, Commander Jefterson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. MARK. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. McM. WOOD WORTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna. S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.

The Panamic Deep-Sea Fauna. J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinarians.

H. B. BIGELOW. The Siphonophores. E. L. MARK. Branchiocerianthus.

K. BRANDT. The Sagittae. JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

" The Thalasslcolae. P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans. ropods.

W. H DALL. The Mollusks. THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarians.

REINHARl) DOHRN. The Eyes of Deep- M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

Sea Crustacea. Doliolidae.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cinipeds. H. B. WARD. Tlie Sipunculids.

HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster. W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians.

PUBLICATIOlSrS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLII.,
and also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVII ; of the Memoirs,
Vols. I. to XXIV., and also Vols. XXVIIL, XXIX., XXXI., and
XXXIL

Vols. XLIIL, XLVL, XLVIIL, XLIX., and L. of the Bulletin,
and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., XXXIIL, XXXIV.,
and XXXV. of the Memoirs, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the Museum,
of investigations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upou the Museum Collections and Explorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on thei Results of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on tlie Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer " Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Command-
ing, in cliarge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from October. 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratorj-, in charge of Professor N. S.
Slialer.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular intervals ;
one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the Memoirs
(4to) usually appear annually. Each number of the Biilletin and
of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list of the publications
of the Museum will be sent on application to the Librarian of the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 11.

NEW PLAGIOSTOMIA.

Bt Samuel Garman.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

Janoary, 1906.

Reports ox the Sciextific Results of the Expedition to the East-
ern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from October,
1901, TO March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. M. Garrett,
U. S. N., Commanding, published or in preparation: —

a. agassiz. General Report on the Expedi-
tion.

A. AGASSIZ. I.i Three Letters to Geo. M.
Bowers, U. S. Fish Cons;

A. AGASSIZ and H. L. CLARK. The Echini.
F. K BEDDARD. The Earthworius.

a B. BIGELOW. The Medusae.

R. P. BIGELOW. The Stomatopods.

S. F. CLARKE. The Hydroids.

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans.

L. J. COLE. The Pycuogonida.

W. H. DALL. The Mollusk.s.

C. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. The Fishes.
W. G. FARLOW. The Algae.

S. 6ARMAN. The Reptiles.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.

H. J. HANSEN. The Schizopods.

S. HENSHAW. The Insects.

W. E. HOYLE. The Cephalopods.

C. A. KOFOID. IU.3 The Protozoa.

P. KRiJMBACH. The Sagittae.

R. VON LENDENFELD. The Sponges,

H. LUDWIG. The Holothurians.

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

H. LUDWIG. The Ophiurans.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinaria.

G. W. MULLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

MARY J. RAIHBUN. The Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON. II.2 The Isopods.

W. E. RITTER. The Tuuicates.

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Bryozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON. The Plants.

G. O. SARS. The Copepods.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-
pods.

TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.

T. W. VAUGHAN. The Corals.

R. WOLTERECK. The Amphipods.

W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

> BuU. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVI., No. 6, Juls'. 1905, 4 pp., 1 pi.

3 BuU. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVI., No. 9, September, 1905, 5 pp., 1 pL

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 11.

NEW PLAGIOSTOMIA.

Bt Samuel Garmax.

ca:\ibridge, mass., U. S. a.:
printed for the museum.

January, 1906.

No. 11. — New Plagiostomia. By Samuel Garman.

The followiug are preliminaries of descriptions to be published with
more details and with illustrations as soon as the necessary drawings are
printed. All except two of the types described are from the collection
of Alan Owston, Esq., taken at considerable depths off the Japanese
coasts. Excepting one, of the Platosomia, all are Antacea. It may be
added here that the name of this section of the Plagiostomia was formed
by Eafinesque, 1815, from the Greek "Avra (Latin ante), "before, in
front," and 'Ak?; or 'Aki? (Latin aciea), " a point," for a group comprised
of sharks only ; it contained no sturgeons, and the name was not, as has
been asserted, made from " dvraKaios, sturgeon."

Hemigaleus pectoralis, sp. nov.

Outlines similar to tliose of the other species of tliis genus, strongly resembling
those of Mustelus cam's Mitch. Spiracle larger than the pores. Length of tlie pre-
oral portion of the head greater than the width of the mouth. A moderate labial
fold on each jaw. Teeth |i ; upper oblique, wide, compressed, with coarse serrations
in the notch on the outer side ; lower with narrower and more erect cusps, becom-
ing oblique toward the angles of the mouth ; three series of smaller erect teeth at
the symphysis, both above and below. Intestinal valve with a few transverse
turns behind the longitudinal roll.

Grayish brown on tiie upper surfaces, olive in life, whitish below ; fins dark,
lighter on hind margins.

No. 847, Mus. Comp. Zool., from the "Aquarial Gardens," for which the
collections were made off the coast.s of Massachusetts and Rhode Island.

Parmaturus, gen. nov.

Differences in dentition, squamation, and in features of the head and
tail, as compared with species of Catulus and Pristiurus, suggest the ad-
visability of establishing a new genus, Parmaturus, to include the
species immediately following, and also Pristiurus eastmanni J. & S.,
1904, from off Izu, Japan, and Catulus xaniurus Gilb., 1891, off Lower
California. Parmaturus is intermediate between Pristiurus and Catulus ;

204 bulletin: museum of compakative zoology.

it is readily distinguished from the former by the features of the head,
and from the latter by the caudal structure.

Parmaturus pilosus, sp. nov.

Head and snout shorter, nostrils closer to the mouth and spines more pilose than
on Pristiurus vtelastoinus Kaf. ; in tiicse and other features somewhat nearer to
Catulus, Scylliuni. Dorsal fins subequal ; origin of first very little backward of that
of the ventral, base reaching little farther back than that of the latter; origin of
second dorsal above the middle of the base of the anal and end of tlie base above
that of the same fin. Teetli compressed ; cusps in variable numbers, upper teeth
commonly with six and lower most often with five. Labial folds equal, short, one
fourth as long as the jaw. Nostrils wide, close to the mouth, equal in width to
the internarial space or twice their distance from the edge of the mouth. Spiracles
small, directly behind and distant one diameter from the eye. Gill clefts small,
the hindmost two smallest, and situated above the base of the pectoral. Entire
length of the pectoral fin hardly half the distance between its base and that of the
ventral. Scales minute, velvety, each with a long, strong median cusp at each
side of the base of whicli is a rudiment.

Uniform brown on back and tins, latter with black margins; light below, the
lighter color extending up behind and above the pectoral firs.

No. 1107, Mas. Conip. Zool.

Hab. Lat. 34° 59' N. ; Lon. 139° 31' E. " 430 fathoms. Goiden Hind."

Centrophorus, M. & H., 1837.

Present knowledge will hardly sanction acceptani^e of this genus as
constituted by Giinther, 1870. The species appear to group themselves
in four distinct genera : (1) Centrophorus M. & H., 1837, of which
Squalus granulosus Bl. & Sch., 1801, is the type, (2) Acantliidium Lowe,
1839, with the type species A. calceus Lowe, 1839, Deania J. & S., 1902,
being a synonym, (3) Scymnodon B. & C, 1864, as represented by S.
ringens B. & C, 1864, and (4) Centroscymnus B. & C, 1864, typified
by C. coelolejjis B. & C, 1864, and including the species of Zameus
J. & F., 1903. Besides the new species added to these genera it is
found that the affinities of Squalus uyato liaf., 1810 {Spinax uyatus
Bonap., Acantliias tiyatus M. & H.), are such as to remove it from the
genus Acanthias, Squalus of later authors, and place it among the species
of Centrophorus. All of these, with some differences of inclusion, are
genera established before the publication of Giinther's arrangement.

Centrophorus acus, sp. nov.

In general the outlines, dentition, and squamation resemble those of C. granulosus
Bl. & Sch. Dorsal spines projecting beyond the skin. Teeth ||, upper the more
erect and narrower, lower with the cutting edge directed obliquely toward the

GAllMAN: NEW PLAGIOSTOMIA. 205

angle of the mouth ; no median tooth in the lower jaw. Labial folds short, al-
most hidden in the groove. Distance between the inner edges of the nasal valves
less than one third of tlie preoral length of the snout. First dorsal entirely in the
forward half of the total length. Hinder angles of pectorals and ventrals slightly
produced, longer on dorsals. Length of base of second dorsal less than three
fourths of that of the first, not including the spine, contained three and two thirds
times in the distance between the two spines. Ends of ventrals reaching back-
ward of the spine of the second dorsal. Scales small, with stout stalks, and with
several keels on the crown, the median one of which ends in a sharp cusp ; lateral
cusps rudimentary ; keels less sharp toward the apex of the scale on the flanks.
Brown, nearly uniform, sprinkled with white single scales.

Distinguished from C tessellatus by larger dorsals, less production of hind
aiigles of dorsals, pectorals and ventrals, smaller sharper scales, smaller eyes, by
dentition, and by a darker more uniform coloration.

No. 1049, Mus. Comp. Zool. of a total length of Z2\ inches.

Hab. Japan.

Centrophorus tessellatus, sp. nov.

Closely allied to C. granulosus, spines and scales similar. Teeth |f, com-
pressed, serrated on the basal portions of the cutting edges ; upper with slender,
sharp pointed cusps, more numerous and more erect, becoming more oblique
toward the angles of the mouth ; lower with oblique laterally directed cusp situated
between two notches at the outer end of a serrated and arched portion of the cut-
ling edge; a median tooth on the symphysis below; several series in function in
the upper, and two in the lower. Labial folds extending less than half-way from
angle to symphysis. Internarial distance equal to more than half the distance
from the mouth. Spiracle large, superior, distant from tlie eye one and one half
times the spiracular diameter, up and backward. Posterior angles of dorsals, pec-
torals, and ventrals much produced ; length of base of first dorsal two fifths of the
distance from the second, base of second three fourths of that of the first, end of
pectoral reaching beyond the first dorsal spine; origin of first dorsal little back-
ward of the axil of the pectoral ; spine of second dorsal one third exposed; lower
lobe of caudal well developed, end of caudal deep.

Light brownish on back and flanks, white below, a white band at margins of
fins and gill clefts. Total length 34| inches.

No. 1031, Mus. Comp. Zuol.

Hab. Lat. 35° N. ; Lon. 139° 30' E. 400 fathoms.

The shagreen of this shark, from specimens of moderate size, is no doubt
as well adapted for covering the grip in the handles of sabres, swords, and other
cutlery as that of Centrophorus granulosus.

Acanthidium Lowl, 1839.

Ueama J. & S. 1902.

In the collection there are representatives of three species, neither of

which is to be identified with the previously described species, A. egkmfma

of Japanese waters and A. calceus from the seas of Europe. Tliey are

206 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

distinguished by difterences in rostral lengths, in the teeth, in the shapes,
positioiis, and lengths of the fins, in the scales, colors, etc. Generically
they agree in the characters of the head, the greatly produced snout,
large eyes, in nostrils, teeth, and spiracles, in the characters of the fins,
and in general shapes. In the scales they are farther than A. calceus
from Centrophorus, though like that species, their scales have slender
peduncles and are erect, but each has three slender, distinct, and sharp
cusps, without the web-shaped connections between their bases. On
the inside of the valves the spiracles are provided with ridges like the
gill laminae ; in front of the valve there is a blind cavity or chamber,
extending forward, like that of Centroscymnus, but of much less extent,
or that of Centrophorus. The inner angles of dorsals and ventrals are
much produced ; those of the pectorals are short.

Acanthidium rostratum, sp. nov.

Rather more compressed in body than the other species of this genus. Dorsal
spines strong, moderately exposed. Base of first dorsal in the forward half of the
total length ; inner angles of dorsals greatly, and those of the ventrals moderately
produced ; inner angle of pectoral little longer than outer, not produced in a point;
base of first dorsal about two fifths of its distance from that of the second, base of
second dorsal little more than that of the first ; end of base of ventral nearly reach-
ing a vertical from the second dorsal spine. Teeth -|§ ; upper with a notch at each
side of the cusp, which latter is oblique and becomes more so toward the angles of
the mouth ; lower with cutting edges very oblique, approaching a horizontal. Upper
labial folds hidden in the deep oblique grooves, half or more of each of which is in
front of the angle ; lower folds long, more than half as long as the jaw. Spiracle
large, above the level of the eye and one diameter farther back ; valves with small
ridges ; prevalvular chamber of moderate extent. Scales minute, with erect slen-
der peduncles, and slender spine-like cusps, each of which is surmounted by a sharp
longitudinal keel.

Light brownisli or grayish brown, greenish or olive in life ; lighter beneath ; lit-
tle darker on back, top of head or tail ; whitish on hind and inner margins of dor-
sals, pectorals, and ventrals.

Total length, 34 inches.
No. 1047, Mus. Comp. Zobl.
Hab. Suruga Gulf, Japan.

Acanthidium hystricosum, sp. nov.

Head nearly one fourth, tail one third, and caudal fin two ninths of the total
length. Middle of the total length in the middle of the base of the first dorsal, in-
cluding the spine. Teeth f f , compressed ; upper with narrow triangular cusps, which
are triangular also in cross section, erect near the symphysis, little oblique toward
the angles of the mouth ; lower with cusps directed toward the corners of the
mouth so much that each cutting edge is almost parallel with the edge of the jaw,

GARMAN : NEW PLAGIOSTOMIA. 207

no median tooth below. Labial folds extending half the lengtli, or a little more,
of each jaw. Internarial distance two thirds of the distance from the end of the
snout. Hinder angles of dorsals and ventrals much produced; pectorals subtrun-
cate, with rounded angles, reaching half-way to a vertical from the first dorsal
spine ; base of second dorsal four fifths of that of the first dorsal, more than the
total length of the ventral, fin reaching the caudal; end of ventral extending below
more than half the base of the second dorsal. Spiracle large, distant one diame-
ter from the orbit, above and slightly backward. Width of first gill cleft half the
orbital length, hindmost clefts little wider and little nearer one another. Scales
much larger than those of A. rostratum, pedunculate on a radiating base, with three
slender cusps, harsh to the touch. Total length, 36^ inches.

Dark brown, somewhat lighter below, black in the mouth, nostrils, orbits, gill
clefts, spiracles, and on the edges of the fins.

No. 1130, Mus Comp. Zool.
Hab. Sagami Bay, Japan.

Acanthidium aciculatum, sp. nov.

Elongate, slender, moderately compressed, caudal fin about one fifth of the total
length. Teeth f^, intermediate between those of the preceding and those of Scym-
nodon ringens B. & C, both upper and lower with more or less erect sharp pointed
cusps, those on the upper jaw triangular and those on the lower bearing the cusp
on the outer portion of the cutting edge. A few of those on the lower symphysis
are nearly erect, the others become more and more oblique toward the angles. In-
ternarial distance nearly one fourth as long as the snout. Spiracles large, near
the eye, valves with ridges resembling the laminae of the gills. Dorsal spines
large, strongly curved, that of the second dorsal much exposed; inner angle of
pectoral rounded, not produced ; length of the base of the second dorsal five sixths
of that of the first, and the length of the base of the latter is three fifths of the dis-
tance between the bases of the two fins, or three eighths of the distance between
the two spines. Scales very small, similar to those of A. calceus, but apparently
having cusps more slender, sharper, and more erect ; median cusp directed back-
ward, lateral cusps extended out more toward the sides. Caudal fin deep, lower
lobe not greatly developed. Total length, 34^ inches. Uniform dark brown.

No. 1128, Mus. Comp. Zool.
Hab. Sagami Bay, Japan.

Centroscymnus Owstonii, sp. nov.

This species bears some likeness in form to C. coelolejns; it is distin-
guished by a snout that is longer, broader, and less pointed at the end,
by nostrils that are farther apart, by a narrower mouth, by teeth on the
lower jaw that are less nearly parallel with the edges of the mouth, by
scales that are smaller and more keeled, and by fins of which the ex-
tremities of the dorsals are less pointed and the hinder ends of the
bases of the ventrals are farther forward as compared with those of the
second dorsal.

208 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

Dorsal spines hardly projecting beyond tlie skin. Scales pedunculate, plurica-
rinate on head, shoulders, and belly. Teeth |§; upper lanceolate, more than twice
as numerous as lower, in two groups at each side, cusps shaped like a spear-head,
subtriangular in transsection, several rows in function ; lower broad, compressed,
cusps witii a deep notch at the outer edge, apex raised, cutting edge rising obliquely
toward the angles of the moutli, one row in function ; no median tooth at the lower
symphysis. Labial folds hidden in the deep, straight, oblique folds crossing the
angles of the mouth ; lower short, upper much longer and reaching half-way to the
middle of the mouth,, that is, a little fartiier than the groove. Nostrils widely sepa-
rated, nearer to end of snout tlian to mouth. Spiracles medium, superior, one
diameter backward and two diameters distant from the orbit, with a large antespi-
racular chamber, extending forward from the valve to a point above the posterior
angle of the orbit, valve with folds on its inner side like gill lamellae. The lining
pf the prespiracular chamber is without siiagreen and apparently is sensitive.
Posterior margin of pectoral oblique, inner angle much shorter ; base of second
dorsal longer and fin higher than in first dorsal, hinder angle produced, base equal
one fifth of its distance from the first dorsal base ; end of pectoral not reaching to
a vertical from the first dorsal spine ; end of ventral base reaching a vertical from
the spine of tlie second dorsal.

Uniform dark brown.

No. 1037, Mus. Comp. Zobl. Total length, 31i inches.
Hal). Yenoura, Suruga Gulf, and Sagami Bay, Japan.
Named in honor of Alan Owston, Esq.

Pristis clavata, sp. nov.

The group of species of this genus contaiuing P. ^^ectinahis Lath.,
1794, and P. zysrou Blkr., 1852, is that iu which the present form most
naturally falls.

Rostral teeth in twenty-one pairs, not trenchant behind. Origin of the first
dorsal one fourth of the length of its base farther backward than the origin of tlie
ventral. Pectoral origin in advance of the first gill cleft nearly the width of tlie
internarial space, or the length of the orbit; outer angle of pectoral fin blunt and
bluntly rounded. Second dorsal smaller than first dorsal, length equal about three
fifths of the length of the caudal fin, or one sixth shorter than first dorsal. Caudal
fin obliquely truncated without an anterior lobe on the subcaudal portion. Tttal
length, 24| inches.

No. 733, Mus. Comp. Zool.

Hab. "Queensland, Australia."

Distinguished from Pristis pectinatus by the smaller number of rostral teeth
and the position of the first dorsal backward of the origins of the ventrals ;
from P. zysroH by the smaller number of teeth in the saw, the more forward
origin of the first dorsal, and the second dorsal smaller than the first dorsal;
and from P. zephyreus J. & S., 1895, by the backward origin of the first dorsal,
the lobeless caudal fin, and the spacing of the rostral teeth.

The following: Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on the Hesults of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge ot Alex-
ander Agassiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

H. AUGEXEK. Tlie Aimelids of the " Blake."

C. HAUTLAUB. a"he Coiuatulae of the "Blake," with 15 P4ates.

H. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentaerinus.

A. MILXE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VEKKILL. The Alcyouaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexaxder Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. Ij. MAUIC. Studies on Leiiidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology, of the Windward Islands.
W. Mc:M. wood WORTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II.. with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross,'" Lieutenant Commander Z. L. Tanner, C S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A, AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna. S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.

The Panamicl)eep-Sea Fauna. J. P. McMURKICH. The Actinarians.

H. B. BIGELOW. The Siphonophores. E. L. MARK. Branchiocerianthus.

K. BRANDT. The Sagittae. JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

" The Thalassicolae. P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

W. R. COE. The Xemerteans. ropods.

W. H D.\LL. The Mollusks. • THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarians.

REINHARI) DOHRK. The Eyes of Deep- M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

Sea Crustacea. Doliolidae.

H. J, HAXSEX. The Cirripeds. H. B. WARD. The Sipunculi.ls.

HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster. W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.
W. A. HERD:MAN. The Ascidians.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLII.,
and also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVII ; of the Memoirs,
Vols. I. to XXIV., and also Vols. XXVIII., XXIX., XXXI., and
XXXII.

Vols. XLIIL, XLVL, XLVIIL, XLIX., and L. of the Bulletin,
and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., XXXIIL, XXXIV.,
and XXXV. of the. Memoirs, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professoi's and Assistants of the Museum,
of investigations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upon the Museum Collections and Explorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by tlie U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer "Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. K., Command-
ing, in cliarge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the ScienJ;ifio Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," from October. 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratory, in charge of Professor N. S.
Slialer.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular intervals ;
one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the Memoirs
(4:to) usually appear annually. Each numli^r of the Bulletin and
of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list of the publications
of the Museum will be sent on application to the Librarian oi the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass.

^.\oC.\

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 12.

VERTEBRATA FROM THE SAVANNA OF PANAMA.

Introduction. Mammalia.
By Outram Bangs.

AVES.

By John E. Thayer and Odtram Bangs.

Reptilia: Amphibia.
, By Thomas Barbour.

Pisces.
By Samuel Garman.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

January, 1906.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the East-
ern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from October,
1904, to March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. M. Garrett,
U. S. N., Commanding, published or in preparation: —

A. agassiz. General Report on the Expedi-

t'um. , , 'ill '

A. AGASSIZ. I.i i'hree Letters to Geo. M.
Bowers, U. S. Fish Com,

A. AGASSIZ and H. L. CLARK. The Echini.
F. E. BEDDARD. The Eartliworms.

R B. BIGELOW. The Medusae.

R. P. BIGELOW. The Stomatopods.

S. F. CLARKE. The Hydroids.

W. R. COE. The Nemertean.s.

L. J. COLE. The Pycnogouida.

W. H. CALL. The Molhi.sks.

0. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. Tlie Fishes.
W. G. FARLOW. The Algae.

S. GARMAN. The Reptiles.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.

H. J. HANSEN. The Schizopods.

S. HENSHAW. The Insects.

W. E. HOYLE. The Cephalopods.

C. A. KOFOID, III.3 The Protozoa.

P. KRUMBACH. The Sagittae.

R. VON LENDENPELD. The Sponges.

H. LUDWIG. TheHolothurians.

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

H. LUDWIG. The Ophiurans.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actinaria.

G. W. MiJLLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

MARY J. RATHBUN. The Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON. 11.= The Isopods.

W. E. RITTER. The Tunicates.

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Bryozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON. The Plants.

G. 0. SARS. The Copepods.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-
pods.

TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.

T. W. VAUGHAN. The Corals.

R. WOLTERECK. The Amphipods.

W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

1 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol.'XLVL, No. 6, July, 1905, 4 pp., 1 pi.

3 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 9, September, 1905, 5 pp., 1 pi.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVL No. 12.

VERTEBRATA FROM THE SAVANNA OF PANAMA.

Introduction. Mammalia.
By Outram Bangs.

AVF.S.

By John E. Thayek and Outram Bangs.

Reptilia: Amphibia.
By Thomas Barbour.

Pisces.
By Samuel Garman.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

Jani:arv, 1906.

No. 12. — Vertebrata from the Savanna of Panama}

CONTENTS.

Page

I. Introduction. By Outram Bangs 211

II. Mammalia. By Outram Bangs 212

III. Aves. By Jolin E. Tiiayer and Outram Bangs 213

IV. Reptilia and Amphibia. By Thomas Barbour 224

V. Pisces. By Samuel Garman 229

I. Introduction. By Outram Bangs.

In the process of the John E. Thayer Expedition of 1904, Mr. W. W.
Brown, Jr., spent nearly a month — the greater part of May, 1904 — near
the city of Panama, making general collections of vertebrates.

The region is quite different in character from the hilly, heavily forested
interior of the Isthmus, and is described in a letter by Mr. Brown as
follows : " My headquarters are at Calidonia at the edge of the swamp
of Panama, about a mile from the seashore and about seventy-five yards
from the beginning of the mangroves. Toward the north and northeast,
the low flat country or Savanna of Panama extends for some four or
five miles, gradually rising, to the hills. This is a grassy plain, very dry
and burnt in appearance, especially in the dry season, with little patches
of wood — island like — scattered about here and there. Near the city of
Panama there are several orange groves, where I collected Blue-creepers
and some Tanagers that I did not see elsewhere."

We did not expect any novel results in the way of species from this
collection, but the region is so different — dry and barren — from the
country farther inland, at Loma del Leon, etc., where most of the bird
collecting on the Isthmus has been done, that we felt it quite worth
while to have a representative series from the Savanna of Panama.

Mr. Garman in his list includes the fishes from Gorgona Island and
the Pearl Islands, as well as those from the vicinity of Panama, while
Mr. Barbour notices the reptiles and amphibians from the vicinity of
Panama and from the Pearl Islands.

1 Papers from the John E. Thayer Expedition of 1904, No. 3.
VOL. xLvi. — No. 12 14

212 bulletin: museum of comparative zo'ulogy.

II. Mammalia. By Outram Bangs.

During his stay of nearly a month, Mr. Brown set traps for the smaller
mammals, at every sort of place on the Savanna of Panama and the
edge of the mangrove swamps, but caught nothing, and he saw no signs
of small mammals. When I stated this fact to Mr. E. W. Nelson, he
said that his experience in Mexico had been much the same, and that
such regions in middle America — low, hot, arid plains — are almost
without mammalian life.

One vesper rat (Oryzoynys panamensis Thomas ; type locality, near
city of Panama), however, has been described from this region.

Mr. Brown secured specimens of four species of mammals, — one
squirrel and three bats.

SCIURIDAE.
1. Sciurus adolphei dorsalis (Gray).

Five adult specimens, both sexes, May 20 to 25.

These are all practically alike in color, except that in some the black is
faded, usually in patches, by long wear, to a rusty brown. They are in the
" Grizzled-backed phase " of Nelson, with head and back mixed Tjlack and
yellowish ; under parts pale buff ; tail buff, below along middle, black above
and on sides, each hair tipped with white. I cannot see that they differ from
Costa Rican examples in the same phase of coloring. It is rather interest-
ing that they do not, as north of Panama in Chiriqui and at Punta Burica,
Costa Rica, the permanently black form — Sciurus melania (Gray) — occurs,
which would thus appear to be merely a colony of melanistic individuals, and
hardly a species (or subspecies) in the true sense of the term.

The flesh measurements are :

No.

Sex.

Total length.

Tail vertebrae

Hind foot.

Eai

10,810

$ ad.

528

270

60

32

10,811

$ ad.

522

280

60

31

10,812

9 ad.

528

270

60

32

10,813

9 ad.

523

270

60

30

10,814

9 ad.

522

260

60

31

MOLOSSIDAE.
2. Prom ops nanus Miller.
One adult $, May 20.

THAYEK, BANGS : AVRS FIJOM SAVANNA OF PANAMA. 213

PHYLLOSTOMATIDAE.

3. Hemiderma castaneum (H. Allen).
Seven specimens, young and adult, May 22 to 25.

4. Artibeus intermedius J. A. Allen.
One adult ^, May 20.

III. AvEs. By John E. Thayer and Outram Bangs.

The ornis of the Savanna of Panama and the mangrove swamps of
the coasts of the bay, though interesting as compared with tliat of tlie
interior of the Isthmus, is not rich in number of species. Mr. Brown's
collection includes but eighty-six species, of which one only, the alder
flycatclier, is a Noilh American migrant. The country is little diver-
sified, and so sparsely wooded that one would not look for a rich bird
fauna.

The characteristic birds of the Savanna are the pigmy titlark, A7ithus
parvus; the red-breasted blackbird, Leistes militaris ; the Lawrence's
cacique, Cacicus vitdUnus ; the grassquit, Tiaris oUvacea dissita, and
the fork-tailed tyrant, Muscivora tyrannus. In the little islands of
woodland scattered over the Savanna the smaller tyrants, ant thrushes,
wrens, and other brush and forest-loving species were found in small
numbers, while in the mangrove swamps Mr. Brown secured a few
specimens of the rare mangrove warbler, Chrysoca7itor erithadiorides,
which, though very common in the mangroves of the Pearl Islands, was
exceedmgly rare in the swamps near tlie city of Panama.

The natives shoot large numbers of birds for food, and the species
most persecuted are very shy and are decreasing in numbers ; the
grackle, Megaquiscalus major macrourus, the wood grouse, Odontophorus
marmoratus, the ortalis, Ortalis cinereiceps, and the doves are the
species most sought for.

In this paper we describe three new forms, — the n.omot, usually
previously referred to the Colombian Momotus suhrufescens ; the Panama
golden-crowned tyrant, which proves separable from Tyrannulus regu-
loides; and the grassquit, — a well-marked southern continental form of
Tiaris olivacea.

During the month that Mr. Brown spent on the Savanna of Panama,
he secured specimens of all the species observed.

214 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

ARDBIDAB.

1. Butorides striata (Linne).

- One adult 9 , May 26, 1904. This skin, No. 14030, affords the following '
measurements: wing, 168.5 ; tail, 61 ; tarsus, 51 ; exposed culmen, 63. It
does not appear to differ in any way from birds from Brazil and Guiana.

FALCONIDAE.

2. Buteo brachyurus Vieill.
One adult ^ in the dusky phase of plumage, May 4.

3. Rupornis ruficauda (Scl. & Salt.)
One 9 , May 25.

CRACIDAB.
4. Ortalis cinereiceps (Grat).
One 9 , May 21.

ODONTOPHORIDAE.
5. Odontophorus marmoratus Gould.

Two males, one adult, May 23, one young. May 17. These are perfectly
typical examples of 0. marmoratus, and show no approach to 0. castigatus of
Chiriqui, which, notwithstanding Ogilvie-Grant's statement, is a very dif-
ferent well-marked form.

COLUMBIDAE.

6. Columbigallina minuta (Linne).
Seven adults of both sexes, May 10 to 26.

7. Clara vis pretiosa (Ferrari-Perez).
Two adult males, May 14 and 21.

8. Leptotila verreauxi Bp.

Two males, one adult. May 18, one young. May 20. .'*

CUCULIDAE.
9- Piaya cay ana thermophila (Scl.).
Five adults, both sexes, May 4 to 21.

THAYER, BANGS : AVES FROM SAVANNA OF PANAMA. 215

10. Diplopterus naevius (Linne).
Five adults, both se.xes, May 19 to 25.

11. Crotophaga ani Linne.
One 9 , May 2.

PSITTACIDAE.

12. Brotogerys jugularis xMullee.
Twenty-three, adults of both sexes, May 12 to 26.

MOMOTIDAB.

13. Momotus conexus, sp. nov.

Six adults, both sexes, May 6 to 26.

Type. — Coll. E. A. and O. Bangs, No. 14,054, adult 9 . Savanna of Panama,
Panama, May 6, 1904.

CJiaracters. — A very distinct form at odce distinguished from M. lessoni
Less, of Central America by its much smaller size and smaller bill, as well as
different coloration, — the throat in M. lessoni being always green to base of
bill, without a hazel chin-spot. From M. suhrufescem Scl. of northern South
America, the Panama bird differs in darker general coloration ; the back is
uniform dark green, becoming chestnut only on nape just below the blue
of back of crown (in M. subrnfescens the neck and mantle are pale tawny more
or less suffused with light green) ; under parts much darker, — hazel or chest-
nut (tawny ochraceous-rufous in M. siibrufescens), the throat and upper breast
strongly suffused with dark green ; a conspicuous hazel chin-spot.

Measurements. —

Wing.

125.

121.

126.

121.

118.

126.

Remarks. — The Panama bird has always been referred to M. suhrufescens
Scl. Type locality Santa Marta, Colombia, but is so different from that form in
"color that it must certainly be regarded as at least a subspecies, — but if a sul>
species, then of what ? All of the many recognized forms of blue-headed
motmots, from eastern Mexico south to Amazonia and Bolivia, are so much
alike, it would not be at all surprising to find that in reality they are all but
representative geographical laces — subspecies — of one wide- ranging variable
species.

No.

Sex.

14,054 type

9 ud.

14,055 topotype

9 ad.

14,056

^ad.

14,057

$ ad.

40,672 M.C.Z. "

9 ad.

B.

9 ad.

Tail.

Tarsus.

Culmen.

228.

27.5

38.

217.

26.

40.

2,31.5

26.5

37.5

227.

205."!"'^'^
worn

219.

27.5

26.

26.5

38.
37.
39.

216 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPAKATIVE ZOOLOGY.

ALCEDINIDAB.
14. Ceryle americana septentrionalis Sharpb.
Three, both sexes, May 4 to 26.

CAPRIMULGIDAE.
15. Nyctidromus albicoUis (Gmel.).
One male, May 26.

16. Stenopsis cayennensis (Gmel.).
One adult <J, May 4.

17. Anthrostomus rufus (Bodd.).
One adult ? , May 6.

TROCHILIDAE.
18. Amizilis tzalatl (L. Lave).
Two males, May 4 and 9.

TROGONIDAB.
19. Trogon caligatus concinnus (Lawb.).
One adult $, May 15.

PICIDAB.
20. Melanerpes wagleri wagleri Salt. & Godm.
Two males, May 11 and 20.

FORMICARIIDAE.
21. Thamnophilus transandeanus Scl.i
Four adults, both sexes, May 4 to 22.

22. Thamnophiltis atrinucha Salv. & Godm.
One adult 9 , ]\Iay 13.

23. Thamnophilus nigricristatus Lawr.

Six adults, both sexes. May 7 to 10.

1 The nomenclature of the ant thrushes here followed is that of Sharpe's Hand
List, Vol. 3, 1901.

THAYER, bangs: AVES FROM SAVANNA OF PANAMA. 217

24. Rhamphocaenus rufiventris (Bp.).
Three adult males, May 8 and 9.

25. Cercomacra tyrannina (Scl.)-
One $, May 21.

26. Cercomacra nigricans Scl.
Seven adults, both sexes, May 6 to 21.

27. Drymophila swainsoni Berlepsch.
Six adults, both sexes, May 9 to 11.

28- Hypocnemis naevioides (Lafk.).

Three adults, both sexes, May 14 to 26.

DENDROCOLAPTIDAB.
29. Xiphorhynchus 1 nanus nanus (Lawr.).
Three specimens, both sexes. May 11 to 25.

PIPRIDAB.
30. Chiroxiphia lanceolata (Wagl.).
Ten adults, both sexes, May 3 to 26.

31. Manacus vitellinus (Gould).
Fifteen specimens, both sexes, May 3 to 21.

TYRANNIDAE.
32. Todirostrum cinereum finitimum Bangs.
Two adult males, May 2 and 17.

33. Todirostrum schistaceiceps Scl.
One adult 9 , May 8.

34 Colopteryx pilaris (Cab.).
Two adults, ^ and 9 > ^lay 8.

35. Myiopagis placens accola Bangs.
One adult 9 , May 13.

1 For change from Dendrornis to Xiphorhynchtis, cf. Oberholser, Smith. Misc.
Coll., Vol. 48, pt. 1, No. 1579, pp. 62-63, May 13, 1905.

218 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

36. Capsierapis flaveola (Licht.).
Five adults, both sexes, May 7 to 18.

37. Ornithion pusillum (Cab. & Heine).
Two adults, ^ and 9 , May 5 and 13.

38. Tyrannulus reguloides panamensis, subsp. nov.

Three adults, ^ (J, 9, May 6 to 22.

Tijpe. — Coll. E. A. and O. Bangs, No. 14,092, adult $, Savanna of Panama,
May 6, 1904.

Characters. — Similar to true T. reguloides Ridg, of the Lower Amazons, l>ut
larger; paler in color below, especially on the breast and sides; back and
rump lighter, clearer green, the back markedly so.

Measurements. —

No.

Sex.

Locality.

Wing.

Tail.

Tarsus.

Exposed
Culnien.

14,092

$ ad.

City of Panama

49

40

12.2

6.8

14,091

^ad.

do.

48

38

12.

6.8

14,093

9 ad.

do.

48

39

12.2

7.

8,035

9 ad.

Chiriqui, Divala

47

39

12.

7.

Remarks. — This little tyrant is quite different from Tyrannulus elatus
(Lath.), and in a former paper was referred by Bangs to true T. reguloides Ridg.,
on the strength of one female collected by Brown at Divala, Chiriqui. The
three additional examples taken at Panama on the present trip, caused us to
doubt its identity with the form of the Lower Amazons and we sent all four
examples to Mr. Harry C. Oberholser who kindly compared them with the
type. He found the Panama bird represents a fairly well constituted northern
subspecies, differing from true T. reguloides in its larger sizes, paler yellowish
green breast, paler yellow sides, and lighter clearer green back and rump.

39. Elainea pagana subpagana Scl. & Salv.
Eight adults, both sexes, May 2 to 11.

40. Elainea albivertex Pelz.

Seven adults, both sexes. May 2 to 21. These are very similar to the series
from Santa Marta on which E. sororm Bangs was based, but are slightly smaller
and thus approach E. sordidata of the Pearl Islands. The bill, however, is not
so large as in the island form.

41. Sublegatus arenarum Saltin.
One adult ^, May 17.

42. Myiozetetes cayennensis (Linn.).
Two adults, (J and 9 , May 2 and 7.

THAYER, BANGS : AVES FROM SAVANNA OF PANAMA. 219

43. Myiozetetes similis superciliosus (Bp.).
Six specimens, young and adult, May 4 to 21.

44. Myiodynastes audax nobilis (Scl.).
Three adults, both sexes. May 2 to 26.

45. Onychorhynchus mexicanus mexicanus (Scl.).
Four specimens, both sexes. May 11 to 26.

46. Myiobius atricauda (Lawr.).
Two specimens, ^ and 9 . ^^ay 6 and 8.

47. Myiobius naevius naevius (Bodd.).
Two adult males, May 3 and 17.

48. Bmpidonax traillii alnorum Brewst.

Two females, May 2 and May 6. All other North American migrants had
left for the north by May; and Mr. Brown saw resident species only, except this
Empidonax. The alder flycatcher does not arrive on its breeding grounds in
eastern North America till the first week in June, and leaves for the south
again so early that on a former trip Mr. Brown took one at Pedregal, Panama,
AuCT. 21. It thus appears to spend a shorter time in the north than any other
migratory small bird. The two specimens have been identified by Mr. "Wil-
liam Brewster.

49. Myiarchus ferox panamensis (Lawr.).
Two adult males. May 6 and 19.

50. Muscivora tyrannus (Linne).
Five adults, both sexes, May 4 to 26.

TURDIDAB.
51. Merula grayii casius (Bp.).
Six adults, both sexes, May 4 to 11.

TROGLODYTIDAB.
62. Phengopedius fasciato-ventris albigularis (Scl.).
Four adults, both sexes, May 4 to 10.

63. Phengopedius hyperythrus (Salv. & Godm.).
Five adults, both sexes, May 4 to 14.

220 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPAKATIVE ZOOLOGY.

54. Troglodytes musculus inquietus (Baird).
Five adults, both sexes, May 3 to 19.

55. Thryophilus rufalbus castanonotus Ridg.

Twelve adults, both sexes, May 5 to 21.

56, Thryophilus galbraithii galbraithii (Lawr.).
Nine adults, both sexes. May 5 to 22.

57. Thryophilus modestus elutus Bangs.
Three males, two adult, one young, May 5 to 11.

VIREONIDAE.

68. Vireosylva flavoviridis flavoviridis Cassin.

Seven adults, both sexes, May 2 to 8.

59. Pachysylva aurantiifrons aurantiifrons (Lawr.).
Four adults, both sexes, May 4 to 11.

60. Pachysylva viridiflava (Lawr.).

Nine adults, both sexes. May 2 to 26. All these have pale bills, while
the two skins collected by Mr. Brown in Chiriqui have the bill black ; other-
wise the Panama and Chiriqui birds seem to be identical. (See Eidgway,
Birds N. and Mid. Amer., Vol. 3, p. 221, foot-note b.)

HIRUNDINIDAE.

61. Progne chalybea chalybea (Gmel.).
One young male, May 20.

MOTACILLIDAB.
62. Anthus parvus Lawr.
Eighteen specimens, adults of both sexes and young. May 9 to 24

MNIOTILTIDAB.
63. Chrysocantor erithachorides (Baird).

Five adult males. May 17 to 21. All taken in the mangrove swamps,
where they were not at all common, and very hard to obtain.

THAYER, BANGS : AVES FROM SAVANNA OF PANAMA. 221

64. Basileuterus rufifrons mesochrysus (Scl.).
Five adults, both sexes, May 3 to 11.

65. Rhodinocichla rosea eximia Ridg.

Nine adults, both sexes, May -1 to 25.

COEREBIDAE.
66. Cyanerpes cyaneus (Linxe).
Nine adult males, May 12 to 26.

67- Dacnis cayana ultramarina (Lawr.).
Five adults of both sexes, May 8 to 25.

ICTERIDAB.

68. Zarhynchus wagleri wagleri (Gray).
Two adult females, May 15.

69. Cacicus vitellinus La-wr.

Twenty-four specimens, adults of both sexes, May 13 to 26, and two young
in nestling plumage, — $, May 26, 9, May 23.

The young (nestlings) differ from the adults in having the yellow portions
much paler and without the orange tint, the black duller and browner, and in
having very small, weak bills.

70. Amblycercus holosericeus (Licht.).
Twelve adults, both sexes. May 2 to 20.

71. Megaquiscalus major macrourus (Swainson).

One adult female, May 25. The grackle is one of the birds relentlessly
hunted for food by the natives, and is found, consequently, in very small num-
bers, and is exceedingly shy.

72. Leistes militaris (Linne).

Twenty-two specimens, adults of both sexes, May 20 to 26; and one young
female in nestling plumage, May 26. This differs from the adult 9 only
in having the feathers of the back and wings, except the primaries, edged
all round with yellowish brown.

TANAGRIDAE.

73. Tanagra cana Swainson.
Two adult males. May 4 and 22.

222 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

74. Ramphocelus dimidiatus isthmicus Kidg.
Twenty-seven adults, both sexes, May 2 to 23. This is a strongly char-
acterized subspecies; its long tail and pale colors, and the brownish patch
on the belly in the male at once separating it from true B. dimidiatus of Co-
lombia. It is a remarkable fact in distribution, however, that the Chiriqui
bird is true dimidiatus, and the Panama form occupies, so far as known, only
a small area along the Panama Railroad.

75. Tachyphonus rufus (Bodd.).
One adult $ , May 26.

76. Eucometis cristata (Hu Bus.).
Two adults, (J and 9, May 21 and 2G.

77. Phoenicothraupis fuscicauda erythrolaema (Scl.).

Ten adults of both sexes. May 4 to 26.

In his " Birds of North and Middle America," Part 2, p. 153, Ridgway
states that though some Panama birds were paler than northern examples, tlie
subspecies is not worthy of recognition. The present series of ten examples,
however, seems to prove that there is a very pallid race, perhaps confined to
the arid region immediately about the city of Panama, as a series from Lonia
del Leon formerly referred to this subspecies by Bangs belongs rather with
true P. fuscicauda.

The type in Sclater's collection (now in the British Museum) was supposed
to have come from Santa Marta, Colombia. We, however, entertain some doubt
as to this supposed origin, because none of the collectors who have visited the
Santa Marta region of late years have secured the bird there, and ant tanagera
are birds that most collectors secure. Be this as it may, however, the type
belongs to the pale form now under consideration.

Recently, when Mr. Gerritt S. Miller, Jr., was in the British Museum, we
sent him specimens of both forms, which he carefully compared with the Sclater
type , and wrote us that it agreed with the pale birds from the Savanna of
Panama.

P. fuscicauda erythrolaema differs from true P. fuscicauda in its paler colors
throughout. The male has the throat patch much paler (pale scarlet), the rest
of the plumage paler and duller, the occiput and sides of head decidedly
grayer ; the female paler, more olive, less brown.

FRINGILLIDAE.
78- Arremonops conirostris conirostris (Bp.).

Ten adults, both sexes. May 2 to May 23.

THAYER, bangs: AVES FROM SAVANNA OF PANAMA. 223

79. Volatinia jacarini splendens (Vieill.).
One adult $, May.

80. Tiaris olivacea dissita, subsp. nov.

Nine adults, both sexes, May 2 to 14.

Tijpe. — Coll. E. A. and 0. Bangs, No. 14,212, adult $, Savanna of Pan-
ama, May 12, 1904.

Characters. — Similar in color to T. olivacea intermedia Ridgw. from Cozumtil
Island, but much smaller. Differing from T. olivacea pusilla (Swains.) from
Mexico, in that the adult male never has the crown and auricular region black
Adult 9 rather greener, less grayish than the adult 9 "f T. olivacea pusilla.

Color. — Adult ^, supraloral spot, eye-brow, chin, upper throat, and spot
on lower eye-lid bright yellow; lower throat, breast, lores, malar region, and
anterior portion of forehead, and a narrow line along sides of crown, black; top
of head and rest of plumage dull grayish olive, paler, more whitish on middle
of belly. Adult 9 , plain grayish olive, the black and yellow markings of the
male usually slightly indicated, paler, more whitish, on the middle of the
belly.

Measurements.

—

No.

Locality.

14,212 Savanna of Panama

14,213

do.

14,214

do.

14,215

do.

40,786

M.

C.

z.

do.

40,785

M.

C.

z.

do.

40,787

M.

c.

z.

do.

40,788

M.

c.

z.

do.

14,216

do.

Sex

Wing.

Tail.

Tarsus.

Culmen.

^ad.

49.5

37.5

16.2

8.8

^ad.

49.

38.

16.4

9.2

$ ad.

49.5

34.

16.4

9.2

$ ad.

48.5

39.5

15.8

9.2

^ad.

50.

40.

16.8

9.4

^ad.

49.5

39.

16.8

9.4

S ad.

49.

39.

17.

9.4

9 ad.

48.

38.

16.

9.2

9 ad.

48.

35.

15.8

9.2

$ ad.

48.

40.

16.4

9.4

S ad.

50.

40.

16.8

9.

S ad.

49.

38.

16.2

9.2

$ ad.

49.

40.

16.4

9.4

7,590 Lonia del Leon, Panama.

9.313 Boquete, Chiriqui.

9.314 do.

9.315 do.

Remarks. — There appears to be a wide gap in Central America between the
ranges of the present form and T. olivacea pusilla, where no gras.squit occurs.
The new form extends from the Bogota region north to Costa Rica ; T. olivacea
pusilla from eastern Mexico south to Guatemala, leaving most of Guatemala
and Nicaragua, Honduras and Salvador, between the ranges of the two, appar-
ently unoccupied by a member of the genus.

T. olivacea dissita can at once be separated from true T. olivacea olivacea of
the Greater Antilles by the black of the under parts extending over the breast,
otherwise it is much like it ; from T. olivacea intermedia of Coznmel Island,

224 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY,

which it greatly resembles in color, by its smaller size ; and from T. olivacea
pusilla of Mexico by the adult male having the crown and auriculars olive, not
black.

81. Sporophila minuta minuta (Linne).

Eight specimens, adults of both sexes, and one yonng male, May 2 to 19.

82. Sporophila gutturalis (Light.).
One adult <J, May 2.

83. Sporophila aurita (Bp.).

Nine adults, both sexes, May 2 to 24.

84. Oryzoborus funereus Scl.
Nine specimens, adults of both sexes, and two young males, May 3 to 22.

85. Saltator magnoides intermedius (Lawr.).
Eight adults, both sexes. May 4 to 23.

86. Saltator albioollis isthmicus (Scl).
Nine adults, both sexes, ]\Iay 6 to 22.

IV. Reptilia and Amphibia. By Thomas Barbour.

A considerable number of reptiles and amphibians were taken by
Mr. Brown on San Miguel and Saboga Islands. He collected also in
the vicinity of the city of Panama, and the specimens obtained in all of
these localities are included in this paper. The fauna of the islands is
not fundamentally different from that of the mainland, whence all the
species on the islands appear to have been derived. A few differentiated
forms are, however, recognizable.

GECKONIDAB.
1. Gonatodes caudiscutatus (Gunther).

Distribution. — Panama, Colombia, and Ecuador.

Of this common species there are sixty-five examples from San Miguel Island
and eleven from Saboga Island.

2. Gonatodes fuscus (Hallowell).

Distribution. — Colombia and Central America.

This species is represented by twenty-three examples from San Miguel Island
and fifteen from Saboga Island.

BARBOUR: REPTILIA. FROM THE SAVANNA OF PANAMA. 225

3. Sphaerodactylus lineolatus Lichtenstein.

Distribution. — Central America.

Thirteen specimens from San Miguel Island.

4. Thecadactylus rapicaudus (Uouttuyn).

Distribution. — Central and South America and the Antilles.

Eighteen specimens from Saboga Island and six from San Miguel Island.

IGUANIDAB.

\
5. Anolis sallaei GtixxHER.

Distribution. — Central America.

San Miguel lour specimens, and thirty-nine from Saboga Island.

6. Basiliscus americanus Laurenti.

Distribution. — Central America.

Eleven from Panama, thirteen from San Miguel Island, and four of unknown
locality. Adults and young, males and females.

7- Iguana tuberculata Laurenti.

Distribution. — Lesser Antilles, Central and South America.
A single specimen from Saboga Island.

8. Ctenosaura completa Bocourt.

Distribution. — Mexico and Central America.

With some hesitation I place under this species six specimens from San
Miguel Island and one from Panama.

o

TEIIDAE.
9- Ameiva surinamensis (Laurenti).

Distribution. — Central and South America.

This lizard was apparently very common, for six were taken on San Miguel
Island and twenty near Panama. As four specimens lost their locality labels
in transportation the species may be represented on Saboga Island also.

SCINCIDAE.

10. Mabuia agilis (Kaddi).

Distribution. — Mexico, Central and South America.

To this species Dr. Stejneger referred four specimens from Panama, and for
his kindness in examining these and other specimens I thank him heartily-

226 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

TYPHLOPIDAB.

11. Typhlops emunctus Garman.

Distribution. — Panama.

A single specimen from San Miguel Island, 135 mm. in length, appears to
belong to this species. It is in rather poor preservation, and the details of
the head scales are very vague.

BOIDAE.

12. Epicrates sabogae, sp. nov.

Types. — No. 6986, Mus. Comp. Zobl.

Two specimens, one entire, and one skin from Saboga Island.

This island species approaches E. cupreus Fischer in color. It is rather dark
reddish brown. Its squamation, however, distinguishes it at once from the
mainland form. The scales are extremely small. Boulenger (Cat. Snakes,
Brit. Mus., vol. 2, p. 95) says that the scales in E. cencliris are in 45-51 rows;
he also includes E. cujyreus in this species. The Saboga specimens have scales
in 65 and 67 rows, an excess of 14 and 16 over the maximum number for
E. cencliris. The number of ventrals and subcaudals, 242 and 247, and 49 and
70, do not show any great variation from the continental form, though 70 is
4 in excess of the largest ventral scale count cited by Boulenger. Both speci-
mens are the same size and measure four feet in length. The perfect specimen
appears to be an adult male.

COLUBRIDAB.

13- Spilotes salvinii Gunther.

Distribution. — Mexico and Central America.

Two large specimens were taken on San Miguel Island.

14. Herpetodryas fuscus (Linne).

Distribution. — Tropical South America.

With this very variable species I identify two snakes from San Miguel
Island and eight from Saboga Island.

15. Drymobius margaritiferus (Schlegel).

Distribution. — Mexico to Colombia and Venezuela.
Three examples from Panama.

16. Leptophis occidentalis (Gunther).

Distribution. — Central and Northwestern South America.
Six specimens from San Miguel Island.

BAEBOUii: VEKTEBRATA FROM THE SA.VANNA OF PANAMA. 227

17. Himantodes cenchoa (Linnk).

Distribution. — Mexico, Central and tropical South America.
A single typical example from San Miguel Lsltuid.

18. Leptodira personata Cope.

Distribution. — Lower Mexico and Central America.

A single specimen from San Miguel Island has its scales in twenty-three
rows.

19. Oxjrrhopus cloelia (Daudin).

Distribution. — Continental tropical America and the Lesser Antilles.
Two specimens from Panama.

20. Oxybelis acuminatus (Wied).

Distribution. — Continent of tropical America.

This species is represented by two specimens from Panama, nine from San
Miguel Island, and ten from Saboga Island. The locality tags were lost from
several other specimens.

21. Homalocranium fuscum (Bocourt).

Distribution. — Central America.
A single specimen from Panama.

22. Hydrus platurus (Linne).

Distribution. — Indian and tropical Pacific Oceans.

It is interesting to find in this series, from a limited region, varieties C, D,
and E which Boulenger describes on page 268 of the catalogue of snakes in
the British Museum, vol. 3.

Mr. Brown took fourteen specimens at San Miguel Island and twelve at
Saboga Island.

23. Elaps fitzingeri Jax.

E. fvlvius D. Boulenger Cat. Snakes, Brit. Mus., 1896, vol. 3, p. 425.

Distribution. — Mexico and Central America.
Three specimens from San Miguel Island.

24. Elaps ftllvius (Linne).

Distribution. — Southeastern North America, Mexico, and Central America.
A single specimen from Panama.

COECILIIDAE.
25. Coecilia ochrocephala Cope.

Distribution. — Panama.
A single specimen from the type locality.
VOL. XLvi. — No. 12 15

228 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

26. Coecilia gracilis Shaw.

Distribution. — Northern South America.

A single specimen apparently of this form is before me, from Panama. This
locality is rather distant from the hitherto known range of the species. There
are 199 circular rings, all of which are interrupted dorsally except the hinder-
most. The great majority of the rings are characteristically interrupted ven-
trally also. A few, however, are complete below.

27- Coecilia sabogae, sp. nov.

Types. — Two specimens, No. 2425 Mus. Comp. Zobl., from Saboga Island.

Head narrowing anteriorly, snout decurved, projecting acutely beyond mouth ;
eyes visible or almost invisible ; tentacle on the under surface of snout, directly
below the nostril. 175-180 circular folds, equidistant, complete above and
below. Slate gray, plicae darker, head much lighter. Total length 272 and
381 mm., diameter 7 and 8 mm. (The specimens have evidently shrunken.)

ENGYSTOMATIDAE.

28. Phryniscus laevis Gunther.

Distribution. — Western South America.
A single male from Panama.

■o'

CYSTIGNATHIDAB.
29. Leptodactylus insularum, sp. nov.

Types. — Twelve specimens, No. 2424, Mus. Comp. Zool., from Saboga
Island.

Dr. Stejneger, who has very kindly examined specimens of this species,
M-rites me as follows : " They seem to belong to the L. caliginosus group,
some of which seem to have dorso-lateral folds. I cannot make up my mind
to identify them with any of the described species. The angularity of the
teeth seems to be extreme, and recalls L. fragilis Bocourt and L. raniformis
Werner, the latter from Colomlna, but these are supposed to be without
dermal edges to the toes." Dr. Stejneger also adds that these specimens are
much larger than certain so-called L. melanonotiis which are in the United
States National Museum, and which are probably adult because the males
have welWeveloped manual spines.

Tongue oval, slightly nicked behind. Vomerine teeth in two slightly
curved series behind the choanae. Nostril nearer the tip of the snout than
the eye. Tympanum half the width of the eye. Toes very conspicuously
fringed. Subarticular tubercles well developed ; two small metatarsal tubercles.
Skin smooth, with few warts above. A ventral discoidal fold and well-
marked dorso-lateral folds. Deep slaty above with indistinct darker marking.

GARMAN: PISCES FKOM THE SAVANNA OF PANAMA. 229

A dark heart-shaped spot on the occiput. In females hinder side of thi^'hs
with nit'rbling of brown; nudes with tiii,L,'hs the color of the dorsum. Mule
with an internal vocal sac, and two sijine-bearing tubercles in the inner side
of the first digit. These manual spines are deep black. The males, which
seem to have been taken in the breeding season, have the fore limbs very
much swollen.

Mr. Brown also took several specimens on San Miguel Island.

30. Hylodes brocchi (Bkocchi).

Distribution. — Guatemala.

One specimen from San Miguel Island.

BUFONIDAE.
31 Bufo marinus (Linne).

Distribution. — South and Central America, West Indies.
Two specimens from San Miguel Island.

32- Bufo spinulosus Wiegmann.

Distribution. — Northwestern South America.
Two examples from Panama.

HYLIDAB.
33- Hyla leucophyllata Beiris.

Distribution. — Tropical South America.
Five examples from Panama.

V. Pisces. By Samuel Garman.

Among the species secured by this expedition there are some of par-
ticular importance on account of being previously unrepresented in the
collection of the Museum ; all of them appear to have been described
heretofore. The embryonic material is of especial interest and value.

The list includes the following : —

Carcharinus cerdale Gilb. Panama.

Carcharinus aethalorus J. & G. "

Carcharinus azure us Gilb. "

Sphyrna zygaena Linne. "

Ginglymostoma cirratum Gmel. "

Urolophus aspidurus J. & G. "

Dasybatus longa Garm. "

Myliobatis asperrimus Gilb. *'

230

bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

Aetobatis nariuari Euph.
Batrachus pacific! Glint.
Eleotris pictus Kner.
Eleotris dormitatrix Bl. & S.
Eleotris maculata Bloch.
Gobius soporator C. & V.
Achirus fonsecensis Giint.
Achirus scutum Giint.
Trachinotus faseiatus Gill.
Lutianus aratus Glint.
Lutianus argentiventris Pet.
Pristipoma humile K. & S.
Eucinostomus califomiensis Gill.
Agonostoma nasutum Giint.
Mugil curema C. & Y.
Poecilia elongata Giint.
Poecilia boucardii Steind.
Galeichthys eigenmanni G. & S.
Tetragonopterus panamensis Giint.

Panama.

((

Gorgona.

Panama.
San Miguel-
Panama.
«

Gorgona.

San Miguel.

Gorgona.

San Miguel.

Gorgona.

San Miguel.
(( '<

Panama.

San Miguel.

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of Alex-
ANDEK Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

H. AUGENER. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HAUTLAUB. The Coniatulae of the "Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentacrinus.

A. MILNE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VKRRILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexakdkr Agassiz, ou the U. S. Fis-h Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Odonata, Part IV.
E. L. JNIARIC. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. Mc-^r. WOOD WORTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with U Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Coniniission Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L. Tanneb, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexandek Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. The Pelagic Fauna.

" The Panamic Deep-Sea Fauna.

H. B BIGELOW. The Siphonophores.
K. BRANDT. The Sagittae.

" The Thalassicolae.

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans.
W. H. DALL. The :\Iollu8ks.
REIN HARD DOHRN. The Eyes of Deei>-

Sea Crustacea.
H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.
HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster.
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians.

S. J. HICKSON. The Antipathids.
J. P. INlcMURRICH. The Actinarians.
E. L. MARK. Branchiocerianthus.
JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.
P. SCHIE3IENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

ropods.
THEO. STUDER. The Alcj'onarians.
M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

Doliolidae.
H. B. WARD. The Sipunculids.
W. MoM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLIL^
and also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVII ; of the Memoirs,
Vols. L to XXIV., and also Vols. XXVIIL, XXIX., XXXI., and
XXXII.

Vols. XLIIL, XLVI., XLVIII. , XLIX., and L. of the Bulletin,
and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., XXXIIL, XXXIV.,
and XXXV. of the Memoirs, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the Museum,
of investigations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upon the Museum Collections and Explorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer " Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Command-
ing, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
• charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
"Albatross," from October, 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratory, in charge of Professor N. S.
Slialer.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular intervals ;
one volume of the Bulletin fSvo) and half a volume of the Memoirs
(4to) usually appear annually. Each number of the Bulletin and
of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list of the publications
of the Museum will be sent on application to the Librarian of the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass.

Bulletin of the Museum of Compa^f-tivt Zoology
AT HARVARD ODl^LEUE.
Vol. XLVL :No.^ik'^

REPORTS OX THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS' OF THE EXPEniTION TO THE
EASTERN TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ,
BY THE U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER "ALBATROSS," FROM
OCTOBER, 1904, TO MARCH, 1905, LIEUT. COMMANDER L. M. GARRETT,
U. S. N., COMMANDING.

IV.

O C T A C IST E M U S .

By William E. Kitt&r.

[Published by Permission of George M. Bowers, U. S. Fish Commissioner.]

With Three Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :
PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

Jantaky, lOOG.

IlEPORifs W^ifife^dnfi^tif'ic Ri;f;cLTS of thk I^xpkdition to the East-
ern Tropical PA(piFJC, in , charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish ComRiission Steamer "Albatross," from October,
1904, to March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. j\I. Garrett,
U. S. N., Commanding, ihtblished or in preparation: —

A. agassiz. v." General Report ou the Ex-
pedition.

A. agassiz. I.i Three Letters to Geo. M.
Bower.s, U. S. Fish Com

A. AGASSIZ and H. L. CLARK. The Echini.
F. E. BEDDARD. The Earthworms.

H B. BIGELOW. The Medus<ae.

R. P. BIGELOW. Tlie Stomatopods.

S. F. CLARKE. The Hydroids.

W. R. COE. Tlie Nemerteans.

L. J. COLE. The Pycnogonida.

W. H. DALX. The Mollusks.

C. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. Tlie Fishes.
W. G. FARLOW. The Algae.

S. GARMAN. Tlie Reptiles.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.

H. J. HANSEN. The Schizopods.

S. HENSHAW. The Insects.

W. E. HOYLE. The Cephalopods.

C. A. KOFOID. III.-! The Protozoa.

P. KRUMBACH. The Sagittae.

R. VON LENDENFELD. The Sponges.

H. LUDWIG. The Holothurians.

H. LUDWIG The Starfishes.

H. LJDWIG. The Ophivirans.

J. P. McMURRICH. The Actiuaria.

G. W. MULLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. Tlie Bottom Specimens.

MARY J, RATHBUN. Tlie Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON. II.2 The Isopods.

W. B. RITTER. The Tunioates. IV.*

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Br^yozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON. The Plants.

G. O. SARS. The Copepods.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-
pods.

TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.

T. W. VAUGHAN. The Corals.

R. WOLTERECK. The Amphipods.

W. McM. WOODWORTH. The AuneUds.

» Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

^ Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVI., No. G, July, 1905, 4 pp., 1 pi.

3 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 9, September, 1905, 5 pp., 1 pi.

•1 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVI., No. 13, January, 190G, 22 pp., 3 pis.

c Mem. M. C. Z., Vol. XXXIII., January, 190G, 88^p., 9G pis.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XL VI. No. 13.

REPORTS OX THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
EASTERN TROP'^CAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ,
BY THE U. S."t<"ISH COMMISSION STEAMER "ALBATROSS," FROM
OCTOBER, 1904, TO MARCH, 1905, LIEUT. COMMANDER L. M. GARRETT,
U. S. N., COMMANDING.

IV.

O C T A C ^^ E M U S.

By William E. Kitter.

[Published by Permission of George M. Bowers, U. S. Fish Commissioner.]

With Three Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A. :

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

January, 1906.

s
i

No. 13. — Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to
the Eastern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz,
hy the U. S, Fish Commission Steamer " Albatj'oss,'^ from
October, 1904, to March, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. K
Garret, U. S. N., Commanding.

IV.

OcTACNEMUs. By "William E. Eitter.

Five specimens of this remarkable animal were taken by the
"Albatross" during her cruise under the direction of Mr. Agassiz iu
the winter of 1904-1 905 ; two at station JN'o. 4649, and three at station
No. 4656, The first mentioned was in latitude 5° 17' south, and longi-
tude 85° 19.5' west, at a depth of 2,235 fathoms ; the second in latitude
6° 54.6' south, and longitude 83° 34.3' west, in 2,222 fathoms. These
positions are between three hundred and four hundred miles off the
coast of Ecuador.

The " Challenger " specimens of Odacnemus were also taken at two
stations; one, No. 218, in latitude 2° 33' south, and longitude 144° 4'
east; and the other. No. 299, in latitude 33° 31' south, and longitude
74° 43' west. The first of these was in 1,070 fathoms, the second in
2,160 fl\thoms.

It will be seen from this that the "Albatross" specimens are from
practically the same zoological region and the same depth as those of
the " Challenger " station No. 299, this being approximately the same
distance from the coast of Peru that the " Albatross " stations are from
the Ecuador coast. It may be noted further that both localities are
in the course of the Humboldt current. The first " Challenger " specimen,
the one on which ^Moseley founded the genus, was, on the other hand,
taken from just north of New Guinea, consequently the whole width of
the Pacific Ocean from the locality of the others.

Although expressing the view that the South Amen'can specimen was
probably the same species as the one studied by Moseley, Herdman, who

234 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

alone examined the former, pointed out, at the same time, that it pos-
sessed a much larger prominence on the "dorsal edge" (posterior part)
^ of the body than did Moseley's individual. In this particular the
"Albatross" specimens agree with the one studied by Herd man, and
differ strikingly from the well-known figure of the type drawn by
Moseley.

Of the five specimens in this collection, kindly entrusted to me by
Mr. Agassiz, three are in exceptionally good condition ; the fourth is
badly mutilated, parts of it being wanting ; while the fifth is so frag-
mentary as to be of little value. lu fiict it is possible that the parts
which I have considered as constituting the fourth and fifth all belong
to one ; so that in reality there may be only four individuals.

As to general characteristics of the oral disc and rays, my observations
agree so nearl}'- with what we already know of the animal from jNfoseley
and Herdman that it would be superfluous to go over the ground in detail.
Comparison of my figures with the figures by these authors will reveal
at a glance the slight differences I have noticed. Probably the most
important of these is in the relative size of the rays. There is, I think,
rather moi'e difference in both length and width between the two
anterior, and the two posterior rays in all the " Albatross " specimens,
than either Moseley's or Herdman's figures indicate. lu the largest
individual the anterior rays measui'e 4 cm. in length, while the posterior
are 3 cm. Again, I do not find the tips of the rays to agree quite with
the published figures. They taper more gradually and terminate in
sharper points than Moseley and Herdman have shown ; and Moseley
speaks of the rays as terminating in " abruptly narrowed tentacle-like
tips." This, however, is probably merely a matter of preservation. The
"Albatross" material is preserved in rather strong formalin, and this is
a much better preservative tlian alcohol for all tnnicates, at least so
far as the conserving of general form and color is concerned. This
makes it worth while to remark that no pigment has been observed
in any part of these specimens excepting a very faint yellow mark along
the peripharyngeal band, the deep orange-red of the sense organ, the
light yellow of the gonads, and the brown of the intestine. As the
material came under mj'^ observation within eight months after its
preservation, it is quite certain that the animal is almost entirely
colorless.

In one individual the wliole " nucleus " is everted through the
branchial orifice and lies on the oral disc. This condition has enabled
me to make out several points that would probably have escaped notice

eittek: octackemus. 235

otlierwise. One of these is the presence of a decided ventral, or anterior,
lip to the branchial orifice. This is shown in Plate 1, Figure 1. This
considerably resembles the lip in the corresponding position in various
species of Salj>a, though as we shall see later this resemblance can have
no taxomomic significance. In the normal specimen in preservation it
gives the orifice a more semilunar shape, Figure 1, than Herdman's
Figure 6 indicates.

As already stated, the posterior enlargement, on vhose dorsal and
posterior surface the atrial oi'ifice is situated, is more like tliat in
Herdman's than in ]\Ioseley's specimen. As a matter of fact, in all the
"Albatross " individuals it is even larger than in Herdman's figure. This
is, I consider, really to be accounted as part of the body of the animal
instead of a prominence on the body, as Herdman has expressed it.

But the most important extension of our information about the
superficial characters of the species I am able to make is in connection
with the adhesive disc. The interest attaching to this comes from the
question of whether or not the animal really lives fixed to the bottom
or is a swimmer, at least for a portion of its life. Moseley states that the
"process," as he calls the part of the animal of which we are now speak-
ing, is "terminated outwardly in a tangled mass of rootlets, massed
amongst which was found much sand and shell-particles from the
bottom." " The ascidian," he says, " was evidently attached by this
process or pedicle." The minute structure of the rootlets Moseley
appears not to have attended to particularly. With reference to the
South American specimen Herdman says : " The dorsal projection
which contains the viscera is roughened on its lower surface, and if
the body were attached to some foreign object it must have been by
this part." Herdman has always, as I judge from mention of Octacnemus
in various of his publications, regarded it as only probable that the ani-
mal is attached. Metcalf, 1893, 1900, observed the hair-like processes
on 0. patagoniensis, recognized their similarity with those on various
simple ascidians, and consequently did not hesitate to conclude that
this is an attached species.

It is thus seen that all who have studied Octacnemus have regarded
it as a bottom dweller. ]\Iy observations certainly confirm this view ;
but at the same time the strength of the circular muscle bands of the
oral disc suggests that at some period in its life the animal may possibly
be a swimmer.^ It is possible, however, that the co-ordinated action of

1 Since writing the above Mr. Ag.issiz has called my attention to the fact that
he has recorded (Mem. Mus. Comp. Zoul., Vol. 26, p. 91) the taking of Octacnemus

236 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

the radial and circular muscles might find sufficient occupation in pro-
ducing the movements necessary for the intake and discharge of the
water essential to respiration and nutrition.

The rootlets of 0. herdinania are not merely processes of the test, as
Metcalf, 1900, speaks of those of 0. patagonieiisis as being. Each is a tube
whose wall is of test, and within which is a delicate axial muscle band
consisting of two or three fibres. Here and there along this band nuclei
are to be seen. In general structure these rootlets resemble more closely
those of Rliizomolgula Ritter, 1901,. than of any other ascidian with
which I am acquainted. They are, however, much more delicate here
than in that molgulid. They do not branch here as there, each arising
direct from the body of the animal. They are not more than three or
four mm. long. It is usual for ascidian root-hairs of this sort to cling with
great tenacity to the mud and sand in which they are embedded, so
that they are freed from foreign particles with difficulty. It is, con-
sequently, surprising to find them quite clean in Odacnemus. This
fact suggests that the animal is not very firmly anchored to the
bottom. But while the individual rootlets were entirely devoid of
foreign particles clinging to them, entangled among them were many
slender, sometimes branched, brown tubes. These seem to belong to
the foraminiferous genus, Rhizammina of Brady, and to be close of kin
to R. algaeformis. In addition to these, numerously present over the
entire adhesive disc of all the specimens, several fragments of a hexacti-
nellid sponge were entangled among the rootlets of one individual.
Finally, a few Globigerinae were associated Avith the rhizopod tubes.

Moseley mentions that the " border of the base [i. e. of the ventral
surface of the oral disc] is thickened into a slightly prominent, rounded
ridge, running round the periphery of the entire basal area." This
author's schematic section of the animal, shown in a text figure, indicates
this prominence at h. This ridge is decidedly more than "slightly
prominent " in the " Albatross " specimens. In life it must amount to a

with the tow-net in 150 fathoms. This was during his Expedition to the Tropical
Pacific in 1899-1900, the station at which the capture was made being in lat.
4° 35' N., and long. 136° 54' W. Mr. Agassiz also tells me by letter that Octacne-
mus was taken at two or three other localities between 300 fathoms and the
surface. With this information, and with what seems to me the certainty that the
animal rests on the bottom at times, the question of the life habits of the species
becomes of increased interest. Note by A. Agassiz. — It is very probable that
the fragments of the bottom sometimes found in the rootlets of Octacnemus have
become entangled in them while in the trawl on its way to the surface after the
specimens were obtained in bathyraetrical belts less than 300 fathoms.

EITTER: OCTACNEMUS. 237

flange of three or four mm. in height. Instead of being rounded, as in
Moseley's animal, it is narrow even at its base, and thins off to an almost
sharp edge. The test along the very edge is somewhat hardened, and
so changed in structure that it refuses to take stain as do the remaining
parts. Even in the preserved animal, this flange with its meandering
course is a conspicuous object on the ventral surface of the disc (Plate 1,
Fig. 2). Its position is not at the periphery of the disc, in the region
of the rays, as Moseley says, but is four or five mm. in toward the centre
from the line of the base of the rays. Posteriorly the flange passes on
to the atrial part of the body. It reaches back to the region of the
adhesive disc, where it gradually disappears, and hence diflers decidedly
from its course in 0. bythius, where it is continuous hehiiul the adhesive
patch. It would appear that the whole ventral surface rests on the sub-
stratum, to which, however, the creature is attached by the adhesive disc
alone. The thickenings of the test, or pads on the bases of the rays,
mentioned by Herdman, are present here, but extend farther toward the
ends of the rays than they did in Herdman's specimen.

Concerning the microscopic structure of the test, and the circular and
radial muscles of the mantle, I have nothing to add to what Moseley and
Herdman have recorded.

The most important diff'erences, both as to observation and interpre-
tation, between my results and those reached by these naturalists, relate
to the branchial sac and the parts immediately associated therewith.
Both Moseley and Herdman sought in vain for branchial stigmata ; and,
failing in this, were misled in their conclusions as to the whereabouts of
the branchial chamber. Both naturally assumed it to be the great cavity
within the oral disc. As it becomes clear from the present study that
the branchial stigmata and the branchial chamber are located in quite a
different region, the question arises as to the significance of the chamber
of the oral disc, supposed by them to be branchial. It will be conven-
ient to make the consideration of this the starting point of our account
of the internal structure of the animal. We begin by examining the
wall of the oral disc external to the chamber. Were the cavity a true
branchial cavity, comparable with that of other ascidians, we should have,
passing from without inward, the following layers: the test, the ecto-
derm, the mantle, and immediately lining the cavity an extension of
the respiratory epithelium. I have examined this wall with especial care,
both on stained and unstained flat preparations, and on microtome sec-
tions, and/ai7 to find anything hut the layer of test.

Likewise the " horizontal membrane," separating the supposed bran-

238 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPAEATIVE ZOOLOGY.

chial from the perihranchial, or ventral chamber should be composed of
aa epithelium constitutiug each surface layer, with something of the
mantle (blood-spaces at least) between. But here, likewise, examina-
tion of microtome sections fails to reveal such structure as would be
expected. The tissues are so highly specialized in the adult state of the
animal tliat it is difficult if not impossible to say definitely just what we
have before us. Herdman has described a squamous ejDithelium as
extending over the "general surface of the membrane," without, how-
ever, specifying which surface is thus covered. Such an epithelium is
undoubtedly present, but on one surface of the membrane only, and that
the ventral or deeper surface. The relation of tlie different elements
entering into the structure of the membrane can be particularly well
made out by examining a flat preparation from the portion in the base of
the arms where the muscle fibres are v\^ell developed. Seen from the
dorsal surface the squamous epithelium is found at a deeper level con-
siderably than the fibres ; and from the level corresponding to the fibres
down to that of the epithelium, numerous cellular elements not consti-
tuting a uniform layer, but composed of several kinds of cells, some
lai'ge and spherical, others smaller and more or less spindle-shaped, are
present. Microtome sections show the epithelial layer to be exceedingh'-
thin, and give the impression that the layer is interrupted in places.
This latter is probably not in reality true. The flat preparations exam-
ined give no intimation of such a state. Sections of the membrane show
in addition to its cellular constituents a considerable quantity of more
or less homogeneous, or somewhat fibrous material strongly resembling
test. This occupies in general the surface opposite the epithelium, i, e.
the dorsal surface.

My interpretation of the membrane is that in life it was closely ad-
herent throughout by its dorsal surface to the test wall of the oral disc,
and became separated from the latter only on the death of the animal.
This would mean that the large dorsal chamber of the oral disc, 7'egarded
by Moseley and Herdman as branchial, is an artifact. On this view the
homogeneous test-like material mentioned above as entering into the
structure of the membrane would be accounted for by supposing that
the rupture plane was within the test for a short distance. The i-agged
character of the dorsal surface of the membrane, as seen on the sections,
confirms this interpretation. If this is right, the ectoderm of the region
involved should be present in the membrane dorsal to the muscle fibres
where these exist. I am unable to recognize anything that can with
certainty be regarded as such a layer, either in this membrane or in the

ritter: octacnemus.

239

test wall. T therefore conclude that the ectoderm has undergone such
extreme modification, the secretion of test having been completed, that
it is no longer recognizable by the methods of examination employed.
This disappearance of the ectodermal layer in adult tunicates would
appear to be no unusual thing. I recall especially my inability to
demonstrate the presence of the layer in the root-hairs, or tubes of
Bhizomolgula (Ritter, :01), where it must certainly have existed at an
early period in the life of the individual. It would seem that in many,
perhaps most, cases there is no addition to, nor renewal of, the test in
tunicates after it has once been fully formed, at least as far as the ecto-
derm, the original source of the cellulose matrix, is concerned. Whether
the test cells, derivatives of the mesoderm, take up this office and replace
the ectoderm in it is an interesting question on which we have, so far as
I am aware, no positive information.

In order to make my interpretation square with certain facts observed
not only by Moseley and Herdman, but as well by myself, and with
certain other statements and conjectures by my predecessors, a brief
consideration of the points involved is necessary.

In the first place, all our observations agree in finding the branchial
orifice to open directly into the dorsal chamber, as the diagrammatic
sectional figure of Herdman shows (see Fig. 1). Of course, if my

■■■aim.

Fig. 1. — Copy of Herdman's text Fig. 11, "Challenger" Reports, Vol. 27, p. 93.
For the letterings of Fig. 1 and Fig. 2, see p. 251.

interpretation is correct, this cannot be so in life, as reference to text
Figure 2 makes obvious. It follows then that the cavity would liave to
be regarded as due to rupture. This rupture is probably caused by the
contraction, at death, of the strong muscle bands at m. b." Figures 1 and
3, the position of which is also indicated in text Figure 2. As the layer
in which these fibres are situated (the homology of which will be seen

240

bulletin: museUxM of comparative zoology.

later), is always found to continue into the horizontal membrane, the
line of rupture would have to be supposed to be at the point x in the sec-
tion represented by Figure 2. It will be seen that the layers to be
ruptured in this position would be the ectoderm and the test, or the line
at which the test terminates within the branchial orifice. But the extreme
delicacy of the ectoderm has already been pointed out ; hence one may
readily believe not only that rupture here would occur with ease, but also
that the severed edges of the ruptured layers might be observed with
difficulty. As a matter of fact, one of the chief obstacles that I have
found to this interpretation is the absence of local evidence of rupture.

QIC. '-ad.

Fig. 2. — A schematic section of the animal corresponding to that shown in Fig. 1,
to show my interpretation of the relation of the several parts, as contrasted with Herdman's.

Attention may be called to the circumstance that the wall within the
branchial orifice opposite the supposed rupture is intact, as the figure
indicates ; and that consequently this rupture is restricted to the region
corresponding to the muscle bands, m. h."

My interpretation of the horizontal membrane finds strong confirma-
tion, it seems to me, in these statements by Moseley : " Tlie membrane
was observed to be attached to' the inner surface of the test wall at the
intervals between the conical processes ; but the specimen was too much
injured to allow of the investigation of the extent and manner of its
attachment within tlie conical processes. It appeared to be attached
laterally on either side to tlie inner walls of these processes, and is prob-
ably reflected so as to line their cavities." And again : " No reflection
of the membrane over the inner surfaces of the upper and lower walls of
tlie test was observed."

Moseley speaks repeatedly of the more thickened central portion of
the horizontal membrane, the portion thus characterized being in general,
one is led to infer, the distinctly octagonal area shown in his figures of

ritter: octacnemus. 241

the entire auimal, to the angles of which the radial muscles are attached.
He remarks that "opposite the indentations in the margin of the thick-
ebed central portion of the membrane, the thin lamina [which is de-
scribed elsewhere as a continuation of the horizontal membrane] is loose,
and hangs in bags or depressions." The condition here described is, I
gather, what gives one the impression from his figures that the oral disc
is occupied by a great sac that extends to the very base of the arms,
even bellying into the arms somewhat, and is quite distinct from the
octagonal central area to whicli the eight radial muscles are attached.
In other words Moseley found the sac in his animal considerably more
complicated than it is in that now uuder examination ; and the points
brought out by him are of such a character* as to justify the belief that
he was dealing with a different creature. This is another of the par-
ticulars "which persuades me that two species of Octacnemus should be
recognized.

Herdman refers to the mantle in the specimen studied by him as
adhering closely to the inner surface of the test. As, however, this
statement is made in close coimection with what he says about the
musculature, I judge he refers only to the mantle within the arms.
Herdman describes a number of pits in the horizontal membrane, the
significance of which he was in doubt about, but which he conjectures
may represent branchial stigmata. I have seen a few of what may be
the same structures, though I fail to make out that the}^ are as definite
or as numei'ous as they were in the specimen studied by Herdman. I
have no suggestion as to their meaning, but they certainly cannot be
homologous with branchial stigmata.

The cavity below the horizontal membrane, which is immediately con-
tinuous with the great chamber occupying almost the whole of the ani-
mal, I regard, with Moseley and Herdman, as probably atrial, or atrial
and peribranchial. This cavity is without partitions, so far as I have
observed. It, of course, opens to the outside world through the atrial
aperture, which is nearly circular and without distinguishable lobes or
markings of any kind. The view that this chamber is atrial is borne
out by the fact that the " nucleus" (in reality, as we shall presently see,
the whole viscera proper) is so loosely suspended within it. Two or
three facts however, to be pointed out presently, throw some doubt on
the cori'ectness of this interpretation.

We may now turn to the examination of the visceral mass. The ex-
act position within the test envelope which this occupies in life is by no
means clear. In all my specimens, as with those taken by the " Chal-
voL. XLvi. — No. 13 16

242 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

lenger," it was very small as compared with the size of the animal as a
whole. It was in the form of a nearly spherical mass, and was situated
underneath the posterior part of the oral disc. I consider it quite likely
tliat in life the mass is considerably more elongated, and extends through
a greater portion of the distance between the two orifices. But this is
entirely conjecture, so the question need not detain us now.

The most noteworthy thing pertaining to the intimate structure of
the visceral mass is the fiict that the true branchial sac is situated ivithin
it, or constitutes a j^cct't of it. An understanding of the orientation and
structure of the mass becomes clear by examining the figures in the
order mentioned, 8, Plate 3, 3, 4, and 5 Plate 2. The dissection from
which Figure 8 was drawn is seen at once by comparing this figui-e with
Figure 1. From these it will be seen that the branchial orifice opens
directly into a capacious tube, in reality the homologue of the inner part
of the branchial siphon of ordinary ascidians. This is shown as cut in
Figure 8. On the ventral side it carries the longitudinal muscle bands
m. b". of Figure 1, and shown from within in Figures 3 and 4. Tlie
ventral wall of this tube, it will be seen, passes directly over into the so-
called horizontal membrane Qi. m., Fig. 3). On the dorsal surface of the
mass (Fig. 8) one sees the rather conspicuous ganglion (71. g.), the sub-
neural gland (s. gl.), the dorsal half of the peripharyngeal band (/?. h. b.),
and on close examination, the dorsal lamina (d. L). All these organs
are situated on what seems, from a dissection like that shown in Figure
8, to be the relatively very large stomach. At the posterior margin of
the mass are seen the ovary (ov.) and testis (tes.).

Figure 3, Plate 2, represents the visceral mass of the same specimen
as that shown in Figure 8, but removed from the test, enlarged consid-
erably, and with the piece carrying the ganglion, gland, etc., cut out.
Examination of the piece on its inner surfiice, Avith a low power, reveals
the fact that two distinct membranes enter into its composition, and
that the inner of these is perforated by a considerable number of ellip-
tical but more or less irregular orifices (Fig. 9, Plate 3). Perforations
of the same sort were also found later on the portion of the wall not
cut away (Fig. 3, br. s.). Each orifice is bordered by a rather decided
epithelial thickening, the inner margin of which has few, but the outer
very many, nuclei (Fig. 6, Plate 2). I have found no intimation of
cilia fringing the orifices. The absence of cilia on the apertures, the
somewhat peculiar structure of their bordering epithelium, and their
irregular distribution, are traits in which they differ considerably from
the more typical branchial stigmata of ascidians. Nevertheless there

RITTER : OCTACNEMUS. 243

can be no doubt about their identity. Their general character, but
most of all their relation to other clearly identifiable parts, leave no
room for hesitation. They are, as will be noted especially from Figure
9, Plate 3 situated on each side of the dorsal lamina, d. L, and behind
the ganglion and peripliaryngeal band. Furthermore, as vre shall see
presently, though far removed from the endostyle, their general relation
to this organ is as it should be. Absence of cilia and the peculiar struc-
ture of the bordering epithelium are probably associated with the fact
that the stigmata are no longer functional as respiratory organs.

But while there is no doubt tliat these orifices are branchial stigmata,
and consequently that the membrane in which they occur is the strict
homologne of the branchial membrane of other ascidians, the fact that
only the inner one of the two layers above pointed out seems to consti-
tute the visceral wall (Figs. 3, 5, 8, and 9 m. and the layer immedi-
ately beneath it) is perforated by the stigmata, does raise a difficult
question as to the peribranchial cavity, i. e. the cavity into which the
stigmata of the tj'pical ascidian open externally.

Something of the character of this external, unperforated layer is
suggested by the facts that a series of six or eight distinct, though
rather delicate, muscle bands (Fig. 9, m. h'.) are situated in it, and ex-
tend across the median dorsal line, and are disposed at nearly regular
intervals from before backward ; and that the same layer extends over
the gonads (Fig. 3, ???.). The suggestion from these facts is that the
layer belongs in reality to the mantle ; and its resting immediately upon
the branchial membrane suggests farther that the 2^^ f Abranchial cavity
has become obliferated, or, more exactly, reduced to the very narrow
interval between the two membranes. On this interpretation the large
cavity beneath the " horizontal membrane " in the oral disc, which was
above regarded, with some doubt, as the peribranchial-atrial chamber,
would not be such ; at least would not be peribranchial (the condition
here described was the occasion for the reservation as to identification,
not indicated in my treatment of that subject).

I am unable to reach entire clearness on these points. It is possible
that further study on additional material, particularly on young or de-
veloping specimens, will find that the atrial chamber is here distinctly
set off from the peribranchial, and that the great interior space already
described is atrial and not at all peribranchial; or it may be that this
whole space is artifact, as I have interpreted the portion above the
horizontal membrane to be. This, however, seems hardly probable,
though such a view would furnish an explanation of the apparent

244 bulletin: museum of compaeative zoology.

absence of an epithelial laj'er on the inner surface of the test of the
ventral side of the oral disc. I have searched in vain for such an
epithelium. I regret the necessity of leaving these points, important
to a full understanding of the morphology of this most interesting
creature, still obscure.

We may now examine a little more attentively the other structures
belonging to the branchial sac. What I have called the dorsal lamina
is really not a lamina at all, nor has it the languets that usually take the
place of a lamina when such a structure is wanting. Here we have two
irregular, approximately parallel, bands of somewhat thickened epithe-
lium, with a narrow interval between them (Fig, 9, d. /.). These are,
as compared with the organ in typical ascidians, relatively short, they
being but a little longer than the combined length of the ganglion and
neuro-hypophyseal gland (Fig. 8, d. L).

The peribranchial band (Fig. 9,^. b. h.) is also of an unusual character.
It consists of a thickened ridge of epithelium, continuous on each side
with the corresponding band of the dorsal lamina; the peribranchial
ridge being, however, less clearly defined than the dorsal bands. These
bands are so irregular in both outline and definition as to defy exact
representation in a drawing.

An area of uniform, thinner epithelium occupies the angle between
the diverging peribranchial bands, and in tliis are situated the gang-
lion, and gland with its duct. The ganglion is anterior and dorsal
to the gland, and from the three large nerves given off from it i. e.
a pair extending forward, and a single median one extending backward,
is somewhat triangular in form. The nerves of the pair are much,
larger than the single posterior nerve. This is correlated with the fact
that it is the anterior nerves which supply the oral disc. These nerves
can be traced forward along the "horizontal membrane," each giving off
branches which go to the arms and musculature of the disc. They are
large and elaborately branched, thus showing that the regions supplied
by them are Avell enervated.

A detailed study of the nerves and their terminals, particularly the
sensory terminals, would in all likelihood yield interesting results.
The gland (Fig. 9, s. gl., Plate 3) is nearly spherical, and as above
indicated is situated ventral to, and behind the ganglion. On its ventral
surface is a ridge extending somewhat diagonally fore-and-aft. This is
in all probability a portion of the duct, though I have not made out
with certainty a collection between it and the large thin-walled dorsal
tubercle (Fig. 9, d. t.). Tliis tubercle, or hypophysis funnel, opens forward

ritter: octacnemus. 245

aud decidedly to the right, by a large elliptical, plain mouth. The wall
of the funnel is very delicate. I have seen no cilia in any part of it.
Within the funnel were observed six or seven rather distinct deep-orange
pigment spots.

Owing to the differences between my results and those reached by
Moseley and Herdmau relative to the branchial sac, the question of the
endostyle is especially important. Both these observers having failed to
find the branchial stigmata, based their conclusions to a considerable
extent on what they supposed to be the endostyle. Herdman, however,
recognized that the structure believed by him to be this or^an was not
the same as that held by Moseley to be such. It is now certain that
neither Moseley nor Herdman saio the true endostyle.

Having found, in the manner above detailed, that the cavity opened
into by removing the dorsal patch of visceral wall, as shown in Figure 3,
must be the true branchial cavity, I proceeded to carefully remove the
food material and refuse by which this cavity was completely tilled.^ Hav-
ing cleaned this out thoroughly, examination of the floor of the chamber
discovered the groove indicated at e. n., Figure 4, Plate 2. Eoth from
its position and structure, (though in this latter respect there was con-
siderable disguising) tliere could be no doubt that the true endostyle
had been come upon at length. By dissecting out the piece containing
the organ, aud examining it Avith more care, it was found that the
typical endostylar structure could be made out, aud, further, that
anteriorly the organ connected in the usual way with the peripharyn-
geal band (Fig. 7, en. andjj. h. b., Plate 2). The two lips of the organ
were unusually far apart, and their irregulai-ity in outline and minuter
composition gave to the organ as a whole something of the peculiarities
ah'eady indicated as characterizing both the dorsal lamina and the
peripharyngeal band. And here, as in all the parts of the branchial sac
where cilia would be expected, no trace of them could be found. JTie
entire apjoaratus^ if is probable, has lost its original respiratory function,
and has become devoted to the nutritive office ; and the peculiarities of
structure of various parts, notably of the stigmata, dorsal lamina, endo-
style, and peripharyngeal band are, it would seem, due in large measure
to this change of function.

Whether the branchial wall has actually become digestive or not, I
am unable to say with certainty. However, from the great amount of
food material contained in the cavity, much of which was in various

1 I was able to identify with approximate certainty in the stomach contents,
portions of a copepod, a schizopod, a pycnogonid, a tanais, and a young fish.

246 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

stages of disintegration ; from the character of the epithelial lining of
the chamber, sections of which prove it to be composed, in part at least,
of more or less columnar cells; and, finally, from the wide communica-
tion of this cavity with the true stomach, this communication being i:i
no clear way marked off from the two connected cavities, I judge that
to a considerable extent the bra7icMal membrane has become digestive.

The branchial chamber of the ascidian being, as is now universally
recognized, the highly modified anterior end of the digestive tract, if the
class be supposed to have had an ancestor in which the region was
truly digestive ; and if the conjecture that in Odacnemics the branchial
membrane has secondarily acquired the digestive function, we should
have here the very unusual instance of an organ resuming its original func-
tion after having become highly modified for a wholly different function.
The data are rather too dubious to make profitable much speculation as
to whether this resumption of the original function could be attributed
in any wise to a true reversion ; that is, to the influence of a long-dor-
mant character. But assuming such a resumption to have taken place,
the fact might be more naturally accounted for by the influences, direct
or indirect, of life at the great depth in which the animal lives. It
seems that for numerous deep-sea ascidians, respiration does not demand
the service of any such elaborate mechanism as that possessed by the
typical shoal-water members of the class. In a considerable series of
species, widely separated taxonomically, the branchial membrane is nnich
reduced in one way and another. Instances of this are furnished by
Ascopera, Corynascidia, Hypohythius, and a new and remarkable form
found off the coast of California at 2,000 fathoms, which I have studied
but have not yet described. Wherefore this diminution of importance
of the branchial organ for respiratory purposes, is not obvious ; given
the fact however, there wo\dd appear no special difficulty in conceiving
that the cavity might gradually be turned over to the food-taking and
digestive functions.

Continuing our examination of the viscera, we find a wide but very
short passage from the posterior end of the branchial cavity (Fig. 4, oe.,
Plate 2) into another still more capacious chamber lying immediately
beneath the floor of the cavity already described. The passage-way is
clearly the oesophagus, and the large chamber the true stomach ; or
more exactly a stomach-intestine ; for it is not sharply set off from a
true intestine. This chamber (st.-in., Fig. 5, PI. 2) extends forward,
narrowing down rapidly to a very small, short rectum. The exact posi-
tion of the anus I have unfoi'tunately not been able to find ; though it

eittek: octacnemus. 247

is obviously somewhat to the right and ventral side of the branchial
sac. It is certainly not in the position occupied by it in the animal
described by Moseley. Herdraan gives us no information on this point
for his specimen, and I therefore conclude that he did not see it, and
assume this to be another particular in w^hich the species studied by
him and myself differs from that studied by Moseley.

The position of the anus in this species is of special interest since the
location of it would throw some light on the question of the atrium,

Tlie position and character of the gonads are indicated in Figures 3
and 4, Plate 2. The ovary is a rather voluminous mass applied closely
to the posterior border of the digestive tract. In two of the specimens
the ova are numerous and apparently near maturity, Tiiey ai'e quite
spherical, and measure about .32 mm. in diameter. The charactei'istic ^
ascidiau " test " cells are present and make a layer of considerable thick-
ness, though it is not uniform over the entire egg. The testis, much
less voluminous than the ovary, is situated at the left end of the ovary,
closely applied to it, and also to the digestive tract. It is of a lighter
color than the ovary, and is divided into numerous small rounded lobes,

I am unable to find an oviduct, and believe that none exists. The
ova probably escape by dehiscence. What appears to be a sperm duct
runs forward for a short course closely applied to the ventral intestinal
wall (consequently not visible on any of the figures). The branched
strand shown in Figures 3 and 4, Plate 2, crossing the concavity of the
ovary toward the right, appears to be a mantle fold, probably serving as
a ligament to hold the ovary in place. The possibility of its belonging
to the blood vascular system naturally suggests itself; but it certainly
has nothing to do with this system. I have, however, seen nothing of
either heart or blood vessels. No " liver " or excretory organ appears
to be present, nor has the chyliferous organ been found.

From the fact that the Octacnemus patagoniensis of Metcalf seems to
propagate by budding, I have naturally looked with care for evidence
of such a mode of propagation here ; but none has been found. I do
not believe it occurs, and this it seems to me is one "weighty reason for
holding that the species studied by Metcalf should be regarded as *•
generically distinct from the animal named Octacnemus by Moseley.

We may turn now to the question of the wider affinities of the Octac-
nemidae. The present investigation makes it obvious, as Metcalf had
already furnished ample reasons for believing, that they are not related
to Salpa, but to the simple or colonial ascidians, Herdman's sugges-
tion that their relationship is with Saljpa has been so generally accepted

248 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

that it will probably be a long time before the matter can be set straight
in general zoology ; but it should be recalled that the suggestion was
made with such reservation as would be expected from so careful and
experienced a zoologist as Herdman, on a point concerning which there
was at the time such imperfect knowledge. " On the whole," are his
words, " I regard this form as being allied to SaljM." It would seem
that this conclusion was based chiefly on the supposed correspondence
of the visceral mass to the "nucleus" in Salpci ; and the supposition
that the endostyle of Odacnemus is located in the floor of the cavity,
taken to be branchial, within the oral disc. Had Herdman found the
true branchial sac with the stigmata and endostyle, it is quite certain he
would not have suggested the kinship of the animal to Salpa. With
the information at his command, his conclusion was justified.

As to exactly what genus among the simple ascidians Odacnemus has
most in common it is not yet possible to say. Certain it is, though, that
there is nothing to support the conjecture of Moseley that it is related to
Cystinr/ia. Metcalf's suggestion that it is related to the Clavelinidae
has perhaps as much in its favor as any that can now be made. I would
point out, however, that the branchial sac, in particular, suggests the genus
Hypohythius of Moseley. This genus alone shares with Clavelina and
some of its nearest allies, the character of having a branchial sac without
folds or internal longitudinal bars ; besides this its stigmata are irregular
in size and distribution. In this latter particular it seems that Odac-
nemus resembles Hypohythius quite decidedly. The stigmata of Odacne-
mus are perhaps too few in number to warrant the assertion that they
are irregular in both respects. They are certainly so as to size ; and
there are in Odacnemus neither folds nor internal vessels or papillae.
The simplicity of the digestive tract of Hypohythius and its close approx-
imation to the side of the branchial sac are likewise points of resemblance
to Octacnemus. It must be noted, however, that the stomach-intestine
0^ Hypohythius rests on the dorsal side of the branchial sac, while in
Octacnemus it is ventral and dextral. I do not think it worth while to
make much of the comparison between these two genera, our knowledge
of both being still too imperfect, but one other point may be referred to.
Moseley's original description of Hypohythius indicates that its oral sur-
face is decidedly flat, and that the atrial orifice is far to one edge, if indeed
not beyond, this disc. With 0. 2^(it<xgoniensis in mind it is not difficult
to imagine a disc like that of Hypohythius to be a starting point for the
production through modification, of a tentaculated disc, first like that of
0. patagoniensis, and finally like that of 0. hythius and 0. herdmania.

kittek: octacnemus. 249

Only one step further will I pursue this comparison. Hypohyfldus
is a distinctly pedunculated ascidian. This fact might be held as
an obstacle in the way of kinship between it and Odaciiemus. On
the other hand, the relatively small and distinctly circumscribed ad-
hesive patch of Odacnemus might be looked upon as a remnant of the
peduncle. One might be warranted in speculating that by the principle
of correlated, or compensatory, growth, the great oral disc of Octacneinus,
with its eight arms, has been gained, in part at least, by the loss of an
ancestral peduncle. Possibly suggestive in this connection is the fact
that the peduncle of H. moseleyi Herdman, is short as compared with
that of H. call/codes Moseley.

In concluding these tentative remarks on the affinities of Odacnemus,
it may be noted that my suggestion of relationship to Hyjjobythius is not
widely at variance from Metcalf's of its possible affinity to the Claveli-
nidae ; for Hypohythius and Claoelina are certainly not remote in their
kinship.

In the present imperfect state of our knowledge it would hardly be
profitable to enter into a detailed consideration of the relationship
between Metcalf s 0. pataaoniensis and the species now under treatment.
I therefore rest satisfied with pointing out the cliief reasons for holding
that Metcalfs species should be assigned to a different genus, which,
however, I refrain from characterizing or naming. These are : the ab-
sence of the well defined and distinctly set off oral disc, and especially
the absence from the disc of the system of circular and radial muscle
bands that are so characteristic of Odacnemtis ; its asexual method of
propagation ; its single pair of branchial stigmata ; and perhaps the
position of its atrial orifice. Having regard for generic distinctions as
they prevail generally in the Tunicata, there can, I think, be no question
that the characters thus indicated are sufficiently distinctive to justify
this proposal.

I conclude by presenting a revision of the genus Odacnemus, and a
diagnosis of 0. herdmania.

••n

Octacnemus Moselet, 1876.

Body attached by a restricted, clearly defined disc, situated posteriorly
and A-entrallv ; this disc carrving a great number of minute root filaments.
Anterior end differentiated into a distinct oral disc, the margin of which carries
eight prominent arms.

Test gelatinous, thin, transparent.

Mantle for the most part very delicate ; though on the dorsal side and within

250 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

the arms of the oral disc having an elaborate system of circular and radial
muscle bands.

Visceral Mass very small, relative to the size of the animal as a whole ; but
loosely held within the enormous atrial chamber.

Branchial Sac situated within the visceral mass ; functionless as a respiratory
organ, but devoted to the nutritive function ; stigmata not numerous, irregular
in size, form, and distribution ; walls of sac without folds or internal vessels
or papillae ; dorsal lamina very short, in the form of two low ridges ; endostyle
likewise short and broad.

Digestive Tract very short and broad, closely applied to the ventral side of
the branchial sac; liver and renal organ wanting.

Gonads forming a compact mass closely applied to the posterior border of
the digestive tract. Ovary much larger, more or less cylindrical, situated im-
mediately behind the stomach ; apparently no oviduct. Testis placed at the
left end of the ovary, finely lobular, lighter in color than the ovary ; a short
sperm duct running forward on the ventral side of the intestine.

Octacnemus herdmani.

Octacnemus hythius Herdman, 1888, p. 88, and 1891, p. 648 ; Metcalf, 1900,
p. 572 ; and other authors, none of whom have examined the animals
themselves.

Posterior, or Atrial end of the animal large and distinctly set off from the
anterior, disc-bearing end.

Ventral Flange of the oral disc prominent, angular in section, and not con-
tinuous around the disc posteriorly, but each side running on to the atrial
portion of the animal, there to gradually disappear on each side of the attach-
ment patch, which is entirely behind the plane of the oral disc on the atrial part
of the body.

Mantle of the Oral Disc not thickened in central portion, or otherwise struc-
turally set off for the other portions.

Rectal portion of the intestine not projecting beyond the visceral mass ; anus
far forward.

Distribution, eastern portion of South Pacific.

In order to bring out clearly the contrast between this species and 0. bythius
Moseley, I subjoin a characterization of the latter species also.

Posterior, or Atrial end of the animal much reduced, so that the attachment
patch is situated on the ventral side of the oral disc.

Ventral Flange rounded, and continuous entirely around' the ventral side of
the oral disc ; hence not running on to the sides of the attachment patch.

Mantle of the Oral Disc thickened in the central portion, this thickened part
octagonal in outline, the rays being the points at which the radial muscles are
inserted ; a small pit in the membrane in each interval between the rays, and
just beyond the thickened central area.

eitter: octacnemus. 251

Rectal 'portion of the intestine projecting considerably beyond the visceral
mass, the anus directed backward and upward.

These specific differences will be readily seen by comparin.G; Figures 1 and 2,
Plate 1, with Figures, 2 and 1 respectively, Plate 10, of Herdman's Report
(1888) ; these latter being copies of Moseley's figures.

Abbreviations.

a anus.

ad adhesive patch.

at atrial orifice.

at. c atrial eliamber.

hr branchial orifice.

hr. s branchial stigmata.

c.b.s cavity of branchial sac.

d.l dorsal lamina.

d.t dorsal tubercle.

ec ectoderm.

en endostyle.

en./, endostylar fold.

A. m " horizontal membrane."

int. b intestinal band.

m membrane together with the epithelium

lining the atrial chamber.

m. h., m. h'., m. b"., muscle bands.

m. r radial muscles.

n anterior nerves.

n. g nerve ganglion.

n. z nucleated zone.

n. n. z non-nucleated zone.

o.br opening into branchial sac by dissection.

oe oesophagus.

ov ovary.

p. b.b peripharyngeal band.

r.n raplieal nerve.

s. gl subneural gland.

St. in stomach-intestine.

t test.

tes testis.

v.f. ventral flange.

252 bulletin: museum of compaeative zoology.

LITERATURE.

Herdman, W. A.

'82. E-eport ou the Tuuicata, Part I. The Voyage of H. M. S. " Challenger,"

Zoology, Yol. VI.
'88. Ibid., Part III, Vol. XXVII.
'91. A revised classification of the Tunicata, etc. Liuueau Society's

Journal, Zoology, Vol. XXIII.

Metcalf, H. M.

'93. Notes upon an apparently new species of Octacnemus, etc. Jolius

Hopkins Univ. Circ, No. 106.
:00. The anatomy of Octaoiemus patagonie7isis. Notes on the morphology

of the Tunicata. Zoolog. Jalirbuch, Abth. f. Anat. uud Outogonie der

Thiere, Bd. XIII, p. 572 and p. 519.

Moseley, H. N.

'76. Ou two new forms of deep-sea ascidians, obtained during the voyage
of H. M. S. " Challenger." Trans. Linn. Soc. London, ser. 2 (Zool.)
Vol. IIL p. 287.

Ritter, Wm. E.

:01. Papers from the Harriman Alaska Expedition, XXIII. The ascidians.
Proc Washington Acad. Sciences, Vol. Ill, p. 225,

KiTTEE. — Octacnemus.

PLATE 1.

Fig. 1. Dorsal view, natural size, of Octacnemus herdmani. The radial muscle
fibres in eacii muscle do not in general diverge quite as much toward
their insertion on tlie mantle as this figure indicates.

Fig. 2. Ventral view of tiie same specimen. The oral disc as marked by the
ventral flange is somewhat too broad.

"Alb7\tross" E.Pacific Ex

0 "^TAC N F ' -T' f '"■. T^L ATE 1

HELlijTVPF. To r:i>5TO»(

RiTTEE. — Octacnemus.

PLATE 2.

Fig. 3. This should be compared with Figure 8, Plate 3. Dorsal view of tlie
visceral mass, removed from the test, and a section, part of whicli is
shown on its inner surface in Figure 9, Plate 3, cut from the dorsal
side of the branchial sac.

Fig. 4. Same as Figure o, excepting that tlie cut has been somewhat extended, and
the food material entirely removed from the branchial sac.

Fig 5. The stomach-intestine, from the dissection sliown in Figure 4, made by a
transverse cut corresponding to tlie line y of Figure 4.

Fig. 6. A single branchial orifice much enlarged.

Fig. 7. Tlie endostyle with a portion of the peribranchial band.

"Albatross'' E.Pacific Ex.

OCTACNEMUS PLATE

w.-

mh^

st-in.

br.s.

m.

tes

em.

hm.

-URL

ov

A.B Streedain, del

It-^l. . T i- t. '-t X^SJilljlf

EiTTEB. — Octacuemus.

PLATE 3.

Fig 8. Comparison of tliis with Figure 1, Plate 1, will show at a glance what the
dissection is. The visceral mass is here somewhat too large for the
size of tlic animal as a whole.

Fig. 9. Tlie anterior portion of tlie piece cut from the dorsal wall of the branchial
sac seen from liie inner surface (see Fig. 3, PI. 2).

'Albatross" E.Pacifil; h;

\

\

^'7

A B. Streedain, del.

He-_:.

The following' Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation : —

Repcrte on the Results of Dre<lgiiig Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, ami 1880, in charge of Alex-
ANDKK Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

H. AUHEXKH. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HAliTliAUB. Tlie Coniatulae of the "Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentacriuus.

A. .'MILXE EDWARDS and E. L. BOUVIER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VERRILL. The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientilic Results of the Expeilitiim to the Tropical Pacific, In charge of
Alexani)i:r Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Comiuission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F. Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. Immature State of the Oilonata, Part IV.
E. L. MARK. Studies on hepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R.T.HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. MoM. WOODWOKTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHIT.MAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part 11., with 14 Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L,
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. Tlie Pelagic Fauna.

" The Panamic Deei)-Sea Fauna.

H. B. BIGELOW. The Sii>honophores.
K. BRANDT. The Sagittae.

" The Thalassicolae.

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans.
W H. DALL. The MoUusks.
REINHARD DOHRN. The Eyes of Deep-

Sea Crustacea.
H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.
HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster.
W. A. HERIXMAN. The Ascidiaua.

189! of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
Tansek, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of

S. J. HIOKSON. The Antipatliids.
J. P. :McMUUR1CH. The Actinarians.
E. L. MARK. Branchioceriiinthus.
JOHN MURRAV. The Bottom Specimens.
P. SCHIEMENZ. Tlie Pteropods and Hete-

ropods.
THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarians.
M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

Doliolidae.
H. B. WARD. The Sipunculids.
W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to XLII.,
and also Vols. XLIV., XLV., and XLVII ; of the Memoirs,
Vols. L to XXIV., and also Vols. XXVIIL, XXIX., XXXI.,
XXXII., and XXXIIL

Vols. XLIIL, XLVI., XLVIIL , XLIX., and L. of the Bulletin,
and Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., XXXIIL, XXXIV.,
and XXXV. of the Memoirs, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the Museum,
of investigations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upon the ^luseum Collections and Explorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on tlie Results of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in cl)arp:c of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, TJ. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer "Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Command-
ing, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to tlie Tropic-al Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Comnussion Steamer
" Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S N., Commanding.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
ciiarge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from October. 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mai-k, Director.

Contribiiiions from tlie Geological Lal)oratory, in charge of Professor N. S.
Shaler.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular intervals ;
one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the Memoirs
(4to) usually- appear annually. Each number of the Bulletin and
of the IMemoirs is sold separately. A price list of the publications
of the Museum will be sent on application to the Librarian of the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass.

•^YU

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vol. XLVI. No. 14.

CERTAIN SCOPE LIDS IN THE COLLECTION OF THE
MUSEUxM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

By Charles H. Gilbert.

With Three Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

April, 1906.

Reports ox the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the East-
ern Tropical Pacific, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from October,
1904, to March, 1905, Lieutenant Commander L. jVI. Garrett,
U. S. N., Commanding, published or in preparation:

T.5 General Report on the Ex-

A. AGASBIZ

pelitio/i,

iy AQA^^IZ. I.i Three Letters to Geo
Bi.-.»ii:s U. 3. Fji.fh Com.,

A. AGASSIZ and H. L. CLAKK. The Echini.
F. E. BEDD.'iii t). The Eaiti6.worms.

H. B. BIGELOW. The Medusae.

R. p. BIGELOW. The Stomatopods.

S. F. CLARKE. The Hydroids.

W. R. COE. The Nemerteans

L. J. COLE. The Ps'cnogonida.

W. H. DALL. The MoUusks.

C. R. EASTMAN. The Sharks' Teeth.

B. W. EVERMANN. The Fishes.
W. G. FARLOW. The Algae.

S. GARMAN. The Reptiles.

H. J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.

H. J. HANSEN. The Schizopods.

S. HENSHAW. The Insects.

W. E. HOYLE The Cephalopoda.

C. A. KOFOID. IIL'' The Protozoa,

M.

P. KRiJMBACH. The Sagitta'e.

R. VON LENDENFELD. The Sponges.

H. LUDWIG. The Holothurians.

H. LUDWIG. The Starfishes.

H. LUDWIG. The Ophiurans.

J. P. McMURRICH. Tlie Actinaria.

G. W. MiJLLER. The Ostracods.

JOHN MURRAY. The Bottom Specimens.

MARY J. RATHBUN. The Crustacea.

HARRIET RICHARDSON. II.2 The Isopods.

W. E. RITTER. !¥.■» The Tuuicafces.

ALICE ROBERTSON. The Bryozoa.

B. L. ROBINSON The Plants.

G. O. SARS. The Copepods.

H. R. SIMROTH. The Pteropods and Hetero-
pods.

TH. STUDER. The Alcyonaria.

T. W. VAUGHAN. The Corals.

R. WOLTERECK. The Amphipods.

W. McM. WOODWORTH. The Annelids.

1 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 4, April, 1905, 22 pp.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 6, July, 1905, 4 pp., 1 pl.

3 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 9, September, 1905, 5 pp., 1 pl.
« Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLVL, No. 13, January, 190C, 22 pp., 3 pis.
6 Mem. M. C. Z., Vol. XXXIII., January, 1906, 88 pp., 96 pis.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

at harvard college.

Vol. XLVI. No. 14.

CERTAIN SCOPELIDS IN THE COLLECTION OF THE
MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

By Charles H. Gilbert.

With Three Plates.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S.A.:

PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.

April, 1906.

No. 14. — Certain Scopdids in the Collection of the Museum of
Comparative Zoology. By Charles H. Gilbert.

For the privilege of examining the Scopelids of the Museum of
Comparative Zoology and of reporting on the species which form the
basis of the following descriptions, I am indebted to the authorities of
the Museum aud especially to Mr. Samuel Garman.

Diaphus nocturnus (Poet).

Plate 1.

Mijctophum noctnrnum Poey, Mem. Hist. Nat. de Cuba, 1860, 2, p. 426.
Colletlia nocturna Jordan and Evermann, Fishes North America, 1896, 1, p. 567.
Lampanyctiis lacerta Goode and Bean, Oceanic Iclithyology, 1896, p. 81, pi. 24,
fig. 89.

Myctophum (Nyctopkus) lacerta Brauer, Zool. Anz., 1904, 28, p. 392.

The species described by Poey as Myctophum nodurnum from Havana,
Cuba, has not been identified by subsequent writers. Nothing has been
certainly known of its characters and relationships except what can be
drawn from the original description, and the latter unfortunately contains
no account of the number and distribution of the photophores. By
Jordan and Evermann, the species is placed provisionally in Collettia
(= Diajyhus), these authors remarking : " Probably a species of Collettia,
and apparently related to C. rafinesquei, but this is not certain." As
Brauer makes no mention of the species in his review of the genus
Myctophum, apparently he has considered its affinities too uncertain for
conjecture.

Among the Myctophids of the ]\ruseura of Comparative Zoology,
are two lots received from Professor Poey and labeled M. nocturnum,
apparently in Poey's own handwriting. They represent two very dis-
tinct species, for one of which, as it is apparently uudescribed, the
name Diaphus garmani is here proposed. The four specimens (No.
G873), constituting the type and cotypes, differ to such an extent from

256 BULLETIN: MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

Poey's description, that identification with M. nocturnum would be
highly improbable. The other lot (No. 6871) consists of a single
specimen which answers Poey's description closely and is here identi-
fied as the type of M, nocturnum. This conclusion is rendered the
more probable as Poey is known to have sent many of his types to
the Museum of Comparative Zoology. The specimen in hand is 69 mm.
long to the base of the caudal fin, and must have been between 85 and
90 mm. in entire length. Poey's type is said to be 95 mm. long, but
this discrepancy cannot be considered serious in view of Poey's known
inaccuracy in details, consequent in part upon the fact that his descrip-
tions were taken more or less from his drawings, instead of from the
type specimens, as was indeed done in the case of M. nocturnum.

The type of Diaphus nocturnus has been compared directly with the
type of Lampanyctus lacerta Goode and Bean, and the two found iden-
tical. D. lacerta was described from the Gulf of Mexico, and is well
known from the Gulf Stream off the Eastern Coast of the United
States. Other Myctophids from the Gulf Stream were also known to
Poey, although he failed to describe them. Specimens of Myctophum
opalmum and M. remigerum were collected by him at Havana and sent
to the United States National Museum, where they still bear his manu-
script names. As the latter have never appeared in print, it will be best
not to give them currency.

Below is given a detailed description of Diaphus nocturnus, drawn
from the type specimen :

Measurements in hundredths of length to base of caudal. Length of head
30.5; diameter of orbit, 9; length of snout, 5; length of maxillary, 22;
greatest depth of body, 21 ; least depth of tail, 9 ; distance from tip of snout
to front of dorsal, 50 ; to ventrals, 46 ; to front of anal, 65 ; to adipose fin, 81.

Dorsal with 14 rays, including all rudiments : anal, 15 ; ventrals with 8
fully developed rays and a short outer rudiment; pectorals, 12. Scales in
lateral line, 38.

Head more compressed, the snout less blunt than in most species of this
genus. Mouth large, oblique, maxillary very little widened posteriorly, its
tip reaching posterior angle of cheeks. Posterior preopercular margin oblique.
Inner teeth in jaws longer than the outer teeth ; vomer toothless, the pala-
tines and pterygoids provided with wide bands which cover the greater part
of the roof of the mouth ; tongue and basibranchials toothed. Gill-rakers of
moderate length, strongly toothed, 6 -f- 1 + 13 in number on the outer arch.

Origin of the dorsal fin slightly in advance of the ventrals; origin of anal
well behind last dorsal ray; adipose dorsal above last anal rays; both pec-
torals and ventrals broken so their length cannot be made out. Scales all fallen.

GILBERT : CERTAIN SCOPELIDS IN THE MUSEUM COLLECTION. 257

Distribution of photophores. — A minute round antorbital under the anterior
margin of the orbital expansion of the frontal. A somewhat larger suborbital
below the anterior portion of the orbit, round and surrounded by black pig-
ment, rather smaller than the photophores on tlie body.

Suprapectoral near lateral line, but not in contact with it ; the usual white
glandular body is attached to it below. Upper infrapectoral in front of lower
pectoral rays; the lower infrapectoral rather less than halfway from the
upper to the first thoracic.

Thoracics, 5, the fourth elevated, but little behind the third, on a level with
upper half of pectoral base; fifth thoracic in front of outer half of ventral
base, the first, second, and third near the median line, forming two lines
gently diverging backwards. The first thoracic interspace is nearly twice the
second, which is a little longer than the fourth.

Supraventral a little nearer base of ventral fin than lateral line, vertically
above middle of ventral base.

Ventral photophores, 5, the first three pairs forming two strongly diverging
lines, the fourth and fifth pairs near the median line, the interspaces all
about equal.

Supra-anals angulated, the upper in contact with the lateral line, a little in
advance of anal fin ; the middle spot below and slightly behind the upper, its
distance from the upper nearly twice its distance from the lower, the lower
halfway between the middle supra-anal and the fifth ventral.

Antero-anals, 7, the first pair nearest the anal base, the first six pairs
forming two very gently diverging straight lines, the seventh a very little
elevated above the line of the others, all of them equally spaced.

Posterolateral in contact with lateral line, over the middle of the space be-
tween the two anal groups, above or nearly above the last anal ray.

Postero-anals, 5, about equally separated from antero-anals and from
precaudals.

Precaudals, 4, the first three close together and equally spaced forming a
gentle curve at base of rudimentary caudal rays, the fourth more widely
separated, near lateral line, but not in contact with it.

In the figure of Lampanyctus lacerta giveu by Goode and Bean
(loc. cit.) the relative position of the ventral photophores is incorrectly
shown ; the last antero-anal should be a little elevated instead of in line
with the others, and the fourth precaudal should be more widely sei)a-
rated from the third. In addition to the minute antorbital spot,
present in the type of D. nodurnus and in all specimens of the species
which have come under my observation, there develops in connection
with it in some specimens a larger luminous body, which does not, how-
ever, extend far out on the snout. The black septum across the photo-
phores is less developed in this species than in any other of the genus,
being very slender, and usually incomplete in the middle.
VOL. xLvi. — No. 14 17

258 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

Diaphus garmani, sp. nov.

Plate 3.

Type. — Coll. Museum of Comparative Zoology, No. 6873, Cuba, Dr. Felipe
Poey.

Most nearly related to D. splendidus Brauer (Zool. Anz., 1904, 28,
pp. 392 and 399, fig. 7), differing in the greater depth, the more higlily
arched head and snout, and in the entirely separate antorbital photo-
phores, the upper a minute round dot above the nostrils, the lower
oblong or ovate. The supraventrals are also lower, scarcely nearer the
lateral line than the ventral fins.

Measurements in hundredths of total length to base of caudal : Length of
head, 27; diameter of eye, 7.5 ; length of snout, 5; greatest depth of head, 22;
length of maxillary, 20 ; depth at front of dorsal, 24 ; least depth of caudnl
peduncle, 10 ; distance from snout to front of dorsal, 42; to ventrals, 43;
to front of anal, 62 ; to adipose fin, 81. Length of type 51 mm.

Dorsal with 14 rays, including all rudiments, the last ray forked to the base;
anal, 15; pectoral, 12 ; ventral with 8 developed rays and an outer slender
rudiment. Lateral line, 34.

Head high and compressed, the upper profile forming a high even curve
from snout to occiput. Eye small, the orljit low, the interorbital area arching
high above the orl)it when the head is seen in profile. Cheeks produced
backwards, the margin of preopercle oblique, the maxillary reaching its
angle.

Vomer toothless; palatines and pterygoids with broad bands of minute
teeth which cover the greater part of the roof of the mouth ; similar teeth on
the tongue and basibranchials. Gill-rakers slender, 7 + 1 + 14 on the outer
arch.

Origin of dorsal over or slightly in advance of the ventrals; origin of anal
under last dorsal ray ; adipose dorsal inserted over last ana) ray.

Scales of lateral line a little enlarged ; three series of scales between lateral
line and base of dorsal fin.

General color dark brown, or blackish, with bright reflections from the
scales. Basal portions of vertical fins finely speckled with black.

Photophores. — A minute dorsal antorbital under the anterior edge of the
supraorbital rim ; a larger ventral antorbital is wholly detached from it and
extends but little below the anterior part of the orbit.

Suprapectoral above opercular angle, slightly nearer lateral line than base
of pectoral, without attached luminous gland. Upper infrapectoral in front
of lower pectoral rays; lower infrapectoral halfway between upper and first
thoracic.

Thoracics, 5, the fourth elevated, a little behind the vertical from the third,
the fifth in front of outer ventral rays. First thoracic interspace longest, the
second and fourth about equal.

GILBERT: CERTAIN SCOPELIDS IX THE MUSEUM COLLECTION. 259

Supraventral over the posterior half of ventral base, midway between lateral
line and ventral fin.

Ventral photophores, 5, the first three pairs forming strongly diverging
lines, the first interspace a little shorter than the second, the third pair a little
in advance of the vertical from the fourth ; fourth and fifth pairs near median
line, as usual.

Supra-anals not angulated, or with the middle very slightly in advance of a
line joining the other two, the upper in contact with the lateral line ; lower
interspace much shorter than upper.

Antero-anals, 7, the first elevated above and a little anterior to the second ;
the second to the sixth nearly parallel with anal base, the seventh again
elevated, but less so than the first, inserted well behind a line joining sixth
■with posterolateral.

Posterolateral in contact with the lateral line, but little behind seventh
antero-anal, well in advance of last anal ray.

Postero-anals, 5. Precaudals, 4, the first three evenly spaced, forming a
curve, the fourth more distant, but little below lateral line.

Three cotypes from the same locality show no variation in the number and
distribution of the photophores.

The species is named for Mr. Samuel Garmau of the Museum of Com-
parative Zoology.

Myctophum pristilepis (Gilbert and Cramek).

Plate 3.

Dasyscopelus pristilepis Gilbert and Cramer, Free. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1897, 19,
p. 412, pi. 39, fig. 1. Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1905, 23, pt. 2, p. 600.

A specimen, 75 ram. long, collected near the Island of Mauritius by
Mr. Nicholas Pike, extends the range of this species fz-om the Hawaiian
Islands to the western shores of the Indian Ocean.

The specimen is somewhat larger than tho.se hitherto reported and
exhibits the noticeable increase in the size of the eye which in this
group accompanies growth. A specimen from the Hawaiian Islands
30 mm. long to base of caudal has the eye 12 hundredths of this length ;
another from the same locality 52 nmi. long has the eye 13 hundredths ;
in the Mauritian specimen 67 mm. long to base of caudal the eye is
13.5 hundredths. In smaller examples, the diameter of the eye is less
than the postocidar length of the head ; in adults, it exceeds the post-
ocular length and is 48 hundredths of the total length of the head.

In the young of this species, the scales have entire margins, a speci-
men 35 mm. long showing no trace of marginal spines on the scales of
the lateral line and on such others as are present. In the Mauritian

260 BULLETIN : MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

specimen, the scales of the lateral line are entire or very weakly armed
except in the middle where they are not concealed by the overlapping
scales, but other scales of the body bear short strong spines.

The anal photophores are 7 + 4, the number most frequent in this
species. The two precaudals are near lower edge of caudal peduncle, not
more widely separated than the postero-anals, but somewhat obliquely
placed, the second a little higher than the first. The supra-anals form
an oblicjue line, very weakly angulated, the lower very slightly in
advance of the line joining the other two, the lower interspace about
half the upper. A minute antorbital photophore in its usual dorsal
position under the anterior frontal rim is evident in the young, but
becomes obscure and apparently functionless in adults. A larger antor-
bital photophore persists at lower anterior orbital margin, well below
the nostrils. The Mauritian specimen is a male with well developed
supracaudal luminous organ, consisting of four shining scales which
overlap little or not at all.

The species differs from M. aspermn Richardson, according to the
original description and figure (Voyage " Erebus " and " Terror," Ichth.,
p. 41, pi. 27, figs. 13, 15), in the larger eye, shorter snout, the fewer
anal photophores, and in the relative position of the supra-anals and the
precaudals, the former being strongly angulated and the latter widely
separated in M. asperum. The relation of M. pristilepis with M. opa-
linuni Goode and Bean is much closer. The two agree in general out-
lines and proportions, and in the arrangement of the photophores. In
M. opalinmn, the scales also are rough, a character which hitherto has
not been noticed, and which sei)arates M. ojmUnum widely from M. affine,
with which Brauer unites it. This statement is based on an examina-
tion of the types of M. opaHnu77i in the United States National Museum.
M. opalinmn has a much smaller eye and a somewhat longer snout than
M. pristilepis, and more numerous anal photophores, which vary from
8 + 5 to 9 4- 6. Even the lowest number known in M. op)aUnum is
thus beyond the known range of M. pristilepis, which is from 6 -^ 4 and
7 + 3 to 7 -f 5 and 8 -f 4. In all the respects in which M. opalinum
is known to differ from M. pristilepis, it approaches M. aspeincm.

Myctophum humboldti (llisso).

A specimen (No. 6870, M. C. Z.) collected by D. D. Roulet, " on a
voyage from China " answei's sufficiently well to the current descriptions
of this Mediterranean species, but these descriptions are so lacking in
detail that the identification cannot be considered reliable. Nor is it

gilbert: CERTAm SCOPELIDS IN THE MUSEUM COLLECTION. 261

possible to determine its relationships to Mydophum hoops Richardson,
from the Pacitic Ocean, a species which has usually been considered
identical with M. humholdti, but apparently without direct comparison.
In spite of the doubtful locality of the specimen in hand, it seems ad-
visable to place on record a more detailed account of its characters. It
differs from typical M. humholdti in having on each side 8 + G, instead
of 8 4- 8 anal photopliores, but the variation in M. humholdti may well
include this formula. It must be considered very doubtful, however,
whether any species will include all the variations which have been
attributed to M. humholdti.

Measurements in hundredths of length without caudal (107 mm.) : Length
of head, 26.5; diameter of eye, 9 ; length of snout, 4.5; length of maxillary,
16.5; interorbital width, 8; depth of body, 21; least depth of tail, 7;
distance from snout to dorsal, 43 ; to adipose fiu, 78 ; to veutrals, 45 ; to
anal, 62.

Dorsal with 12 rays, including all rudiments ; anal, 20; pectoral, 14 ; ven-
tral with 8 fully developed rays and no evident rudiment. Lateral line, 41.
Gill-rakers, 6 -f 1 + 16, on outer arch.

The scales are mostly lost, but a few along the course of the lateral line
indicate that these are much deeper than the others.

The ventrals are inserted under the front of the dorsal; the anal fin is
entirely behind the dorsal ; the adipose fin is well in advance of the last anal
ray. The fins are all broken, so no indication can be given of the length of
the rays.

The mouth and gill cavity are black, this color including the gill-arches and
the gill-rakers, but not the gill-filaments or the pseudobranchiae.

Photophores. — A sniall dorsal antorbital organ, obscure in this specimen ;
a more evident lower antorbital, which seems to be persistent in adults.

Suprapectoral distinctly nearer upper pectoral rays than lateral line. Upper
infrapectoral on base of lower pectoral rays and below; lower infrapectoral
somewhat below the line joining the upper with the first thoracic, its distance
from the former less than two-thirds its distance from the latter; the vertical
from the lower infrapectoral passes immediately before the second thoracic.
L^pper pectoral interspace slightly longer than the lower.

Thoracic photophores peculiar in having the first three pairs forming rather
widely diverging lines, tlie fourth pair less widely separated, about as in the
second pair, the fifth pair very widely divergent, opposite and partly external
to the outer ventral rays; second and fourth interspaces equal, the third
shorter, two-thirds the first.

Supraventrals vertically above the fifth thoracic, a little nearer the latter
than the lateral line, distinctly above the line of the two low^er supra-anals.

First pair of ventral photophores nearer median line than are the inner
ventral rays, which are unusually far apart; first three pairs of ventrals form-

262 bulletin: museum of comparative zoology.

ing diverging lines, the fourth again less widely separated ; fourth pair wholly
in advance of vent. First ventral interspace longer than the second, the third
the shortest.

Upper supra-anal just below the lateral line, vertically above vent or a little
anterior ; middle supra-anal vertically above fourth ventral, or a trifle anterior;
lower supra-anal in advance of and slightly below the middle supra-anal,
nearly over the second ventral. Upper supra-anal interspace less than two-
thirds the lower.

Antero-anals, 8, forming a strongly curved line, the concavity downwards ;
first pair very closely approximating anal base, second and third widely diverg-
ing, the others again gradually approaching the anal base; last antero-anal
opposite base of the fourteenth anal ray.

Posterolateral vertically above last antero-anal, immediately below lateral
line.

Postero-anals, 6, the first opposite the base of the seventeenth anal ray ;
interval between last anal and first precaudal equalling that between first and
fifth postero-anals.

Precaudals, 2, obliquely placed, the distance between them only slightly
greater than that separating the postero-anaLs.

A short luminous body on back of tail, less than half as long as
diameter of eye, with no trace of overlapping scales in the present con-
dition of the specimen.

GILBERT : CEKTAIN SCOPELIDS IN THB MUSEUM COLLECTION. 263

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

PLATE 1.
Diaphus nocturnus (Poey).

PLATE 2.
Diaphus garmani Gilbert.

PLATE 3.

Myctophum pristilepis (Gilbert & Cramer).

V

0,

0)

c
o

y
C/)

ar

p

p-(

n

z

°

p

o)

^

o

01

D

z

H

6

O

O

O

UJ
Q.

Js;

>

H

CO

O

13

-J

UJ

w

X

n

o

a;

r'^

1 — '

:p?

z

o

K

O)

1

s

1 — ,

;>.

o

•X

o

<

Ul

r^

>

K

■jl

O

—1

K^'

UJ

<— <

I

E

^

^

ft

c

1)

O

S

S-*

u

*

f

CD

^2

i5

z

00

o

1-

^-^

eo

IX

g

[i,

6

*—i

o

H

tu

Cfl

a.

>

s

O

a

UJ

I

;=;

;.~i

s

ft

o

H

O

^t

Ar

n

The following Publications of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

are in preparation: —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations in 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of Alex-
ANDKR Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," as follows: —

H. AUGEXKK. The Annelids of the " Blake."

C. HAKTi.AaB. The Coiuatulae of the "Blake," with 15 Plates.

H. LUDWIG. The Genus Pentacriuus.

A. MILXE EDWARDS and E. L. BOU\^ER. The Crustacea of the "Blake."

A. E. VERRILU The Alcyonaria of the " Blake."

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer "Albatross," from August,
1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F. Closer, U. S. N., Commanding.

LOUIS CABOT. IniniatureStateof theOdonata, PartlV. '

E. L. ilARlC. Studies on Lepidosteus, continued.

" On Arachnactis.

R. T. HILL. On the Geology of the Windward Islands.
W. McM. WOOD WORTH. On the Bololo or Palolo of Fiji and Samoa.
AGASSIZ and WHITMAN. Pelagic Fishes. Part II., with U Plates.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission. Steamer
"Albatross," Lieutenant Commander Z. L. Ta>-ker, U. S. N., Commanding, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, as follows: —

A. AGASSIZ. Tlie Pelagic Fauna.

" The Panamic Deep-Sea Fauna.

H. B BIGELOW. The Siphonophores.
K. BRANDT. The Sagittae.

" The Tlialassicolae.

W. B. COE. The Nemerteans.
W H. DALL. The MoUusks.
REINHARD DOHRN. The Eyes of Deep-

Sea Crustacea.
H J. HANSEN. The Cirripeds.
HAROLD HEATH. Solenogaster.
W. A. HERDMAN. The Ascidians.

S. J. HICKSON. The Antlpathids.
J. P. :MrtIURRICH. The Aetinarians.
E. L. MARK. Branchiocerianthus.
JOHN MURRAY. TheBottoni Specimens.
P. SCHIEMENZ. The Pteropods and Hete-

ropods.
THEO. STUDER. The Alcyonarians.
M. P. A. TRAUSTEDT. The Salpidae and

DolioHdae.
H. B. WARD. The Sipunculids.
W. McM. WOOD WORTH. The Annelids.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Bulletin Vols. I. to 'XLII.,
and also Vols. XLIV. to XLVII ; of the Memoirs, Vols. L to
XXIV., and also Vols. XXVIII., XXIX., XXXL, XXXIL, and
XXXIII.

Vols. XLIIL, XLVIIL, XLIX., and L. of the Bulletin, and
Vols. XXV., XXVI., XXVII., XXX., XXXIV., and XXXV. of
the Memoirs, are now in course of publication.

The Bulletin and Memoirs are devoted to the publication of
original work by the Professors and Assistants of the Museum,
of investigations carried on by students and others in the different
Laboratories of Natural History, and of work by specialists based
upon the Museum Collections and Explorations.

The following publications are in preparation : —

Reports on the Results of Dredging Operations from 1877 to 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer " Blake," Lieut.
Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, TJ. S. N.,
Commanding.

Reports on the Results of the Expedition of 1891 of the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer " Albatross," Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., Command-
ing, in charge of Alexander Agassiz.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from August, 1899, to March, 1900, Commander Jefferson F.
Moser, U. S. N., Commanding.

Reports oh the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Pacific, in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, on the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross," from October, 1904, to April, 1905, Lieut. Commander L. M.
Garrett, U. S. N., Commanding.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, Professor E. L. Mark, Director.

Contributions from the Geological Laboratorj-.

These publications are issued in numbers at irregular intervals ;
one volume of the Bulletin (8vo) and half a volume of the Memoirs
(4to) usually appear annually. Each number of the Bulletiu and
of the Memoirs is sold separately. A price list of the publications
of the Museum will be sent on application to the Librarian of the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass.

ACME
BOOKBIN^M'JQ CO., IMC.

AUG 2 3 1934

100 o;^i\;!smDGE street

CHARLESTOWN, -fWIASS,

i

Harvard MC2 Library

3 2044 066 303 033

Date Due